TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0

TriStation 1131Developer’s Guide TriStation 1131 Developer’s Workbench Version 4.9.0 9700100-012 May 2011 Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies, names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Invensys Systems, Inc. © 2004–2011 by Invensys Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Invensys, the Invensys logo, Foxboro, I/A Series, Triconex, Tricon, Trident, and TriStation are trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners. Document No. 9720100-012, Rev. 1 Printed in the United States of America. Contents Preface xiii New Features in TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Summary of Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Product and Training Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv We Welcome Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Chapter 1 Project Administration 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Project Administration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Installing TriStation 1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Upgrading from Previous Versions of TriStation 1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Changing a TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Installing the TriStation 1131 Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Customizing the Security Banner Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Uninstalling the TriStation 1131 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Verifying the TriStation 1131 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.9.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Selecting the Target System Version During Project Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Rules for Tricon Project Target System Version Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Rules for Trident Project Target System Version Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Converting Version 4.x Tricon Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Converting Version 4.x Trident Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Converting Version 2.x and 3.x Tricon or Trident Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The Project Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Creating a New Tricon Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Creating a New Trident Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Creating a New Tri-GP Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Logging In to an Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Logging In for the First Time When Enhanced Security Is Enabled . . . . . . . . 28 Logging In When Standard Security Is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Logging In When Enhanced Security Is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Troubleshooting Login Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Adding a Project Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Adding Audit Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Specifying Project Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Specifying Language Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Specifying Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Specifying Forced Points Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 iv Contents Specifying Download Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Specifying Emulator Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Specifying TriStation 1131 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Specifying Directory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Specifying Drawing Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Specifying FBD Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Specifying LD Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Specifying CEM Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding or Removing Custom Help Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Adding a Custom Help File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Viewing Custom Help Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Removing a Custom Help File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Managing User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Changing the Security Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding and Modifying User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Recommended Rules for Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Changing the Security Level for Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Changing Security Level Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Viewing User Access Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Viewing the User Access Log In Windows Event Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Saving the User Access Log to a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Changing Event Logging Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Clearing the User Access Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Working with Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Creating a Library of Project Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Managing Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Adding a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Updating a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Deleting a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Making Partial Changes to a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Verifying a Library Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Updating the Report Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Viewing and Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Adding Custom Reports to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Exporting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Report Database Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Printing Project Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Printable Project Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Printing Individual Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Printing Multiple Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Chapter 2 Application Development 97 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Application Development Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Application Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 The Application Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 The Declaration Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 The Implementation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Parts of an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Safety and Control Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Function Block Diagram Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Contents v Ladder Diagram Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Structured Text Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 CEMPLE (Cause and Effect Matrix Programming Language Editor) . . . . . . 108 User Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Creating a User Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Copying User or Library Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Copying a User Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Copying a Library Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Specifying Document Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Specifying Document Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Restricting Access to a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Changing a Document Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Using the FBD Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Using the LD Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Function and Function Block Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Working with Logic Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Selecting a Sheet Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Managing Logic Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Editing the Sheet Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Printing Logic Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Selecting Library Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Specifying Function Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Specifying Function Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Specifying Function Block Application Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Using a Space Saver Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Structured Text Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Using the ST Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Using Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Defining an Enumeration Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Defining an Array Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Defining a Structured Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Declaring a VAR CONSTANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Declaring a VAR_TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Declaring a VAR_EXTERNAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Declaring Local Variables in ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Declaring Input and Output Variables in ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Using ForLoop and Exit Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Using a CASE Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 VAR_IN_OUT Function Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cause Effect Matrix Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 CEMPLE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Matrix Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 How a Matrix is Evaluated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Using the CEM Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 FBD Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Variable Detail Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Setting up a CEM Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Specifying CEM Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Specifying CEM Element Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Specifying Monitor Colors and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Using User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Enabling User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States. . . . . . . . 151 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 vi Contents Specifying Local Variables, Tagnames, and Constants in a CEM Program . . . . . . 152 Specifying Properties in the Variable Detail Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Working with Cells, Rows, and Columns in a CEM Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Selecting and Editing Cells in a CEM Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Displaying and Sizing Cells from the Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Inserting and Deleting Rows or Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Sizing and Hiding Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Sizing and Hiding Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Sizing and Hiding the Comment Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Editing the Title Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Managing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Variables and Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Declaring Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Specifying Variable Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Specifying Variable Annotation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Naming Multiple Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Changing Multiple Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Creating Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Specifying Constant Annotation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Declaring Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Assigning an Alias Number, Alias Type, and Physical Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Important Information About Alias Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Procedure for Input and Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Procedure for Memory Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Scaling a REAL Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Specifying Display Options for Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Creating Multiple Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Changing Multiple Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Renaming a Tagname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Deleting a Tagname. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Inserting a Column into the Tagnames Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Deleting a Column from the Tagnames Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Managing Undeclared and Unused Tagnames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 What Are Undeclared Tagnames? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 What Are Unused Tagnames? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Displaying Undeclared and Unused Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Editing Unused Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Deleting Unused Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Importing and Exporting Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Exporting Tagname Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Format of an Exported Tagname File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Preparing an Excel File for Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 File Format Requirements for Tagname Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Import Options and Validation Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Importing Tagname Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Annotations and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Adding Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Specifying Annotation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Adding a Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Specifying Comment Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Picking and Dropping Elements for Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Editing Comment Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Contents vii Using Macros with Annotations and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Editing Macro Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Modbus Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Assigning Alias Numbers to Tagnames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 How Tricon Transmits REAL Values With Special Alias Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Tricon Special Alias Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 How REAL Numbers are Scaled to Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Scaling REAL Values to Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 How Trident and Tri-GP REAL Values are Transmitted Without Scaling . . . . . . . 217 Disabling Scaling of REAL Values for Trident and Tri-GP Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . 218 Peer-to-Peer Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Estimating the Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Allocating Peer-to-Peer Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 SOE Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Displaying the SOE Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Defining SOE Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Assigning Tagnames to SOE Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Specifying a Trip Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Tricon Application Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Restricting Access to a Tricon Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 What Affects Tricon Write Access from External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Restricting Write Access to Tricon Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Allowing Write Access to Tricon Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Trident and Tri-GP Application Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Restricting Access to a Trident or Tri-GP Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 What Affects Trident and Tri-GP Write Access from External Devices . . . . . . . . . 235 Restricting Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Allowing Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Building an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Specifying the Program Order and Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Compiling a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Building or Rebuilding an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 About the Application’s Initialization Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Viewing and Understanding Initialization Table Size Information . . . . . . . . 242 Solving an Initialization Table Overflow Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration 245 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 The Tricon Controller Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 The Tricon Controller Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 The Tricon Configuration Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 The Tricon Controller and Emulator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Setting Tricon Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Allocating Memory for Tricon Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Configuring the Tricon Target System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Determining Your Tricon Controller’s System Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Validating a Tricon Target System Version Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Changing the Tricon Target System Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Target System Version Change Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Changing the Target System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Results of a Tricon Target System Version Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Configuring Tricon Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 viii Contents Adding or Deleting a Tricon Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Determining Tricon Chassis Power Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Configuring a Tricon AI Single-Ended or Differential Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Configuring a Tricon DO Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Configuring a Tricon PI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Adding a Tricon Thermocouple Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Configuring Tricon Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Configuring Tricon ACM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Configuring Tricon HIM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Configuring Tricon EICM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Configuring Tricon NCM Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Configuring Tricon SMM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Configuring TCM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Configuring TCM Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Configuring TCM Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Configuring TCM Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Configuring TCM Protocols (Tricon v10.3 and Later Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Exporting the TCM Configuration to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Importing the TCM Configuration From a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 About Tricon Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Using a Tricon ACM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Using a Tricon NCM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Using a Tricon NCM/G to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Using a Tricon SMM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Printing the Tricon Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration 311 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 The Trident and Tri-GP Configuration Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 The Trident and Tri-GP Controller and Emulator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Validating a Trident Target System Version Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Changing the Trident Target System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Results of a Trident Target System Version Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Main Processors (MPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Specifying Trident or Tri-GP MP Module Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Displaying Trident or Tri-GP MP Attribute Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Configuring Trident 1.x MP Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Configuring Trident 2.x or Tri-GP MP Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP MP Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Contents ix Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Removing a Trident or Tri-GP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP SDO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP PI or EPI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Configuring the Trident v1.x Communication Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Configuring Trident v1.x CM Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Configuring Trident v1.x CM Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Configuring Trident v1.x CM Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Configuring the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Peer-To-Peer Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Modbus TCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Exporting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration to a File . . . . . . . . . 360 Importing the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration From a File. . . . . . 361 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 About Trident and Tri-GP Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Using a Trident 1.x CM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Using a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Using Trident or Tri-GP System and Module Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Printing the Trident or Tri-GP Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 371 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 TriStation 1131 Communication Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Configuring the TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Installing the TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 When to Use the Tricon Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Connecting a Tricon Serial Port to a TriStation PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Directly Connecting an ACM or NCM Network Port to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . 380 Connecting a TCM Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Router or Hub . . . . 381 Connecting a Tricon Network Port Using a Media Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Controlling Access to the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 What Are TCM Resources? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 How Is Access Controlled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 What Are Access Levels? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Sample Access Control List and Resulting Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Configuring the Access Control List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Configuring Tricon Controller Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Effect of Printing on Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 x Contents Connecting a Tricon EICM Port to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Configuring a Tricon EICM Port for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 About Function Blocks for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using a RARP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using an EICM or TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Testing a Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 405 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 TriStation 1131 Communication Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Configuring the TriStation PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Installing DLC or TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Connecting Via the Serial Connection (Recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Connecting via the Left MP Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 When to Use the Trident or Tri-GP Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time . . . . . . . . 412 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller When the Network Is Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller When the Access Control List has Been Misconfigured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Serial Port to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . 416 Connecting the Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Connecting the Trident 1.x CM to the TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Connecting a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Connecting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Controller to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Directly Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 What Are CM Resources?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 How Is Access Controlled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 What Are Access Levels? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Sample Access Control List and Resulting Access Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Configuring the Access Control List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Effect of Printing on Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Devices for Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Contents xi Directly Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . 441 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Printing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 About Function Blocks for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Setting an IP Address Using a RARP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Setting a Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Address Using an MP Connection . . . . 449 Setting a Trident 1.x Controller IP Address Using a CM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Network Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Testing a Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Chapter 7 Implementation 455 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Implementation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Controlling the Operational Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Controller Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Downloading to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Changes to the Project Version and State After Downloading to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Monitoring Variables on the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Monitoring the Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Adding Annotation for Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Determining the Scan Surplus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Setting the Scan Time for a Downloaded Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Displaying Hardware Allocation Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Steps for Downloading Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Planning and Controlling Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Commands Required with Application Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Disabling Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Disabling Points on the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Viewing Disabled Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Re-enabling Disabled Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Forcing Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Using the Download Changes Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Using the Download All Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Appendix A Commands and Properties Appendix B Data Types 481 645 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Elementary Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 BOOL Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 DATE Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 DINT Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 DT Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 DWORD Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 INT Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 LREAL Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 REAL Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 STRING Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 xii Contents TIME Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 TOD Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Generic Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration 659 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Configuring TCM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Configuring TCM Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Configuring TCM Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Configuring TCM Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Configuring a Tricon TCM Printer Port for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 Appendix D Reserved Names 679 Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 Names Reserved by SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Index 693 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Preface TriStation™ 1131 Developer’s Workbench is a software application for developing, testing, and documenting safety-critical and process-control applications that execute on Triconex® controllers. New Features in TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 TriStation 1131 version 4.9.0 is a maintenance release, incorporating several minor fixes and enhancements. Note For more detailed information about the changes made in each TriStation 1131 v4.x release, see the Product Release Notice for TriStation v4.x, available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site. Summary of Sections • Chapter 1, Project Administration—Describes how to install the TriStation 1131 software, create a project, set up security, and use libraries of functions and function blocks. Chapter 2, Application Development—Explains how to develop an application. Chapter 3, Tricon Controller Configuration—Explains how to configure modules installed in a Tricon™ controller. Chapter 4, Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration—Explains how to configure modules installed in a Trident™ or Tri-GP controller. Chapter 5, Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131—Describes how to set up communication between a TriStation 1131 PC and a Tricon controller. Chapter 6, Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131—Describes how to set up communication between a TriStation 1131 PC and a Trident or Tri-GP controller. Chapter 7, Implementation—Explains how to implement an application on a controller. Appendix A, Commands and Properties—Describes TriStation 1131 commands, properties, and tools. Appendix B, Data Types—Describes the data types used in applications developed with TriStation 1131. Appendix C, TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration—Explains how to configure the model 4351 or 4352 Tricon Communication Module (TCM). • • • • • • • • • TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 xiv Preface Related Documents • • • • • • • • • TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference Triconex Emulator User’s Guide SOE Recorder User’s Guide Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User’s Guide Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP Safety Considerations Guides Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems Communication Guide for Trident Systems Communication Guide for Tri-GP Systems Product Release Notices for specific Tricon, Trident, Tri-GP, and TriStation 1131 versions Product and Training Information To obtain information about Triconex products and in-house and on-site training, see the Invensys Operations Management Web site or contact your regional customer center. Web Site http://www.iom.invensys.com TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Preface xv Technical Support Customers in the U. or Toll number 508-549-2424 (outside U.9.) Fax Toll number Web Site http://support. and Canada can obtain technical support from the Invensys Global Customer Support (GCS) center at the numbers below. Please have a purchase order or credit card available for billing. you may incur a charge.ips.S.invensys.0 .com/ (registration required) 508-549-4999 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Telephone Toll-free number 866-746-6477. Requests for support are prioritized as follows: • • • Emergency requests are given the highest priority Requests from participants with a support agreement and customers with purchase order or charge card authorization are given next priority All other requests are handled on a time-available basis If you require emergency or immediate response and do not have a support agreement. International customers should contact their regional support center. v4.S. clarifications. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. we want to know about any corrections. See Technical Support on page xv for contact information. you can write to us at: Attn: Technical Publications — Triconex Invensys 26561 Rancho Parkway South Lake Forest. Or. job title. company name. missing information that you would find helpful) Your suggestions for correcting or improving the documentation The version of the Triconex hardware or software you are using Your name. phone number. If you have a technical problem or question.xvi Preface We Welcome Your Comments To help us improve future versions of Triconex documentation. When you contact us.0 .com Please keep in mind that this e-mail address is only for documentation feedback. or further information you would find useful. v4. please include the following information: • • The title and version of the guide you are referring to A brief description of the content you are referring to (for example. CA 92630 USA Thank you for your feedback. step-by-step instructions that are incorrect. and e-mail address • • • Send e-mail to us at: triconextechpubs@invensys. please contact the Invensys Global Customer Support (GCS) center. information that requires clarification or more details. 0 Creating a New Project Working with Projects Specifying Project Options Specifying TriStation 1131 Options Managing User Access Working with Libraries Generating Reports Printing Project Documents 2 4 11 20 27 35 45 54 68 80 91 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 .9. v4.1 Project Administration Overview Installing TriStation 1131 Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.9. 0 .2 Chapter 1 Project Administration Overview This figure shows a typical project cycle and the main steps for setting up a TriStation 1131 project. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9.       Specify the language to be used as a default. and CEM Editor options. (Optional) Specify options to be used when you use TriStation 1131. (Optional) Create TriStation 1131 users and configure user access levels. Specify monitor colors for displaying variables in the Emulator and controller.0 on page 11   Install the TriStation1131 software (if needed) Create or open an existing project. Specify sort options for the tagnames table used by the TCM embedded OPC server. as needed. add custom reports. LD. (Optional) • Specifying Language Options on page 36 • Specifying Annotation Options on page 37 • Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values on page 39 • Specifying Download Options on page 41 • Specifying TriStation 1131 Options on page 45 • Specifying FBD Editor Options on page 48 • Specifying LD Editor Options on page 49 • Specifying CEM Editor Options on page 50     Add custom Help files for user-defined libraries. Steps See • Installing TriStation 1131 on page 4 • Creating a New Project on page 20 • Working with Projects on page 27 • Converting Existing Projects to Version 4. Specify FBD. Specify whether annotations are automatically included.9. Add libraries from other projects.9. • Adding or Removing Custom Help Files on page 51 • Managing User Access on page 54 • Adding a Library on page 74 • Generating Reports on page 80 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Overview 3 Project Administration Steps This list includes steps that can be or should be done during project administration. v4.0 . (Optional) View standard reports. as needed. 9.x MP only. • • • • • • 1 GHz processor with 512 MB RAM 500 MB free hard drive space CD-ROM drive Network adapter card SVGA monitor running at 1024 x 768 resolution with 32-bit color DLC protocol installed (for connecting to a Trident v1.9.5 and one of the following Windows® operating systems: — Windows® XP Professional — Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise (32-bit and 64-bit) — Windows Server® 2003 — Windows Server 2008 R2 (32-bit and 64-bit) Note If the . Topics include: • • • • • • • System Requirements on page 4 Upgrading from Previous Versions of TriStation 1131 on page 5 Changing a TriStation 1131 v4.0 Installation on page 5 Installing the TriStation 1131 Software on page 6 Customizing the Security Banner Text on page 7 Uninstalling the TriStation 1131 Software on page 9 Verifying the TriStation 1131 Installation on page 9 System Requirements The following are the minimum system requirements for TriStation 1131: • PC running the .4 Chapter 1 Project Administration Installing TriStation 1131 This section explains how to install and uninstall the TriStation 1131 software. setup will install it for you before installing TriStation 1131.0 . and how to verify that the software is correctly installed. v4. See Installing TriStation 1131 on page 4 for more information.NET Framework is not already installed. The installation also installs the TS1131 Install Check software. see Installing DLC or TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC on page 408) TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.NET Framework 3. Trident. To correct this.x open at the same time as v4.9. If you currently have the full-featured version of TriStation 1131 v4. 3. you do not need to uninstall it before running the TriStation 1131 v4. To correct this. uninstalling v4.9.9.9. downgrading to the Tri-GP only version means you will lose the ability to work with Tricon or Trident project files. you cannot have v3. Additionally. Projects backed up using a later version of TriStation 1131 cannot be opened by older versions.8.0 to no longer work. a project backed up using version 4.0 installed.x.9.9.0 on page 11).0.0 .0.9.9.9.9. Sample TriStation 1131 projects are now found in the following locations on the PC where you install TriStation 1131 v4.0 (see Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.0\Projects Changing a TriStation 1131 v4. if you installed other Triconex applications (such as SOE Recorder) after you installed TriStation 1131 v4.x. If you have previously installed either version of TriStation 1131 v4. before opening the project in a later version.0 setup program. You may wish to keep both versions of the TriStation 1131 software installed on your workstation until you have finished converting all your projects to v4. However. During installation.9. v4. If you have previously installed v4.0.0. for example.9.0 may cause other installed Triconex applications to no longer work. uninstalling v4.0 and then reinstall v4. and Tri-GP. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 after you have installed v4.0 will cause v4. setup will automatically modify the current installation to add or remove features. If you have previously installed version 2.9.0. please note the following: • Projects created in previous versions of TriStation 1131 should be backed up using the version of TriStation 1131 they were created in.Installing TriStation 1131 5 Upgrading from Previous Versions of TriStation 1131 If you are upgrading from a previous version of TriStation 1131.x of the TriStation 1131 software. or 4.4. The full-featured version: Supports application development for all Triconex controllers—Tricon. you do not need to uninstall it before installing v4.0. simply uninstall and then reinstall the other Triconex applications after you uninstall TriStation 1131 v4. For example. and you want to upgrade or downgrade your installation.0 Installation There are two versions of TriStation 1131: • • The Tri-GP only version: Supports application development for Tri-GP controllers only. simply uninstall both v4.9.0\Projects • • • • — Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2: C:\Program Data\Triconex \TriStation 1131 4.0 and v4. However. you do not need to uninstall it before you install version 4. You cannot create applications for use with Tricon or Trident controllers.0: — Windows XP and Windows Server 2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.9.x of the TriStation 1131 software. only one version of TriStation 1131 can be open at any one time.0.9.0 cannot be opened in TriStation 1131 version 4. leave the default text as-is during installation. If the .NET Framework installation can take several minutes. To look for recent updates. the message text can also be modified at any time after installation.0 . The setup program provided by Triconex installs all the components of the TriStation 1131 Developer’s Workbench on your PC. which is: • Windows XP / Windows Server 2003: C:\Program Files\Triconex \TriStation 1131 4. and then click Control Panel. Close all open applications.0\ TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. setup will also install Windows Installer v4. Double-click setup. Depending on your PC’s configuration. Insert the TriStation 1131 CD in the CD-ROM drive. Click the CD or Floppy button. From the Start menu. If necessary. Follow the InstallShield Wizard instructions. click Settings. • The Triconex Emulator v1. If you receive any errors during the .5 prior to installing the . and may require you to restart your PC in order to complete the installation process.exe file on the CD. Double-click Add New Programs. you will be asked if you want to change the NERC Security Banner message text. go to step 8.NET Framework. If the installation starts automatically. Before you start TriStation 1131 installation. see Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing on page 459. This is optional. If you purchased the optional CEMPLE software.9. Do NOT install and run TriStation 1131 on a network server.2.6 Chapter 1 Project Administration Installing the TriStation 1131 Software This procedure explains how to install the TriStation 1131 software.NET Framework is not already installed.0 is automatically installed as part of the TriStation 1131 installation. If you aren’t sure if you want to change the text. For more information about the Emulator. it is installed at the same time. visit the Microsoft Windows Update website. make sure you have installed the latest service packs and critical updates for your version of Windows. See Customizing the Security Banner Text on page 7 for more information. go to the next step.NET Framework installation. contact your system administrator for assistance. v4.exe to start the installation. Windows Installer and . Triconex recommends installing the TriStation 1131 software in the default destination folder. setup will install it for you before installing TriStation 1131. Otherwise.9. Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Log on as an administrator or as a user with administrator privileges. • The TriStation 1131 software must be installed on a local drive. Note During installation. and then browse to locate the setup. 9.9. and place that file on the network. or on a portable flash drive. You can then copy and paste the text from the file. the same security banner text can be used for other Triconex products that use the security banner functionality. However. if your organization’s security banner text is the same for all Triconex products. v4. The security banner text must be customized in each TriStation 1131 installation individually. Note For more information about the NERC’s Cyber Security standards. On the Edit menu. advising you of the appropriate use of TriStation 1131. or be in compliance with North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) cyber security standards.Installing TriStation 1131 7 • • 9 Windows 7 / Windows Server 2008 R2 (32-bit): C:\Program Files\Triconex \TriStation 1131 4. click Finish.0\ Windows 7 / Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit): C:\Program Files(x86) \Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. click Modify Banner Message. or at any time after installation using the procedure provided in this section.9. can assist in securing critical infrastructure from cyber security threats.com. For example. To complete the installation. a set of sound security practices that.NET Framework was installed as part of the TriStation 1131 installation. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. you can simply copy and paste the text from one PC to another. Procedure 1 2 Open TriStation 1131. If you are an administrator managing TriStation 1131 installations in your organization.0 . see www. if properly implemented.0\ To restart your PC after the installation has finished. a security banner appears. You are not required to restart your PC before running the TriStation 1131 software. 10 Customizing the Security Banner Text Each time you start TriStation 1131. The security banner text can be changed during TriStation 1131 installation.nerc. once you modify the security banner text once. click Yes. you may want to customize the security banner text to reflect your corporate policy. meet site-specific needs. unless the . you can use the same text for the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor as you do for TriStation 1131. An easy way to do this would be to create a temporary text file with the security banner text in it. You must be logged in to Windows as user with administrator privileges to change the security banner text. Also. you may not have read/write access to the location where the message text is stored. if you delete the existing text. The security banner text can be a maximum of 2. but do not enter new text.0 . For contact information.”) will be displayed. v4. the default security banner message (“This system is for use by authorized Safety System personnel only. and then click OK. Contact Invensys Global Customer Support for assistance. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.8 Chapter 1 Project Administration If the Modify Banner Message menu item is not enabled. Note You cannot have a blank security banner message.100 characters. The next time you start TriStation 1131. the customized text will appear in the security banner. Note If you receive an “Unable to save changes to the banner message” error message when you attempt to save the security banner text. 3 Edit the security banner text as needed. see Technical Support on page xv. The Modify Banner Message dialog box appears. you are not logged in to Windows with administrator privileges.9. Triconex. select Programs. and then click Control Panel. Install Check verifies that all TriStation 1131 files are correctly installed.0 .9. Note If you saved projects in the default installation directory (see Installing TriStation 1131 on page 4) or the default Projects directory (see Specifying Directory Locations on page 46). v4. From the Start menu. 5 6 Click Yes or Yes to All if the Remove Shared File dialog box asks about removing unused DLLs. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Log on as an administrator or as a user with administrator privileges. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Note Running TS1131 Install Check is required for safety applications. The Install Check software is copied to your hard drive when you install the TriStation 1131 software. Follow the on-screen instructions to confirm the deletion of the selected application and all its components. Procedure 1 2 From the Start menu. you should run the TriStation 1131 Install Check program. the name. version. click Settings. Click Finish to complete the uninstallation process. After installing the software and before downloading an application to the controller. For more information. see the Safety Considerations Guide. When verification is complete.Installing TriStation 1131 9 Uninstalling the TriStation 1131 Software This procedure explains how to uninstall the TriStation 1131 software.9. and then Install Check 4. Click Run. Click Change/Remove. and status of each file are displayed in the list. Verifying the TriStation 1131 Installation This procedure explains how to verify the TriStation 1131 software is correctly installed and that associated files are not corrupted.0.9.0. and select TriStation 1131 4. the uninstall program does not remove them. 4 Click Display Details to view the full path for verified files and expanded error messages for any identified problems. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . If there are files that have “Missing” or “Corrupted” in the Status column.9. The status of each file should be “OK”. you should re-install TriStation 1131. v4.10 Chapter 1 Project Administration 3 Verify that the program is validated by viewing each item in the list. Note All projects are backed up automatically prior to project conversion. it can no longer be opened with an earlier version of TriStation 1131. Projects converted to version 4.x Trident Projects on page 15 Converting Version 2. Topics include: • • • • Selecting the Target System Version During Project Conversion on page 11 Converting Version 4.9.9.x and 3. you must do one of the following to correct the target system version: • Change the project to the Download All state. if it is a Tricon project last opened in TriStation 1131 v4. If you select an incorrect target system version during project conversion.9.0 can be converted to v4. v4. The conversion process is the only time you can set the project’s target system version without having to change the project state to Download All. The name and location of the backup file is displayed in the messages window (see Message View Command on page 561) after project conversion is complete.9. However.8.0 11 Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.0 .9.9. Any project created with v2.0. The most significant differences are: • • • There are no program instances Programs can directly reference tagnames Programs cannot use VAR_INPUT. The backup file can be opened in the version of TriStation 1131 originally used to create the project.x through v4.Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.x is significantly different from versions 3.0 The programming model for TriStation 1131 4. The target system version determines which controller features and modules can be configured in a project. VAR_OUTPUT.x Tricon or Trident Projects on page 17 Selecting the Target System Version During Project Conversion When converting an existing project. once a project has been opened in v4. If your project is in the Download Changes state prior to conversion. or a Trident project last opened in TriStation 1131 v4.0. If the target system version is correctly configured during conversion. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and then change the target system version (see Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318).4 or earlier.0 are automatically set to use Standard Security. However.x and earlier. changing the target system version at any time after conversion will require a Download All.0. or VAR_IN_OUT variables This procedure explains how an existing TriStation 1131 project can be automatically converted to v4. You can change the security setting after project conversion is complete.x Tricon Projects on page 13 Converting Version 4. See Changing the Security Setting on page 55. you are asked to select the target system version for the project. the project can remain in the Download Changes state.9. be sure to select the correct target system version during the conversion process.1 or earlier. 12 Chapter 1 Project Administration • Keep the project in the Download Changes state by abandoning the current project and using the project’s backup file to restart the conversion process. do not open the project in TriStation 1131 v4. You must use TriStation 1131 v4.x CM after project conversion is complete. 1.4 or earlier with these systems. In this case.5 with a mix of High-Density and Enhanced Low-Density chassis cannot be changed to an earlier system version (downgraded) or to a later system version (upgraded). the configuration settings for the CM will be reset to their default values during project conversion.1 Rules for Trident Project Target System Version Conversion • If the project’s hardware configuration includes a Trident v1.9. This limitation does not apply to projects created in TriStation 1131 v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For more information.0 or v1. v4.x. Rules for Tricon Project Target System Version Conversion • If the project’s hardware configuration includes a model 3006 or 3007 Main Processor.0 cannot be used to create or modify projects for Trident v1.6 or later. you must convert the project with Tricon v9 . and then change the target system version after project conversion is complete.x CM configuration details (or saving a backup of your project prior to conversion) before changing the target system version. time synchronization is enabled if the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization check box is selected on the Operating Parameters tab of the MP Setup dialog box.x to 2.x to Trident 2. it will be disabled during project conversion if the target system version is changed from 1.9.x.x. • If you are upgrading from a Trident 1. TriStation 1131 v4. In this case. or vice-versa. — On Trident 2. This will require a Download All. you cannot upgrade to a model 3008 Main Processor during project conversion. Invensys recommends writing down your Trident 1.x target system version during project conversion.9.x on the Invensys Global Customer Support (GCS) web site for detailed compatibility information.2 or later target system version during project conversion. See the Product Release Notice for TriStation 1131 v4.1 system.0.0 or v1. you must upgrade to a Trident v1. • A project created in TriStation 1131 v4.4 or v4.1 systems.3006 Main Processor as the target system version. so that you can use them to reconfigure the Trident 2. • If time synchronization has been enabled on the Trident CM or MP (as described below).0 . time synchronization is enabled if either the On NET 1 Enable Time Synchronization or the On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization properties are selected on the Network tab of the CM Setup dialog box. — On Trident 1. if you want to maintain your project for use with these Trident system versions. see Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318. from 1. Click Log On. The name and location of the backup file will be displayed in the messages window (see Message View Command on page 561) after project conversion is complete.9.0.9. Note Upgrading or downgrading within a major Trident version (for example.9. If the Select Main Processor dialog box does not appear.1 to 2. Procedure 1 Open the TriStation 1131 project to be converted. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or from 2.Converting Existing Projects to Version 4. See Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization on page 362 for more information.x Tricon Projects This procedure describes how to convert Tricon projects created in TriStation 1131 versions 4.0– 4. Converting Version 4. go to step 8. Do one of the following: • • If the Select Main Processor dialog box appears (only when converting projects last opened in TriStation 1131 v4.0) will NOT change your time synchronization settings.6.0 to TriStation 1131 v4. Enter your user name and password.8. go to step 6. 2 3 4 5 When prompted.2 to 1. Note All projects will be backed up automatically during project conversion. v4.0 .0 13 You will need to re-enable time synchronization after project conversion is complete.1 or earlier). click Yes to continue the conversion or No to cancel. 0 does not support Tricon versions 9. v4.0 .4. Note If you aren’t sure which Main Processor model and Tricon system version to select. based on your Tricon configuration. If the project’s hardware configuration includes a model 3008 Main Processor. For a list of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Tricon. — TriStation 1131 v4.x and earlier.3. specify these properties in the Select Main Processor dialog box. See Determining Your Tricon Controller’s System Version on page 252 for more information. click OK when prompted to convert the project with Tricon v9 . use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor to verify your Tricon’s system version information.9. Property Model Target System Version Description The Main Processor model installed in the Tricona that this project will be downloaded to. • a.9. The system version of the Tricon that this project will be downloaded to. Do one of the following: • If you are upgrading a project from one of the following TriStation 1131 versions. TriStation 1131 v4.x — TriStation 1131 v4.3006 Main Processor as the target system version. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select. go to step 10.x or later TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 7 8 Click OK. see the applicable Tricon Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).0.14 Chapter 1 Project Administration 6 Do one of the following: • If the project’s hardware configuration includes a model 3006 or 3007 Main Processor. Note If you click No.1. you must click Cancel when prompted to change the project’s state. Project conversion is complete when the project file opens in TriStation 1131 and you see the Application Workspace. do NOT open it with TriStation 1131 v4. see Updating a Library on page 75.9.1 and earlier. Click Log On.2 or later during project conversion. If you click Yes. In this case. you must upgrade the target system version to Trident v1. click Yes to update the libraries.Converting Existing Projects to Version 4. click Yes to update the libraries.0. v4. but the TCXLIB library will NOT be updated.x or v4.2. depending on your project’s current download state: • • If your project is in the Download All state.0 to TriStation 1131 v4.0 15 • 9 If you are converting a project from TriStation 1131 v4. go to step 10.9.1 or earlier. The name and location of the backup file will be displayed in the messages window (see Message View Command on page 561) after project conversion is complete. To maintain the project for use with Trident v1. If your project is in the Download Changes state. Note All projects will be backed up automatically during project conversion. If you open a project developed for use with one of these systems. 10 If prompted to update the project libraries. When prompted. — If you click Change State. your project will be changed to the Download All state.x.9. click Yes to continue the conversion or No to cancel. Do one of the following: TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Enter your user name and password.0 does not support Trident versions 1. — To maintain your project in the Download Changes state. go to step 9.0 . or No to continue the conversion without updating the libraries. You can update the TCXLIB library manually after project conversion is complete.9. the TX1LIB and TR1LIB libraries will be updated.0–4. you will then be prompted to change the project state to Download All in order to update all project libraries. CAUTION Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Open the TriStation 1131 project to be converted. TriStation 1131 v4.0. see Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77.8. or No to continue the conversion without updating the libraries.9. do one of the following. Converting Version 4. you must manually update the libraries prior to building and downloading the application. and all libraries (including TCXLIB) will be updated.x Trident Projects This procedure describes how to convert Trident projects created in TriStation 1131 versions 4. When prompted to update the project libraries. If the Select Main Processor dialog box does not appear.16 Chapter 1 Project Administration • • If the Select Main Processor dialog box appears (only when converting projects last opened in TriStation 1131 v4. The system version of the Tridenta that this project will be downloaded to.2. go to step 6.x — TriStation 1131 v4. depending on your project’s current download state: TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. go to step 10. TriStation 1131 v4. see Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version on page 318.1 and earlier. Click OK.0 .0. For a list of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Trident. Do one of the following: • If you are upgrading a project from one of the following TriStation 1131 versions. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select. 6 Specify these properties in the Select Main Processor dialog box.x or v4. Note 7 8 If you aren’t sure which Trident system version to select. based on your Trident configuration.1. do one of the following.0 does not support Trident versions 1. v4. — TriStation 1131 v4. Property Model Target System Version Description The Main Processor model installed in the Trident that this project will be downloaded to.3. 9 When prompted to update the project libraries. go to the next step.9. a.9.4 or earlier). go to step 8. see the applicable Trident Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).x.x or later • If you are converting a project from TriStation 1131 v4. x or v3.0. the TRDLIB library will be updated.0 17 • • If your project is in the Download All state.x and 3. and all libraries (including TCXLIB) will be updated. but the TCXLIB library will NOT be updated.1 or earlier. Converting Version 2. In this case. If you click Yes. or No to continue the conversion without updating the libraries. You can update the TCXLIB library manually after project conversion is complete. CAUTION TriStation 1131 v4.0 . see Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77. — If you click Change State. click Yes to update the libraries.0. your project will be changed to the Download All state.2 or later during project conversion.9.9.9.9. If you open a project developed for use with one of these systems. 10 If prompted to update the project libraries. Procedure 1 2 Open the TriStation 1131 project to be converted.1 and earlier. you will then be prompted to change the project state to Download All in order to update all project libraries. you must click Cancel when prompted to change the project’s state. click Yes to update the libraries.9. do NOT open it with TriStation 1131 v4. Note If you click No. To maintain the project for use with Trident v1.0 does not support Trident versions 1. To get information about what is converted. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Converting Existing Projects to Version 4. When prompted. you must upgrade the target system version to Trident v1. you must manually update the libraries prior to building and downloading the application. If your project is in the Download Changes state. Project conversion is complete when the project file opens in TriStation 1131 and you see the Application Workspace. — To maintain your project in the Download Changes state.x Tricon or Trident Projects This procedure describes how to convert Tricon or Trident projects created in TriStation 1131 v2. see Updating a Library on page 75. or No to continue the conversion without updating the libraries. go to step 10. click Yes to continue the conversion or No to cancel.x to TriStation 1131 v4. click Help. v4. Application State Multiple Program Instances Naming Conflicts If renaming a program input or output results in a name conflict with a local variable. If there are multiple instances of a program. This means you will not be able to compare the current version of the project to the previously downloaded version of the project until after the first download. The following table identifies the changes made during a v2. For a Trident project: — Click Yes when prompted to update the Trident Hardware Definition File.9.bt2. you must log in to the project as a Level 01 user. The state of the application is changed to Download All. you must perform a Download All (see Using the Download All Command on page 480). — Click Yes again when prompted to convert the project with Trident v1. each instance is converted to a new program document. click Yes when prompted to convert the project with Tricon v9 .2 or later as the target system version.3006 Main Processor as the target system version. the project is opened and a backup is made using this naming convention: <project name>_<version>_Pre40Cnv. Table 1 Item Application Snapshot Changes Made During Version 2. The name of each new document is generated by appending _# to the program name.18 Chapter 1 Project Administration 3 If you clicked Yes. 4 Do one of the following: • • For a Tricon project. v4.x Project Conversion Description The conversion removes the snapshot of the application which was saved during the last download. the first instance is named TankAlarm_1.x or 3. if there were two instances of program TankAlarm. You must rename the local variable before compiling the program. the name of the local variable is appended with ?Dup? and a message is written to the message output view. where # is a consecutive number starting at 1.0 .x project conversion. After you log in. For example. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x or v3. and the second is named TankAlarm_2. 5 After completing the conversion. The reason this must be done is that in this version of TriStation 1131.0 19 Table 1 Item Changes Made During Version 2. The best place to do this is in the first network in your program. You must change the names and change the Point Type to memory. input and output variable declarations are changed to tagname declarations.0 . In ST programs.9. the variable name is appended with ?Sys? and a message is written to the message output view. LD.x Project Conversion (continued) Description If a tagname references a Trident system variable. and CEM programs. One way to do this is to replace the dot (period) in the name with an underscore and then delete the ?Sys? from the end of the name.Converting Existing Projects to Version 4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. Trident System Variables Variable Changes In FBD. Trident system status values are only accessible by using the system status function blocks. and VAR_IN_OUT declarations are changed to VAR_EXTERNAL.9. VAR_OUTPUT. You must also use the system status function blocks (SYS_*) to set the value of these variables. all VAR_INPUT.x or 3. Trident.9. and a user name and password are automatically created with the highest level of privileges—Level 01 (see Managing User Access on page 54). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or Tri-GP). You are automatically logged on as this default user when the project is created. When a new project is created.0 . Standard Security is enabled. See Adding Custom Reports to a Project on page 82.20 Chapter 1 Project Administration Creating a New Project This procedure explains how to create a new TriStation 1131 project. you cannot create a single project for use with two or more controller types. Custom reports you create using the Crystal Reports software appear in the User Reports folder. • The standard reports included with TriStation 1131 are found in the Default Reports folder. v4. • Other project features are accessed from the menus. See Viewing and Printing a Report on page 80. Note Each project is created for a single controller type (Tricon. Topics include: • • • • The Project Workspace on page 20 Creating a New Tricon Project on page 21 Creating a New Trident Project on page 23 Creating a New Tri-GP Project on page 25 The Project Workspace The Project Workspace includes two reports folders. select Tricon or Tricon Low Density.9. Note TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive. Procedure 1 2 Open TriStation 1131. The project’s file name (including the entire folder path) cannot exceed 235 characters. but you must copy the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation 1131. the first character in the file name must be an alphanumeric character. click New Project.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Projects may be saved to a network drive for backup purposes. v4. enter a file name. 5 Navigate to the folder you want to save the project in. 3 4 For the Platform (controller).Creating a New Project 21 Creating a New Tricon Project This procedure describes how to create a new project for a Tricon controller. On the File menu. Click OK to continue. Also. and click Save. select 3008. Note If you aren’t sure which Main Processor model and Tricon system version to select.x. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property Model Description The Main Processor model installed in the Tricona that this project will be downloaded to. 7 Click OK. • For Tricon versions 9. Files that are used in TriStation 1131 are copied to the project. select 3006/N.x and earlier. as changing the target system version at a later time will require a Download All.52.x. or 9. You should be sure to select the correct target system version. see the applicable Tricon Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site). For a list of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Tricon.9. After the file creation process finishes. based on your Tricon configuration. use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor to verify your Tricon system version information.0 . Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select. a.51.6 and later. See Determining Your Tricon Controller’s System Version on page 252 for more information. 9. 3007.4. v4. • For Tricon versions 9. you are automatically logged on to the project using the default user name (MANAGER) and default password (PASSWORD). TriStation 1131 v4.x.0 does not support Tricon versions 9.22 Chapter 1 Project Administration 6 Specify these properties in the Select Main Processor dialog box.5. Target System Version The system version of the Tricon that this project will be downloaded to.9. Procedure 1 2 Open TriStation 1131. In the Filename for New Project dialog box.Creating a New Project 23 Creating a New Trident Project This procedure describes how to create a new project for a Trident controller. but you must copy the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation 1131. the first character in the file name must be an alphanumeric character. Note TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive. select Trident. enter a file name. Click OK to continue. v4. Projects may be saved to a network drive for backup purposes. 3 4 5 For the Platform (controller). Also. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The project’s file name (including the entire folder path) cannot exceed 235 characters. navigate to the folder you want to save the project in.0 . click New Project. and click Save.9. On the File menu. a. For a list of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Trident. v4. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select. as changing the target system version at a later time will require a Download All.9. you are automatically logged on to the project using the default user name (MANAGER) and default password (PASSWORD). Note If you aren’t sure which Main Processor model and Trident system version to select. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Files that are used in TriStation 1131 are copied to the project. see the applicable Trident Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site). 7 Click OK. You should be sure to select the correct target system version.9.0 does not support Trident versions 1.1 and earlier. based on your Trident configuration. After the file creation process finishes. Property Model Target System Version Description The Main Processor model installed in the Trident that this project will be downloaded to. see Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version on page 318. The system version of the Tridenta that this project will be downloaded to. TriStation 1131 v4.24 Chapter 1 Project Administration 6 Specify these properties in the Select Main Processor dialog box.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. but you must copy the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation 1131.9. Click OK to continue. In the Filename for New Project dialog box.Creating a New Project 25 Creating a New Tri-GP Project This procedure describes how to create a new project for a Tri-GP controller. and click Save. Procedure 1 2 Open TriStation 1131. v4. On the File menu. click New Project. navigate to the folder you want to save the project in. the first character in the file name must be an alphanumeric character. Note TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive.0 . Projects may be saved to a network drive for backup purposes. select Tri-GP. The project’s file name (including the entire folder path) cannot exceed 235 characters. 3 4 5 For the Platform (controller). enter a file name. Also. You should be sure to select the correct target system version. you are automatically logged on to the project using the default user name (MANAGER) and default password (PASSWORD). Property Model Target System Version Description The Main Processor model installed in the Tri-GP that this project will be downloaded to. Note If you aren’t sure which Main Processor model and Tri-GP system version to select. 7 Click OK. After the file creation process finishes. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. see Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version on page 318.26 Chapter 1 Project Administration 6 Specify these properties in the Select Main Processor dialog box. Files that are used in TriStation 1131 are copied to the project.0 . as changing the target system version at a later time will require a Download All. v4. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select. The system version of the Tri-GP that this project will be downloaded to. based on your Tri-GP configuration. v4.0 . Topics include: • • • • Logging In to an Existing Project on page 27 Adding a Project Description on page 31 Adding Audit Comments on page 32 Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on page 33 Logging In to an Existing Project Only one project can be opened at a time.9. If you are unable to open a TriStation 1131 project created by another user. and the folder it is located in. Windows security file access rules apply to all TriStation 1131 project files. If Enhanced Security is enabled. Note If an existing TriStation 1131 project was created by a user with restricted or administrator-level rights in Windows. if your Windows domain setting is limited to three login attempts. Depending on the current security setting. there is no limit on the number of times you can attempt to enter your user name and password. contact your network or system administrator for assistance with changing the access rights for the selected project file and/or file location. For example. ask your network administrator to reset your Windows account. after three unsuccessful attempts to log in to the project. • • If Standard Security is enabled. other users may be unable to open that project. Topics include: • • • • Logging In for the First Time When Enhanced Security Is Enabled on page 28 Logging In When Standard Security Is Enabled on page 28 Logging In When Enhanced Security Is Enabled on page 28 Troubleshooting Login Problems on page 29 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. add audit comments and a description. If this occurs. A project that has been saved to a network drive must be copied to your local drive before you open it. your user account will be locked out.Working with Projects 27 Working with Projects This section explains how to open and log on to an existing project. You must have read/write access to a TriStation 1131 project. the number of times you can attempt to enter your user name and password is determined by your Windows domain setting. TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive. you may need to log in using your Windows user name and password. view project version information and save an existing project. to be able to open the project. If both authentications are successful.28 Chapter 1 Project Administration Logging In for the First Time When Enhanced Security Is Enabled If you are a new user. Logging In When Standard Security Is Enabled When Standard Security is enabled. The default user name is MANAGER. Select the folder to look in. 3 4 Enter a user name and password. you need to enter your Windows user name and password. Procedure 1 2 Open TriStation 1131 and on the File menu. you may need to log in twice: • • First. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Your user information will be authenticated against Windows Active Directory. as well as the project’s user list. see Troubleshooting Login Problems on page 29. The project opens. to authenticate against the Windows domain. click the project to be opened. Logging In When Enhanced Security Is Enabled When Enhanced Security is enabled. you then need to enter your Windows user name and TriStation 1131 password (NOT your Windows password).9. the first time you log on to a project when Enhanced Security is enabled. to authenticate against the project’s user list. you must use your Windows user name and password to log in. If Windows authentication is successful. v4. click Open Project. all subsequent logins will require you to enter only your Windows user name and password to access the project. The default password is PASSWORD. If you are having problems logging in using your Windows user information. and then click Open. you must use your TriStation 1131 user name and password to log in.0 . Click Log On. In this case. The following error message appears: “Logon failure: unknown user name or bad password. Verify that you are trying to log in with the correct Windows user name and password. click Open Project. 3 Enter your Windows user name (including domain.9. Be sure not to leave the user name and/or password field blank. This message appears when Enhanced Security is enabled. TriStation 1131 is unable to authenticate your user information with Windows.Working with Projects 29 Procedure 1 2 Open TriStation 1131 and on the File menu. Problem The following error message appears: “The parameter is incorrect. click the project to be opened. and click OK. if necessary) and password.” Solution This message appears when Enhanced Security is enabled. Troubleshooting Login Problems The following are common problems you may encounter when trying to log in to a TriStation 1131 project. and then click Open.0 . When you click OK in the error message box. and you do one of the following in the login dialog box: • Enter an incorrect Windows user name that has not been added to the project’s user list. User names and passwords are case-sensitive. • Enter an incorrect password. and you clicked OK in the Login dialog box without entering your Windows user name and/or password. the Login dialog box will appear again. v4. Select the folder to look in. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is not on when you enter your user information. When you click OK in the error message box.” TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the login dialog box will appear again. The Windows login dialog box appears. Windows “Guest” accounts are used to provide access to a computer when you do not have a Windows user account on that computer.0 .” Solution This message appears when Enhanced Security is enabled.9. Verify that you are trying to log in with the correct Windows user name and password. In order for you to be able to log in to a TriStation 1131 project with a “Guest” account. v4. User names and passwords are case-sensitive.30 Chapter 1 Project Administration Problem The following error message appears: “You are not authorized to open this project because your user name was not found in the project’s user list. When you click OK in the error message box.” This message appears when Enhanced Security is enabled and you are trying to log in using a Windows “Guest” account. ask your network or system administrator to do the following: • Remove the “Guest” user from the Windows Local Security Policy “Deny access to this computer from the network” list. Verify that the CAPS LOCK key is not on when you enter your user information. The following error message appears: “Logon failure: the user has not been granted the requested logon type at this computer. • Enable the “Accounts: Guest account status” option in the Windows Local Security Policy security options list. the login dialog box will appear again. and you enter a Windows user name that has not been added to the project’s user list for the project you are trying to open. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Working with Projects 31 Adding a Project Description This procedure explains how to add a description to a project. Changing or adding information to the Summary tab in the Windows File Properties dialog box for a TriStation 1131 project file (. The Project Description dialog box displays information about the project. v4.pt2) will prevent TriStation 1131 from opening the file. which may be different. There is no way to recover a project file that has been changed in this way. Click OK to save.9. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. including the version of the project being developed and the version of the project downloaded to the controller. CAUTION Do not use the Windows file properties dialog box to maintain descriptive information about your project. click Project Description.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 2 3 Enter a description of any length for the project. function. See Building or Rebuilding an Application on page 241. Note You can also add audit trail comments when compiling or saving a program. Procedure 1 Close a program. 2 Enter a comment and click OK. The following dialog box appears. These comments provide an audit trail which can be viewed in reports.9. allowing you to describe the changes before the element is saved.32 Chapter 1 Project Administration Adding Audit Comments This procedure explains how to add comments when you change a program. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and building an application. or function block that was changed.0 . function. v4. or function block. the major version is 3. the minor version is 7.pt2) downloaded to the Emulator. in version 3. and the EmulatorCount is 12). the minor version is 7.12. Note The complete list of downloaded version changes can be viewed in the Project History dialog box. in version 3.pt2) downloaded to the controller. The Emulator downloaded project version is the last version of the project file (. The version is provided in the format major. For example. in version 3. Differences in the Project’s Downloaded Version The project’s downloaded version is different for the Emulator and the controller.minor version is the same as the last controller downloaded project version.7. and project elements. each separated by a period. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. the major version is 3 and the minor version is 7).minor. and EmulatorCount (third) number.EmulatorCount (for example. click Project Description. — The EmulatorCount value is incremented sequentially after either a Download All or a Download Changes to the Emulator. Version numbers are used with the project under development (current version). • The controller downloaded project version is the last version of the project file (.7. Version numbers include a major (first). and the EmulatorCount version is 12. The version is provided in the format major.0 .7. See View Project History Command on page 640. v4. the downloaded application (downloaded version).12. — The major. 2 View these properties in the Project Description dialog box.Working with Projects 33 Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents This procedure explains what version numbers are and how they can be viewed. • Procedure for Projects 1 On the Project menu. the major version is 3.minor (for example. minor (second). click Properties. Procedure for Documents 1 2 Expand the Application Workspace (see The Application Workspace on page 100). The version of the document is located at the end of the name. The version of the project (application) which was last downloaded to the controller or the Emulator. view the Name property. v4.v1. and right-click a document. if the document name is displayed as LightEmUp .9. 3 On the Summary tab. 3 Click OK to close the dialog box.0 .34 Chapter 1 Project Administration Property Current Version Downloaded Version Description The version of the project which is under development. On the shortcut menu that appears. The Document Properties dialog box appears. 4 Click OK to close the dialog box. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.26.26. For example. the version number is 1. Use the View Project History Command on page 640 to see the complete list of downloaded version changes. 9. default settings are used unless you specify different settings. You can change the default settings when you begin a new project or at any time during project development. v4. The settings only affect new elements. When you create new elements in a project. Topics include: • • • • • • Specifying Language Options on page 36 Specifying Annotation Options on page 37 Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values on page 39 Specifying Forced Points Options on page 40 Specifying Download Options on page 41 Specifying Emulator Options on page 42 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For example. annotation. and Emulator settings used when new project elements are created.Specifying Project Options 35 Specifying Project Options Project Options are settings that specify the language. which means that a new function is automatically created in FBD language unless you specify another language.0 . monitor. download. the Default Language property is set to Function Block Diagram. click Project Options. data types. function. v4. function blocks. Select the check box for each feature (programs.36 Chapter 1 Project Administration Specifying Language Options This procedure explains how to specify the language and element types used to create new programs. Enabled Features 3 Click OK to save the settings. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. and then click the Language tab. and multiple programs) that can be created in the project. 2 Specify these properties on the Language tab. and function blocks. The default is selected for all features.9. The default is Function Block Diagram. functions. or data type. Property Default Language Action Specify the type of programming language to use when creating a program. functions. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. function block.0 . Property Annotation on by Default Action Select the check box to have annotation boxes automatically added to variables used with a program.9. The default is cleared. and then click the Annotations tab. or function block. The default is Single. Specify the type of border to include with an annotation or comment. You can also specify text or macros to be included in annotations.0 .Specifying Project Options 37 Specifying Annotation Options Annotations can be used to display descriptive text about a constant. tagname. Select the check box to have the value of the variable displayed when the program or function block is executed. Monitor Value on by Default Alignment Border TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. Specify how to align the text in an annotation or comment. 2 Specify these properties on the Annotations tab. function. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. click Project Options. The default is cleared. or variable. The default is Left. including information specified in system and user-modifiable macros. This procedure explains how to specify whether annotations are automatically included when comments and variables are created and whether the value is shown when an application is monitored. Default Macros or Text 3 Click OK to save the settings. The program variable defaults are: Tag Refs: %PGM_TAGNAME Locals: %PGM_LOCAL The function and function block variable defaults are: Input: %FB_INPUT Output: %FB_OUTPUT Local: %FB_LOCAL I/O: %FB_IO See Using Macros with Annotations and Comments on page 206 for more information.38 Chapter 1 Project Administration Property Text Size Action Specify the point size for text used in the project. C (10 points).) Specify the default macro or text to be included with a program or function variable. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and D (10 points.0 . The default settings are: A (6 points). v4.9. B (8 points). False is white. Property General Monitor Colors Action Select the color for True and False for BOOL variables and wires. CEM Monitor Colors Select the color for True and False for cause.0 . Procedure 1 On the Project menu. This feature allows you to change the colors to meet an industry or corporate standard. effect. v4. The default for True is red.9.Specifying Project Options 39 Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values This procedure explains how to specify what colors are displayed for BOOL True and False values when the application is run on the controller or Emulator. click Project Options. 2 Specify these properties on the Monitor Colors tab. 3 Click OK to save the settings. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default for True is red. and intersection cells in a CEM (cause and effect matrix). False is green. and then click the Monitor Colors tab. click Project Options. clear the check box if you do not want to be asked. For more information about disabling or forcing points.9. or forcing points on the controller or Emulator. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. All check boxes are selected by default (you will be asked for a comment). v4.40 Chapter 1 Project Administration Specifying Forced Points Options This procedure explains how to specify if you want to be prompted to enter an optional comment when enabling. Procedure 1 On the Project menu.0 . 3 Click OK to save the settings. disabling. 2 Specify if you want to be asked to enter a comment when performing the following actions: • • • Enabling a point Disabling a point Forcing a point to a specific value Select the check box if you want to be asked. Comments appear in the Project History log. and then click the Forced Points tab. see Disabling Points on page 474 and Forcing Points on page 477. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. Because the tagnames table is used only for ease of OPC client configuration and is not needed during normal Tricon operation. regardless of their group assignments. non-hierarchical list. • Note For more information about the TCM’s embedded OPC server and configuring your OPC client to access Tricon tagnames and system variables.9. including a change to the sort order. the table is downloaded even if no changes have been made to the table. the table is downloaded only if there have been changes to the table since the last download. This sort order is useful for large projects with many tagnames. During a Download Changes operation. Sort the table by group to view tagnames in an hierarchical list. where tagnames are organized according to the groups they are assigned to. The sort order controls how the information is displayed in the OPC client. v4. organized in alphabetical order. • Sort the table alphabetically to view tagnames in a single.0 . If a model 4353 or 4354 TCM is configured and installed in the Tricon. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. This sort order is useful for small projects without a lot of tagnames. 3 Click OK to save the setting. your choice of sort order will not have any impact on TCM performance.Specifying Project Options 41 Specifying Download Options This procedure explains how to specify download options for the tagnames table downloaded to the TCM’s embedded OPC server (models 4353 and 4354 only). Select the sort order for the table: • • Sort by Tagname (alphabetical view) Sort by Group (hierarchical view) 2 The default is Sort by Tagname. click Project Options. • • During a Download All operation. Tagname information from this table is used to help you configure your third-party OPC client to monitor Tricon system variables and tagnames. and then click the Download tab. a table with information about the tagnames and system variables configured in the project is downloaded to the TCM’s embedded OPC server during a Download All or Download Changes operation. and then click the Emulator tab.9. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. Emulator project options are saved on a per-project basis. or the Emulator Help (available from the TriStation 1131 Help menu). Emulator project options should be set prior to starting the Emulator. see the Triconex Emulator User’s Guide. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . For more information about the Emulator. v4. and do not need to be reconfigured each time you start the Emulator. 2 Specify these properties on the Emulator tab. click Project Options. Options changed while the Emulator is running will not take effect until the Emulator is stopped and restarted.42 Chapter 1 Project Administration Specifying Emulator Options This procedure explains how to specify Emulator project options in TriStation 1131. You can change the default settings when you begin a new project or at any time during project development. and files generated by a download to the controller. but multiple Emulator instances must be terminated manually. more than one instance of the Emulator can be running at the same time.SOE) generated.535 seconds. Note: These files will look just like the . reconnect to the Emulator.BT2 file and/or .SOE file are generated in the same directory where the TriStation 1131 project is located. The default is Single. The default timeout value should be adequate for the majority of applications. you should not have to change this value. During a Download All or Download Changes operation on the Emulator. • Select the SOE check box if you want an SOE definition file (.Specifying Project Options 43 Property Number of Instances Action Select how many instances of the Emulator you want to be able to run at any one time. The default setting is for the files to not be generated.SOE files generated by TriStation 1131 when you download an application to the controller. You will not be able to distinguish between files generated by a download to the Emulator. Emulator File Generation Select the files you want generated each time you download the application to the Emulator. disconnect from the Emulator. so you can compare that timestamp to the date/time of the generated files. Note: In most cases. If this option is set to Single. If you want to be able to test your SOE configuration with the Emulator. • Select the BT2 check box if you want a backup project file (. You may want to make a note of the date and time each time you download the application to the Emulator. only one instance of the Emulator can be running at any one time.BT2) generated (not recommended).0 . If you receive a “download aborted” message when downloading an application to the Emulator. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. increase the Emulator timeout value. the . v4. If this option is set to Multiple. The default is 4 seconds. Single Emulator instances are terminated when TriStation 1131 disconnects from the Emulator. you must select this option. The valid range is from 0 to 65.BT2 and . and then try downloading again. Emulator Timeout Select the timeout value for the connection to the Emulator.9. If selected. the processing time required for applications with a very large number of variables (symbols) may exceed the default Emulator timeout value of 4 seconds. See the Triconex Emulator User’s Guide for more information about using Peer-to-Peer communication with the Emulator. If redundant communication modules are installed in a single logical slot. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 3 Click OK to apply your changes and save the settings.9. The Modbus configuration from the selected communication module will be used by the Emulator so that you can test your Modbus functionality using emulated nodes.0 . The default is NET 1. Note: If no CM modules are listed. Select the communication module you want to get Peer-to-Peer configuration information from and then select the network that the communication module you selected is connected to. you must select the physical communication module (LEFT or RIGHT) with the configuration you want to use. you must select the physical communication module (LEFT or RIGHT) with the configuration you want to use. Only one Peer-to-Peer configuration can be used by the Emulator. Note: If no CM modules are listed.44 Chapter 1 Project Administration Property Communication Modules (CMs) for Peer-to-Peer Action Optional. Communication Modules (CMs) for Modbus Optional. you have not configured any communication modules for Modbus communication in your project. The default is LEFT. The Peer-to-Peer configuration from the selected communication module will be used by the Emulator so that you can test your Peerto-Peer functionality using emulated nodes. Select the communication module you want to get Modbus configuration information from and then select the network that the CM you selected is connected to. The default is NET 1. Required only if you want to test Peer-to-Peer communication using the Emulator. Only one Modbus configuration can be used by the Emulator. See the Triconex Emulator User’s Guide for more information about using Modbus communication with the Emulator. Required only if you want to test Modbus communication using the Emulator. The default is LEFT. v4. If redundant communication modules are installed in a single logical slot. you have not configured any communication modules for Peer-to-Peer communication in your project. The settings you configure are saved for your user ID only.Specifying TriStation 1131 Options 45 Specifying TriStation 1131 Options TriStation 1131 options include properties that affect the TriStation 1131 interface.9.0 . the Wire Tool property can be specified for right-handed or left-handed use. Topics include: • • • • • Specifying Directory Locations on page 46 Specifying Drawing Colors on page 47 Specifying FBD Editor Options on page 48 Specifying LD Editor Options on page 49 Specifying CEM Editor Options on page 50 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. All the properties included in the Options dialog box have default settings that specify how features are initially configured. For example. v4. You can change these settings at any time during project development. The default is: • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.0\Projects Data Files Enter the path.9. Click OK to save the settings.0\Data Temporary Files Enter the path. library. and then click the Directories tab.9. 2 Specify these properties on the Directories tab.9.46 Chapter 1 Project Administration Specifying Directory Locations This procedure explains how to specify the locations for project. click TriStation 1131 Options.9. Note 3 TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive.0\Projects • Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. and report files.0\Temp • Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. v4.9. Property Project Files Action Enter the path.9. The default is: • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.0\Data • Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.0 . The default is: • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.0\Temp Use Defaults Click the Use Defaults button to return the settings to the default paths. Procedure 1 On the Tools menu. You should not enter directory paths that point to a location on your network. Click to change the colors of all items to the default colors. Property Drawing Item Change Colors Command Default Colors Command Action Select an item to be shown in a color. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. Procedure 1 On the Tools menu. v4. click TriStation 1131 Options. and then click the Drawing Colors tab. Click to display a color palette from which to choose a color for the selected drawing item. The default drawing colors are based on the Windows color scheme selected in Control Panel.0 . 3 Click OK to save the settings.Specifying TriStation 1131 Options 47 Specifying Drawing Colors This procedure explains how to specify the colors used for items in the programming editors. 2 Specify these properties on the Drawing Colors tab. v4. Enable EN/ENO Terminals on Functions by Default Left-Handed Wire Tool 3 Click OK to save the settings. Property Double Space Function (Block) Terminals by Default Action Select the check box to automatically have the spacing doubled between terminals (inputs and outputs) on the function block. click TriStation 1131 Options. 2 Specify these properties on the FBD Editor tab. You can also change the Double Space and EN/ENO properties for a specific function.9. Select the check box to automatically enable EN/ENO terminals on functions.48 Chapter 1 Project Administration Specifying FBD Editor Options This procedure explains how to specify Function Block Diagram (FBD) Editor settings that are used throughout the project unless changed on a specific FBD function. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select the check box to enable the wire tool for lefthanded use. The default is cleared. and then click the FBD Editor tab. The default is cleared. The default is cleared. Procedure 1 On the Tools menu.0 . which creates additional space for annotation. 2 Specify these properties on the LD Editor tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 On the Tools menu. Compiler Warning When Right Power Rail is Missing Left-Handed Link Tool 3 Click OK to save the settings. The default is cleared. Select the check box to display a compiler warning if the right (power) rail is missing from a Ladder Diagram function. Property Double Space Function (Block) Terminals by Default Action Select the check box to automatically have the spacing doubled between terminals (input and output parameters) on the function block. click TriStation 1131 Options. which adds space for annotation. Select the check box to enable the link tool for lefthanded use. v4. The default is cleared. and then click the LD Editor tab. You can also change the Double Space property for a specific function.Specifying TriStation 1131 Options 49 Specifying LD Editor Options This procedure explains how to specify Ladder Diagram (LD) editor settings that are used throughout the project unless changed on a specific LD function. The default is cleared.9.0 . you can modify these settings on a program-by-program basis. and then click the CEM Editor tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 3 Click OK to save the settings. The default is cleared. After a program is created. Property Cause Header Functions On by Default Effect Header Functions On by Default Intersection Functions On by Default Default Number of Cause Rows Default Number of Effect Columns Action Select the check box to automatically add input and function columns. v4. Enter the number of rows to include in a new matrix. 2 Specify these properties on the CEM Editor tab.0 . Procedure 1 On the Project menu. The default is 22.9. click TriStation 1131 Options. Enter the number of columns to include in a new matrix. Select the check box to automatically add function columns. Select the check box to automatically add output and function columns.50 Chapter 1 Project Administration Specifying CEM Editor Options This procedure explains how to set the options used as initial settings for all the CEM (cause and effect matrix) programs in a project. The default is 25. The default is cleared. The default is cleared. For more information about creating HTML Help.microsoft. If you don’t have administrator privileges. without having to leave TriStation 1131. WinHelp. please see the Microsoft® web site at www.chm) to the TriStation 1131 Help menu. Customized Help files allow users to reference specialized information related to application development. You are responsible for the creation of the Help files you want to add to the TriStation 1131 Help menu. in order to add or remove custom Help files.Adding or Removing Custom Help Files 51 Adding or Removing Custom Help Files TriStation 1131 allows you to add a maximum of 32 customized HTML Help files (. Some ways you can use this feature include: • • If you have added your own custom libraries to TriStation 1131. The Triconex Emulator Help file (TCXEMX. DotNet Help. this feature allows you to provide a customized Help file with that information. Invensys recommends not removing this Help file from the list.0 . see your network administrator for assistance. or other types of Help files cannot be added. Topics include: • • • Adding a Custom Help File on page 52 Viewing Custom Help Files on page 52 Removing a Custom Help File on page 53 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.9.com.chm) has already been added to the Help menu as a custom Help file. Note You must be logged into Windows as an administrator. If you have specific sets of instructions for creating a safety or control application in your organization. WebHelp. Help files must be in the compiled HTML Help format (. or a user with administrator privileges.chm). this feature allows you to provide customized Help for these libraries. • Custom Help Files TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.52 Chapter 1 Project Administration Adding a Custom Help File This procedure describes how to add a custom Help file to the TriStation 1131 Help menu.9.0 . v4. Click Add File. Procedure 1 On the Help menu. Help files must be in the compiled HTML Help format (. The Add or Remove Custom Help File dialog box appears. For example. it will appear in the Help menu as CUSTOM. you can view them from within TriStation 1131 by selecting them from the Help menu. 2 3 Click Browse to locate and select the Help file you want to add. The Help file is added to the TriStation 1131 Help menu. Viewing Custom Help Files Once you have added your custom Help file(s) to TriStation 1131. Note The file names of the custom Help files are displayed in the Help menu. The Help file opens in the HTML Help viewer window.chm).chm. click Options. On the Help menu. click the name of your custom Help file. if your custom Help file is Custom. Procedure 1 On the Help menu. click Options. Click Remove File(s). and will no longer appear in the TriStation 1131 Help menu.9.Adding or Removing Custom Help Files 53 Removing a Custom Help File This procedure describes how to remove a custom Help file from the TriStation 1131 Help menu.0 . The selected Help files are removed from the list of installed files. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The Add or Remove Custom Help File dialog box appears. 2 3 In the list of custom Help files. select the file(s) you want to remove. or a Tri-GP CM installed in your system. If you are trying to edit a user document created by another user. Multiple levels of access control help prevent unauthorized access to TriStation 1131. See Restricting Access to a Document on page 114. the Manager level (03) includes privileges for operations associated with managing a TriStation 1131 project. Each level of security includes default settings for the operation privileges allowed for that level. To ensure unauthorized users do not access the project. This is the default setting. and are unable to do so even when you have the correct user level and access privileges. If it is locked.9. from the highest level (01) to the lowest level (10). Note If a TriStation 1131 project was created by a user with restricted or administrator-level rights in Windows. Windows security file access rules apply to all TriStation 1131 project files. Your network or system administrator can assist with changing the access rights for the selected project file and/or file location. v4. check the document’s access property.x CM. 02. other users may be unable to access that project.54 Chapter 1 Project Administration Managing User Access This section explains how to provide user access to controller and TriStation 1131 operations. Choose the security setting that is right for your implementation: — Standard Security uses a simple user name / password scheme. Note If you have a Tricon Communication Module2 (TCM). Only users assigned to levels 01. For example. • The security setting defines the type of authentication used to identify users upon login. you must ask the user who created the document to change the access property. which do not have the access control list feature. Each new TriStation 1131 project is created with a default user name (MANAGER) and password (PASSWORD). you should immediately add at least one more level 01 user. or 03 can access the security controls for controller and TriStation 1131 operations. access to the controller via TriStation 1131 can also be managed via the optional access control list.0 . This ensures that if you forget the password for the default level 01 user. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Except models 4351 and 4352. a Trident v2. and not allow multiple users to access the project using the default level 01 user information. you should create a user account for each person who will be working with the project before application development begins. Once you have created a project. 2. • User security levels define what operations a user can perform while using TriStation 1131. — Enhanced Security adds another layer of protection against unauthorized access by requiring Windows domain user authentication.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434. Access is based on the security level assigned to the user. or change the security setting. you’ll still be able to log in as the secondary level 01 user. See Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386 or Controlling Access to the Trident 2. Access to a project can be further restricted by settings on documents and operating parameters. and have the ability to add or modify users. No other user authentication is required. Leaving your project file set to use Enhanced Security may prevent technical support personnel from being able to open the project file. a user name and password is required to open the TriStation 1131 project. If you change the security setting from Standard to Enhanced.0.9. you must do the following: • • • Make a copy of the project file. Note If you need to send a project file that uses Enhanced Security to Invensys Technical Support for troubleshooting purposes. the change is captured in the project history (see View Project History Command on page 640). make sure that at least one level 01 user has a valid Windows user name before closing the project. change the security setting to Standard. Failure to do so will prevent you from opening the project again and/or changing the security setting back to Standard. The security setting defines the type of authentication used to identify users upon login to a project: • Standard Security: When selected. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.7. this security setting is the same as the user name / password login used in previous versions. • Enhanced Security: When selected. Send the copy file (with Standard Security enabled) to Technical Support. If you used a version of TriStation 1131 previous to version 4. This is the default setting.0 . You must be a level 01 user to change the security setting. The user name for each TriStation 1131 user must be the same as the user’s Windows user name. You should choose the security setting you want to use before you begin creating user accounts. v4.Managing User Access 55 Topics include: • • • • • • • Changing the Security Setting on page 55 Managing Users on page 58 Adding and Modifying User Access on page 59 Recommended Rules for Passwords on page 60 Changing the Security Level for Privileges on page 61 Changing Security Level Names on page 63 Viewing User Access Logs on page 64 Changing the Security Setting TriStation 1131 uses one of two application-level security settings: Standard or Enhanced. In the copy file. Each time you change the security setting for a project. CAUTION Each TriStation 1131 project has its own security setting. Windows and TriStation 1131 user authentications are required to log in. and then click OK. select the setting you want to use: Standard Security or Enhanced Security.0 . 3 Click OK. Go to Managing Users on page 58 to edit users as needed. 5 Do one of the following: TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. you are not a level 01 user. click Security. this procedure is complete.56 Chapter 1 Project Administration This procedure describes how to change the security setting for a project. v4. enter your Windows user name and password. You must be a level 01 user to change the security setting. 4 When prompted. 2 On the Security Setting tab. go to the next step.9. If you upgraded the security setting from Standard to Enhanced. The Security dialog box appears. Note If both options are unavailable. and then do one of the following: • • If you downgraded the security setting from Enhanced to Standard. because it must be the same as the user’s Windows user name. and TriStation 1131 was able to successfully authenticate your Windows user name and password. See Recommended Rules for Passwords on page 60 for minimum requirements. the Add User dialog box appears so you can add yourself as a Windows user to the project user list. John Smith). Enter the user’s password. You cannot change the security level. If this is the first time you have upgraded the security setting from Standard to Enhanced. Enhanced Security requires at least one level 01 Windows user. Go to Managing Users on page 58 to edit users as needed. their job title or function). 7 Click OK to save your changes. You cannot change the user name. this procedure is complete. This is NOT the same as the user’s Windows password.0 . Enter or change the description for the user (for example. unique to the user’s TriStation 1131 account. v4. Go to the next step.9. Verify Password Security Level Enter the new password again for verification. and TriStation 1131 was able to successfully authenticate your Windows user name and password. Property Full Name Description User Name Password Action Enter or change the user’s full name (for example.Managing User Access 57 • If your Windows user name was previously added to the project user list. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • 6 Specify these properties in the Add User dialog box. You should select a different password. Using the Print All command. click Security. Command New Modify Action To create a new user. you can print a Project Users report. Note If Enhanced Security is enabled. you cannot delete the last level 01 Windows user. which lists all the users that have been added to the project’s user list. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. The default level 01 user (MANAGER) can be deleted only if another level 01 user has already been created. If Enhanced Security has ever been enabled (even if it is not the current security setting). and then click the Users tab. which includes creating. or 03 can access the Security dialog box and view user access settings.58 Chapter 1 Project Administration Managing Users This procedure explains how to manage users. select a user in the list. See Adding and Modifying User Access on page 59 for further instructions. To delete a user.9. To modify a user. and then click Modify. click New. 2 Perform one of these actions on the Users tab. Thus. modify. you cannot add. select a user in the list. modifying. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. and then click Delete. see Adding and Modifying User Access on page 59. Delete Note Unless you have level 01 access. if you have level 03 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For further instructions.0 . Only users assigned to security levels 01. 02. and deleting TriStation 1131 users. a quick way to prevent a user from accessing TriStation 1131 is to add their Windows user account to the Windows Local Security Policy “Deny access to this computer from the network” list. or delete users who have the same or higher security level as yourself. v4. Enter or change the description for the user. Note When Enhanced Security is enabled. the first time a newly-added user logs in. 02. modify. you can add.9. See Logging In for the First Time When Enhanced Security Is Enabled on page 28 for more information. or delete other level 01 users.Managing User Access 59 access. and then click Modify. they need to log in twice for authentication purposes. and then click the Users tab. 3 Click OK to save your changes. 2 Specify these properties in the Add or Modify User dialog box. v4. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. click Security. If you have level 02 access. modify.0 . you cannot add. If you have security level 01 access. • • To add a user. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property Full Name Description Action Enter or change the name for the user. or delete users with level 02 or 01 access. or delete users with level 03. Adding and Modifying User Access This procedure explains how to add or modify access properties for a TriStation 1131 user. To modify a user. you cannot add. click Add. modify. or 01 access. but you cannot delete yourself. click the user name. including domain information. If the user whose information you are modifying is the only level 01 Windows user. Include at least one letter. Recommended Rules for Passwords Invensys recommends configuring your Windows domain authentication settings to support the following minimum requirements for passwords. you cannot change the user name. / : . numeric. See Recommended Rules for Passwords on page 60 for minimum requirements. • If you are using Standard Security. Special characters include the following: ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + . To change this user’s level. You should select a different password.9.. Password Enter or change the logon password. < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~ • • • Include at least one number. the user name must be the same as the user’s Windows user name. • If Enhanced Security is enabled. Select the security level for this user. Level 01 is the highest. Include at least one lower-case letter AND one upper-case letter. v4. Verify Password Security Level Enter the new or changed password again to ensure the password is what you intended. as set forth in the NERC Cyber Security standards. spaces and special characters are not allowed. assign another Windows user to level 01. Enhanced Security requires at least one level 01 Windows user. • If you are using Enhanced Security. unique to the user’s TriStation 1131 account.0 . and then try changing this user’s level again. Note: If you change an existing user’s logon name. and special characters. Consist of a combination of alpha. . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.60 Chapter 1 Project Administration Property Logon Name Action Enter or change the name to be used to log on to the project. you cannot change the security level. this is not the same as the user’s Windows password. Passwords should: • • Be a minimum of six (6) characters. or re-enter the user’s existing password. level 10 is the lowest. user names can have a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters. you will also need to enter a new password for the user. 3 Click OK to save your changes. because it must be the same as the user’s Windows user name. if necessary. If you are using Enhanced Security. which also includes the privileges for lower levels.0 . even if a user has the correct security level privileges to perform a Download All command. If Enhanced Security is enabled. users with level 01. See your network administrator for more information about how to enforce requirements for Windows passwords. Only users with level 01. from the highest level (01). which lists the security levels currently assigned to each operation. all TriStation 1131 passwords are protected from unauthorized read or copy access because they are stored and protected by Windows security mechanisms.9. Note When Enhanced Security is enabled. 02. This meets the NERC Cyber Security standards regarding password security.Managing User Access 61 • • Include at least one special character. each operation is assigned a security level.x or Tri-GP. Be changed at least annually. Each security level includes a set of privileges for that level. click Security. For example. By default. Changing the Security Level for Privileges This procedure explains how to change the security level required for privileges to controller and TriStation 1131 operations.nerc. if the operation is set to level 04. As a result. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. For example. so it is up to you to ensure user passwords meet these requirements. Invensys recommends you check the latest NERC Cyber Security standards (available at www. Using the Print All command. Except TCM models 4351 and 4352. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Windows passwords will be used. these password rules should be enforced at the Windows domain / Active Directory level. this level of password protection is not provided.com) for all the latest applicable password requirements. However. access to the controller via the TriStation protocol can also be managed via the optional access control list3. you can print a Project Security Levels report. v4. 02. and then click the Privileges tab. These rules will NOT be validated by TriStation 1131 when you enter or change the user’s password. Procedure 1 On the Project menu.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434. they will be unable to perform the Download All command. see Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386 or Controlling Access to the Trident 2. 3. or more frequently based on risk. Note If a TCM is installed in the Tricon. or a CM is installed in the Trident v2. and 03 privileges also have access to the operation. when Standard Security setting is enabled. For more information. if they do not have Read/Write TriStation access through the TCM or CM. to the lowest level (10). which do not have the access control list feature. or 03 access can change security level privileges. Property Operation Type Operations Action Select Controller Operations or TriStation 1131 Operations.62 Chapter 1 Project Administration 2 Specify these properties on the Privileges tab. Click the operation. v4. if you are a level 03 user. depending on the operations you want to specify. For example. • Press Ctrl and click to select multiple non-contiguous items. • Press Shift and click to select multiple contiguous items. Because they cannot access the Privileges tab. you cannot remove privileges from your own security level.9. users with security levels 04–10 cannot perform the following tasks: Security: Add/modify users. and then select the check box for the level of security to be assigned to the operation. Security: Change level privileges. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Security: Change level descriptions. 3 Note Click OK to save your changes.0 . you cannot remove privileges from security level 03. Additionally. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. click Security. 02. Changing the name does not affect the security level assignments.Managing User Access 63 Changing Security Level Names This procedure explains how to change the names associated with security levels. and then click the Level Names tab. 2 Enter the name to associate with each security level.9. If you change a name on this tab. v4.0 . The default names are as follows: Level 01 02 03 04 05 Name Corporate Manager Site Manager Project Manager Project Engineer Project Programmer Level 06 07 08 09 10 Name Maintenance Manager Maintenance Engineer Operations Manager Operator Level 10 3 Click OK to save your changes. Only users with level 01. or 03 access can change security level names. it is reflected on the other security tabs. TriStation 1131 keeps a log of all user login attempts. These access logs are required for compliance with NERC Cyber Security standards. Topics in this section include: • • • • Viewing the User Access Log In Windows Event Viewer on page 64 Saving the User Access Log to a File on page 65 Changing Event Logging Options on page 66 Clearing the User Access Log on page 67 Viewing the User Access Log In Windows Event Viewer This procedure describes how to view TriStation 1131 user access information in the Windows System Events Log using the Windows Event Viewer.64 Chapter 1 Project Administration Viewing User Access Logs When Enhanced Security is enabled. Procedure 1 2 3 On the Start menu.0 . TriStation 1131 uses the Windows System Events Log to store the following information about user login and logoff attempts: • • • • • Successful login using Windows user name and password Login failure due to an incorrect Windows user name and/or password Login attempt cancelled by the user Login failure due to the user forgetting to enter their Windows user name and/or password (this is referred to as an “incorrect parameter” error) Successful logoff (when the user closes the TriStation 1131 project) You can view this log to determine if an unauthorized user is attempting to log in to TriStation 1131 projects.com/kb/842209). v4.microsoft. click Application. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. you will be unable to view the Windows System Events Log. see Microsoft Knowledge Base Article 842209 (http://support. click Control Panel. Note For more information about the Enhanced Security option. The Windows Event Viewer opens. and then double-click Administrative Tools.9. In the console tree. Note If you are logged into Windows using a “Guest” account. You can also use this log as a troubleshooting tool when helping a user who is having login problems. For more information. You must be logged on to Windows as an administrator to perform this procedure. Event information appears in the details pane. see Changing the Security Setting on page 55. whether they are successful or not. Double-click the Event Viewer icon. the sort order is not retained when logs are saved. click the Source column header to sort the events by application. double-click the event. In File name. the entire log is saved. Procedure 1 2 3 In the Windows Event Viewer. v4. regardless of filtering options. click Save Log File As. Saving the User Access Log to a File This procedure describes how to save the user access event information to a file. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Also. When you save a log file. display the event log with the user access information that you want to save to a file. On the Action menu.0 . To view detailed information about a specific event. Look for TriStation 1131 as the source type. You cannot save a log file with just the events related to TriStation 1131.9. You must be logged on to Windows as an administrator to perform this procedure. enter a name for the archived log file.Managing User Access 65 4 5 6 In the details pane. such as word processing or spreadsheet programs.txt) or comma-delimited (. Invensys recommends that you change this setting to ensure that user login event information is not lost.0 . Procedure 1 2 3 On the Start menu. you can reopen it in Event Viewer. select a file format. and then double-click Administrative Tools.evt) retain the binary data for each event recorded. Logs saved as event log files (. 5 Click OK to save your changes. click Control Panel. The default logging policy is that if a log is full. In the console tree.csv) format. enter the desired value (in KB) in the Maximum log size field Select Do not overwrite events (clear log file manually). This procedure describes how to change event logging options using the Windows Event Viewer. Double-click the Event Viewer icon. right-click Application. Logs saved in text or comma-delimited format do not retain the binary data. The Application Properties dialog box appears. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. 4 Do one or both of the following: • • To increase the maximum size of the event log file. and then click Save. you can reopen the log in other programs.66 Chapter 1 Project Administration 4 In Save as type. • • If you archive a log in log-file format. Changing Event Logging Options Using the Windows Event Viewer. The Windows Event Viewer opens. the oldest events are deleted to make room for new events. If you archive a log in text (. You must be logged on to Windows as an administrator to perform this procedure.9. you can set the maximum size of the log and specify whether events are overwritten or stored for a certain period of time. Note Clearing the log file will clear ALL application event information.0 . Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 On the Start menu. not just events related to TriStation 1131. and click Save. This procedure describes how to clear the event log file so that you can continue collecting user login event information. and then double-click Administrative Tools. right-click Application. In the console tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Invensys highly recommends saving the file prior to clearing it. and then select Clear all events. You must manually clear all events from the event log file before new entries can be added. The file is saved to your selected location. click Control Panel. you will see the following error message in TriStation 1131: The event log file is full. The Windows Event Viewer opens. and the current log file is cleared.9. Double-click the Event Viewer icon. v4. When prompted to save the log before clearing it. You must be logged on to Windows as an administrator to perform this procedure.Managing User Access 67 Clearing the User Access Log When the Windows System Events Log reaches its maximum size. Select the location where you want to save the file to. click Yes. Note Libraries created in TriStation 1131 v4.0 and later can be imported to projects developed in TriStation 1131 v4. and Tri-GP controllers TR1LIB and TX1LIB: Libraries for Tricon controllers TRDLIB: Library for Trident and Tri-GP controllers ALARMS: Library for process alarms The standard libraries can be found in the default Data directory: • • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. and how to manage libraries that can include TriStation 1131 and user-created project elements. 1131 4. available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site. v4. Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation For more information about the libraries automatically included with a TriStation 1131 project.x. and data types) that can be used in a project. functions.9.0 . Trident. see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference. These standard libraries are automatically included with TriStation 1131: • • • • • TCXLIB: Triconex library for Tricon.0\Data. Trident. Information about the version numbers of libraries included with each TriStation 1131 release can be found in the Product Release Notice for TriStation 1131 v4.68 Chapter 1 Project Administration Working with Libraries Libraries are collections of project elements (programs. This section describes how to create a library that can be added to other projects.0.9.0\Data.9. Topics include: • • • • • • • Creating a Library of Project Elements on page 69 Managing Libraries on page 73 Adding a Library on page 74 Updating a Library on page 75 Deleting a Library on page 76 Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77 Verifying a Library Version on page 79 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and Tri-GP controllers STDLIB: Industry-standard library for Tricon.9. and then click Create Library. and skip to step 5. v4. The library specification (.lsp) and export library (. Procedure 1 2 Open the TriStation 1131 project that contains the elements you want to copy.lt2) files are created in the imported libraries directory. To identify or change this library.0 .9.Working with Libraries 69 Creating a Library of Project Elements This procedure explains how to create a library of project elements (programs. function blocks.0\Data.9. click Use Existing Library Specification. 3 Do either of these: • • To create a new library. click Create New Library Specification. click Next. and then click Next. To add elements to an existing library.9. see Specifying Directory Locations on page 46. functions. Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. Expand the Application tree.0\Data. and data types) that can be imported to another TriStation 1131 project. right-click User Documents. The default location is: • • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 70 Chapter 1 Project Administration 4 Navigate to the library directory. and then click the angle brackets ( >> ) to move the element to the right side. click Next. and click the top and bottom documents. and click each document. To select all the documents. click the document that you want to include. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 5 In the list on the left. press Ctrl and Shift. v4. To select several documents at the same time. 6 When you are finished selecting the elements to be included in the library. and click the library file you want to add elements to.9. press Ctrl.0 . You can also specify whether the source code can be viewed or restricted from other users. browse to select the path where you want to save the new library files.9. v4.0 .Working with Libraries 71 7 Add information about the library. If you want to save the library to a path other than the default directory. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. including a name. description. 8 Click Next to continue. and major and minor version number. click Save the specification and create the Library.72 Chapter 1 Project Administration 9 Do either of these: • To save the files as a library. If you create a library. a library.lt2 file are created (where library is the name you selected in step 7).lsp file and a library. If you save just the specification. • 10 Click Finish. but not create the library. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. but are not finished with the documents in the project.lsp file is created. You can open this file and create the library file based on the specifications at a later time. click Just save the specification. v4. a library.9. You might want to do this if you are planning to create a project library. To save the specification.0 . You can also add libraries of project elements that were created in other TriStation 1131 projects. or delete) to an existing library. update.0 . Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. For further instructions. Allow Partial Changes to Libraries TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. as well as a report listing all the currently installed libraries and their version numbers (Shared Libraries). see Updating a Library on page 75. Click to delete an existing library. see Adding a Library on page 74. see Deleting a Library on page 76. Click to update an existing library. For more information. For further instructions. Note Using the Print All command. see Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. The default is cleared. 2 Perform one of these actions in the Manage dialog box. right-click Library Documents. This allows you to make changes to selected elements in a library without having to add. update.Working with Libraries 73 Managing Libraries This procedure explains how to manage libraries. function blocks. Select this check box to allow partial changes (add. see Verifying a Library Version on page 79. or delete the entire library. For further instructions. Click to verify the most current version of the selected library is loaded. and data types that can be copied and sometimes modified for a project. and click Manage. For further instructions. Command Add Update Delete Verify Version Command Action Click to add a new library. v4. TriStation 1131 automatically includes IEC libraries with functions.9. you can print reports listing all the functions and function blocks included in each library (Library Documents: Report). this problem will not occur in a safety program if you use the flags properly. when the library is imported into TriStation 1131 v4.74 Chapter 1 Project Administration Adding a Library This procedure explains how to add libraries to a TriStation 1131 project. you must change the project state to Download All in order to add the library. and you may continue with the library import process. Because VAR_IN_OUT is not allowed in a program with the “safety” flag set. Click Yes on the Query screen. Click the library to add.1.3 or earlier was used to compile the function block and then export the library. giving you the option to cancel the library import process. regardless of the version of TriStation 1131 used to compile and export the library.x a trap will occur when the function block is used in a program with the “control” flag set.x. If TriStation 1131 v4. rightclick Library Documents.9. browse to select the path where the library you want to add is located. Note When the project is in the Download Changes state. TriStation 1131 checks your library file for the presence of function blocks using a Boolean VAR_IN_OUT parameter. A warning message appears if at least one such function block is detected. and then click OK. and is displayed in the list. If any of the elements in the library being added are incompatible with elements that have already been downloaded to the controller. This allows you to update libraries provided by Invensys. • Note TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Before completing the library import. If you want to add new elements to an existing library.0 or later was used to compile the function block and export the library.0 . • If TriStation 1131 v3. a library can be added only if it does not impact function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller. click Manage. If the library you want to add is located in a path other than the default directory. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. the library is fully compatible with TriStation 1131 v4. v4. and then click Add. and add libraries of project elements from other TriStation 1131 projects. see Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77. 2 3 4 If Your Library Has a Function Block with a VAR_IN_OUT Parameter During the library import process. The library is added to the project. you should contact your library vendor for information about the version of TriStation 1131 that was used to compile and export the library. Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. See Product Alert Notice #10. for more information. You can then update the library or cancel the operation. a library can be updated only if it does not change function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller. including detailed instructions for obtaining and using the Project Analysis Utility. v4. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree.89 or later 1. TriStation 1131 compares the library in the project with the most current installed library and displays a message indicating the versions of each. see Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77. you can prevent a trap from occurring in your application by substituting a VAR_INPUT and VAR_OUTPUT for each VAR_IN_OUT parameter in the affected function block(s). or TX1LIB libraries: • If the project is in the Download Changes state. the library can only be updated if the project is in the Download All state. and you choose to continue importing the library. once you have imported the library and built the project.Working with Libraries 75 If TriStation 1131 v3.3 or earlier was used to compile and export the library.9. TR1LIB. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Please note the following regarding updating the TRDLIB. and not the entire library. When the project is in the Download Changes state.0\Data. and then click Manage.0 .9. If any of the elements in the library being updated have already been downloaded to the controller.113 or later 1.62 or later • If the library version is earlier than those listed above.exe) to verify that you have removed all VAR_IN_OUT parameters from the affected function blocks. In this case.1. you may also want to use the TriStation 1131 Project Analysis utility (TS2Analysis. When you request an update. Libraries can be updated only if they are located in the default Data directory: • • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. Updating a Library This procedure explains how to update TriStation 1131 libraries for your project. you must change the project state to Download All in order to update the library. right-click Library Documents.9.0\Data. available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site. these libraries can only be updated if the library version is equal to or later than the version listed in the following table: Library TRDLIB TR1LIB TX1LIB Version for Update in DLC State 1. To update only selected elements in an existing library. Clear the Allow partial changes to libraries check box. 4 When prompted. Click No to cancel. Deleting a Library This procedure explains how to delete a library from a TriStation 1131 project. Select the library to be deleted. click Yes to confirm deletion of the library. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Application tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and then click Update. right-click Library Documents. 4 Click Yes to continue the update process. and then click Delete. you must change the project state to Download All in order to delete the library. a library can be deleted only if it does not contain function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller. Click No to cancel. and then click Manage.76 Chapter 1 Project Administration 2 3 Clear the Allow partial changes to libraries check box.9.0 . but do not want to delete the entire library. If any of the elements in the library being deleted have already been downloaded to the controller. see Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77. Select the library to be updated. v4. Note When the project is in the Download Changes state. If you want to delete selected elements from a library. v4.0\Data. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x or v4. Select the Allow partial changes to libraries check box. and chose to not update the TCXLIB library during project conversion (see Converting Existing Projects to Version 4. Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9. Note If you upgraded a project from TriStation 1131 v4.9. All partial changes must be compatible with the other elements in the library.9.0\Data. Partial library changes are defined as: • • • Adding individual elements to an existing library.2. right-click Library Documents.1. you cannot delete an element if it has already been downloaded to a controller or if it is referenced anywhere in your project.9.x. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. You cannot make partial changes to the following standard Triconex libraries: • • • • STDLIB TX1LIB TR1LIB TRDLIB If the project is in the Download Changes state. Updating individual elements in an existing library. and then click Manage. Libraries can be updated only if they are located in the default Data directory: • • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. This maintains your project in the Download Changes state. Deleting individual elements from an existing library. However.Working with Libraries 77 Making Partial Changes to a Library This procedure explains how to make changes to selected elements in an existing TriStation 1131 library.0 on page 11).0 . you can update the library after project conversion is complete by making partial changes to the library. You must change the project state to Download All to update elements that have already been downloaded. any TCXLIB functions that have already been downloaded to the controller will not be updated while in the Download Changes state. and click the top and bottom elements. 5 6 Click the angle brackets ( >> ) to move the selected element(s) to the right side. To select several elements at the same time. click Delete.9. and then drag your pointer over the other elements you want to select. You can also click an element. v4. press Ctrl. updated in. press Ctrl and Shift. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. To select all the elements. or delete. as long as they are compatible with other elements in the project. are not eligible for inclusion in the partial change operation. The selected elements are added to. However.0 . and click each element. To remove elements from the library.78 Chapter 1 Project Administration 3 Select the library you want to make changes to. or have been used somewhere in the project. and then do one of the following: • • To add new elements to the library or update existing elements in the library. click OK. elements that have already been downloaded to the controller. all elements are eligible. Note Only elements that are eligible to be included as part of the partial change operation are displayed in the Available Library Elements list. When you are finished selecting the elements to be included in the partial change operation. click Update. update. The Select Elements for Partial Library Change dialog box appears. or deleted from the library. 4 In the list on the left. when the project is in the Download Changes state. When the project is in the Download All state. click the element(s) that you want to add. see Specifying Directory Locations on page 46. For more information about the default directory. Note Only libraries that are located in the default library directory can be verified. version. identifying the library. right-click Library Documents.0 . A message appears. 3 Click OK to close the message box. v4. and then click Verify Version. Click the library to be verified. and whether the project library is the same as the installed library. an error message will appear. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Working with Libraries 79 Verifying a Library Version This procedure explains how to determine the version of TriStation 1131 libraries used in your project. stating that the library is unregistered. If a library is not located in the default directory. and then click Manage. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree.9. Procedure 1 2 Open the Project Workspace (see The Project Workspace on page 20). which is installed with the TriStation 1131 software.80 Chapter 1 Project Administration Generating Reports This section describes how to view and print standard TriStation 1131 reports. The report appears in the report viewer window. Viewing and Printing a Report This procedure explains how to view and print a report. and right-click the Default Reports or User Reports folder. This copies project information to a database used for generating reports. which can be saved to disk or sent to an e-mail address. Topics include: • • • • • Updating the Report Database on page 80 Viewing and Printing a Report on page 80 Adding Custom Reports to a Project on page 82 Exporting Reports on page 82 Report Database Information on page 83 Updating the Report Database This procedure explains how to update the report database. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and after installing or updating the TriStation 1131 software. which can be purchased separately. v4.9. Click Update Reports Database. You can also export reports to a variety of formats. The status of the updated operation can be viewed in the status bar at the bottom of the TriStation 1131 window.0 . Procedure 1 Open the Project Workspace and then double-click a report. You should update the report database after making changes to a project. Before you view a report. Custom reports must be created using the SAP® Crystal Reports® software. you should update the report database if changes have been made to the project or if the report database was not updated after installing the TriStation 1131 software. Standard reports are displayed through the Crystal Reports viewer. Click to search for text in the report. and then click Refresh to have the updated data displayed in the report.0 . Size of view Search Text Command TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Type or select a percentage to change the size of the report view. For further instructions. update the report database. which re-loads project data to the report. Click to refresh the display. 2 Perform any of the following tasks in the report viewer.Generating Reports 81 Note If the report database was not updated after the TriStation 1131 software was installed. see Exporting Reports on page 82. a “File Not Found” message will appear. Command Print Command Export Report Command Refresh Command Action Click to print the report being viewed.9. If project information has changed. v4. Click to export the report data to a file. Update the reports database (see Updating the Report Database on page 80) and then try viewing the report again. Select the destination as either Disk file or Microsoft Mail. 3 Specify these properties in the Export dialog box. 4 Click OK to continue. Exporting Reports This procedure explains how to export report data in TriStation 1131. such as the characters to use to separate and delimit a file. Procedure 1 2 In the Crystal Reports software. click the Export Report button. If the report is added while the project is open. The report appears in the report viewer window.rpt file in the Data Files directory. you must close and re-open the project to view the report in the list. this software must be purchased separately. Only reports generated in the Crystal Reports software can be used in TriStation 1131. Procedure 1 2 Open the Project Workspace and then double-click the report you want to export. Put the . see Specifying Directory Locations on page 46. and can save the exported data to a disk or send it to someone via Microsoft Mail. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property Export Format Export Destination Action Select the file format.82 Chapter 1 Project Administration Adding Custom Reports to a Project This procedure explains how to add a custom report created in the Crystal Reports software to a TriStation 1131 project.0 . The next time you open the project. For more information on directory locations. may be requested. The default is PDF. the report will be included in the User Reports list.rpt. You can export reports to a variety of file formats. create a report and save it in a file with the extension . On the report viewer toolbar.9. Depending on the format. v4. additional information. The default is Disk. Generating Reports 83 Report Database Information This section provides information on the dBASE IV relational databases that are used when the Crystal Report Engine generates a report in TriStation 1131.dbf) on page 89 Project: Audit History (PRHIST.dbf) on page 86 Configuration: Memory Allocation (TRMALLOC.dbf) on page 87 Project: Information (PRINFO.dbf) on page 87 Security: Operations (SECOPRS.dbf) on page 86 Configuration: SOE Block Definition (TRSOEBLK.dbf) on page 85 Configuration: Implementation (TRIMPPAR. After a project is opened. the databases are automatically updated with information from the project when you print the first report.dbf) on page 84 Configuration: Tagnames (TRGLBVAR.dbf) on page 86 Configuration: SOE Block Variables (TRSOEVAR.dbf) on page 84 Configuration: Program (TRPRGINS.dbf) on page 87 Security: Users (SECUSERS. you can create custom reports that can be used in TriStation 1131.9. You must purchase the Crystal Reports software in order to create custom reports.dbf) on page 84 Configuration: Instance Variable Connections (TRINSVAR.dbf) on page 88 Project: POU Variables (PRPOUVAR.dbf) on page 84 System Definition: Module Types (TRHWDMOD. Databases include: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • System Definition: Chassis Types (TRHWDCHS. v4.dbf) on page 85 Configuration: Operating Parameters (TRSYSOPS.dbf) on page 90 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. You can also update the databases by right-clicking the Default Reports or User Reports folder and clicking Update Reports Database.dbf) on page 88 Project: Elements (PRELEMS.dbf) on page 89 Project: POU Cross-Reference (PRPOUXRF.dbf) on page 86 Configuration: Module Configuration (TRMODCFG. In addition to the standard reports.0 .dbf) on page 88 Project: Shared Libraries (PRLIBS.dbf) on page 87 Security: Levels (SECLVLS. dbf) Field Type Number String Description Chassis type numerical identifier Chassis description The TRHWDMOD file contains information about the modules used in the system. otherwise blank TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.dbf) Field Type Number String String Description Triconex module identifier Module description Module marketing model number The TRPRGINS file contains information about the programs in the project. Table 5 Field Name INSTNAME (key) VARPATH PROGNAME VARNAME TAGNAME VAROUTPUT Configuration: Instance Variable Connections (TRINSVAR.84 Chapter 1 Project Administration The TRHWDCHS file contains information about the chassis types used in the system. Program variable path Program name Program variable name.dbf) Field Type String Number Description Program name Execution sequence number The TRINSVAR file contains information about the variable connections in the program. Table 3 Field Name MODTYPE (key) MODDESC MODMODEL System Definition: Module Types (TRHWDMOD. This is the same as the tagname. v4. Table 2 Field Name CHASTYPE (key) CHASDESC System Definition: Chassis Types (TRHWDCHS.9. This is the same as the program name.dbf) Field Type String String String String String Strings Description Program execution name. Table 4 Field Name PROGNAME SEQUENCE Configuration: Program (TRPRGINS.0 . Tagname W if written by instance. Table 6 Field Name TAGNAME (key) GROUP1 GROUP2 DESCRIP LOCATION MODBUS DATATYP DATACLASS TYPECLASS APPLICATN SHARED RETENTIVE INITVALUE DECPL MINSPAN MAXSPAN SYSTEMTAG MULTIWRIT Configuration: Tagnames (TRGLBVAR.Generating Reports 85 The TRGLBVAR file contains information about the tagnames (global variables) in the project. Data class: memory. v4. REAL. DINT. Point memory address.9. input.dbf) Field Type String String String String String String String String String String String Boolean String Number Number Number Boolean Boolean Description Tagname Group 1 name Group 2 name Tagname description Tagname location (same format as in configuration) Modbus alias number Data type: BOOL.dbf) Field Type String Number String Number Boolean Boolean Boolean Boolean Boolean Description Configuration version number NCM node number (switch setting) Network IP alias name Scan rate (in milliseconds) Password required for download Tricon Keyswitch STOP disabled Disable Modbus writes to outputs Disable remote changes Permit disabling points TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and so on.0 . Table 7 Field Name CNFGVERS NETNODE NETALIAS SCANRATE PSWDREQD DSBLSTOP DSBLMBWR DSBLRCHG DSBLPNTS Configuration: Operating Parameters (TRSYSOPS. Tagname application type (safety or control) Tagname shared for read state (Yes or No) Retain value indicator Initial value of tagname Decimal places for REAL tagname Lower limit for REAL number in Engineering Units Upper limit for REAL number in Engineering Units Is a system variable Multiple writes enabled The TRSYSOPS file contains information about the operating parameter settings in the project. or output. 86 Chapter 1 Project Administration The TRIMPPAR file contains information about the implementation settings (scan rate. Table 9 Field Name SOEBLKNUM (key) SOEBLKTTL SOEBUFSIZ SOEBLKTYP Configuration: SOE Block Definition (TRSOEBLK.0 .dbf) Field Type Number String Number String Description SOE block number SOE block title Event buffer size SOE block type The TRSOEVAR file contains information about the SOE tagnames used in the project.dbf) Field Type Number String String Description Parameter ID number Parameter name Parameter description The TRSOEBLK file contains information about the SOE block definitions in the project.dbf) Field Type Number Number Number Number Description Chassis number (1-n) Chassis type numerical identifier Module type numerical identifier Module type numerical identifier TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Peer-toPeer sends/receives) in the project. Table 10 Field Name SOEBLKNUM (key) TAGNAME TRUENAME FALSENAME TRUECLR FALSECLR Configuration: SOE Block Variables (TRSOEVAR. Table 11 Field Name CHASNUM (key) CHASTYPE SLOTNUM MODTYPE Configuration: Module Configuration (TRMODCFG.9.dbf) Field Type Number String String Strings String String Description SOE block number Tagname Name of TRUE state Name of FALSE state Color of TRUE state Color of FALSE state The TRMODCFG file contains information about the module configuration used in the project. Table 8 Field Name PARKEY (key) PARNAME PARDESC Configuration: Implementation (TRIMPPAR. v4. dbf) Field Type String String Number Description Operation category name User description Minimum privilege level required TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.dbf) Field Type String Number Number Number Number Description Brief (coded) description of memory section Maximum number of points for this type Allocated points of this type Forecasted points of this type after the next download Currently used points of this type The SECUSERS file contains information about the users authorized access to the project.Generating Reports 87 The TRMALLOC file contains information about how memory is allocated. Table 12 Field Name DATADESC MAXPTS ALLOCPTS FCASTPNTS CURRPTS Configuration: Memory Allocation (TRMALLOC.0 . Table 14 Field Name PRIVLEVEL (key) DESCRIP Security: Levels (SECLVLS. Table 15 Field Name CATEGORY DESCRIP PRIVLEVEL Security: Operations (SECOPRS. v4. Table 13 Field Name LOGINNAME (key) USERNAME DESCRIP PRIVLEVEL Security: Users (SECUSERS.9.dbf) Field Type String String String Number Description User’s log in name User’s full name User description User’s privilege level The SECLVLS file contains information about the user’s access (privilege) level in the project.dbf) Field Type Number String Description User’s privilege level User description The SECOPRS file contains information about the level of access required to use TriStation 1131 and controller operations. 0 . and so on. functions.9.88 Chapter 1 Project Administration The PRINFO file contains information that is used when reports are printed. Ladder Diagram. Table 18 Field Name ELEMNAME (key) VERSION CATEGORY DESCRIP ELEMTYPE LANGUAGE OWNER USERDEFINE LIBRARY LIBNAME LOCKED Project: Elements (PRELEMS. function block. Element owner name User defined indicator Library indicator Library name Element locked indicator TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.dbf) Field Type String String String String String String Date String Description Project name Project description Project version number Company information 1 Company information 2 Company information 3 Date the report database was updated Time the report database was updated The PRLIBS file contains information about the libraries included in the project. and data types) in the project. function blocks.dbf) Field Type String String String String String String String Boolean Boolean 8 characters Boolean Description Element name Element version number Element category Element description Element type: function.dbf) Field Type String String String Description Library name Library description Library version number The PRELEMS file contains information about the elements (programs. and so on. v4. Table 16 Field Name PRJNAME DESCRIP VERSION COINFO1 COINFO2 COINFO3 DBDATE DBTIME Project: Information (PRINFO. Language type: Function Block Diagram. Table 17 Field Name LIBNAME (key) DESCRIP VERSION Project: Shared Libraries (PRLIBS. dbf) Field Type String Number String Description Program variable path which indicates where the variable is used Record sequence number 0–n Sheet coordinates of variable on SHTNUM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.dbf) (continued) Field Type Boolean String Strings String String Date String String Date String String String String Description Element read-only indicator Drawing title Drawing number Drawing revision Created by user name Created date Created time Modified by user name Modified date Modified time Approved by name Approved date Element application type (safety or control) READONLY DRWGTITLE DRWGNUM DRWGREV DRWGCBY DRWGCDATE DRWGCTIME DRWGMBY DRWGMDATE DRWGMTIME DRWGAB DRWGADT APPLICATN The PRPOUVAR file contains information about the POUs (program organizational units). and function blocks. Table 19 Field Name VARPATH POUNAME (key) VARNAME ((key) DESCRIP DATATYPE DATACLASS INITVALUE Project: POU Variables (PRPOUVAR.0 . Table 20 Field Name VARPATH (key) SEQNO SHTCOORD Project: POU Cross-Reference (PRPOUXRF. DINT. output. REAL.9.dbf) Field Type String String String String String String String Description POU variable path POU name POU variable name Element description Data type: BOOL. input. which include programs. functions. and so on. v4. and so on.Generating Reports 89 Table 18 Field Name Project: Elements (PRELEMS. Initial value of the POU variable The PRPOUXRF file contains information about where variables are located in the project. Data class: local. dbf) Field Type String String String String Date String String Description ID of the event User’s full name Name of element that was changed Comment on change Date of change Time of change Action performed (including version number) TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Table 21 Field Name EVENTID USERNAME ELEMNAME COMMENT DATE TIME ACTION Project: Audit History (PRHIST. v4.0 .9.90 Chapter 1 Project Administration The PRHIST file contains information about the project history. organized by instance. this report can be very large (more than 150 pages). Prints a logic sheet with the graphical representation of each function block in the project. project history. libraries. version and more for each function and function block. and more. Topics in this section include: • • • Printable Project Documents on page 91 Printing Individual Documents on page 94 Printing Multiple Documents on page 94 Printable Project Documents The following types of project documents and/or information can be printed: Table 22 Item Function Printable Project Documents Description Prints a logic sheet with the graphical representation of each function in the project. I/O modules) currently configured in the project. functions. Depending on the libraries being used. Function Blocks Hardware Module Configuration Instance Variable Connections Library Documents: Functions Library Documents: Report TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. Prints the structured text for each function in the libraries used by the project. You have the ability to select which documents you want to print. category. CMs. including programs. Includes the name. Each function block is printed on a separate sheet. Prints a report listing the functions and function blocks in each of the libraries used by the project. The Print All command allows you to print multiple documents at one time. organized by library. Prints a report listing the controller hardware (MPs. module configurations. description.0 .Printing Project Documents 91 Printing Project Documents This section describes how to print project documents.9. Each function is printed on a separate sheet. Prints a report listing the variables used in your project. Depending on the program type. TCM and EPI module configuration details are included. Includes the Program Execution List. but the SDO module is not. library. Includes each variable’s data type. and scan time settings. Each program is printed on a separate sheet. or function block diagram sheet will be printed. as it does not require configuration in TriStation 1131. or function blocks. Prints a report listing all the variables defined in each program in the project. SOE block configuration. Organized by program name. Prints a report listing all the variables currently being used in the project. etc). See Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249 or Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters on page 315 for details about these settings. initial value. with a coordinate describing where they can be found on a program sheet. either the structured text.0 . except this report is organized by time instead of by the element changed. v4. Includes information about user access and modification of the project. initial value. Prints a report extracted from the project’s audit trail (see View Project History Command on page 640). Prints a report listing the current configuration for each item in the Implementation Tree (see The Implementation Tree on page 101). functions. POU Variables POU Cross-Reference Programs Program Variable Listing Project History by Element Project History by Time Project Implementation TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and more. Only modules that require configuration in TriStation 1131 are included in this report. Prints each program in the current project. Prints a report listing all the variables defined in the project’s programs. organized by the element changed (project. and more. For example. Most recent events are at the top of the list. Similar to the Project History by Element document described above. Module Configuration Settings Operating Parameters Prints the current setting of each item on the Operating Parameters screen.92 Chapter 1 Project Administration Table 22 Item Printable Project Documents (continued) Description Prints a report listing the current configuration settings for each applicable module in the project’s hardware configuration. Includes each variable’s data type.9. Includes the name of the program the tagname is used in. functions. See Chapter 5. Prints a report listing the tagnames that have been assigned to SOE blocks. Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 for details about these settings. Prints a report listing each of the users that have been added to the project’s user list. See Changing the Security Level for Privileges on page 61 for more information. Prints a report listing the libraries that have been added to the project. Prints a report listing Modbus alias information for each tagname in the project. v4. function blocks. Includes both used and unused tagnames. including points used. Project Memory Allocation Project Security Levels Project Users Shared Libraries SOE Block Variables Tagnames: Complete Listing Tagnames: Modbus Aliases Tagnames: Where Used TriStation Communication Parameters User Documents Note If you have a PDF printer driver (such as Adobe® Acrobat® or PrimoPDF®) installed on your PC. This may be useful if you need to provide information to Invensys Customer Support when troubleshooting a problem. points allocated. or any time you need to save or transfer this information electronically. User documents are programs. Prints the current setting of each item on the TriStation Communication screen. Prints a report listing each the security level currently assigned to each TriStation and controller operation for the project.9. Includes each user’s full name. and maximum points. Contact your system administrator if you need assistance with installing a PDF printer driver on your PC. and security level. and its sheet coordinates (when applicable). and data types that you created. Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 or Chapter 6. Prints a report listing the tagnames that have been used in a program in the project. Organized by alias number. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. you can choose to print these documents to a PDF file instead of a printer. user name. including their current version numbers.0 . Prints a report listing all the tagnames that have been defined in the project. Prints a report listing all the user documents in the project. Organized by the name of the tagname.Printing Project Documents 93 Table 22 Item Printable Project Documents (continued) Description Prints a report listing the current memory allocation for the project. and reports displayed in the current window can be printed individually. Note If the Print command is not enabled for the document you want to print. Select the desired properties for your printer (number of copies. The Print All Options dialog box appears.0 . The document currently being viewed is printed. function blocks. The Print dialog box appears. select Print All. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.94 Chapter 1 Project Administration Printing Individual Documents This procedure describes how to print individual documents. or report you want to print. page orientation. Procedure 1 2 3 Open the logic sheet. etc). See Printing Multiple Documents on page 94. On the File menu. and then click OK. you may be able to print it by selecting the document from the Print All Options list.9. select Print. On the File menu. v4. Only logic sheets. function block. Printing Multiple Documents This procedure describes how to print multiple documents at the same time. Procedure 1 2 Open the Project Workspace (see The Project Workspace on page 20). if you selected the Functions document. Select the printer you want to use. and make it easier to select only those documents you want to print. Note If any of the selected documents do not have content to be printed (for example. clear the Select All check box. and then click OK. The Print dialog box appears. but no functions have been defined in the project). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Printing Project Documents 95 3 Select the check boxes for the documents you want to print. 4 5 Click OK. To quickly clear the check boxes for all the documents in the list. etc). v4. a message will appear in the messages window (see Message View Command on page 561).0 . page orientation.9. The selected documents are printed. See Printable Project Documents on page 91 for a description of each document in the list. and the desired settings (number of copies. v4.96 Chapter 1 Project Administration TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9.0 . 9. v4.2 Application Development Overview Application Development Steps 98 99 Application Elements 100 User Documents 109 Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development 116 Structured Text Development 129 Cause Effect Matrix Development 141 Variables and Constants 163 Tagnames 172 Importing and Exporting Tagnames 189 Annotations and Comments 200 Modbus Applications 209 Peer-to-Peer Applications 219 SOE Development 222 Tricon Application Access 229 Trident and Tri-GP Application Access 234 Building an Application 239 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . C reate programs and functions . v4.0 .Build and test application Errors? No C onfigure the C ontroller Set Up TriStation C ommunication Implement on the C ontroller TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Set Up the Project Develop the Application .Restrict access to application elements .9.Restrict access to application points .98 Chapter 2 Application Development Overview This figure shows the main steps for developing a TriStation 1131 application. An application can be developed and tested on the Emulator before downloading the application to a controller.Declare tagnames Test with the Emulator Fix Errors Yes .    Add annotations and comments. Add Peer-to-Peer features. v4.Application Development Steps 99 Application Development Steps This list includes the steps that can or should be performed during application development. Determine access to a document. Create programs and functions. • Declaring Variables on page 163 • Creating Constants on page 170 • Tagnames on page 172 • Importing and Exporting Tagnames on page 189 • Modbus Applications on page 209 • Peer-to-Peer Applications on page 219 • Compiling a Program on page 240 • Building an Application on page 239 Assign Modbus aliases. • Annotations and Comments on page 200 • Restricting Access to a Document on page 114 • Tricon Application Access on page 229 • Trident and Tri-GP Application Access on page 234        Create variables and constants. Determine access to points. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Import or export tagnames. Build the application. Step See • Safety and Control Applications on page 104 • User Documents on page 109 • Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development on page 116 • Structured Text Development on page 129 • Cause Effect Matrix Development on page 141   Plan the application. Compile project programs and functions. Declare tagnames.9.0 . 100 Chapter 2 Application Development Application Elements This section describes the elements of an application and the steps in application development.9.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Topics include: • • • • • • The Application Workspace on page 100 The Declaration Tree on page 101 The Implementation Tree on page 101 Parts of an Application on page 102 Safety and Control Applications on page 104 Programming Languages on page 105 The Application Workspace Application development takes place in the Application Workspace. v4. tagnames. The tree also includes the TriStation 1131 library of functions. functions. and implementation settings needed for the application. function blocks. function blocks. data types. and data types that can be used in the project. The folders in this tree include the user programs. 9.0 . including the Execution List (list of programs and scan time). or function block. SOE Configuration. Implementation Tree TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. function. Declaration Tree The Implementation Tree The Implementation Tree lists the elements that can be specified for the application. v4. and Peer-To-Peer Configuration.Application Elements 101 The Declaration Tree The Declaration Tree lists the declarations for the currently opened program. functions. output. Programs A program is an executable element that includes one or more functions and function blocks. this limit includes internal system POUs. The maximum number of user-defined variables that can be used in a program is 2. and local variables.9. A function block is an executable element that returns one or more values and retains the values derived during one evaluation for use in the next evaluation.001 (this limitation does not apply to programs being downloaded to the controller). function blocks. Application An application includes application elements and configuration information that is built (compiled) into executable code and downloaded and run on a Triconex controller. The maximum number of variables that can be used in a function or function block is 400. implementation information. which includes input. but not VAR_TEMP variables. function. function blocks. and controller configuration. and data types. but not VAR_TEMP variables.0 . For function blocks. input/output. variables. and data types that are automatically included with each project. which includes local variables and tagnames. A program is initiated from the Execution List. Program Organizational Units (POUs) A program organizational unit is a program. see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference.102 Chapter 2 Application Development Parts of an Application The major elements in an application are programs. Functions and Function Blocks A function is an executable element that returns exactly one result. a set of input values may not yield the same output values. The maximum number of programs in an application is 250. tagnames. so the actual number of POUs available for inclusion in an emulated application is dependent on the control program implementation. However.000. function blocks. For information on specific functions. TriStation 1131 Libraries TriStation 1131 includes libraries of functions. The maximum number of POUs in an application being downloaded to the Emulator is 3. or function block. The values in a function exist only while the function is executing. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. A program can invoke functions and function blocks but cannot invoke another program. Generic data types are used to organize elementary data types that have similar properties and can be used with IEC 61131-3 standard functions that support overloaded inputs and outputs. a compiler error occurs. TriStation 1131 also supports the derivation of structured. DATE. Tagnames A tagname identifies input. see Appendix B. Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration. STRING. • Elementary types are defined by IEC 61131-3 and include: BOOL. this information is required. and TOD.0 . The maximum number of user-defined variables and tagnames in a program is 2. TriStation 1131 uses both elementary and generic data types.9. if no value is assigned to the function output. TIME. module configuration. • Controller Configuration The controller configuration specifies the communication characteristics for memory. function blocks. Tricon Controller Configuration and Chapter 4. Data Types. In IEC terminology. When the application is built. LREAL.000. tagnames are called global variables. DWORD. No error or warning is issued if an assignment to the function output is in a conditional statement and is not executed. see Chapter 3. For more information. Variables A variable is a named area in memory that stores a value or string assigned to that variable. and other hardware-related settings. Generic data type names use the prefix ANY.Application Elements 103 User-Defined Functions In user-defined functions. Table 23 Input In/Out Output Local Tagname VAR_TEMP Variable Types and Uses Used With Functions and function blocks Function blocks Functions and function blocks Functions. v4. output. REAL. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and enumerated data types. DINT. For more information. DT. INT. and memory points that are accessible to all programs in the application. the return value is the default initial value. and programs Programs Currently available only in ST programs and function blocks Variable Type Data Types A data type identifies the type of data used in tagnames and variables. If there is not a statement that assigns a value to the function output. array. functions. control programs only. This table describes how programs. All elements of the application (programs. and tagnames) must be approved or specified for safety. function blocks. Can be safety or control. The tagnames must be specified as control tagnames. Application Elements Programs Tagnames TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Safety applications are the most restrictive type because they are designed to take a process to a safe state when predetermined conditions are violated. Scan Time. or safety and control functions and function blocks. and Peer-to-Peer setup. Safety and Control Applications An application can include safety programs only. Table 24 Safety and Control Usage Use Safety programs cannot use control functions. These designations cannot be changed. functions. function blocks.9. a safety program can read a control tagname and vice-versa. If Shared Read is selected. and tagnames can be used in safety and control applications.0 . v4. or a combination of safety and control programs. Functions and Function Blocks Can be safety and control. or tagnames.104 Chapter 2 Application Development Implementation Information Implementation information includes the Execution List. Library functions and function blocks are designated as approved for use in safety and control or control applications. Control applications are designed to control a process and can use control. or control. Control programs cannot use safety tagnames. function blocks. SOE. The elements used in this language appear as blocks wired together to form circuits. CEMPLE is an optional language that can be purchased separately from Invensys.Application Elements 105 Programming Languages TriStation 1131 supports multiple programming languages for developing. v4. TriStation 1131 supports these programming languages: • • • • Function Block Diagram Language (FBD) Ladder Diagram Language (LD) Structured Text Language (ST) CEMPLE (Cause and Effect Matrix Programming Language Editor) The Function Block Diagram.9. Ladder Diagram. and documenting applications that run on a Triconex controller. The wires can communicate binary and other types of data between FBD elements. An FBD diagram can contain one or more networks. a group of elements visibly interconnected by wires is known as a network. Figure 1 Sample FBD Network TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . testing. In FBD. Function Block Diagram Language Function Block Diagram (FBD) language is a graphical language that corresponds to circuit diagrams. and Structured Text languages comply with the IEC 61131-3 International Standard on Programming Languages for Programmable Controllers. 0 .106 Chapter 2 Application Development Ladder Diagram Language Ladder Diagram (LD) language is a graphical language that uses a standard set of symbols to represent relay logic. The basic elements are coils and contacts which are connected by links. Links are different from the wires used in FBD because they transfer only binary data between LD symbols.9. which follow the power flow characteristics of relay logic. Figure 2 Sample Ladder Diagram TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. Function blocks and function elements which have at least one binary input and output can be used in LD diagrams. . Functions and function blocks can be invoked in ST.. and can be used to implement complicated procedures that are not easily expressed in graphical languages such as FBD or LD. Structured Text is particularly useful for complex arithmetic calculations.0 .ELSE).. ST allows you to create Boolean and arithmetic expressions as well as structured programming constructs such as conditional statements (IF.9.Application Elements 107 Structured Text Language Structured Text (ST) language is a general purpose.. similar to PASCAL or C.THEN. v4. Figure 3 Sample Structured Text Code TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. high-level programming language. A matrix is readily understood by a broad range of plant personnel from process control engineers to maintenance operators. Figure 4 Sample CEMPLE Matrix TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. which is commonly used in the process control industry. v4. The problem is known as a cause and the action is known as an effect. is a Triconex language based on cause and effect matrix methodology. but the volume of inputs and outputs that need to be controlled is high.0 .9. a cause is represented by a row in the matrix and an effect is represented by a column. which stands for Cause and Effect Matrix Programming Language Editor. CEMPLE allows you to associate a problem in a process with one or more actions that must be taken to correct the problem. An X in the intersection of a cause row and an effect column establishes a relationship between the cause and the effect. A cause and effect matrix is frequently used for applications such as fire and gas systems for which the programming logic is simple. In a typical matrix.108 Chapter 2 Application Development CEMPLE (Cause and Effect Matrix Programming Language Editor) CEMPLE™. Topics include: • • • • • • Note Creating a User Document on page 109 Copying User or Library Documents on page 110 Specifying Document Summary Information on page 112 Specifying Document Attributes on page 113 Restricting Access to a Document on page 114 Changing a Document Owner on page 115 If you are trying to edit a user document created by another user. check the document’s access property. function blocks. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. function block.User Documents 109 User Documents This section describes the how to create and specify user documents. See Restricting Access to a Document on page 114. If it is locked. v4. and then click New Document.0 . which include programs. function. right-click the User Documents folder. or data type. A user document can be a program. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and data types. functions. you must ask the user who created the document to change the access property.9. Creating a User Document This procedure explains how to create a user document. and are unable to do so even when you have the correct user level and access privileges. The document is opened in the specified programming language. and click Copy. Note Using the Print All command. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. Property Name Document Type Language Application Type Action Enter a descriptive name for the document. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 2 On the Edit menu.0 . 3 Click OK. Topics include: • • Copying a User Document on page 110 Copying a Library Document on page 111 Copying a User Document This procedure explains how to copy a user document. right-click the document to be copied. you can print a report listing all the user documents you have created in a project (User Documents). If the document is open in TriStation 1131. the Copy command will be unavailable.9.110 Chapter 2 Application Development 2 Specify these properties in the New Document dialog box. The default is Function Block Diagram. as well as library documents. This can help you reduce development time by using an existing document as the basis for a new document. The default is Control. v4. click Paste. Copying User or Library Documents You can make copies of user documents you have created. Click the type of application the document is to be used in. Close the document and then repeat step 1. Click the type of document to create. The default is Program. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. Click the language type to use. If the document is open in TriStation 1131.9. open the Library Documents folder and locate the function or data type you want to copy. Close the document and then repeat steps 1 and 2. and click OK. and select Copy. 4 Enter a name for the copied document. Only functions and data types can be copied.User Documents 111 3 Enter the name for the new document.0 . The new function or data type is now located in the appropriate folder in the User Documents folder. Copying a Library Document This procedure explains how to make a copy of an existing library document. 3 In the Application tree. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. the Copy command will be unavailable. function blocks cannot be copied. v4. Right-click on the function or data type. and then click OK. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. right-click the User Documents folder and select Paste. Displays the date and time the document was created. right-click a document (program. Property Name Internal ID Owned by Created Modified Compiled Category Description Document Access Change Owner Command Action Displays the name of the document and version number. Displays the name of the owner.0 . To change. v4. See Restricting Access to a Document on page 114. Documents can be organized and displayed by categories. function block. Enter a description for the document. Displays the date and time the document was last compiled. Displays the date and time the document was last modified. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. function. The default is Read/Write. Select the type of access to allow for this document. See Changing a Document Owner on page 115. Click the Change Owner button to change the owner of the document. Enter a name to be used to categorize the document. 3 Click OK to save your changes. click Change Owner. or data type) and click Properties.112 Chapter 2 Application Development Specifying Document Summary Information This procedure explains how to specify summary information for a document. Displays an internal number used to identify the document. 2 Specify these properties on the Summary tab. v4. Only available for programs written in FBD. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. See Safety and Control Applications on page 104. and click Properties. right-click a document (program. or Safety and Control applications. See Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values on page 39. and whether the document can be used in a CEM program. Control. See Enabling User-Defined Functions and ApplicationDefined States on page 151. function. Enable Color Monitoring 4 Click OK to save your changes. The default is Control. or CEM. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select the check box if you want a color displayed for BOOL inputs and outputs when the application is run on the controller or Emulator.User Documents 113 Specifying Document Attributes This procedure explains how to specify document attributes. Cause Effect Matrix Support Select the check box for each type that is supported. Only available for functions and function blocks. which include the type of application the document can be used in. function block. LD.9.0 . or data type). 3 Specify these properties on the Attributes tab. Click the Attributes tab. Specify the number of inputs and outputs. if needed. Property Application Type Action Specify whether this document can be used in Safety. Click OK to save your changes. Document Access property 2 3 On the Summary tab. The least restrictive setting is for Read/Write. v4. The most restrictive setting is for Read. and click Properties. To change the setting for this property. right-click a document (program.114 Chapter 2 Application Development Restricting Access to a Document This procedure explains how to restrict access to a document by setting the Access property. You can also Lock the document to prevent editing by unauthorized users. function. see Managing User Access on page 54. which means all users can read and change the document.9. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. you must have a User Security level that includes Change Access Attributes. function block. select the access type for this document.0 . which means anyone with a lesser security level than yours cannot change it. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default value is Read/Write. or data type). For more information. 3 4 In the Users dialog box. Click OK. or data type).0 . Normally. your user security level must: • • Include the Elements: Change Access Attributes privilege Be the same or greater than the security level of the user you want to assign as owner For more information about user security levels. the owner of a document is the user who created it. select the user who is to become owner of this element. v4. The Owned By property in the Document Properties dialog box displays the name of the new owner. function block. On the Summary tab. right-click a document (program.9. which determines whether other users can change the element. see Managing User Access on page 54. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.User Documents 115 Changing a Document Owner This procedure explains how to change the owner of a document. and click Properties. click Change Owner. function. To change the setting for this property. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. 9. Topics include: • • • • • • • • • Using the FBD Editor on page 117 Using the LD Editor on page 118 Function and Function Block Graphics on page 119 Working with Logic Sheets on page 120 Selecting Library Elements on page 124 Specifying Function Properties on page 125 Specifying Function Block Properties on page 126 Specifying Function Block Application Usage on page 127 Using a Space Saver Function Block on page 128 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and function blocks.0 . v4. functions.116 Chapter 2 Application Development Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development This section explains how to use Function Block Diagram (FBD) and Ladder Diagram (LD) languages to develop programs. 9. 1 Declaration Tree 6 Insert Output Variable Command Insert Input Variable Command Tagname Constant Wire Tool Command 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 Comment Tool 16 Zoom To Fit Command Previous Sheet Command Sheet Manager Next Sheet 2 Selection Tools 7 12 Horizontal Network Divider Command Vertical Network Divider Command Auto Name Command Zoom Command 17 3 4 5 Function Block Command Local Variable Input Variable 8 9 10 13 14 15 18 19 1 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Figure 5 Function Block Diagram Editor Elements TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . Commands and Properties. v4.Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development 117 Using the FBD Editor The Function Block Diagram (FBD) editor allows you to develop programs and functions by using a graphical language that corresponds to circuit diagrams. Toolbar commands are described in detail in Appendix A. 0 . Toolbar commands are described in detail in Appendix A. Commands and Properties. v4.9. 1 2 3 Declaration Tree Selection Tools Function Block Command Contact Command Coil Tool Command Right Power Rail Command 1 2 7 8 9 Input Local Variable Insert Output Variable Command Insert Input Variable Command Tagname Constant 13 14 15 Link Command Comment Tool Horizontal Network Divider Command Vertical Network Divider Command Auto Name Command Zoom Command 19 20 21 Zoom To Fit Command Previous Sheet Command Sheet Manager 4 10 16 22 Next Sheet 5 6 11 12 17 18 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Figure 6 Ladder Diagram Editor Elements TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.118 Chapter 2 Application Development Using the LD Editor The Ladder Diagram (LD) editor allows you to develop programs and functions by using a graphical language that corresponds to relay logic. For function blocks only. Instance name Names of terminals Terminals Evaluation order Type name TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Identifies the function block type. Locations where variables are attached.9. see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference. Identifies the order in which the function is executed in the program. each function and function block is graphically represented on the logic sheet. Function Input terminals Evaluation order in program Output terminal Instance name for the function block Names of input terminals Input terminals Evaluation order in program Function Block Type name (CSCHED) Output terminal names Output terminals Figure 7 Function and Function Block Elements Table 25 Item Function Block Graphic Elements Description Identifies the specific implementation of a function block type.Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development 119 Function and Function Block Graphics In FBD and LD languages.0 . v4. Identify the input and output parameters used with the function block. For more information on specific functions and function blocks. Sheet Template SheetTemplate A SheetTemplate B SheetTemplate C SheetTemplate D Description 8. and then create or open a program. 3 Select the template you want to use for logic sheets. and function blocks.9. function. Topics include: • • • • Selecting a Sheet Template on page 120 Managing Logic Sheets on page 121 Editing the Sheet Title on page 122 Printing Logic Sheets on page 122 Selecting a Sheet Template This procedure explains how to select a sheet template. manage. function.5” x 11” 11” x 17” (default) 17” x 22” 22” x 34” TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . functions. v4. Four sheet sizes are available. or function block. or function block. there is no limit to the number of sheets you can have in a program or function.120 Chapter 2 Application Development Working with Logic Sheets Logic sheets are the workspace for developing programs. click Select Sheet Template. This section describes how to select. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. and edit logic sheets. On the Sheets menu. The sheet template defines the size of the logic sheets used in the selected program. or function block. select the sheet you want to remove and then click Delete. so be sure you have selected the correct sheet before clicking Delete. enter the new sheet title and then click OK. If you want your logic sheets to be in the portrait (vertical) orientation. function. select the existing sheet. and then click Insert. select the sheet and then click Go To. To view a specific sheet. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • Note 4 Click OK to save your changes. and then click Title.0 . be sure to select the _Portrait version of the desired sheet template. insert. In the Enter Sheet Title box. To change an existing sheet’s title. The new sheet size will also apply to any new programs. or function blocks you create. v4. 3 Do any of the following: • • • To add a new sheet after an existing sheet. select the sheet whose title you want to change. To delete an existing sheet. and then click Append. To add a new sheet before an existing sheet. function. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. functions. and delete logic sheets in a program. enter the new sheet title and then click OK. click the Sheets Manager button . or function block. You are not asked to confirm the deletion of the sheet. and then create or open a program.Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development 121 Note Logic sheets are oriented in the landscape (horizontal) direction. function. On the FBD or LD Editor toolbar. enter the new sheet title and then click OK. In the Enter Sheet Title box. select the existing sheet.9. In the Enter Sheet Title box. or function block. Managing Logic Sheets This procedure explains how to append. 4 Click OK to save your selection and apply the new sheet size to the open program. select Print. You can print logic sheets individually. Use the Previous Sheet and/or Next Sheet to display the sheet you want to print. The Print dialog box appears. v4. function. page orientation.122 Chapter 2 Application Development Editing the Sheet Title This procedure explains how to change the title of the current sheet. Use the Previous Sheet and/or Next Sheet buttons on the FBD or LD Editor toolbar to display the sheet whose title you want to change. or function block. Select the desired properties for your printer (number of copies. or you can print all logic sheets in a project at once. See Managing Logic Sheets on page 121. the window caption bar. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. use the Sheets Manager dialog box. and then create or open a program. and the Window Menu list. Printing Logic Sheets This procedure explains how to print one or more logic sheets in a project. etc). It does not affect the logic on the sheet.9. The sheet title is displayed in the title block. click Edit Sheet Title. On the Sheets menu. or function block. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Application tree. To change the sheet title for multiple sheets without displaying each individual sheet. Printing Individual Logic Sheets 1 2 3 4 Expand the Application tree. buttons on the FBD or LD Editor toolbar On the File menu. and then create or open a program. and then click OK. function. 4 Note Enter the sheet title and then click OK.0 . On the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. and then click OK. and make it easier to select only those documents you want to print.Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development 123 Printing Multiple Logic Sheets 1 2 Open the Project Workspace (see The Project Workspace on page 20).0 . Note 4 5 Click OK. clear the Select All check box. and the desired settings (number of copies. 3 Select the check boxes for the following documents: • • • Functions Function Blocks Programs To quickly clear the check boxes for all the documents in the list. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.9. Select the printer you want to use. page orientation. The Print All Options dialog box appears. select Print All. etc). See Copying a Library Document on page 111. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Note You can easily create your own function by making a copy of an existing library function. and then modifying it to suit your needs.124 Chapter 2 Application Development Selecting Library Elements This procedure explains how to select a library element to include in a program or function. repeat steps 2–4.0 . and then click on the logic sheet to place the element. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. click the Select Function (Block) Tool Element button . which can be copied to a program or function. click the Function (Block) Tool . To insert another function or function block of the same type.9. Many of these elements include the source code. and data types that can be used in a project. 3 4 Select the function or function block to be inserted. and then click OK. On the FBD or LD Editor toolbar. v4. Click on the logic sheet to place the element. and then create or open a program. TriStation 1131 includes libraries of functions. To select a different function or function block. function blocks. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or False to True) when the function is executed. Only available for BOOL outputs. Required in functions and function blocks used in LD programs. To invert the value for the output. Double Space Select the check box to have space in the function graphic on the logic sheet doubled between the inputs and outputs. Width EN/ENO Click + or – to increase or decrease the width of the selected function graphic on the logic sheet. Only available for BOOL inputs. Invert Input 4 Click OK to save your changes. select the input and then select the Invert Input check box. the value is changed to the opposite value (True to False. enter the number of inputs and click Apply. Property Number of Inputs Action If the Number of Inputs fields is enabled. To include an input and output parameter that detects errors in FBD and LD logic. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree and open a program or function. the value is changed to the opposite value (True to False.9. v4. select the EN/ENO check box.0 . Invert Output If an output is inverted. To add inputs. Double-click the graphic of the function whose properties you want to define. To invert the value for a specific BOOL value. 3 Specify these properties on the Function tab. select the Invert Output check box.Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development 125 Specifying Function Properties This procedure explains how to specify properties for functions. which means the number of inputs can be changed. the function is extensible. or False to True) when the function is executed. If an input is inverted. Select the check box to have space in the function block graphic on the logic sheet doubled between the inputs and outputs.0 . Function blocks must have at least one BOOL input and one BOOL output. The scope of an instance of a function block is local to the function block or program that declares the instance. Width EN/ENO Double Space Click + or – to increase or decrease the width of the selected function block graphic on the logic sheet. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree and open a program or function block.126 Chapter 2 Application Development Specifying Function Block Properties This procedure explains how to specify properties for function blocks. Property Instance Name Invert Input/Output Action Enter a name for this specific implementation of the function block. 4 Click OK to save your changes. select the input or output and then select the Invert Input/Output check box. 3 Specify these properties on the Function Block tab. Double-click the graphic of the function block whose properties you want to define. the same function block invoked with the same inputs may not return the same outputs. the value is changed to the opposite value (True to False.9. Any function block previously declared can be used in the declaration of another function block or program. If an input or output is inverted. The default is cleared. or False to True) when the function is executed. Only available for BOOL inputs. Only available with functions. All input. To invert the value for a specific BOOL value. and local variables in a function block persist from one execution of a function block to the next execution. output. v4. Consequently. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree and expand the User Documents folder. but does not need to be executed every scan. which determines how the function block is used in a program. but you cannot change the settings for TriStation 1131 library function blocks. You can specify the usage for userdefined function blocks.0 . Use when each instance should be executed only once per scan.Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development 127 Specifying Function Block Application Usage This procedure explains how to specify the Usage property for function blocks. 3 Specify one of these settings on the Usage tab. and then click the Usage tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. 4 Click OK to save your selection. Use when a single instance can be executed more than once per scan. see Using a Space Saver Function Block on page 128. click Properties. Right-click a function block. For more information on specific requirements for using a function block as a space saver. v4. Setting Space Saver Action Use when a single instance can be executed more than once per scan to reduce memory usage and increase performance. Exactly Once Only Once Internal State Use when each instance should be executed exactly once per scan. 128 Chapter 2 Application Development Using a Space Saver Function Block This procedure explains how to use a function block as a space saver. To prevent mistakes. Do not use the function block instance more than once in a network—the result is a WG0014 warning because the diagram could be ambiguous. On a function block diagram. the setting cannot be changed. • Declare only one instance of the function block and use that same instance throughout your program. v4. The Space Saver setting means a single instance can be executed more than once per scan to reduce memory usage and increase performance. just use the same instance name repeatedly. If you forget to connect an input. you can specify this setting.0 . • • TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. then you must search for a previous execution of the function block to see the input value because the function block remembers the input value from one execution to the next if the input is not connected. For Triconex Library function blocks. For user-defined function blocks. connect a value to every function block input.9. For more information. 1998 (ISBN: 0852969503). by R.. function block. Structured Text is a high level language that has been specifically developed for industrial control applications. function. Lewis. v4.9. Topics include: • • • • • • • • • • • • • Using the ST Editor on page 130 Using Expressions on page 131 Defining an Enumeration Data Type on page 132 Defining an Array Data Type on page 133 Defining a Structured Data Type on page 134 Declaring a VAR CONSTANT on page 134 Declaring a VAR_TEMP on page 135 Declaring a VAR_EXTERNAL on page 136 Declaring Local Variables in ST on page 137 Declaring Input and Output Variables in ST on page 137 Using ForLoop and Exit Statements on page 138 Using a CASE Statement on page 139 VAR_IN_OUT Function Parameters on page 140 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Structured Text Development 129 Structured Text Development This section explains how to use Structured Text (ST) language to write a program. or data type.0 . see Programming Industrial Control Systems Using IEC 1131-3.W. London: Short Run Press Ltd. 9. while viewing the code you want to copy. This figure shows the logic sheet and commands. and select Paste. 1 2 Read Only Command Find Text Command 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 Replace Command Line Numbers 5 6 Larger Font (Font Size) Smaller Font (Font Size) 7 8 Type Over Command Auto Indent Command 1 Figure 8 Structured Text Editor Elements The ST compiler allows you to insert tabs.130 Chapter 2 Application Development Using the ST Editor The Structured Text (ST) editor allows you to develop programs and functions by writing code. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Each statement must be terminated with a semi-colon (. v4. Toolbar commands are described in detail in Appendix A. and comments between keywords and identifiers wherever a space is required. return to your ST program. right-click where you want to add the code. Commands and Properties.) separator. and select Copy. Comments must be preceded by (* and followed by *). Then.0 . right-click on it. To do so. select the code. spaces. as shown in this example: (* this is a comment *) Note You can easily add code to your ST program by copying and pasting code from existing library or user documents. you cannot add a BOOL operand to an INT operand. ALARM1. X. An operator performs a specific action on one or more operands to compute a value. VALVE_OPEN) or a literal constant (for example. the multiplication operator (*) is used to compute the product of two or more operands: MyValue * 100 Order of Evaluation Expressions are evaluated in a specific order. When operators have equal precedence. For each expression. For example. An operand can be a variable (for example. v4. and their order of evaluation or precedence: Table 26 Operation Parenthesization Function Evaluation Operation Symbol Precedence Symbol (Expression) Identifier (Argument List) Example: LN(A) MAX(X.Y). The following table lists the Arithmetic and Boolean operators. Parentheses are used to isolate sub-parts of an expression and prioritize expression evaluation. an expression to calculate the total area of two rectangles could be written as follows: (RectA_width * RectA_height) + (RectB_width * RectB_height) Operands and Operators An operand is an element with which an operation is performed. 1234.35. Expressions within parentheses have the highest precedence and are always evaluated first. 16#FFFF). For example. etc.0 . depending on the precedence of the operators and/or sub-expressions. Precedence 1 (Highest) 2 Exponentiation Negation Complement Multiply Divide Modulo Add ** NOT * / MOD + 3 4 4 5 5 5 6 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Structured Text Development 131 Using Expressions An expression is a sequence of variable or constant operands and operators that compute a value. 1. Other operators are subsequently evaluated based on their precedence. For example. they are evaluated from left to right. the operands must be the same type.9. The default initial value is YELLOW. Syntax Example TYPE ENUM_COLORS: (YELLOW. v4. Note Once an enumerated data type has been successfully compiled. <=. >= = <> AND XOR OR Precedence 6 7 8 8 9 10 11 (Lowest) Boolean AND Boolean Exclusive OR Boolean OR Defining an Enumeration Data Type An enumerated data type is a data type that allows different states of a value to be given different names. (* The following statement causes an error *) (* MY_COLORS := 6. See Declaring Variables on page 163 for more information.0 . RED. elsif (MY_COLORS = RED)then MY_COLORS := YELLOW. GREEN).132 Chapter 2 Application Development Table 26 Operation Subtract Comparison Equality Inequality Operation Symbol Precedence (continued) Symbol <. The order for comparison increases from left to right. the value of a variable of type ENUM_COLORS is YELLOW. you can assign it as a data type for local variables. Any other value is an error. end_if. or GREEN.9. END_TYPE In this example. *) END_PROGRAM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Example PROGRAM ST_Enumerations VAR MY_COLORS : ENUM_COLORS := GREEN. elsif (MY_COLORS = YELLOW)then MY_COLORS :=GREEN. END_VAR if (MY_COLORS = GREEN)then MY_COLORS := RED. >. RED. END_VAR This means the array elements are referenced by the expressions: V[0]. v4.1. TYPE A: ARRAY [0 . and the array index is replaced with a comma-separated list of array indexes.483. Syntax Example TYPE ARRAY_DINTS : ARRAY[1. In this example. V[9] The default initial values are 0 (zero)..Structured Text Development 133 Defining an Array Data Type An array is a group of data objects with identical attributes.6.483.9.147. END_TYPE Example For each array. VAR V : A . . 9] OF INT . a variable declaration specifies a variable V of type A. END_TYPE Example In this example. For an array with more than one dimension. you can assign it as a data type for local variables. The maximum number of array elements is 256.0 . the sub-range is replaced with a comma-separated list of sub-ranges. the default initial value is the one defined for the array type.000. An array index must be in the range of -2. See Declaring Variables on page 163 for more information. for example..648 to +2. ..647. . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. V [I + 1]. and be up to 32 KB maximum. array type A has 10 elements of type INT.20] OF DINT. Example An index can be an expression of type ANY_INT. which is sometimes referred to as multi-element variables. V[1]. • • • Note Arrays can have one or two levels. Once an array has been successfully compiled.147. which is appropriate for safety applications because the value cannot be changed in a program. element HIGH_LIMIT of type REAL. END_TYPE Each structured declaration consists of an element name followed by a colon. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Declaring a VAR CONSTANT A VAR CONSTANT is a named constant. END_VAR Program Example PROGRAM ST_Constants VAR CONSTANT MILLISECS_IN_SEC : DINT := 1000. HIGH_LIMIT:REAL. The default initial value of each structured element is the one defined for the structured type. and so on. See Declaring Variables on page 163 for more information. False (0). v4. 0. In this example. If a variable declaration specifies a variable V of type STRUCT_SENSOR (VAR V : STRUCT_SENSOR . and element ALARM_COUNT of type INT. V.0 . then the four structure elements are referenced by the expressions V.9.3. Note Once structure has been successfully compiled.0. Gear_Ratio:INT : 12. END_VAR). followed by a type specification. ALARM_COUNT:INT. STATUS:BOOL. END_VAR VAR TIMER_MILLISECS. and 0. the structured type called STRUCT_SENSOR has four structure elements: element INPUT of type DINT. Syntax Example TYPE STRUCT_SENSOR : STRUCT INPUT:DINT. The default initial values are 0. you can assign it as a data type for local variables. INPUT. END_STRUCT. which are accessed by their specified names. element STATUS of type BOOL.134 Chapter 2 Application Development Defining a Structured Data Type A structured data type is derived by defining a structure from existing data types by using elements of other specified types. TIMER_SECS : DINT. Syntax Example VAR CONSTANT StartUp_Speed: REAL : 12. A structure can have a maximum of 400 elements. GET_CALENDAR : TR_CALENDAR.STATUS. 9. END_VAR VAR_INPUT INP_1. TIMER_MILLISECS := TIMER_SECS * MILLISECS_IN_SEC. END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT OUT_SUM : DINT . or function block. it is automatically initialized to zero at the start of the program. IS_ROUNDUP : BOOL. or function block terminates. OUT_BOOL : BOOL . *) END_PROGRAM Declaring a VAR_TEMP A VAR_TEMP is a variable which is appropriate for safety applications because the variables are placed in a temporary memory area (not local memory) which is cleared when the program. INP_2. INP_3: REAL . Function Block Example FUNCTION_BLOCK ST_VarTemp VAR_TEMP (* These 4 bytes will not be counted as LOCAL variables *) TEMP_SUM : REAL. TIMER_SECS := GET_CALENDAR. if (IS_ROUNDUP) then TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. During each scan. (* The following statement causes an error because MILLISECS_IN_SEC *is a VAR CONSTANT*) (* MILLISECS_IN_SEC := 999. function. END_VAR TEMP_SUM := INP_1 + INP_2 + INP_3. A VAR_TEMP variable provides no persistence. function.0 . v4. Syntax Example VAR_TEMP RESULT : REAL.Structured Text Development 135 END_VAR GET_CALENDAR(CI := TRUE).SECOND. END_VAR VAR LOC_ROUNDUP : BOOL := FALSE. IS_ROUNDUP := (LOC_ROUNDUP OR FORCE_ROUNDUP). END_VAR. FORCE_ROUNDUP: BOOL . Tagname_5.136 Chapter 2 Application Development TEMP_SUM := CEIL(TEMP_SUM). LOC_ROUNDUP := TRUE. end_if. Syntax Example VAR_EXTERNAL TagName_1. else Tagname_9 := TRUE. else TEMP_SUM := FLOOR(TEMP_SUM). Tagname_9 : BOOL. END_FUNCTION_BLOCK Declaring a VAR_EXTERNAL A VAR_EXTERNAL (also known as a global variable) allows access to tagnames (also known as tagname declarations in TriStation 1131). v4.9. END_VAR if (Tagname_1) then Tagname_1 := FALSE. else Tagname_1 := TRUE. end_if. END_PROGRAM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. END_VAR Program Example PROGRAM ST_VarExternal VAR_EXTERNAL TagName_1. OUT_SUM := REAL_TO_DINT(TEMP_SUM). if (Tagname_9) then Tagname_9 := FALSE. else Tagname_5 := TRUE. end_if. Tagname_5. LOC_ROUNDUP := FALSE. end_if. Tagname_9 : BOOL. It is used for all program inputs and outputs. if (Tagname_5) then Tagname_5 := FALSE.0 . OUT_BOOL := IS_ROUNDUP. Function Block Example FUNCTION_BLOCK AVERAGE (* Variable Declarations *) VAR_INPUT RESET : BOOL .. Function block instances are actually local variables and are declared as such. (* Declares instance of CTU function block*) END_VAR Declaring Input and Output Variables in ST Function block input and output variables are declared using the VAR_INPUT . All input variables must be declared before any output variables can be declared. (* Declares Boolean variable Reset *) UpCounter : CTU.(* Current Value from UPDOWN *) END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT STATUS : BOOL .END_VAR construct.. Local variables in a program or function block are initialized with initial values (the default is zero) at startup. (* Declares initial value to be 100 *) Reset : BOOL... (* State => 1 = resetting.. END_VAR constructs cannot be used in programs.Structured Text Development 137 Declaring Local Variables in ST A local variable is declared within function blocks using the VAR... 0 = calculating *) XOUT : DINT .0 . END_VAR and VAR_OUTPUT . END_VAR and VAR_OUTPUT . END_VAR constructs. Programs must use VAR_EXTERNAL for input and output variables.. (* Avg Output = Current_Value Divided by MAX_COUNT *) END_VAR (* Your execution statements here *) END_FUNCTION_BLOCK TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Note The VAR_INPUT .9. Syntax Example VAR UpCount : INT:= 100.. (* 1 = reset. v4. 0 = calculate *) CURRENT_VALUE : DINT . COUNT := COUNT + 1. (* This statement causes an error because IDX_1 is being used * as the counter for the ForLoop structure *) (* IDX_1 := 20. end_for.0 . COUNT : DINT.138 Chapter 2 Application Development Using ForLoop and Exit Statements The ForLoop and Exit statements allow a set of statements to be repeated depending on the value of an iteration variable. v4. IDX_1. END_VAR for IDX_1 := 1 to 6 do for IDX_2 := 1 to 20 do MY_ARRAY[IDX_1. *) end_for. END_PROGRAM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.IDX_2] := COUNT. if (COUNT = 100) then exit. Program Example PROGRAM ST_ForLoop VAR MY_ARRAY : ARRAY_DINTS. end_if.9. IDX_2 : INT. 3.000 selection statements.0.0. END_PROGRAM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. else SPEED := 0. SPEED :REAL := 0.8:SPEED := 18. 9: SPEED := 21. 10:SPEED := 25. Allows up to 5. TriStation 1131 rejects the code.0.0. 7.Structured Text Development 139 Using a CASE Statement The CASE statement allows a selected statement to be executed depending on the value of an expression that returns an integer result.4. Only numerical values can be used for the reference items in the CASE statement.0 . end_case. 6: SPEED := 15.0.5. (*Select a SPEED based on the value of SETTING *) case SETTING of 1: SPEED := 5. END_VAR if (SETTING > 10) then SETTING := 0. If variables are used.9.0.0. 2: SPEED := 7.5:SPEED := 12. v4. Program Example PROGRAM ST_Case VAR SETTING : DINT := 0. end_if. SETTING := SETTING + 1.0. v4. end_if. INOUT_3 : DINT . END_FUNCTION TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . To automatically check for the use of VAR_IN_OUT in your safety application. Syntax Example VAR_IN_OUT INOUT_1. if (INOUT_2 > 64000) then INOUT_2 := 0. end_if. see Application Type on page 485). INOUT_3 := INOUT_3 + 3. INOUT_2 := INOUT_2 + 2.9. END_VAR Function Example FUNCTION ST_VarInOut : BOOL VAR_IN_OUT INOUT_1. if (INOUT_3 > 64000) then INOUT_3 := 0. INOUT_3 : DINT . CAUTION You should not use the VAR_IN_OUT variable in a safety application. set the Application Type to Safety for the programs included in the application (for more information. INOUT_1 := INOUT_1 + 1. ST_VarInOut := TRUE.140 Chapter 2 Application Development VAR_IN_OUT Function Parameters The VAR_IN_OUT function parameters allow more than one input and more than one output in a function block. VAR_IN_OUT is used as a pointer in TriStation 1131. Safety standards (such as IEC 61508) recommend limiting the use of pointers in safety applications. INOUT_2. INOUT_2. end_if. END_VAR if (INOUT_1 > 64000) then INOUT_1 := 0. Cause Effect Matrix Development 141 Cause Effect Matrix Development This section explains how to use the Cause Effect Matrix (CEM) language to create a program based on a cause and effect matrix.9. Rows. Tagnames. Topics include: • • • • • • • • CEMPLE Overview on page 142 Using the CEM Editor on page 144 Setting up a CEM Program on page 147 Using User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States on page 150 Specifying Local Variables.0 . and Columns in a CEM Program on page 153 Editing the Title Block on page 161 Managing Views on page 162 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. and Constants in a CEM Program on page 152 Working with Cells. intersections. if one of the inputs changes to True. For more complex processes. Variables with a variable type of In/Out (VAR_IN_OUT) are not allowed in CEM programs. CEM language allows you to add functions or function blocks to causes.142 Chapter 2 Application Development CEMPLE Overview CEMPLE is an optional TriStation 1131 language editor that automates the process of creating a program based on a cause and effect matrix. In a basic matrix. and effect states Choice of de-energize-to-trip or energize-to-trip matrix evaluation Automatic conversion of matrix to Function Block Diagram language Customized view monitoring of active causes.000 intersections. A matrix created in CEM language can be as basic or complex as your situation requires. If the matrix is based on an energize-to-trip system.9. Matrix Evaluation Options When planning a matrix. and mitigation actions.000 intersections Ability to invoke functions and function blocks to evaluate cause. for example. and effects. intersection. In an energize-to-trip system. and 1. the reverse is true. If more than one cause is related to an effect. the related outputs also change to False. and to pass additional input variables to output variables. if one of the inputs changes to False. 99 effects. or any safety program or function block. the state of the effect is based on how the matrix is evaluated. an OR evaluation is typically used because the normal state of inputs is TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The state of a cause (True or False) determines the state of the related effect. Restrictions and Limitations • • No more than 99 causes. causes are identified as True or False inputs related to one or more effects through the intersections between them. to accept non-Boolean input and convert to Boolean output. function blocks that are invoked by matrix programs. and determining how the matrix is to be evaluated. v4. you must determine how the matrix is evaluated when it includes multiple causes and effects.0 . Cause and effect matrix is a methodology that is commonly used in the process control industry to define alarms. to set timers before evaluating the input. In a typical de-energize-to-trip system. the related outputs also change to True. intersections. emergency shutdown strategies. CEM language includes these features: • • • • • • Ability to specify up to 99 causes. and effects Multiple levels of undo and redo editing Matrix Planning Planning includes determining the causes (problems) to be monitored. You can specify the matrix evaluation as a de-energize-to-trip (fail-safe) or energize-to-trip system. This feature can be used for many purposes. 99 effects. and 1. such as a fire suppression system. a state is determined based on the inputs and function associated with the cause. 1. How a Matrix is Evaluated When a matrix is executed.0 . the related outputs also change to False. The order of evaluation is shown and described in this figure. 2. and effects are saved in internal variables. the related outputs also change to True. If the matrix is based on a de-energize-to-trip (fail-safe) system. an effect state is determined based on the intersection state and the function associated with the effect. The default setting is OR. If one of the inputs changes to False. If one of the inputs changes to True. and intersections are evaluated in a specific order. v4.Cause Effect Matrix Development 143 False. and then to the effect state. effects. 3. an AND evaluation is typically used because the normal state of inputs is True. a state is determined based on the cause state and intersection function. Figure 9 CEMPLE Matrix Evaluation Steps TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The states of causes.9. For typical OR evaluations. For typical AND evaluations. intersections. For each cause from the top row to the bottom. This is why it is typically used with systems that are designed to be fail-safe. the states of causes. For each intersection from the bottom to the top. An internal Move function moves the cause state to the intersection state. all cause states must be True for the intersection state to be True and one False state makes the output False. all cause states must be False for the intersection state to be False and one True state makes the output True. For each column from the left to the right. 9. effects. functions. The editor includes the following areas: • Matrix: Identifies causes.144 Chapter 2 Application Development Using the CEM Editor The CEM editor allows you to create a TriStation 1131 program based on a cause and effect matrix.0 . outputs. It also allows you to specify variable type and data type. and intersections. Variable Detail Table: Displays the inputs and outputs of an FBD network that are generated when a cause. • • This figure depicts the areas in the CEM Editor. effects. and function blocks related to causes. It also allows you to specify properties and to invert the values of variables. and the intersections between them. Can also include inputs. or intersection is selected. Matrix rows and columns Variable Detail Table FBD Network Figure 10 CEMPLE Editor Elements TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or intersection that you select in a matrix. effect. effect. v4. FBD Network: Displays the Function Block Diagram (FBD) related to the cause. When you create a cause. effect. In a more complex matrix. Although you cannot directly access the internal variables. or intersection that does not contain a function.9. functions can be included for causes. an internal variable is automatically created for each. the inputs and outputs of those functions can be specified in the matrix. columns. Effect items Intersections Cause items Figure 11 CEMPLE Matrix Elements FBD Network The FBD Network area of the CEM editor displays the Function Block Diagram (FBD) related to the cause. you can create variables and copy the values to those variables.Cause Effect Matrix Development 145 Matrix The matrix area of the CEM editor includes the rows. and intersections. or if you make multiple selections. The FBD network uses internal Boolean variables to save and move results to associated cells so that causes and effects can be evaluated. or intersection that you select in the matrix. such as this figure.0 . v4. the FBD network cannot display appropriate information. effect. intersection. If you select a cause. causes can be directly related to effects through intersections. and intersections of a matrix. When functions are included. The CEM editor uses internal variables to store and move results between cells. In a basic matrix that does not use functions. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. effects. You can also specify properties and invert values of variables. or effect. This figure shows the names. variable types.9. effect. v4. Figure 13 Variable Detail Table in CEMPLE Editor TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.146 Chapter 2 Application Development FBD Network area Figure 12 FBD Network Area in CEMPLE Editor Variable Detail Table The Variable Detail Table area of the CEM editor displays the inputs and outputs of an FBD Network that are generated when a cause.0 . and data types related to the function block. or intersection is selected. Select the check box to have output and function columns added. 2 Specify these properties on the CEM Editor tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. and then click the CEM Editor tab. The default is cleared. Procedure 1 On the Tools menu.0 . Select the check box to have function columns added. click TriStation 1131 Options. you can modify these settings on a program-by-program basis.Cause Effect Matrix Development 147 Setting up a CEM Program The following sections describe how to set default options that apply to CEM programs. Property Cause Header Functions On by Default Effect Header Functions On by Default Intersection Functions On by Default Action Select the check box to have input and function columns added. The default is cleared. The default is cleared. After a program is created.9. Topics include: • • • Specifying CEM Editor Options on page 147 Specifying CEM Element Options on page 148 Specifying Monitor Colors and Names on page 149 Specifying CEM Editor Options This procedure explains how to set the options used as initial settings for all the CEM (cause and effect matrix) programs in a project. Property Enable Cause Header Functions Enable Effect Header Functions Enable Intersection Functions Action Select the check box to add an input and function column to the cause header. 2 Specify these properties in the CEM Element Options dialog box. Specifying CEM Element Options This procedure explains how to specify whether functions are used in a specific CEM program. The default is 22. Enter the number of columns to include in a new matrix. double-click a program. click the Document menu. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select the check box to add an output and function column to the effect header. 3 Click OK to save the settings. The default is selected. and how the matrix is evaluated. and then click Options.9.0 .148 Chapter 2 Application Development Property Default Number of Cause Rows Default Number of Effect Columns Action Enter the number of rows to include in a new matrix. The default is selected. The default is selected. v4. The default is 25. Select the check box to add a function column to the intersection. and intersection cells in a CEM (cause and effect matrix). Specify how the matrix is to be evaluated when it includes multiple intersections between a cause and effect. Procedure 1 On the Project menu. 3 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and then click the Monitor Colors tab. Click OK to save your changes. select the color for True and False for cause.0 . False is white.9. effect. 2 Under CEM Monitor Colors. This is useful when the name of the function or function block is long. v4. The default is cleared.Cause Effect Matrix Development 149 Property Enable Floating Text in Intersection Cells Action Select the check box to allow the name of the function or function block to be displayed in a neighboring cell if that cell is empty. Specifying Monitor Colors and Names This procedure explains how to specify the colors that are displayed for True and False BOOL values when an application is monitored on the Controller and Emulator Panels. The default is OR. Evaluation Options 3 Click OK to save the settings. click Project Options. The default for True is red. the second input and output of the function is the application state. intersection. v4. Application States User-defined functions can include a variable that stores application states and that is evaluated in the same way as the cause. Figure 14 Using a Variable to Store Application State TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . Application state inputs and outputs must be a DWORD data type. a function used in an intersection must have a Boolean primary input and Boolean primary output. For example. (Invensyssupplied functions and function blocks do not have to be enabled. it is validated to ensure it can be used in that part of the matrix. the second input and output of the function is the application state. For the cause function block. For the effect function block. User-Defined Functions User-defined functions must be enabled before they can be used in a CEM program.150 Chapter 2 Application Development Using User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States This section describes how user-defined functions and application-defined states can be used in a CEM program. which is a 32-bit string. This figure shows an example of using a variable to store the application state. and effect internal variables.) When you enable a function. For the intersection function block. the function is not available for selection. the second output is the application state.9. If not enabled. This means you can include application information that is evaluated with an AND or OR operation when the matrix is run. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. 3 4 5 Click OK to save the settings. click Compile. Inputs Supports Use in Effect Columns With. The compile process determines whether the function can be used. v4. The default is cleared. The default is cleared. and then click the Attributes tab. Select the check box to enable the function to add a variable to store the application defined state. Select the check box to enable the function for use in effect columns. Select the check box to enable the function for use in intersections. click Properties. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9.0 . Property Application Type Supports Use in Cause Rows with. If a user-defined function is not enabled. right-click the user-defined function... Select the check box to enable the function for use in cause rows. and then select the required number of inputs.. The default is cleared. double-click the function to open it on a logic sheet. and then select the required number of outputs. In the Application tree. 2 Specify these properties on the Attributes tab. The default is cleared.. On the Document menu. Outputs Supports Use in Intersections Supports Application Defined States Action Click either Control or Safety and Control.Cause Effect Matrix Development 151 Enabling User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States This procedure explains how to enable user-defined functions and application-defined states for a specific matrix. it cannot be used in a matrix. and constants in a CEM program. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or in the Var/Const column in the Variable Detail Table. Enter a description for the variable or constant. Specifying Properties in the Variable Detail Table This procedure explains how to modify properties in the Variable Detail Table. In/Out variables (VAR_IN_OUT) are not allowed in CEM programs. Tagnames. 2 Specify these properties in the Variable Detail Table.152 Chapter 2 Application Development Specifying Local Variables. Select a data type. the declaration is changed. If the changes are valid. tagnames. function blocks that are invoked by CEM programs. Select Local or Tagname. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree.9. When functions are used with causes or effects. If not. Select or type the name in the Input or Output columns. v4. and Constants in a CEM Program This procedure explains how to specify local variables. expand User Documents. which is located in the lower left part of the CEM program.0 . a message displays explaining why the declaration was not changed. Property Var/Const Var Type Data Type Description Action Enter a variable or constant name. the inputs and outputs to the functions must be specified as variables or constants. and double-click a CEM program. and open a CEM program. or any safety program or function block. hold down the Ctrl key. hold down the shift key. Topics include: • • • • • • Selecting and Editing Cells in a CEM Program on page 153 Displaying and Sizing Cells from the Matrix on page 154 Inserting and Deleting Rows or Columns on page 155 Sizing and Hiding Columns on page 158 Sizing and Hiding Rows on page 159 Sizing and Hiding the Comment Column on page 160 Selecting and Editing Cells in a CEM Program This table and figure explain how to select one or more cells in a CEM program. and click the rows or column. Click the first cell.Cause Effect Matrix Development 153 Working with Cells.0 .9. and click the last cell in the area. and columns that make up a CEM program matrix. Rows. and Columns in a CEM Program The following sections describe how to work with the cells. Click anywhere in the cell. v4.. Click here to select one effect Click here to select all effects Click here to select all causes Click here to select all intersections Click here to select one cause Click here to select all intersections in a row Click here to select all intersections in a column Figure 15 Selecting CEMPLE Matrix Cells TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. To ... Click a cell.. Select a single cell Select contiguous (adjacent) cells Select discontiguous (non-adjacent) cells Do This . rows. ... v4. You can also make changes by using commands on the View menu. Double-click the thickened row boundary. Drag the column boundary to the left until it meets the nearest boundary. Drag the row boundary up or down.. Drag the row boundary upward until the row is almost hidden. Select a cell or group of cells (but do not place in edit mode) and press the delete key. These actions do not affect the matrix evaluation. then release the button. For an effect column. Drag the row boundary upward until it meets the nearest boundary.9. Drag the column boundary to the left so that the column is almost hidden. then release the button. Change width of column Restore size of column Change height of row Restore default size of row Hide a column Do This . Press the tab key or Enter to move the cursor to the next cell to the right. Drag the column boundary left or right. double-click the thickened column boundary. To ..0 . Click directly over the text in an editable cell..154 Chapter 2 Application Development This table explains how to edit cells in a matrix. double-click the boundary between the currently displayed columns and the hidden column. you must use the double-arrow cursor. Displaying and Sizing Cells from the Matrix This table describes how to change the display and size of cells in a matrix. Enter edit mode Complete a cell entry Move to the next cell Delete the contents of a cell or group of cells Do This .. Press the tab key or Enter to complete a cell entry and move the cursor to the next cell to the right. To .. which is only active in the gray cells of a matrix. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Unhide a column Hide a row Unhide a row For a cause column. To drag or double-click a cell boundary. . CAUTION Doing either of the following will cause the function block instance(s) in the remaining rows or columns to be renamed: • • Adding or deleting a row above one or more rows containing a function block Adding or deleting a column to the left of one or more columns containing a function block When a Download Changes operation is then performed. Inserting Columns This procedure explains how to insert columns in a CEM program. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the renamed function block output(s) will be re-initialized (set to zero). Click OK.0 . and do either of these: • • 2 3 4 5 Click the Insert Columns button toolbar on the Click the Edit menu. and then click Insert Columns Enter the number of columns to insert. v4.Cause Effect Matrix Development 155 Inserting and Deleting Rows or Columns The following procedures explain how to insert or delete rows or columns in a CEM program. The new column is inserted in the location you specified. open a CEM program.9. Select the column and click Before or After to specify where the column is to be inserted. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. If you do not want the column to be displayed. clear the Make visible on all managed views check box. Select the row and click Before or After to specify where the row is to be inserted. Click OK. clear the Make visible on all managed views check box. 3 Confirm your selections.9.0 . open a CEM program. and then click Delete Columns Enter the number of columns to delete and the starting column number. open a CEM program. and do either of these: • • 2 3 4 5 Click the Insert Rows button on the toolbar Click the Edit menu. and then click OK. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Column numbers are identified at the top of the column as shown in this figure. v4. where x is the number of columns to delete. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. and the x columns to the right of the selected column will be deleted. The new row is inserted in the location you specified. Deleting Columns This procedure explains how to delete columns in a CEM program.156 Chapter 2 Application Development Inserting Rows This procedure explains how to insert rows in a CEM program. and then click Insert Rows Enter the number of rows to insert. and do either of these: • • 2 Click the Delete Columns button toolbar on the Click the Edit menu. Column numbers are located here. If you do not want the column to be displayed. The selected column (E01 in this example). Figure 16 CEMPLE Matrix Column Numbers Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. The selected columns are deleted. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and then click Delete Rows Enter the number of rows to delete and the starting row number. and the x columns below the selected row will be deleted. and then click OK.Cause Effect Matrix Development 157 Deleting Rows This procedure explains how to delete rows in a CEM program. Row numbers are identified to the left of the row as shown in this figure. and do either of these: • • 2 Click the Delete Rows button on the toolbar Click the Edit menu. The selected row (C01 in this example). open a CEM program. v4. The selected rows are deleted.0 . where x is the number of rows to delete.9. Figure 17 CEMPLE Matrix Row Numbers Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. 3 Confirm your selections. Row numbers are located here. 158 Chapter 2 Application Development Sizing and Hiding Columns This procedure explains how to size and hide columns in a CEM program. Select and then enter the new size for the column. Select to restore the column to the default size. Select to automatically size the column to its content. and then Columns 2 Specify these properties in the Size/Hide Columns dialog box. but it is used in the matrix evaluation. v4.9. and then click Size/Hide. Property Number of columns to adjust Adjust starting from column New size Size to Content Restore Default Sizes Hide or Unhide Action Enter the number of columns you want to resize. If hidden. Select the starting column. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and do either of these: • • Click the Size/Hide Columns button on the toolbar Click the View menu. the column is not displayed. open a CEM program. Select Hide or Unhide. 3 Click OK to save your changes.0 . Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. 0 . and do either of these: • • Click the Size/Hide Rows button on the toolbar Click the View menu.Cause Effect Matrix Development 159 Sizing and Hiding Rows This procedure explains how to size and hide rows in a CEM program. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. Select the starting row. Select Hide or Unhide. If hidden. v4. and then click Size/Hide. open a CEM program. the row is not displayed. but it is used in the matrix evaluation. Select and then enter the new size for the row. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property Number of rows to adjust Adjust starting from row New size Restore Default Sizes Hide or Unhide Action Enter the number of rows you want to resize.9. Select to restore the row to the default size. and then Rows 2 Specify these properties in the Size/Hide Rows dialog box. 3 Click OK to save your changes. Select Hide or Unhide.160 Chapter 2 Application Development Sizing and Hiding the Comment Column This procedure explains how to size and hide the comment column in a CEM program. Select and then enter the new size for the column. If hidden. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . Property Restore Default Size New size Hide or Unhide Action Select to restore the comment column to its default size.9. From the View menu. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree and open a CEM program. click Size/Hide. and then Comment Column. v4. 2 Specify one of these properties in the Size/Hide Comment Column dialog box. the column is not displayed. 3 Click OK to save your changes. 2 3 Enter text to describe the matrix. Click OK to save your changes. which is included when the CEM program is printed. v4. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree.9.0 . and then click Edit Sheet Title. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. open a CEM program. click the Sheets menu.Cause Effect Matrix Development 161 Editing the Title Block This procedure explains how to edit information in the title block. On the View menu. Click to restore the current view to show all causes and effects. v4. click Manage Views. and remove views of CEM programs. Click to save the currently displayed view.162 Chapter 2 Application Development Managing Views This procedure explains how to save. A view is a display of a selected portion of the matrix. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Application tree and open a CEM program. either by using menu commands or by dragging columns and rows on the matrix. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Command Load Save Remove Restore All Defaults Close Cancel Action Select a view and click Load to have it displayed. load. Select a view and click Remove to delete the view from the list.9. 4 Perform one or more of these actions in the View Manager dialog box. Use commands on the View menu or drag columns and rows on the matrix. Saving the view allows you to load it at anytime.0 . You can create a view by hiding or showing columns and rows on the matrix. Change the view by showing or hiding columns and rows. Click to save your changes and close the View Manager dialog box. Click to close the View Manager dialog box without saving your changes. LD. and then click on the logic sheet (FBD or LD only). On the program or function Declarations tree. The maximum number of user-defined tagnames and variables in a program is 2. Topics include: • • • • • • • • Declaring Variables on page 163 Specifying Variable Properties on page 164 Specifying Variable Annotation Properties on page 165 Naming Multiple Variables on page 167 Changing Multiple Variables on page 168 Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program on page 169 Creating Constants on page 170 Specifying Constant Annotation Properties on page 171 Declaring Variables This procedure explains how to declare input. v4. Note You can use arrays. in/out. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. Variables store values and must be declared in order to be used in a program or function. and CEM languages. and CEM languages.0 • . LD.000. The compiler will automatically check your function blocks to determine if user-defined data types were correctly used. output. and click New Declaration. Note Using the Print All command. you can print a report listing all the variables currently defined in your project (Program Variable Listing). Procedure 1 Create a variable by doing either of the following: • On the toolbar. right-click the folder for the type of variable to be declared.Variables and Constants 163 Variables and Constants This section explains how to create variables and constants in FBD. click the icon for the variable. For information on tagnames (global variables). and enumerations that you have defined in structured text by declaring them as user-defined data types in local variables. structures.9. and local variables in FBD. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. see Tagnames on page 172. errors will result in “mismatched data type” warnings at compile time. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. double-click the icon that represents the variable. On the logic sheet. (Optional) Select the type of variable. Description Var Type Enter a description for the variable. Specifying Variable Properties This procedure explains how to specify properties for variables. or Local. the data type is automatically set to the correct type for the function. 3 Specify these properties on the Variable tab. However. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree and then open a program or function. • For programs. Property Name Data Type Action Enter a name for the variable. User-defined data types—such as arrays. For example. you must successfully compile your user-defined data type before it will appear in the Data Type list. Output. it affects only the selected variable. Select a data type. when you add an annotation to a variable.0 . No symbols or spaces are allowed. and enumerations that you have defined in structured text—can also be selected as data types in local variable declarations. Initial Value Specify a value to be used on the first scan. If the variable is dragged to a function terminal.164 Chapter 2 Application Development The Item Properties dialog box for the variable appears. can be Local only.9. Properties affect the selected occurrence of the variable. Use only alphanumeric characters and underscores. v4. 2 Specify these properties on the Declaration tab. Required. In/Out. Not applicable if you have selected a user-defined data type. Required. structures. Must agree with the Data Type. can be Input. • For functions. Data Type Displays the data type that was set on the Declaration tab. On the Variable tab. See Naming Multiple Variables on page 167 for more information. On the logic sheet. the Data Type is undefined.Variables and Constants 165 Property Variable Name Action To change the selected variable to a different variable. Declarations Command Auto Name Command 4 Click Apply to save your changes. To create a new variable. Click to view the Declaration tab for the variable. Click to view the Automatic Naming dialog box. To change the name of all the variables with this name. select the variable name and click Apply. v4. Annotations are available only in FBD and LD programs. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Application tree and then open a program or function. Select the check box to add an annotation to the variable. select the Annotate check box and then click the Annotation tab. Width Annotate Click + or – to increase or decrease the width of the variable icon on the logic sheet. The default is cleared. See Specifying Variable Annotation Properties on page 165 for more information about annotations. double-click the icon that represents the variable. If the variable has not been declared. Specifying Variable Annotation Properties This procedure explains how to specify text and macros to be included with an annotation. click Declaration and change the name of the variable. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. See Declaring Variables on page 163 for more information. enter a new name.9. and click Apply.0 . To paste the macro in the Annotation tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . Click OK to close the Edit Macro dialog box. 5 Close the Properties dialog box to save your changes to the Annotation tab. click the macro and press Ctrl+C. To copy a macro. v4. Available only in programs. press Ctrl+V.166 Chapter 2 Application Development 4 Specify these properties on the Annotation tab. Include Monitor Value in Annotation Select this check box to display the value of the variable in the annotation when the element is run on the controller or Emulator. see Using Macros with Annotations and Comments on page 206. Property Annotation Text Action Enter text or copy macros to be used in the annotation. To copy a macro.9. Macros Command Click to display the list of macros that can be added. To have variables named based on the selection order. Select the order in which to name variables. 4 Click OK to apply the formatted name to the selected variables. • Selection Order—Names are applied based on the order in which they were selected. or normal numbering. Enter the starting value for the first variable and the number to use when incrementing each successive variable. column. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree and open a program or function logic sheet. • Columns—Names are applied horizontally. Variables can be named by row. click Auto Name Selected Items. Property Formatted Name Start Value and Increment Name Order Action Specify whether to use theater numbering. and selection order.0 . The variables must exist before they can be named.Variables and Constants 167 Naming Multiple Variables This procedure explains how to name multiple variables by specifying a format. 2 3 On the Tools. Specify these properties in the Automatic Naming dialog box. hold the Shift key. from left to right. click them in the order in which you want them named. On the logic sheet. which uses numbers. • Rows—Names are applied vertically. which uses letters. menu. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. from top to bottom. v4. select the Annotate check box. and then enter or copy the text or macro. select the variables you want to change by pressing the Shift key while you click the variables. See Naming Multiple Variables on page 167.0 . Double-click one of the selected variables. 3 Specify these properties on the Variable or Annotation tabs. Multiple levels of undo are available. click and specify the pattern. click the Annotation tab. To automatically name the selected variables based on a pattern. you can also use the Find/Replace command. undo the changes you just made by pressing Ctrl+Z. The Item Properties dialog box appears.168 Chapter 2 Application Development Changing Multiple Variables This procedure explains how to change size and annotation settings for multiple variables on a logic sheet. v4. Property Variable Name Action To change all the selected variables to the same variable name. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Annotate To add the same annotation to each variable. select or enter the name. Width Click the + button to increase the width of the variable graphics. Procedure 1 2 On a logic sheet. Auto Name Command 4 5 Close the Properties dialog box to save your changes to the Annotation tab. Note To quickly change just the names of variables on a logic sheet. To undo this change. press Ctrl+Z. See Replace Command on page 592.9. If necessary. Click the – button to decrease the width of the variable graphics. If you exceed this limit. This number must be 2. 3 If you have exceeded the limit in any of the programs included in your application. The Messages View automatically opens and displays the status of the compile process. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. look for the following statement: Total Var count=x where x is the total number of user-defined variables and tagnames in the program.Variables and Constants 169 Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program The maximum number of user-defined variables and tagnames in a program is 2. You can view the number of user-defined variables and tagnames in each program when you compile your application. you will be unable to build your application.0 .000 or less. as shown below. The number of each type of variable (including tagnames) and the total user-defined variable count are displayed in the Messages View during the compile process: Variable Type Input Output Input/Output Local Global (also known as tagname) Name VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_IN_OUT VAR VAR_EXTERNAL Procedure 1 On the Project menu. v4.000 (not including undeclared tagnames). change your programming to reduce the number of variables and/or tagnames in the program before building the application.9. click Compile All User Documents. Variable count for ST_VarTemp program Variable count for ST_VarExternal program 2 For each program. Click the + button to increase the width of the constant graphic. and then enter or copy the text or macro.9. A constant is a value that can be used in a program or function. click the Annotation tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. LD. On the toolbar. must be appropriate for the Value property. Click the – button to decrease the width of the constant graphic. and open a program or function. 3 Specify these properties on the Constant tab. See Naming Multiple Variables on page 167. Property Use Local Time Data Type Width Action Enter the value for the constant. select the Annotate check box. Select the data type. v4. click . Annotate To add an annotation to the constant. To automatically name the selected constants based on a pattern. Auto Name Command 4 Click the Apply to save your changes. and CEM languages.170 Chapter 2 Application Development Creating Constants This procedure explains how to create constants in FBD.0 . and then click in the logic sheet. click and specify the pattern. double-click a constant.9. This can be used only in FBD and LD development. 3 Specify these properties on the Annotation tab. v4. Procedure 1 2 On a logic sheet. The Item Properties dialog box appears.0 . See Using Macros with Annotations and Comments on page 206. Click to copy a macro. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Variables and Constants 171 Specifying Constant Annotation Properties This procedure explains how to specify text and macros to be included with a constant annotation. select the Annotate check box and then click the Annotation tab. On the Constant tab. Property Annotation Text Macros Command Action Enter text or copy macros to be used in the annotation. In TriStation 1131. For Modbus or DDE communication. Tagname is the term commonly used when referring to input points (sensors) and output points (final elements). tagnames are references to physical tagnames (labels) on the connected field devices or to memory points which are locations in the controller memory. v4. output. Note Using the Print All command. making one or more changes to existing tagnames or adding new tagnames.000.172 Chapter 2 Application Development Tagnames This section describes tagnames. Alias Type. OPC.0 . Topics include: • • • • • • • • • • • Declaring Tagnames on page 172 Assigning an Alias Number. tagnames must be assigned an alias number that allows read or read/write access. You can declare tagnames before or after writing programs. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. and Physical Address on page 174 Scaling a REAL Point on page 178 Specifying Display Options for Tagnames on page 179 Creating Multiple Tagnames on page 180 Changing Multiple Tagnames on page 181 Renaming a Tagname on page 182 Deleting a Tagname on page 182 Inserting a Column into the Tagnames Table on page 183 Deleting a Column from the Tagnames Table on page 184 Managing Undeclared and Unused Tagnames on page 184 Declaring Tagnames This procedure explains how to declare tagnames for points. The maximum number of user-defined tagnames and variables in a program is 2. In IEC terminology. tagnames can be accessed by the tagname—an alias number is not needed. Note Once you have downloaded your project to the controller. Tagnames must be declared before downloading the application to the controller. See Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on page 33 for more information about project version numbers. tagnames are called global variables. For Peer-to-Peer. Tagnames describe the type of point (input. prior to the next download will cause the the project’s minor version number number to be increased by one. you can print various reports listing the tagnames declared and used in your project. An alias number is a five-digit identifier which defines the data type and location of a point in the controller memory. or TSAA applications. or memory) and the properties associated with the point. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. The default is Control. The default is cleared. Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder. and then click the Declarations button. The default is cleared. Right-click the Declarations tree. 3 Click Apply to save your changes. click the tagname tool .0 . and click New Tagname. Note To view the total number of tagnames in a program. compile the application and then look for the VAR_EXTERNAL count information in the Messages View. click on the logic sheet. Specify whether the tagname is to be used in a Safety or Control application. Select a data type. Enter the value to be used for the tagname when the system starts up. enter a new name.Tagnames 173 Procedure 1 Create a tagname by doing any of these: • • • On the toolbar. and click New Tagname. The default is BOOL. Property Tagname Data Type Group 1 and Group 2 Description Initial Value Application Type Shared Read Retentive Action Enter a name for the tagname. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Enter a description for the tagname. Must be 31 characters or less.9. Select the check box to allow a different Application Type to read the tagname. 2 Specify these properties on the Declaration tab. Select the check box to have the value of the tagname retained if a power failure occurs. Enter the names of the groups this tagname belongs to. See Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program on page 169 for more information. For input and output points. If you find any tagnames with an alias number of zero (0). See Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on page 33 for more information about project version numbers. • For Trident or Tri-GP projects. — Assign a default alias number for Tricon projects. To do so: 1 Expand the Application tree. Alias numbers allow a DCS or external applications to access a tagname’s value via the Modbus protocol. but there are no available alias numbers in the range for the selected tagname type. if you select No alias for an aliased memory point (Alias Type is Read Aliased or Read/Write Aliased).9. TriStation 1131 will automatically: — Assign 0 as the alias number for Trident or Tri-GP projects. see Configuring Tricon Hardware on page 262 or Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware on page 327. making one or more changes to existing tagnames prior to the next download will cause the project’s minor version number to be increased by one. Note Once you have downloaded your project to the controller. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. including assigning an alias number and physical address to input or output points. TriStation 1131 will automatically assign 0 as the alias number. follow the instructions in Changing Multiple Tagnames on page 181 to assign new alias numbers to those tagnames. TriStation 1131 will assign zero (0) or a default (system-specified) alias number for a selected tagname: • • If you select Default alias. For more information. and assigning an alias number and alias type to memory points. If you select User alias.174 Chapter 2 Application Development Assigning an Alias Number. Important Information About Alias Numbers Under certain circumstances.0 . and click Display Tabular View. You should verify that none of your tagnames have been assigned the alias number 0 before you build your application. if a tagname has been assigned the alias number 0. and Physical Address This section includes procedures for assigning information to a tagname. but do not enter an alias number. the I/O hardware configuration must be completed before a physical address or alias number can be assigned. its value will be inaccessible. The tagnames and properties are displayed in a table. Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder. 2 3 View the numbers in the Alias # column to be sure none of the tagnames have 0 assigned as the alias number. v4. However. Alias Type. double-click a tagname. the second four input points (points 5-8) are reserved for future use. if you select the model 3807 BPAO module. and then click the Declarations button. the application will receive an input value of zero for those points. and should not be assigned aliases. However.Tagnames 175 Procedure for Input and Output Points This procedure describes how to assign an alias number.0 . and then click the point to be assigned. Click the Point Assignment tab. 4 On the Browse Available Points screen.06. Click the Browse button then go to step 4. to select an address from a list of related modules. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. If you configure the unused points. v4. 3 Enter a physical address by doing either of these: • • Enter the number representing the Physical Address (for example: 01. select the module. TriStation 1131 will automatically re-assign the next available address to this tagname when you build or rebuild your application. you will see four output points and eight input points in the list of available points. then go to step 6. Note In the Browse Available Points dialog box. Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet. alias type. The first four input points provide coil diagnostic voltage measurements across the load.9. and physical address for an input or output point. Note If the address you select has already been assigned to an existing tagname.05). Procedure 1 Open an input or output point by doing either of these: • • 2 On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the default alias number must be used.9. click Apply. Under certain circumstances. see Alias Number on page 481. For alias number information.0 . See Important Information About Alias Numbers on page 174 for detailed information. To save your changes. system-specified based on a default range. TriStation 1131 will automatically assign 0 as the alias number. the alias number can be user-specified (within the range). For Trident and Tri-GP. 6 Specify the Alias Number assignment as follows: • • For Tricon. select the Enable Multiple Writes check box. or not aliased. Note 7 8 To allow the point to be written to multiple times from programs in the application. v4.176 Chapter 2 Application Development 5 Click OK to return to the Point Assignment tab. Alias Number 4 To save your changes. Enable Multiple Writes Select the check box to allow the point to be written to multiple times from programs in the application. 3 Specify these properties on the Point Assignment tab. Procedure 1 Open a memory point by doing either of these: • • 2 On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree.Tagnames 177 To cancel your changes and restore the original settings.9.0 . Procedure for Memory Points This procedure describes how to assign an alias number. double-click a tagname. click Restore before clicking Apply. Specify the alias number assignment. To cancel your changes and restore the original settings. you cannot revert to the original settings. select Read Aliased or Read/Write Aliased. See the note in Assigning Alias Numbers to Tagnames on page 210 for additional information. click Apply. The default is Default alias. Click the Point Assignment tab. Once you click Apply. or system-specified based on a default range. v4. and then click the Declarations button. The default is unaliased. click Restore before clicking Apply. Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet. The alias number can be user-specified (within the range). Property Alias Type Action To allow a memory point to be accessed from a remote device. Once you click Apply. alias type. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. you cannot revert to the original settings. and physical address for a memory point. which allows the value of a REAL point to be scaled to an integer so it can be transmitted through Modbus communication protocol. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 3 Specify these properties on the Scaling tab. Procedure 1 Open a tagname by doing either of these: • • 2 On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree. Alias Type. The default is 32767. Invensys recommends using the Download All command if these types of changes are made. The default is 32768.0. and then click the Declarations button.9.178 Chapter 2 Application Development WARNING If a memory variable’s Point Type. Enter the number of decimal points to be used. double-click a tagname. Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet. or Alias Number is changed. or 0 if no initial value is defined. must be more than the minimum value. For information on the formula. v4. must be less than the maximum value. performing a Download Changes operation will re-initialize the variable to its configured initial value.0. see How REAL Numbers are Scaled to Integers on page 213. The default is blank. Property Minimum Value (Min Span) Maximum Value (Max Span) Precision Action Enter the minimum value to be used to scale the REAL number to an integer. The integer is derived from a formula that includes values specified on the Scaling tab and values for the Modbus minimum and maximum range on the Tricon TCM and EICM. Click the Scaling tab. and Trident/Tri-GP MP and CM Setup screens. Scaling a REAL Point This procedure explains how to scale a point. Enter the maximum value to be used to scale the REAL number to an integer.0 . v4. click Apply. click Apply.0 . see the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide. 4 To save your changes. Specifying Display Options for Tagnames This procedure explains how to specify monitor display options used when the tagname is displayed in SOE Recorder. click Restore before clicking Apply. 4 To save your changes. The display options can help an operator identify alarm conditions at a glance. you cannot revert to the original settings. Property Monitor Display Options Action Enter the name and color to be displayed when the state of the tagname is True or False. double-click a tagname.Tagnames 179 Property Disable Scaling (Trident and TriGP only) Action To allow scaling of REAL numbers to integers. Procedure 1 Open a tagname by doing either of these: • • 2 On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree. Click the Display tab. The default is cleared. and then click the Declarations button. 3 Specify these properties on the Display tab. do not select this check box. the default color is red. Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet. To cancel your changes and restore the original settings. The default name is TRUE. Scaling cannot be disabled on the Tricon. the default color is green.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default name is FALSE. Once you click Apply. For more information. Start Value and Increment Enter the starting value for the first tagname and the number to use when incrementing each successive tagname. or normal numbering. Property Formatted Name Action Specify whether to use theater numbering.0 . right-click the Tagname Declarations folder. which uses letters. Enter the number of tagnames you want to create. How Many 3 Click OK to create the tagnames. 2 Specify these properties on the New Tagnames screen. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Note: Keep any text in this field (such as “Input” in the example above) to 25 characters or less. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. click Get Defaults at any time. To use the default settings. which uses numbers. and click New Tagnames (plural). Creating Multiple Tagnames This procedure explains how to create multiple tagnames by specifying a naming pattern. v4.9. to ensure you do not exceed the 31-character limit on tagname names.180 Chapter 2 Application Development To cancel your changes and restore the original settings. click Restore before clicking Apply. and then making the changes. compile the application and then look for the VAR_EXTERNAL count information in the Messages View. To select a contiguous group. and click the last tagname. click a tagname. Select multiple tagnames Note To view the total number of tagnames in a program. See Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program on page 169 for more information. Tagnames can then be sorted by different properties. Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder. and then click Item Properties. and click Display Tabular View. alias numbers can be added to a group of tagnames by sorting them. Note Once you have downloaded your project to the controller. and click all the other tagnames to be selected. The tagnames and properties are displayed in a table. hold the Ctrl key. right-click on one of the selected tagnames. The tabular view shows a subset of the tagname properties which can be sorted or changed by inserting or deleting columns. You can change the size of the columns and the properties that are displayed. 2 Perform any of these actions. Action Sort by property Description Click the column heading of the property you want to sort by. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Make changes to the properties and click Apply. This action cannot be undone. v4. The changes are applied to all the tagnames in the selection. See Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on page 33 for more information about project version numbers. selecting the tagnames. click the top tagname.9. In the Tagname Declarations tree. Change multiple tagnames Sort and select the tagnames to be changed. or right-click the column heading and select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. hold the Shift key. To select a non-contiguous group. For example.0 . Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. making one or more changes to existing tagnames prior to the next download will cause the project’s minor version number to be increased by one.Tagnames 181 Changing Multiple Tagnames This procedure explains how to change the properties of multiple tagnames by using a tabular view of the tagnames. right-click a tagname. v4. Procedure 1 2 On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree. Enter the new name and press Enter.9. Renaming a Tagname This procedure explains how to rename a tagname. See Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on page 33 for more information about project version numbers. Procedure 1 On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree. right-click a tagname. If the tagname already exists. a message warns you that deleting the tagname may result in unresolved tagnames or that the tagname is in use. See Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on page 33 for more information about project version numbers. deleting one or more tagnames prior to the next download will cause the project’s minor version number to be increased by one. making one or more changes to existing tagnames prior to the next download will cause the project’s minor version number to be increased by one. a message is displayed and you must enter another name. Deleting a Tagname This procedure explains how to delete a tagname. Note Once you have downloaded your project to the controller. Note Once you have downloaded your project to the controller. and then click Rename.0 . and then click Delete. the message is similar to this screen: TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. If the tagname is already in use. the project’s minor (second) version number is updated.182 Chapter 2 Application Development If you change a tagname after a project has been downloaded. If you deleted the tagname from the Tagname Declarations tree. you can customize the table to display properties that are useful to you. click No or Cancel. You can reorder the columns by clicking a column heading and dragging it to another location. Right-click in the column heading to the right of where you want to insert another column. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. v4. By inserting columns.Tagnames 183 If you deleted the tagname from the program Declarations tree. and then click OK. This action cannot be undone.0 . and then select Insert Column.9. 3 Select the name of the column to be inserted. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the message is similar to this screen: 2 To cancel. click Yes or OK. This action displays an additional tagname property in the table. and click Display Tabular View. Inserting a Column into the Tagnames Table This procedure explains how to insert a column into the Tagnames table. right-click the Tagname Declarations folder. To confirm deletion of the tagname. The column is removed from the table. v4. Right-click in the heading of the column you want to delete. Each time you declare a new tagname (whether it is used in a program or not).0 . Think of undeclared tagnames as the number of “free” points that are available for use in your application. Topics include: • • • • • What Are Undeclared Tagnames? on page 184 What Are Unused Tagnames? on page 186 Displaying Undeclared and Unused Tagnames on page 186 Editing Unused Tagnames on page 187 Deleting Unused Tagnames on page 188 What Are Undeclared Tagnames? Undeclared tagnames are tagnames (also referred to as points) that have been created but not named. see Inserting a Column into the Tagnames Table on page 183. Note You can add a deleted column to the table again at any time. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and click Display Tabular View. They have a Tag name attribute of {not yet named}. They are not listed under Tagname Declarations in the Application Workspace. you might want to view colors set for False by adding the False Color column and then sorting by the column. See Allocating Memory for Tricon Points on page 251 or Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points on page 317. Managing Undeclared and Unused Tagnames This section explains how to manage undeclared and unused tagnames. They have the following characteristics: • • • They are not yet associated with any global tagnames.184 Chapter 2 Application Development Deleting a Column from the Tagnames Table This procedure explains how to delete a column from the Tagnames table. This action removes the column from the table so you can display another column. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree.9. For example. and then select Delete This Column. You control the total number of undeclared tagnames via the amount of memory you have allocated for points. right-click the Tagname Declarations folder. the total number of undeclared tagnames decreases by one. The Tagname column cannot be deleted. • • Of these points. Note Undeclared tagnames are not counted against the 2.Tagnames 185 Example In this example. because while they have been allocated. Remember. v4. you can increase or decrease the number of available points by changing the amount of memory allocated for points. only 8 have been added to a program (see What Are Unused Tagnames? on page 186). you can declare 631 more unaliased memory BOOL points. 8 have been used and 9 have been forecast (declared). 631 points appear in the Undeclared Tagnames list.9. See Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program on page 169 for more information. • • Thus. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. they have not yet been declared (640 allocated . because while 9 points have been declared. The 9 declared points will appear in the Tagname Declarations tree.9 declared = 631 undeclared).000 tagnames per program limit. One point will also appear in the Unused Tagnames list. memory has been allocated to allow for 640 unaliased memory BOOL points.0 . based on the current memory allocation. as shown in the Memory Allocation Item Properties dialog box. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Input. which contain the lists of undeclared and unused tagnames. and Output. function. Tagnames with invalid attributes imported from external sources will remain unassociated with any global tagnames until they are renamed using the procedures outlined in Renaming a Tagname on page 182. v4. The Unused Points or Undeclared Points tree appears. but have not yet been used in a program. Unused tagnames: • Are already associated with global tagnames using the procedures outlined in Declaring Tagnames on page 172.186 Chapter 2 Application Development What Are Unused Tagnames? Unused tagnames are tagnames that have been declared.0 . Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree and double-click the folder that contains the tagnames you wish to display—Undeclared or Unused Tagnames. Have not yet been used in any program. or function block in the project.9. Note The Undeclared Tagnames and Unused Tagnames lists are for information only and cannot be edited. The Undeclared Points and Unused Points trees are further divided by point type: Memory. Displaying Undeclared and Unused Tagnames The Application Workspace tree includes the Undeclared Tagnames and Unused Tagnames folders. with the list of items displayed in the right pane. Undeclared Tagnames Folder Unused Tagnames Folder 2 Double-click the item in the folder you wish to display—Undeclared Points or Unused Points. • • Are listed under Tagname Declarations in the Application Workspace. Editing Unused Tagnames You cannot make changes to a tagname’s attributes while viewing the unused tagnames list. All tagname editing must be performed via the Tagname Declarations tree in the Application Workspace. v4. double-click on the tagname you want to edit. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . To edit unused tagnames. as needed. see What Are Undeclared Tagnames? on page 184. see Editing Unused Tagnames on page 187. Make changes to the tagnames attributes. Undeclared tagnames cannot be edited. Procedure 1 2 On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree.9. The list views for undeclared and unused tagnames are read-only.Tagnames 187 3 Sort the list view in ascending or descending order by clicking the desired column header. See Declaring Tagnames on page 172 for detailed attribute information. you may want to review the list of unused tagnames. right-click the Tagname Declarations folder. To confirm deletion of the tagname. telling you the total number of unused tagnames that will be deleted and asking if you want to continue. and then click Delete Unreferenced Tagnames. A message appears. click No. Procedure 1 In the Application Workspace. 2 To cancel. v4.9. Note Because you cannot recover deleted tagnames. or function block—can be quickly deleted all at one time. This action cannot be undone. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. before performing this procedure. function. click Yes. to be sure you want to delete them.0 .188 Chapter 2 Application Development Deleting Unused Tagnames Unused tagnames—those that are not being used in a program. See Managing Undeclared and Unused Tagnames on page 184. file name.Importing and Exporting Tagnames 189 Importing and Exporting Tagnames This section explains how to import and export tagnames using a file with point information. Click Export. File formats you can export to include: • • • • • dBASE™ (dbf) Microsoft Access® (mdb) Microsoft Excel® (xls) Comma delimited text file (txt or csv) Matrikon OPC XML Data file (xml) Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. Topics include: • • • • • • Exporting Tagname Properties on page 189 Format of an Exported Tagname File on page 190 Preparing an Excel File for Import on page 192 File Format Requirements for Tagname Import on page 193 Import Options and Validation Criteria on page 195 Importing Tagname Properties on page 196 Exporting Tagname Properties This procedure explains how to export tagname properties to a file.9. and file type to save the tagname information. right-click the Tagname Declarations folder. 2 3 Select the location. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . v4. and click Export. a real value RETENTIVE Retentive flag: if R. see Names Reserved by SQL on page 688.0 . N = Non-retentive R = Retentive IOP IOP number (1) (Trident or Tri-GP) TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. from 0 to 42000 TAGTYPE The data type: D = Discrete (BOOL) I = Integer (DINT) R = Real (REAL) TAGCLASS The data class: I = Input O = Output M = Memory INITVALUE The initial value: For BOOL.190 Chapter 2 Application Development If you enter a file name longer than eight characters. from 0 to 49999 For Trident and Tri-GP. Table 27 TAGNAME DESCRIP GROUP1 GROUP2 ALIASTYPE Exported Tagname File Format Description The tagname for the point. Must be 31 characters or less to be a valid IEC 61131-3 identifier. The Group1 description. For Tricon. the value is retained if a power outage shuts down the controller. The description for the point. Format of an Exported Tagname File The exported file includes these columns. you are warned that you may need to rename the file if you want to import it to a TriStation 1131 project. For a list of these names. The Group2 description The alias type for the point: U = Unaliased R = Read-only aliased W = Read/Write aliased Point Property ALIASNUM The alias number for the point. True or False For DINT. Note Some names cannot be used as file names when exporting tagnames to Microsoft Excel files. v4. an integer value For REAL.9. Importing and Exporting Tagnames 191 Table 27 SLOT POINT CHASSIS SLOT POINT MIN SPAN Exported Tagname File Format Description Slot number (1 - 6) (Trident or Tri-GP) Point number (1 - 32) (Trident or Tri-GP) Chassis number (0 - 15) (Tricon) Slot number (0 - 8) (Tricon) Point number (0 - 64) (Tricon) The lower limit for REAL in Engineering Units; the default is –32767.00. The range is –3.402823466e+38 to +3.402823466e+38. Must be less than the MAX SPAN value. Point Property MAX SPAN Upper limit for REAL in Engineering Units; the default is 32767.00. The range is –3.402823466e+38 to +3.402823466e+38. Must be greater than the MAX SPAN value. DECPL SCALING Decimal places for displaying Real variables. (Corresponds to the Precision property and Min/Max Accuracy field in the Import Wizard.) Scaling flag: if S, real numbers are scaled. N = Non-scaling S = Scaling For more information, see Disable Scaling on page 513. APPLICATION Application flag: C = Control S = Safety SHARED FALSE STATE TRUE STATE FALSE COLOR TRUE COLOR Shared for Read flag: Y = Yes, N = No Text. For example, False or Zero. Text. For example, True or Zero. Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Yellow, Pink, and White are allowed. Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Yellow, Pink, and White are allowed. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 192 Chapter 2 Application Development Preparing an Excel File for Import This procedure explains how to prepare a Microsoft Excel file if you created the file from scratch or renamed a previously exported file. This procedure does not have to be performed if you exported tagnames to an Excel file, modified the contents, but did not change the file name. Procedure 1 2 Open an Excel file that contains tagname data. Ensure the data is formatted as follows: • • • All cells must have the Format setting as Text. The Tagname, Data Type, and Point Type cells are required. The values in these cells must be numeric and must begin with a single quotation mark (’): Alias Number, Initial Value, Chassis, Slot, Point, Min Span, Max Span, and Display Precision. 3 4 5 Select the range of data cells to be included by selecting the headings and cells. Do not select empty records. On the Insert menu, click Name, then Define. In the Define Name dialog box, enter the new name (in this example, NewTagnames) in the text box, and then click Add. Select the names to delete (in this example, tagnames), click Delete, and then click OK. Ensure the Refers to range reference at the bottom of the screen includes information. If it is blank, repeat step 3 through step 6. 6 7 To verify the table name was created, click the Name Box list box. Name Box All the records (columns and rows) should be highlighted. If not, repeat steps 4 and 5. 8 Save the file. The file is ready to be imported. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Importing and Exporting Tagnames 193 File Format Requirements for Tagname Import This section describes the requirements for database or text files with tagnames to be imported into a TriStation 1131 project. Note You cannot delete existing tagname information by importing a database or text file with blank fields where the existing data resides. Importing a file only updates or creates tagname data. Blank fields for existing tagnames are ignored, so that any existing information will remain as-is. Blank fields may be imported for new tagnames only; see the following table for instructions. However, you can create a “blank” field for an existing tagname by typing spaces to replace the existing data. The field will then appear blank. After the import is complete, you can remove the spaces from the field to create a true blank field by editing the tagname’s properties; see Changing Multiple Tagnames on page 181. Table 28 Item Filename Table or Lines General File Requirements Database File Must be 8 characters or less. Each row must contain columns mapped to these point properties: • Tag Name • Tag Type • Tag Class Text File Must be 8 characters or less. Must have a consistent format; the same number of fields in each line. Each line must contain fields mapped to these point properties: • Tag Name • Tag Type • Tag Class Must be delimited by commas with no spaces before or after. Can include more than 22 fields, but only 22 fields can be mapped. Blank fields (for new tagnames only) must be represented as follows: • For a blank numeric field, use two commas with no spaces between. • For a blank string field, use two quotation marks with no spaces between. Columns or Fields Can include more columns than the number of fields to be imported, but no more than one column can be mapped to each point property. Column headings can be any name. Blank numeric fields and blank string fields are allowed for new tagnames only (in .DBF or .XLS files). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 194 Chapter 2 Application Development Table 29 Import Data Requirements Description The tagname for the point. Must be 31 characters or less to be a valid IEC 611313 identifier. Can be any string of letters, digits, and underscores provided that the first character is not a digit and there are not two or more underscore characters together. The description for the point; cannot be more than 131 characters. The Group1 description; cannot be more than 63 characters. The Group2 description; cannot be more than 63 characters. The alias type for the point: U = Unaliased R = Read-Only aliased W = Read/Write aliased Point Property TAGNAME DESCRIP GROUP1 GROUP2 ALIAS TYPE ALIAS NUMBER The alias number for the point. For Tricon, from 0 to 49999 For Trident or Tri-GP, from 0 to 42000 TAG TYPE The data type: D = Discrete (BOOL) I = Integer (DINT) R = Real (REAL) TAG CLASS The data class: I = Input O = Output M = Memory INITIAL VALUE The initial value: For BOOL, True or False For DINT, an integer value For REAL, a real value RETENTIVE FLAG Retentive flag: if R, the value is retained if a power outage shuts down the controller. N = Non-retentive R = Retentive IOP SLOT POINT CHASSIS SLOT POINT IOP number (1) (Trident or Tri-GP) Slot number (1 - 6) (Trident or Tri-GP) Point number (1 - 32) (Trident or Tri-GP) Chassis number (0 - 15) (Tricon) Slot number (0 - 8) (Tricon) Point number (0 - 64) (Tricon) TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Importing and Exporting Tagnames 195 Table 29 Import Data Requirements (continued) Description The lower limit for REAL in Engineering Units; the default is –32767.00. The range is –3.402823466e+38 to +3.402823466e+38. Must be less than the MAX SPAN value. Point Property MIN SPAN MAX SPAN Upper limit for REAL in Engineering Units; the default is 32767.00. The range is –3.402823466e+38 to +3.402823466e+38. Must be greater than the MAX SPAN value. DISPLAY PRECISION Decimal places to display MIN SPAN and MAX SPAN properties. Limited to 125 digits. REAL values are set to 1. BOOL and DINT values are set to 0. SCALING Scaling flag: if S, real numbers are scaled. N = Non-scaling S = Scaling For more information, see Disable Scaling on page 513. APPLICATION Application flag: C = Control S = Safety SHARED READ FALSE STATE TRUE STATE FALSE COLOR TRUE COLOR Shared for Read flag: Y = Yes, N = No Text. For example, False or Zero. Text. For example, True or Zero. Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Yellow, Pink, and White are allowed. Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Yellow, Pink, and White are allowed. Import Options and Validation Criteria When importing tagname information from a database or file, you can specify whether to update, add, or update and add new tagnames. Adding New Points If the imported tagname includes a tagname, tag type (BOOL, DINT, or REAL), tag class (input, output, or memory), and alias type (R for Read, W for read/write, or U for no alias), the tagname is imported. If the tagname matches an existing tagname or is invalid in any way, a message is displayed alerting you of the problem or error when the import operation is complete, but the tagname is still imported. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 196 Chapter 2 Application Development Updating Existing Points If the imported tagname matches a tagname, tag type (BOOL, DINT, or REAL), and tag class (input, output, or memory), the tagname is updated. All fields, with the exception of the TAGNAME field (see below), can be updated for an existing tagname. If an updated value is invalid in any way, a message is displayed alerting you of the error when the import operation is complete, but the attribute is still changed to the new value. Updating the TAGNAME field for an existing tagname will create a new tagname. The existing tagname will be retained. For example, if you update the TAGNAME field for the tagname Counter1 by changing it to Counter10, after the import process is complete, you will have two tagnames: Counter1 AND Counter10. Importing Tagname Properties This procedure explains how to import tagname properties from a file. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree, right-click Tagname Declarations, and click Import. Note The project you are importing tagnames into must be in the Download All state. If the project is not in the Download All state, the Import menu option is disabled. Use the Change State to Download All Command on page 492 to change the project state before continuing this procedure. 2 Click Select Import Data File and go to the folder that contains the file. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Importing and Exporting Tagnames 197 If the file is not displayed, you may need to change the type of file to match the extension used in the file to be imported. 3 4 Click the file name and click Select. Click Next to continue. On the Link Data Fields screen, match the source fields to the tagname properties by clicking a field in the list on the left, and a tagname property in the list on the right, and then clicking Link. The following required tagname properties must be linked before continuing: • • • Data Type Point Type Tag Name 5 6 Once fields and properties are linked, click Next. On the Select Import Options screen, select options as needed. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 198 Chapter 2 Application Development 7 8 Click Next to continue. Read the Review Your Request screen. Click Finish to continue, or Back to make changes. 9 Review the status of the records on the Data Import Validation Result screen. • If there are errors, close the screen, edit the data, and then go back to step 1 to import the file again. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Importing and Exporting Tagnames 199 • If you selected the Validate option on the Select Import Options screen and there are no errors, click Commit Records to import the data. This action cannot be undone. This table describes the status of the imported records. Status Ignored Added Error Updated Description The import record is mapped to an existing point that has the same properties, so the import record is being ignored. A new record is being added to the configuration. The import record has been rejected due to one or more errors. The import record is updating properties of an existing point. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 200 Chapter 2 Application Development Annotations and Comments This section describes how to use annotations and comments in an FBD or LD program or function. Topics include: • • • • • • • • Adding Annotations on page 200 Specifying Annotation Properties on page 202 Adding a Comment on page 203 Specifying Comment Style on page 204 Picking and Dropping Elements for Comments on page 205 Editing Comment Fields on page 206 Using Macros with Annotations and Comments on page 206 Editing Macro Text on page 208 Adding Annotations This procedure explains how to add an annotation to a constant, tagname, or variable. Annotations can be used to display descriptive text, including information specified in system and user-modifiable macros. You can also display the value of a variable during program execution in the Emulator or controller. To have annotations automatically included for all new elements, see Specifying Annotation Options on page 37 and Using Macros with Annotations and Comments on page 206. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree, and open an FBD or LD program or function. Double-click the graphic for a constant, tagname, or variable. The Item Properties dialog box appears. 3 4 Select the Annotate check box. For constants, the check box is on the Constant tab. For tagname references and variables, the check box is on the Variable tab. Click the Annotation tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Annotations and Comments 201 5 6 To add text, enter the text in the annotation area. To add a macro: • Click Macros. The Edit Macros dialog box appears. • • • • 7 Select a macro to be added. To change the value of a macro identified by a pencil icon, double-click the macro, enter the value, and click OK. With the macro selected, press Ctrl+C to copy the macro. Click OK to close the Edit Macros dialog box. Click in the annotation area, and press Ctrl+V to paste the macro. For variables, select the Include Monitor Value in Annotation check box to display the value of the variable in the Controller or Emulator Panel. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 202 Chapter 2 Application Development Specifying Annotation Properties This procedure explains how to specify text and macros to be included with an annotation. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree, and open an FBD or LD program or function. On the logic sheet, double-click an annotation. The Item Properties dialog box appears, with the Annotation tab selected. 3 Specify these properties on the Annotation tab. Property Annotation Text Include Monitor Value in Annotation Macros Command Action Enter the text and/or macros to be used in the annotation. Select the check box to display the value of the variable in the annotation when the element is run on the controller or Emulator. Click to add macros to the annotation. See Using Macros with Annotations and Comments on page 206. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Annotations and Comments 203 Adding a Comment This procedure explains how to add comment text in FBD and LD programs. Comments are used to add information about operations performed by a program, function, or function block. There is no limitation on the number of comment boxes per program or their placement on a logic sheet. If you draw a comment box around a project element it is ignored when you compile the element. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Expand the Application tree, and open an FBD or LD program or function. On the toolbar, click the icon for comments . On the logic sheet, click and drag to create the comment box. Double-click the comment box to display the Comment properties. 5 Specify these properties on the Comment tab. Property Comment Text Alignment Text Size Border Macros Command Action Enter the text to be included as a comment. Can include text and macros. Select how to align the text. The default is left. Select the point size for the text; from 3 to 24 points. Select whether to include a border around an annotation or comment box.The default is single. Click to view macros that can be included with the comment text. To copy, click the macro and press Ctrl + C. To paste, return to the Comment tab and press Ctrl + V. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 204 Chapter 2 Application Development Specifying Comment Style This procedure explains how to specify style features used with comments. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree, and open an FBD or LD program or function. Double-click a comment, and then click the Style tab. 3 Specify these properties on the Style tab. Property Expand Macros Action Select this check box to display the value of the macro when the application is run on the Emulator or controller. For example, if expanded, the macro %DATE_CREATED displays the month, day, and year when the project was created. The default is cleared. Select this check box to list the user-modifiable macros on the Edit Fields tab, which allows you to edit the value for the macro. The default is cleared. Select this check box to move the selected comment box behind a logic element. This affects the appearance of the logic sheet only; it does not affect the execution of the logic element. Move the comment box to the desired position before selecting this option. Once this option is selected, the comment box cannot be moved. To move the comment box after this option has been selected, double-click the comment box to access the Properties dialog box, and then clear this option. The default is cleared. Enable Macro Editing Move Behind Logic Elements TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Note To use the Pickup and Drop commands. This is useful for isolating logic during testing or troubleshooting. Elements in comment boxes are ignored when you compile the program.0 . click the Pickup/Drop tab. click the Pickup/Drop tab. and open an FBD or LD program or function. You can also remove captured elements from a comment by selecting the comment and dropping the elements back onto the logic sheet. Drop Command TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. 3 Specify these commands on the Pickup/Drop tab. To remove elements from the comment. Double-click a comment. click and drag the comment box so it entirely covers the elements to be captured.9. see Specifying Comment Style on page 204. double-click the comment box. the Move Behind Logic Elements option cannot be selected. Double-click the comment. Command Pickup Command Action To pick up elements to include in the comment. then click Drop. and then click the Pickup/Drop tab. v4. and then click Pickup.Annotations and Comments 205 Picking and Dropping Elements for Comments This procedure explains how to pick up and drop elements from a comment box. For more information about this option. are values you can specify. For example. • CAUTION TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the %CREATED_ BY macro includes the user ID of the person who created the element. and open an FBD or LD program or function. the %APPROVED_NAME macro can include any name you enter. Change the text used for the macro. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. Macros can be used only in FBD and LD development.9. You cannot change values for these macros. For example. you change it for ALL annotations and comments in the project that use the macro. Click OK to save the change. When you change the value of a macro.206 Chapter 2 Application Development Editing Comment Fields This procedure explains how to modify the comment text if the comment includes a macro that can be edited and the macro is enabled for editing. identified by a pencil icon . and then click the Edit Fields tab. The value is displayed when the element is run on the controller or Emulator. Using Macros with Annotations and Comments This procedure explains how to use macros in an annotation or comment. User-modifiable macros. 3 4 5 Select a field and then click Modify. Double-click a comment. Macros are placeholders for text or information supplied by the system or by you.0 . v4. There are two types of macros: • System macros are values supplied by the system and cannot be changed. click inside the text area and paste the macro by pressing Ctrl+V. 5 6 Click OK to close the Edit Macros dialog box.9. Do either of these: • • 3 For a comment. To add the copied macro to the annotation or comment. v4. select the macro and copy it by pressing Ctrl+C. or sheet to view the macros available for those elements.Annotations and Comments 207 Procedure 1 2 Expand the Application tree. . You are returned to the Item Properties dialog box. document. and click the Macros button. If needed.0 . double-click the comment. Click the Annotation tab. click Modify and then make the change. To copy a macro to an annotation or comment. select the check boxes for project. identified by a pencil icon select the macro. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 4 Do any of the following: • • To change the value of a user-modifiable macro. Double-click a variable or tagname reference. then click the Macros button. and open an FBD or LD program or function. Double-click a comment. or variable. Click the Edit Fields tab. tagname.9. constant. Click OK to save. v4.208 Chapter 2 Application Development Editing Macro Text This procedure explains how to edit text associated with a macro. 4 5 Enter the text to be used when the macro is displayed. and then click Modify. You can include text and macros that supply information from the system. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Application tree.0 . The Item Properties dialog box appears. select the field to be changed. and open an FBD or LD program or function. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Trident and Tri-GP Functionality The Trident and Tri-GP controllers have serial ports on the CM and MP that provide options for communication with a Modbus devices. slave. The Tricon controller has serial ports on the EICM. The master can also be an operator workstation or other device that is programmed to support Modbus devices.9. transfer line control. each CM port can operate in a multipoint configuration with several Modbus devices connected to a serial link. pipeline monitoring. Tricon Functionality A Tricon controller with an EICM or TCM can operate as a Modbus master. Each serial port can operate in a point-to-point configuration with a single Modbus device.Modbus Applications 209 Modbus Applications This section describes information related to developing a Modbus application. while the Tricon acts as a slave. Modbus is an industry-standard master/slave communication protocol that is traditionally used for energy management.0 . and network and serial ports on the TCM that provide options for communication with a Modbus devices. or both. or in a multi-point configuration with several Modbus devices connected to a serial link. and other industrial processes. A DCS typically acts as the master. Topics include: • • • • • • • Assigning Alias Numbers to Tagnames on page 210 How Tricon Transmits REAL Values With Special Alias Numbers on page 211 Tricon Special Alias Numbers on page 212 How REAL Numbers are Scaled to Integers on page 213 Scaling REAL Values to Integers on page 215 How Trident and Tri-GP REAL Values are Transmitted Without Scaling on page 217 Disabling Scaling of REAL Values for Trident and Tri-GP Tagnames on page 218 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. In addition. Each CM and MP port can operate in a point-to-point configuration with a single Modbus device. v4. or Read/Write Aliased. v4.210 Chapter 2 Application Development Assigning Alias Numbers to Tagnames This procedure explains how to assign an alias number for input.0 . Note Using the Print All command. 3 Specify these properties on the Point Assignment tab.9. the physical address must be specified before an alias number can be assigned. Click the Point Assignment tab. and then click the Declaration button. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. and memory points. double-click a tagname. Procedure 1 Open a tagname by doing either of these: • • 2 On the Tagname Declarations tree. you can print a report listing Modbus alias information for each tagname in the project (Tagnames: Modbus Aliases). Select the check box to allow the point to be written to multiple times in a scan. and then click Apply. The default is cleared. enter a number within the range. Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet. Alias Number Physical Address Enable Multiple Writes TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. specify either Read Aliased. For input and output points. (Input and output points can only be Read Aliased. output. See Important Information About Alias Numbers on page 174 for additional information about assigning alias numbers. Property Alias Type Action For memory points. specify either User alias or Default alias.) For aliased memory points. If User alias. The Tricon controller splits the 32-bit REAL value into two 16-bit integers and places them in the special aliases to be read by the Modbus master. You can avoid this behavior by always using the User alias setting to define your own alias numbers and keep control of assigned aliases. One Modbus integer is mapped to the 16 most significant bits and the other Modbus integer is mapped to the 16 least significant bits in the REAL number. v4. Figure 18 Modbus Master Reading REAL Values from the Tricon Writing REAL Values This figure shows a Modbus master writing a REAL value to the Tricon controller by transmitting two 16-bit integer values to two consecutive special aliases. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. these aliases can be automatically re-assigned under certain circumstances. The controller concatenates the two 16-bit integers to form a 32-bit REAL value. TriStation 1131 will re-use the alias number of the deleted tagname. For example.9. To cancel your changes and restore the original settings. Once you click Apply. 4 To set the alias number. The Modbus master can also read and write values by using a scaled value in an alias number. click Restore before clicking Apply. you cannot revert to the original settings. How Tricon Transmits REAL Values With Special Alias Numbers This section explains how the Tricon controller transmits REAL values for tagnames by using special alias numbers which map one 32-bit REAL value into two 16-bit Modbus integers.0 . Reading REAL Values This figure shows a Modbus master reading a REAL value from two consecutive special aliases which correspond to a REAL alias. click Apply. if another tagname using the Default alias setting is deleted. the next time you build the application.Modbus Applications 211 Note When you select Default alias as the alias number for memory point tagnames. . . . 34000 Memory REAL. 44239 45001 45003 . .or . . . . . . . . 44240 45002 45004 . . Read/Write 41001 41002 . The Most and Least columns refer to the most significant and least significant bits. . . Read Only 33001 33002 . . . .or . 44000 . . . . .212 Chapter 2 Application Development Figure 19 Modbus Master Writing REAL Values to the Tricon Tricon Special Alias Numbers This table lists the special alias numbers used for read and write operations with REAL tagnames. . . . 47000 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. .or Most 44001 44003 . 36999 42001 42003 . 46999 Least 44002 44004 . 34240 35002 35004 . . v4. 42000 34001 34003 . . . 43999 Special Aliases Least 34002 34004 .9. . . .0 . . .or . . . . Variable Type Aliases Most Input REAL.or . 37000 42002 42004 . 32120 Memory REAL. . . Read Only 32001 32002 .or . . 34239 35001 35003 . . . 9. Scaling Integer Values to REAL Values This figure shows how a Modbus master writes an integer value to the Triconex controller. where it is scaled to a REAL value. When a Modbus master reads a 32-bit REAL variable from a Triconex slave. v4. the controller scales the integer to a 32-bit REAL number before using it in the TriStation 1131 application. If a REAL value is scaled.Modbus Applications 213 How REAL Numbers are Scaled to Integers This section explains how 32-bit REAL scaled numbers are transmitted in Modbus protocol. the Minimum Value (Min Span) and Maximum Value (Max Span) for the tagname. Values above the Max Span or below the Min Span are clamped to the respective limit. The same principle applies to values outside the Modbus range. (Modbus Value – Modbus Min) + Minspan (Modbus Max – Modbus Min) This figure shows how scaling is done.0 . Figure 20 How Triconex Controller Scales a Integer Value to a REAL Value Scaling an integer to a REAL value uses this formula: (MaxSpan – MinSpan) Real Value = -----------------------------------------------------------------------. and the Modbus minimum (Modbus Min) and maximum (Modbus Max) range set for the Modbus Range property. Scaled REAL numbers use a formula that includes the value of the tagname. which uses 16-bit integers. these operations occur: • • When a Modbus master writes a 16-bit integer to a Triconex slave. the controller scales the REAL variable to a 16-bit integer before transmitting it. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. #IND) or infinity (1.#INF). Values above the Max Span or below the Min Span are clamped to the respective limit.0 . the result is one of the floating point standard special numbers: NAN (not a number: -1. (Real Value – MinSpan) + ModbusMin (Maxspan – MinSpan) This figure shows how scaling is done. do not set Modbus Max equal to Modbus Min—the REAL value result is undefined. Scaling REAL Values to Integer Values This figure shows how a Modbus master reads a REAL value which has been scaled to an integer. For the Trident.6 and later controllers. v4.214 Chapter 2 Application Development Figure 21 Scaling an Integer Value to a REAL Value To avoid division by zero. Tri-GP. or Tricon v9.9. The same principle applies to values outside the Modbus range. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Figure 22 How the Modbus Master Reads a REAL Value Scaled to an Integer Value Scaling a REAL value to an integer value uses this formula: (Modbus Max – Modbus Min) Modbus Value = -----------------------------------------------------------------------. Scaling may be needed to transmit numbers through Modbus protocol. Scaling REAL Values to Integers This procedure explains how to scale a REAL value to an integer.Modbus Applications 215 Figure 23 Scaling a REAL Value to an Integer Value To avoid division by zero. do not set Max Span equal to Min Span—the resulting Modbus value is undefined. Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet. Procedure 1 Open a tagname by doing either of these: • • 2 On the Tagname Declarations tree. v4. Numbers are scaled by using minimum (Min Span) and maximum (Max Span) values for the point and minimum and maximum values for the Modbus Range. 3 Specify these properties on the Scaling tab.0 . which uses 16-bit integer numbers. Typically. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. double-click a tagname.9. the result is -1. and then click the Declaration button. for a Triconex controller. Click the Scaling tab. 0.9. Enter the maximum value to be used to scale the REAL number to an integer.x or Tri-GP CM Serial Ports on page 348 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is 32767. Enter the number of decimal points to be used. Scaling cannot be disabled on the Tricon. do not select this check box. The default is -32768. must be more than the minimum value. must be less than the maximum value.x MP Network Ports on page 330 Configuring Trident v1. The default is blank.0.x CM Serial Ports on page 344 Configuring Trident v2. The default is cleared. To allow scaling of REAL numbers to integers.0 . v4. specify the Modbus minimum and maximum range. On the Setup dialog box for the communication module. See the following sections for detailed instructions: • • • • • Configuring Tricon EICM Ports on page 274 Configuring TCM Serial Ports on page 280 Configuring Trident 1.216 Chapter 2 Application Development Property Minimum Value (Min Span) Maximum Value (Max Span) Precision Disable Scaling Action Enter the minimum value to be used to scale the REAL number to an integer. 4 5 Click Apply to save your changes. these operations occur: • • • A Modbus master reads the least significant 16 bits of a 32-bit number which is derived from the integer and decimal parts of a 32-bit REAL value. For more information. This figure shows the standard format for REAL values. A Modbus slave sends the least significant 16 bits of a 32-bit number. v4.0 . which uses 16-bit integers. see IEE Std 754-1985. A Modbus master writes a REAL value as two consecutive 16-bit integer aliases which the Trident or Tri-GP controller concatenates to form a 32-bit REAL value.Modbus Applications 217 How Trident and Tri-GP REAL Values are Transmitted Without Scaling This section explains how 32-bit REAL unscaled numbers are transmitted in Modbus protocol. This applies only to Trident and Tri-GP controllers. Figure 24 Standard Format for REAL Values TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. If a REAL value is not scaled. which adheres to the IEE Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The Item Properties dialog box appears. 3 4 On the Scaling tab. Scaling cannot be disabled for Tricon. The default setting is to use scaling. Click OK to apply and save.9. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. v4.218 Chapter 2 Application Development Disabling Scaling of REAL Values for Trident and Tri-GP Tagnames This procedure explains how to disable scaling on a specific REAL tagname. 2 Click the Scaling tab. The default is cleared. and double-click a tagname which is a REAL data type and is not to be scaled.0 . select the Disable Scaling check box to ensure the point is not scaled. These time periods are a function of the following parameters of the sending and receiving controllers: • • • • • Scan time Configuration size Number of bytes for aliased variables Number of Send function blocks. Consequently. if you have one of the following communication modules installed. For information on the Send and Receive function blocks used for Peer-to-Peer communication. printing function blocks. Additional time (at least two scans) is required for a sending node to get an acknowledgment from the MPs that the message has been acted on. The number of send operations initiated in a scan is limited to five.9. the processtolerance time of the receiving controller must be greater than 5 seconds.0 . Also. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference. The number of pending send operations is limited to 10. send the message over the network. Process-tolerance time is the maximum length of time that can elapse before your control algorithms fail to operate correctly.Peer-to-Peer Applications 219 Peer-to-Peer Applications This section explains how to use Peer-to-Peer communication to allow Triconex controllers to send and receive information from each other.x or Tri-GP CM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 352 Topics include: • • • Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time on page 219 Estimating the Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time on page 220 Allocating Peer-to-Peer Memory on page 221 Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time In a Peer-to-Peer application. and Modbus master function blocks Number of controllers on the Peer-to-Peer network Send function blocks require multiple scans to transfer data from the sending controller to the receiving controller. v4. and the time-out limit for a Peer-to-Peer send (including three retries) is 5 seconds. further analysis of your process is required. Peer-to-Peer communication is performed through Send and Receive function blocks included in the application.x or Tri-GP CM: Configuring Trident v2. data transfer time includes the time required to initiate a send operation. see: • • Tricon TCM: Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 287 Trident v2. and have the message read by the receiving node. Receive function blocks. A typical data transfer time (based on a typical scan time) is 1 to 2 seconds. If these limitations are not acceptable. and double-click Configuration. click Memory Points. Add the results. DINT. and aliased memory points. or Output Points. Enter the number in step 1 of the following worksheet. expand the Controller tree. click Memory Allocation. DINT. The more memory allocated for aliased points. 9.01 5. Procedure 1 2 On the sending controller. and REAL points and enter the numbers in step 3. Enter the number of bytes for each point type on the receiving controller and divide or multiply as indicated. Steps 1. and REAL points: • • On the Configuration tree.9. 3 On the receiving controller. 6. Multiply the larger of TR or SR by 2. 7. Multiply the total bytes sending (TBS) from step 1 by 0. the slower the transfer time.220 Chapter 2 Application Development Estimating the Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time This procedure explains how to estimate the Peer-to-Peer data transfer time between a pair of Triconex controllers.01 3. Multiply the total bytes receiving (TBR) from step 3 by 0. If the number of pending send requests in the application is greater than 10. Add the results. Do the same for DINT and REAL points and enter the results in step 1. divide the number of send requests by 10. BOOL DINT REAL _________ _________ _________ TS = ÷8= x4= x4= Total bytes of aliased points TBR = 4.0 . On the Configuration tree. Multiply the larger of TS or SS by 2. Point Type BOOL DINT REAL Allocated Bytes _________ _________ _________ Operation ÷8= x4= x4= Result _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ DT= _________ _________ Total bytes of aliased points TBS = 2. Add the results of step 7 and 8 to get the data transfer time 10. Get the scan time of the sending node in milliseconds by viewing the Scan Time in the Execution List. TR = SS = SR = TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Find the bytes allocated for BOOL. 8. output. Double-click the graphic for the point type. Enter the number of bytes for each point type on the sending controller and divide or multiply as indicated. Input Points. v4. get the BOOL. Follow the instructions on the following worksheet to estimate the transfer time. Add the number of bytes allocated for all BOOL input. Get the scan time of the receiving node in milliseconds by viewing the Scan Period in the Execution List. For example. double-click Implementation. v4. Multiply the results of steps 9 and 10 to get the adjusted data transfer time. which is based on the maximum number of Send and Receive numbers you specify. and then click Peer-to-Peer Configuration. To save memory and minimize scan time. • • Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Sends Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Receives 3 If you want to change the settings for an application running on the controller. but need to receive messages from only one application. you should use the lowest possible numbers.9. A change in Peer-to-Peer allocation requires a Download All (see Using the Download All Command on page 480).Peer-to-Peer Applications 221 Steps Point Type Allocated Bytes Operation Adjusted DT Result 11. Allocating Peer-to-Peer Memory This procedure explains how to allocate memory for Peer-to-Peer functions. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. you must build the application and perform a Download All. _________ 12. a TriStation 1131 application might need to send messages to three applications.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The maximum number does not have to be the same for Sends and Receives. 2 Set these properties by clicking the up and down arrows. Compare the adjusted DT to the process-tolerance time to determine if it is acceptable. which displays the SOE blocks that have been configured.0 . and then enter the name (or partial name) of the tagname you want to find. double-click Implementation. To search for a tagname in the list.222 Chapter 2 Application Development SOE Development This section explains how to enable sequence of events collection in a project. v4. click on the corresponding list header. and click SOE Configuration. Events can be retrieved from a Triconex controller by using the Triconex SOE Recorder software.9. select Find. Procedure 1 Expand the Application tree. Topics include: • • • • Displaying the SOE Configuration on page 222 Defining SOE Block Properties on page 223 Assigning Tagnames to SOE Blocks on page 226 Specifying a Trip Variable on page 228 Displaying the SOE Configuration This procedure explains how to view the SOE Configuration screen. on the Edit menu. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. see the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide and the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. 2 Do any of the following: • • To sort by SOE block number or tagname. or by using a third-party OPC client to subscribe to the TCM’s embedded OPC server. For more information. see Defining SOE Block Properties on page 223. and then click Copy on the Edit menu. Each external block can be accessed by only one sequence of events utility. Defining SOE block properties is related to the general task of controller configuration and can be completed at the same time.0 . which is required if you are using sequence of events in an application. — To select all tagnames. To change the SOE block properties. Click Find Next to find the next matching tagname.SOE Development 223 — When you click Find First. — Wildcard searches are not supported. and it must be defined as an External Block Type. • To copy the SOE configuration information to the clipboard.9. if the TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The following table lists the types of SOE blocks that can be defined for each type of sequence of events recorder: If You’re Using This Sequence of Events Recorder: Triconex SOE Recorder Use These Types of SOE Blocks: • First Out • History • External Foxboro® I/A Series® DCS Honeywell™ TDC 3000 DCS • External • Modified External CAUTION When a Foxboro I/A Series DCS retrieves events via an ACM. v4. click Select All. the first tagname whose name matches the text you entered is selected in the list. or you can define them for limited operation when your controller is not on a network. You can define SOE blocks to provide continuous event information to external devices on a network. hold down CTRL (for a non-contiguous selection) or SHIFT (for a contiguous selection) while you click each tagname. • Defining SOE Block Properties This procedure explains how to define the properties of an SOE block. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. on the Edit menu. For example. — Copied SOE configuration information can be pasted into any word processing or spreadsheet application using the Paste command in the target application. • To print reports with SOE configuration information (Project Implementation and SOE Block Variables). select the tagnames you want to copy. use the Print All command. only one block can be configured. — To select multiple tagnames. and double-click a block number. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. A Note About Using OPC to Collect SOE Events If you have a model 4353 or 4354 TCM. v4. Expand the SOE Configuration tree. the events collected by the SOE block will be continually cleared by the TCM’s embedded OPC server. See the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide for instructions on specifying the blocks SOE Recorder can retrieve events from. Procedure 1 2 Click the Application tree. all change of state events (transitions) for tagnames assigned to the block you have defined for this purpose will be sent to the OPC client as simple events. see Configuring TCM Protocols (Tricon v10. However. SOE Recorder cannot also retrieve events from that same block. and double-click Implementation. An SOE block used for OPC must be configured with a block type of EXTERNAL. If you choose to use the TCM’s embedded OPC A&E server to obtain events from a controller.9. you cannot also use SOE Recorder to retrieve events from the same system. For more information about configuring the TCM’s OPC server. 3 Specify these settings on the SOE Block Definition tab. if an OPC client is not connected.0 .3 and Later Only) on page 292. When an OPC client is subscribed.224 Chapter 2 Application Development Foxboro I/A DCS workstation is retrieving events from an External SOE block. you can use a third-party OPC client to obtain Tricon SOE events through a subscription to the TCM’s embedded OPC Alarms & Events server. The buffer stores the event entries.000 events (1 MB). each containing a 8-byte time stamp and one or more 8-byte data entries. Blocks 1 through 14 can use any combination of History. Note: You cannot change the SOE Buffer Size while the project is in the Download Changes state. If you do not change the project state to Download All. SOE Buffer Size SOE Block Collection Type Select the event collection behavior type for the block. The maximum number is 20.000 events (320. If the project is currently in the Download Changes state. the buffer size will not be changed. The default is “soe_block_n. and External block types. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • First Out Block Type: Used to retrieve events that started a trip. The maximum buffer size across all blocks is 60.” where n is the block number.000 bytes). If you do not enter a block name. • Select Manual if you want the block’s events to be collected by an external DCS or an instance of SOE Recorder running in Custom mode. • Select Automatic if you want the block’s events to be automatically collected by an instance of SOE Recorder running in Primary. The default is unassigned. • Modified External Block Type: Used for event retrieval with the SMM. or Custom mode. a default name will be assigned automatically. Redundant.9. See Change State to Download All Command on page 492 for important information about the impact of changing the project state. • Historical Block Type: Used to monitor current events. Enter the number of events to be stored in this block. Blocks 15 and 16 can use only the Modified External block type.SOE Development 225 Property SOE Block Type Action Select one of the following block types: • External Block Type: Used when an external device. is continually retrieving events. SOE Block Name Enter a title for the block. such as a DCS or a PC running SOE Recorder. v4.0 . The default is Automatic. First Out. when you click Apply you will be prompted to change the project state to Download All. the default is 0. Assigning Tagnames to SOE Blocks This procedure explains how to assign tagnames to an SOE block. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all the blocks to be configured. 4 5 Note Click Apply to save your changes.0 .0 or later is required if you want to use Redundant or Custom mode. The default is Primary. For more detailed information about the Automatic and Manual block collection types. and the SOE Recorder block collection modes (Primary. See the Triconex SOE Recorder v4. and then select the Primary block you want this block to be a copy of. The only additional configuration you can do is to specify a type of External and a buffer size. You can designate one tagname in a TriStation 1131 application as the trip variable that notifies the operator when a trip occurs. if you define a block for use with the Advanced Communication Module (ACM). Tagname states can be displayed with names and colors that you define. Note: SOE Recorder v4. or Discrete memory read/write aliased variables Discrete output points cannot be assigned to an SOE block.9. please see the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide v4.2 User’s Guide for more information. A block configured as Redundant is automatically assigned the same tagnames as its associated Primary block. Tagnames can be assigned only to blocks configured as Primary blocks. See the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide v4.2 for more detailed information.2. v4. you cannot manually assign tagnames to a Redundant block. the Foxboro I/A Series system assigns the tagnames. or Custom). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Tagnames must be aliased memory and/or input tagnames of type BOOL: • • • Discrete physical input points Discrete memory read-only aliased variables. • Select Redundant if you want the block to be a copy of an existing Primary block. • Select Primary if you want the block’s events to be collected by an instance of SOE Recorder running in Primary mode or an instance of SOE Recorder running in Custom mode when the blocks are selected for collection.2. Note For Tricon. which is required if you are using sequence of events in an application. Redundant. The tagnames assigned to the selected Primary block will automatically be assigned to the Redundant block.226 Chapter 2 Application Development Property SOE Block Collection Mode Action Select the collection mode for the block. or the block has been defined as a Redundant block. Procedure 1 2 3 Open the Application tree. You cannot manually assign tagnames to Redundant blocks. save the project so the tagnames are available when specifying a trip variable. select the block number check box. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and double-click Implementation. Note If you add tagnames after opening the SOE Configuration screen. 5 6 Continue to assign tagnames to blocks as needed.9. v4.SOE Development 227 Before you can assign tagnames. Click the SOE Configuration branch. To assign a tagname to one or more SOE Blocks. it means the block has not been defined. you must close and re-open the SOE Configuration screen to have the new tagnames displayed. After assigning all the tagnames. if any. The tagnames and block assignments. 4 To assign the tagname to specific blocks. double-click the row for the tagname. The Item Properties dialog box appears. are listed in a pane to the right of the tree.0 . you must define SOE block properties (see Defining SOE Block Properties on page 223). If the number is disabled. The minimum time is 2 minutes. the maximum time is 10 minutes. In an application used for safety shutdown. If an application requires several variables related to trip conditions. Trip State Time After Trip Select the value on which to begin collecting events: True or False. the maximum time is 10 minutes. You must define at least one SOE block and assign a tagname to the block (see Defining SOE Block Properties on page 223 and Assigning Tagnames to SOE Blocks on page 226). and then select a Trip State of True or False. v4. 3 Specify these settings on the SOE Trip Variable tab.228 Chapter 2 Application Development Specifying a Trip Variable This procedure explains how to designate a trip variable. but it can apply to all blocks.9. Property Trip Tagname Action The tagname that designates whether a trip has occurred. An application can have only one trip variable. Select the number of minutes to collect events before a trip. The default is 2 minutes. Procedure 1 2 Open the Application tree. Time Before Trip TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select the number of minutes to collect events after a trip. The default is 2 minutes. Select the tagname from the list of tagnames. The minimum time is 2 minutes. Double-click SOE Configuration. these variables must be evaluated in combination to determine the final state of the trip variable. a trip variable is an aliased tagname whose state transition causes SOE Recorder to automatically create a trip snapshot. and double-click Implementation. The Item Properties dialog box appears.0 . which is optional if you are using sequence of events in an application. Only tagnames that are aliased BOOL data types are available. Tricon Application Access 229 Tricon Application Access This section explains how to restrict connection access to a Tricon controller and how to restrict or allow write access to output and memory points in the downloaded application. v4. click Operating Parameters. See Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386. Note You can also use the optional TCM access control list1 to restrict access to the Tricon on a per-client basis. If access is restricted. Property Password Required for Connection Action Select the check box to restrict access by requiring a password when connecting to the controller. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. which do not have the access control list feature.0 . Except models 4351 and 4352. 1. The default is cleared. On the Configuration tree. Topics include: • • • • Restricting Access to a Tricon Controller on page 229 What Affects Tricon Write Access from External Devices on page 230 Restricting Write Access to Tricon Points on page 232 Allowing Write Access to Tricon Points on page 233 Restricting Access to a Tricon Controller This procedure explains how to restrict access to a Tricon controller from a TriStation PC. only users with access privileges can disable points or download changes to the controller. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.9. and double-click Configuration. 3 Specify these properties on the Operating Parameters screen. Write access to an output point via the TCM’s embedded OPC server is not allowed. communication.230 Chapter 2 Application Development Property Password Disable Stop on Keyswitch Disable Remote Changes to Outputs Allow Disabling of Points Action Enter the password required to access the controller. Property or Feature Tricon keyswitch TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and point settings. communication properties. you must perform a Download All to apply your changes to the controller. and memory points can be read by any external device that can communicate with a Tricon controller. This table describes write access to Tricon points from external devices. Write access to input points is not allowed from any external device. • Allows write access when set to the Remote or Program position. application. Table 30 Tricon Write Access Description A system setting that determines write access to output and memory points unless overruled by the GATENB function block in the application. Clear the check box to allow remote devices to write to output points. TriStation 1131 will automatically rebuild the application before it is downloaded. The default is cleared. Select the check box to prevent the keyswitch from halting the application if it is turned to Stop. What Affects Tricon Write Access from External Devices This section describes the system properties. Once you have changed this property (by selecting or clearing the check box). v4. Select the check box to allow the TriStation PC to disable points while the application is running on the controller. • Restricts write access when set to the Run position. Write access to a output or memory point is allowed or restricted based on the system. The default is cleared. output.9. The settings you selected are used when the application is built. This property can be changed only when your project is in the Download All state. The default is selected. and function blocks that affect read and write access to memory and output points on a Tricon controller.0 . These types of read and write access are possible: • • • • Input. The default is PASSWORD. which do not have the access control list feature. • For output points. When selected. A Tricon ACM and NCM module setting that determines whether network devices using DDE. This setting is not available on model 4351B. meaning the port is read-only. all alias numbers are Read/Write. HIM. NCM. v4. • For Tricon ACM. 4352B. The default is cleared. ACM. Prohibit Writes Point Assignment a. b. A system setting on the Operating Parameters screen that determines write access to output points. • For memory points. A Tricon SMM module setting that determines whether Honeywell devices have write access to output points and read/write aliased memory points. 4353 and 4354 TCMs (used in Tricon v10.Tricon Application Access 231 Table 30 Tricon Write Access (continued) Description A Tricon function block that programmatically allows write access to a specified range of aliased memory points when the keyswitch is in the Run position. The default value is cleared. See Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386. TSAA. A tagname setting that determines whether the output and memory point is assigned a Read or Read/Write alias number. The Tricon EICM. which means write access is allowed.3 and later systems). HIM. the protocols they can use. Property or Feature GATENB GATDIS Disable Remote Changes to Outputs Privilege Port Write Enableda A Tricon TCM setting that determines whether TriStation. TCM Access Control Listb An optional Tricon TCM feature that gives you the ability to control which clients can access TCM resources. the default is Read/Write. the default is Read. alias numbers can be Read or Read/Write. and SMM modules do not have this property.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . • The Tricon EICM. • For Tricon NCM. A Tricon function block that programmatically restricts remote write access for all ranges of aliased memory points that were previously enabled by GATENB. or TSAA communication have write access to output points and read/write aliased memory points. and SMM modules do not have this property. no matter what other settings are made. and the level of access each client has. OPC. or Modbus have write access to the selected port. external devices cannot write to output points. TCM. Except models 4351 and 4352. 3 Ensure the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs check box is selected. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is selected. output. you must enable and configure the TCM access control list. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. click Operating Parameters.9. See Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386. When the Tricon keyswitch is turned to Run. Input. On the Configuration tree. To disable write access by TSAA clients.0 .232 Chapter 2 Application Development CAUTION In Tricon v10. this may create a security issue. Depending on your configuration. Please note that this default behavior is opposite of that on TCMs in Tricon v10. Restricting Write Access to Tricon Points This procedure explains how to restrict external devices from writing to output or memory points. Input points cannot be written to. v4. external devices cannot write to points unless the GATEB function block is used programmatically to allow write access to a range of aliased memory points. and double-click Configuration. and memory points can be read by any external device that can communicate with the Tricon controller.2 and earlier systems. TSAA clients using a TCM interface have write access to the NET 1 and NET 2 ports by default.3 and later systems. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. v4.9. ensure the Port Write Enabled property for the selected port and protocol is selected. even if the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property is cleared. but cannot be written to.0 . TSAA. External devices must use supported communication protocols (Modbus. and double-click Configuration. The default is selected. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Input points can be read. and DDE) to communicate with the controller. for Tricon NCM the default is Read/Write. 3 4 Clear the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs check box. See Assigning an Alias Number.Tricon Application Access 233 Allowing Write Access to Tricon Points This procedure explains how to allow external devices to write to memory and output points. See Privilege on page 584. click Operating Parameters. Note External OPC clients cannot write to output points. See Port Write Enabled on page 581 or Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386. which do not have the access control list feature. On the Configuration tree. or that the TCM2 access control list is configured to allow read/write access for the selected client using the appropriate protocol. ensure the Privilege property for the module is set to Read/Write. If the external devices are communicating through a TCM. • 5 Ensure the output or memory point is assigned a Read/Write alias number. OPC. The default for Tricon ACM is Read. Except models 4351 and 4352. Alias Type. Do one of the following: • If the external devices are communicating through an ACM or NCM. and Physical Address on page 174. 2. 9.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434.0 . Topics include: • • • • Restricting Access to a Trident or Tri-GP Controller on page 234 What Affects Trident and Tri-GP Write Access from External Devices on page 235 Restricting Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points on page 237 Allowing Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points on page 238 Restricting Access to a Trident or Tri-GP Controller This procedure explains how to restrict access to a Trident or Tri-GP controller from a TriStation PC. Note You can also use the optional v2. and then double-click the MP.234 Chapter 2 Application Development Trident and Tri-GP Application Access This section explains how to restrict connection access to a Trident or Tri-GP controller and how to restrict or allow write access to output and memory points in the downloaded application. The MP Setup dialog box appears. The Item Properties dialog box appears. On the Configuration tree. Click Setup.x CM access control list to restrict access to the Trident or Tri-GP controller on a per-client basis. and double-click Configuration. If access is restricted. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2. v4. open the Hardware Allocation node. only users with access privileges can disable points or download changes to the controller. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is cleared. communication properties. you must perform a Download All to apply your changes to the controller. output. Property Password Required for Connection Password Disable Remote Changes to Outputs Allow Disabling of Points Action Select the check box to restrict access by requiring a password when connecting to the controller. Once you have changed this property (by selecting or clearing the check box). The settings you selected are used when the application is built. Table 31 Trident and Tri-GP Write Access Description A system setting on the MP Operating Parameters tab that determines write access to output points.Trident and Tri-GP Application Access 235 4 Specify these properties on the Operating Parameters tab. Property or Feature Disable Remote Changes to Outputs TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. The default is cleared. This property can be changed only when your project is in the Download All state.0 . v4. Write access to input points is not allowed from any external device. communication. When selected. Write access to a output or memory point is allowed or restricted based on the system. Enter the password required to access the controller. This table describes write access to Trident or Tri-GP points from external devices. The default is PASSWORD. and function blocks that affect read and write access to memory and output points on a Trident or Tri-GP controller. application. Clear the check box to allow remote devices to write to output points. no matter what other settings are made. These types of read and write access are possible: • • • Input. external devices cannot write to output points. and memory points can be read by any external device that can communicate with a Trident or Tri-GP controller. The default is selected. Select the check box to allow the TriStation PC to disable points while the application is running on the controller. TriStation 1131 will automatically rebuild the application before it is downloaded. What Affects Trident and Tri-GP Write Access from External Devices This section describes the system properties. and point settings. • For output points. the protocols they can use.236 Chapter 2 Application Development Table 31 Trident and Tri-GP Write Access (continued) Description A Trident/Tri-GP function block that programmatically allows or restricts write access to output or memory read/write aliased points when used in an application. and the level of access each client has. this may create a security issue. OPC. • This setting does not affect Modbus access. you must enable and configure the CM access control list. alias numbers can be Read or Read/Write. all alias numbers are Read/Write. A tagname setting that determines whether the output and memory point is assigned a Read or Read/Write alias number.x and Tri-GP CMs. To allow write access. Property or Feature SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL Privilege (Trident 1.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434. • The default is Read/Write. or TSAA communication have write access to output points and read/write aliased memory points.9. To disable write access by TSAA clients. CM Access Control List (Trident 2. the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property cannot be selected.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434. TSAA clients have write access to the NET 1 and NET 2 ports on Trident 2. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2. Depending on your configuration. Point Type CAUTION By default.x only) An optional CM feature that gives you the ability to control which clients can access CM resources.0 . • For memory points.x only) A CM module setting that determines whether network devices using DDE. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2. Input.Trident and Tri-GP Application Access 237 Restricting Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points This procedure explains how to restrict external devices from writing to memory and output points. The MP Setup dialog box appears. The SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL function block can be used programmatically to override the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs setting and allow write access to a range of aliased output or memory points. output.9. 3 On the Operating Parameters tab. Procedure 1 2 On the Configuration tree. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. ensure the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs check box is selected. Input points cannot be written to. open the Hardware Allocation node.0 . Click Setup. The Item Properties dialog box appears. and then double-click the MP. and memory points can be read by any external device that can communicate with the Triconex controller. See Assigning an Alias Number. TSAA. The default is Read/Write. Input points can be read. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2.0 . External devices must use supported communication protocols (Modbus. and DDE) to communicate with the controller.238 Chapter 2 Application Development Allowing Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points This procedure explains how to allow external devices to write to memory and output points. The Item Properties dialog box appears. ensure the Privilege property on the Network tab is set to Read/Write. or the SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL function block is used. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. OPC.x CM. Alias Type. • 4 Ensure the output or memory point is assigned a Read/Write alias number. even if the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property is cleared.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434. v4. If the external devices are communicating through a Trident 2. See Configuring Trident 1. Do one of the following: • If the external devices are communicating through an Open Network port on the Trident 1.9. but cannot be written to. and then double-click the MP. The MP Setup dialog box appears. ensure that the access control list is configured to allow read/write access for the selected client using the appropriate protocol. Click Setup. and Physical Address on page 174. Procedure 1 2 3 On the Configuration tree.x MP Network Ports on page 330.x or Tri-GP CM. open the Hardware Allocation node. Note External OPC clients cannot write to output points. You can also set the scan time of the application. TriStation 1131 tries to build it and then download it. double-click Execution List.9. 3 Specify these properties on the Execution List screen. you can print a report that includes the Program Execution List (Program Implementation). v4. If you try to download an application before building it. Procedure 1 2 On the Application Tree. which determines the number of milliseconds that is taken to execute the application once. Topics include: • • • • Specifying the Program Order and Scan Time on page 239 Compiling a Program on page 240 Building or Rebuilding an Application on page 241 About the Application’s Initialization Table on page 242 Specifying the Program Order and Scan Time This procedure explains how to specify the programs and order of execution in the application. If the build has errors. See Printing Project Documents on page 91.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The maximum number of programs in an application is 250.Building an Application 239 Building an Application This section includes information on how to build an application. Note Using the Print All command. On the Implementation tree. the download does not continue. which must be done before testing. double-click Implementation. For example.0 . For more information. Compiling a Program This procedure explains how to manually compile a program. which can be done before building an application. If you add Program12 back to the execution list again.240 Chapter 2 Application Development Property or Button Scan Time Action Enter the number of milliseconds anticipated for the scan. then enter the name. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. enter a comment to describe the changes you made to the program since the last compile. Select a program and then click to move a program down in the execution order. Click to delete the selected program from the list. Programs are automatically compiled when you build an application. see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor application. Click to add a program to the list. When prompted to confirm the deletion of the program from the list. double-click a program. assume that you delete Program12 from the execution list. Procedure 1 2 On the Project menu. and then adding the deleted program back to the execution list at a later time will cause a new instance of the program to be downloaded and initialized when you perform another download. and then click OK. 3 If there are errors. The actual scan time is determined after the application is downloaded and run on the controller.9. and then perform a Download Changes to the controller. When the Comments for Audit Trail dialog box appears. v4. WARNING Deleting a program from the execution list. To add or change a program. New (insert) button Delete button Move Up button Move Down button Browse button Select a program and then click to move a program up in the execution order. performing a download operation (Download All or Download Changes) to the controller. make sure to read the information provided in the warning note below before clicking OK to confirm the deletion. a new instance of Program12 will be downloaded and initialized. click Compile All User Documents. The default is 200 milliseconds. or click the Browse button to select a name from the available programs. and then perform another Download Changes to the controller. fix them before building the application. The Message View automatically opens and displays the status of the compile process. See Specifying Document Attributes on page 113. select View Intermediate FBD or View Intermediate ST. and then build or rebuild the application. Note When building an application. the number of program variables cannot exceed 64. from the Document menu. If the programs in the application have not been compiled. If you receive an error message that this limit has been exceeded. When you build a CEM program. warnings refer to unused points in an application. Typically. The build process begins. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 3 4 Check the Message View to view the status of the build.9. intermediate FBD and ST code is generated. Procedure 1 2 On the Project menu. you must reduce the number of program variables before you can build your application. To view the intermediate code. enter a comment to describe the changes you made to the application since the last build. the Build Application command compiles them and then attempts to build the application. If there are errors.001. This code is useful for understanding and debugging the CEM program. click each error message to locate the location of the error. 5 Note Correct the errors. The easiest way to reduce the number of program variables is to turn off color monitoring in your program(s). When the Comments for Audit Trail dialog box appears. If there are no errors. Errors must be resolved before an application can be downloaded. and to check for errors. click Build Application or Rebuild Application. compile the affected user documents.0 . v4. but warnings do not affect online execution.Building an Application 241 Building or Rebuilding an Application This procedure explains how to use the Build Application command or Rebuild Application command to build an application. the build is successful. Errors and warnings are displayed in the Message View. and then click OK. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. END_VAR the initialization table would have an entry telling the controller’s operating system to set I1 to 5 prior to running the application. which tells the controller’s operating system which data variables need to be set to a non-zero value prior to the application starting to run (such as initialized variables. and the number of bytes used in the initialization table. For example. This section describes how to view and understand the size of the application’s initialization table. and what to do to correct an initialization table overflow problem. Topics include: • • Viewing and Understanding Initialization Table Size Information on page 242 Solving an Initialization Table Overflow Problem on page 243 Viewing and Understanding Initialization Table Size Information Each time you download your project (see Downloading to the Controller on page 460). is provided in the Message View at the end of the download process.242 Chapter 2 Application Development About the Application’s Initialization Table Each application has an initialization table. If there are too many entries in the initialization table. you may be able to download the application to the Emulator. but you will be unable to download it to the controller due to an initialization table overflow error (Error Code PD0004). As a result.9. deleting too many variables at once can result in initialization table overflow due to the temporary entries created to set the deleted variables to zero.0 . an additional temporary entry is made in the initialization table to set the variable to zero during the next Download Changes operation. or those marked as retentive). information about the total number of initialized or retentive variables. Note When you delete a variable. if you declared a variable (in structured text) as: VAR I1 : DINT := 5. v4. which have been initialized or marked as retentive: • • 279 BOOLs 401 DINTs • • 64 REALs 10 TIME The total number of variables is 754 (279 + 401 + 64 + 10 = 754). Example Initialization Table Calculation Assume your project has the following variables.812 768 160 8.0 . The following sample calculation shows how the values for each variable are used to determine the total size of the initialization table.208 512 80 6.535 bytes).251 bytes in the initialization table.232 3. there are a total of 8. you will be able to download the application without encountering an overflow error.535 limit. The size of the initialization table is calculated as follows: • • • • Each variable carries a overhead of 8 bytes.219 (bytes used) = 8. Change variables from retentive to non-retentive.535 bytes.251 6.251 In this example.032 (overhead) + 2.9. Variable Type BOOL DINT REAL TIME Totals: Number of Variables 279 401 64 10 754 Overhead (# variables x 8) 2. Create a program that only runs on the first scan to initialize variables. The following are recommendations for reducing the size of the initialization table: • • • Reduce the number of initial values. Each TIME variable uses an additional 8 bytes.Building an Application 243 The maximum size of the initialization table is 64K (65. Each BOOL variable uses an additional 1 byte.511 4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Solving an Initialization Table Overflow Problem You will be unable to download the application to the controller if the size of the initialization table is greater than 65.032 Bytes Per Type 1 4 4 8 n/a Bytes Used (# variables x bytes per type) 279 1. Each DINT or REAL variable uses an additional 4 bytes. v4. Because this is less than the 65.604 256 80 2219 Total Bytes Used (overhead + bytes used) 2. 9. v4.244 Chapter 2 Application Development TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . 0 . v4.9.3 Tricon Controller Configuration Overview 246 Setting Tricon Operating Parameters 249 Allocating Memory for Tricon Points 251 Configuring the Tricon Target System Version 252 Configuring Tricon Hardware 262 Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 271 Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization 298 Printing the Tricon Module Configuration 309 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Controller configuration must be completed before an application is downloaded to the Tricon.Set operating parameters C onfigure the C ontroller . Allocate memory and hardware. Description See Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249 Allocating Memory for Tricon Points on page 251 Configuring Tricon Hardware on page 262 Configuring Tricon Communication Modules on page 271 Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization on page 298      Set the operating parameters.9. Configure hardware.C onfigure communication to external devices .0 .Set up Time Synchronization (optional) Set Up TriStation C ommunication Implement on the C ontroller Tricon Controller Configuration Steps This list includes the steps that can or should be done during controller configuration. Set up time synchronization. v4. Configure communication to external devices. Set Up the Project Develop the Application Test with the Emulator Fix Errors Yes Errors? No .246 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Overview This figure shows the main steps for configuring the Tricon controller and their typical order in the project cycle. The controller must be configured before an application can be downloaded and implemented on a controller.Allocate memory and configure hardware . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The tree also includes the Controller and Emulator Panels used to emulate and run an application.9. The Tricon Configuration Tree The Tricon Configuration tree includes operating parameters. communication settings. memory allocation. and hardware allocation. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. memory allocation. and hardware allocation) that can be configured. communication. v4. Topics include: • • • The Tricon Controller Tree on page 247 The Tricon Configuration Tree on page 247 The Tricon Controller and Emulator Panels on page 248 The Tricon Controller Tree The Tricon Controller tree includes the elements (operating parameters. which is where you specify the configuration for the project.Overview 247 The Tricon Controller Workspace This section describes the Controller Workspace.0 . v4.9.0 . Controller and Emulator tree TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.248 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration The Tricon Controller and Emulator Panels The Controller and Emulator Panels display programs running in emulation or in the controller. enter the password. use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor. including settings to restrict access to the controller from a TriStation PC and from remote devices. v4. This value is not obtained from a connected controller. Not casesensitive. Procedure 1 Expand the Controller tree. 2 Specify these properties on the Operating Parameters screen. double-click Configuration.Setting Tricon Operating Parameters 249 Setting Tricon Operating Parameters This procedure explains how to specify Tricon operating parameters. Note The Target System Version displayed on the Operating Parameters screen is the target system version currently configured in the project.0 . The default is cleared.9. The default is selected. see Determining Your Tricon Controller’s System Version on page 252. If a password is required. Property Password Required for Connection Password Disable Stop on Keyswitch Disable Remote Changes to Outputs Action Select the check box to require a password to be used to connect from the TriStation PC to the controller. To view the actual system version of your Tricon system. Select the check box to prevent the STOP keyswitch from halting the application running on the controller. For more information. and then click Operating Parameters. Select the check box to prevent external devices. The default is cleared. such as a DCS. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. which are settings that affect the general operation of the controller. from writing to output tagnames in the TriStation application. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.250 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Property Allow Disabling of Points Action Select the check box to allow points to be disabled from TriStation. Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization Select the check box to allow the controller to participate in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network as a master node or a slave node (see Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 307). This property can be changed only when your project is in the Download All state. you can print a report listing the current Operating Parameters settings. If you change this property (by selecting or clearing the check box).0 . The default is cleared. you must perform a Download All to apply your changes to the controller. See Disabling Points on page 474 for more information. TriStation will automatically rebuild the application before it is downloaded.9. Note Using the Print All command. double-click Configuration. the amount of memory for input and output points is determined by the number and type of I/O modules configured in the TriStation project. Initially.9. The amount of memory for memory points is set when a TriStation project is created. CAUTION After an application has been downloaded to the controller or Emulator.Allocating Memory for Tricon Points 251 Allocating Memory for Tricon Points This procedure explains how to change the amount of memory used for input. Repeat for all points to be changed. and memory points (tagnames) in the application. and then expand Memory Allocation. Using the Print All command. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 3 4 Note Move the slider up or down to change the memory allocated for the selected point. See What Are Undeclared Tagnames? on page 184 for more information about memory allocation for points. you can print a report listing the current memory allocation settings. output. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.0 . Double-click the type of point you want to change. changes to memory allocation require a Download All (see Using the Download All Command on page 480). v4. You can change these allocations at any time before building and downloading the application. Validate the target system version change to review the changes that will be made to the project before committing to the change. When you change the target system version. Note If you are unable to connect to the Tricon.9. You need to know the following: • • The model number of the Main Processor modules installed in the Tricon (3006. you are allowed to back up your project. Change the target system version in the project. The target system version determines which Tricon features and modules can be configured in a project. etc. or when you converted an existing project to TriStation v4. you must logically configure the change in the TriStation project. v10.1 to v10. You originally set the target system version when you created a new project. If you change the system version of your Tricon controller (for example. Note You cannot be connected to the controller while you are changing the target system version.3. 3007.1. Topics include: • • • • Determining Your Tricon Controller’s System Version on page 252 Validating a Tricon Target System Version Change on page 253 Changing the Tricon Target System Version on page 255 Results of a Tricon Target System Version Change on page 258 Determining Your Tricon Controller’s System Version Before changing the target system version in your TriStation project.0.) The easiest way to find this information is to connect to the Tricon using the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor. Configuring the target system version is a three-step process: • • • Determine the system version of the Tricon the project will be downloaded to.9. you should determine the system version of the Tricon you will be downloading the project to. TriStation saves the configuration and attaches the Tricon library that supports the installed MPs. which should specify the Main Processor model installed in your Tricon. you can also refer to your sales order paperwork. as well as the system version. Before committing to the target system version change. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. This change requires a Download All.252 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Configuring the Tricon Target System Version This procedure explains how to change the target system version in your project. or you do not have the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor.3). or 3008) The Tricon’s system version (for example. you upgrade your system from v10.6. v10.0 . v9. v4. 3006/N. Procedure (Using the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor) 1 2 3 Open the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (for more detailed instructions.Configuring the Tricon Target System Version 253 The target system version currently configured in the project is displayed on the Operating Parameters screen and at the top of the Select Main Processor dialog box. see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User's Guide). Tricon System Version 4 View the system version information. and expand Hardware Allocation. located at the top of the System Overview window. see the Target System Version Change Matrix on page 259. For detailed information about the changes that occur when switching from one target system version to another.9.0 . Validation allows you to plan ahead for the changes that will occur when you switch from one target system version to another. In the System Overview tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. double-click Configuration. v4. you should validate the change to determine what effect it will have on your project. and then click Replace MPs. click System Overview. Validating a Tricon Target System Version Change Before committing to a target system version change. The System Overview window appears. Double-click the chassis whose target system version you want to change. Connect to the node (controller) whose system version you want to find. 4. or 9.51. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select.x. select 3008. use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor to verify your Tricon system version information. 6 In the Messages pane. based on your Tricon configuration. Property Model Description The Main Processor model installed in the Tricona that this project will be downloaded to.254 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration 3 Specify these properties in the Replace Main Processor dialog box. Note If you aren’t sure which Main Processor model and Tricon system version to select.5.x. select 3006/N.6 and later.52. TriStation analyzes your project settings and current controller configuration to determine the modifications that will be made to the project if you change to the selected target system version. TriStation 1131 v4. See Determining Your Tricon Controller’s System Version on page 252 for more information. 3007.x.x and earlier.0 . 4 5 Select the Validate Only check box. For a list of TriStation versions compatible with your Tricon. • For Tricon versions 9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 9. • For Tricon versions 9. Click OK. see the applicable Tricon Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).9. v4. a. review the results of the validation to determine if you want to commit to the target system version change. Target System Version The system version of the Tricon that this project will be downloaded to.6 does not support Tricon versions v9. you can: • • Upgrade from a model 3006 or 3007 Main Processor to a model 3008 Main Processor.2. When changing the target system version.5. Includes a mix of High-Density and Enhanced Low-Density chassis.x or earlier. or downgrade from v10. See Exporting the TCM Configuration to a File on page 296.Configuring the Tricon Target System Version 255 Changing the Tricon Target System Version The target system version determines which Tricon features and modules can be configured in a project.9. You cannot change the project’s target system version while the project is in the Download Changes state. you cannot: • • Downgrade from a model 3008 MP to a model 3006 MP. You selected the target system version for your project when you created it.0. or when you converted the project from a previous version of TriStation. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.8 to v10.4 or v4. 4352A/B. If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project If you have a model 4351A/B. Topics include: • • • Target System Version Change Rules on page 255 If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project on page 255 Changing the Target System Version on page 256 Target System Version Change Rules When changing the target system version. Note You cannot change (upgrade or downgrade) the target system version for a project that meets all of the following criteria: • • Was originally created in TriStation v4. you also need to change the target system version in your TriStation project. If you have upgraded your Tricon to a newer version. you may want to export the TCM configuration prior to changing the target system version. upgrade from v9.6 with a mix of High-Density and Enhanced Low-Density chassis to a target system version of 10.0).0 . Changing the target system version requires a Download All. or 4353/4354 TCM configured in your project. You cannot be connected to the controller while changing the target system version. Upgrade or downgrade the version number of the Tricon (for example. Downgrade a project created in TriStation v4. to save your configuration settings for future use.2 to v10. In the Change Project State to Download All dialog box.2 project prior to project conversion. you can then import the configuration file in your v10. — You must reconfigure the module from scratch.3 project. the project is in the Download Changes state.0 . you can add the 4351A/4352A module back to your project. change the project state to Download All. and then click Replace MPs. Procedure 1 2 Verify that you are not connected to the controller.9.2 project prior to project conversion. using the instructions provided in Configuring TCM Ports on page 278. If needed. — If you exported the existing TCM configuration in the v10. you should validate the change to determine what effect it will have on your project. the TCM will be removed during project conversion. Double-click the chassis whose system version you want to change. the TCM will be removed during project conversion. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. — Once project conversion is complete. — Once project conversion is complete. • If you are downgrading from Tricon v10. You cannot import a TCM configuration file that was exported from the 4351A/4352A module originally configured in the v10. v4. • • 3 4 On the Commands menu. double-click Configuration. you must reconfigure the module from scratch. Changing the Target System Version Before committing to a target system version change.2 to v10. and expand Hardware Allocation. using the instructions provided in Configuring TCM Ports on page 278.2 or v10.2.3. you can add the 4351A/4352A module back to your project. See Validating a Tricon Target System Version Change on page 253.256 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration If you have a model 4351A/4352A TCM configured in your Tricon v10. click Change State to Download All.3 to v10. Go back to step 2 to change the project state before continuing. Note If the Replace MPs button is unavailable.3 project.3 project. please make note of the following: • If you are upgrading from Tricon v10. — If you did NOT export the existing TCM configuration in the v10. Expand the Controller tree. click Change State. 0 on page 11.x. v4. Note: If the project is currently configured for a model 3008 MP. Property Model Description The Main Processor model installed in the Tricona that this project will be downloaded to.0 . • For Tricon versions 9. TriStation 1131 v4. select 3006/N. a.52.Configuring the Tricon Target System Version 257 5 Specify these properties in the Replace Main Processor dialog box. see the applicable Tricon Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site). • For Tricon versions 9.51. or 9. 3007. or Creating a New Project on page 20. 9. Target System Version The system version of the Tricon that this project will be downloaded to.9. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select.x. you cannot downgrade to a model 3006 MP. For more information. If you must create a project for a 3006 MP. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x and earlier.4.6 and later. select 3008.6 does not support Tricon versions 9. see Converting Existing Projects to Version 4. based on your Tricon configuration. For a list of TriStation versions compatible with your Tricon. or re-convert the project using a backup of the project created in an earlier version of TriStation 1131. you need to create a new project.x.9.5. v4. click Yes to continue. 9 10 In the Messages pane. 6 7 8 Click OK.9. When asked to confirm your selection. any parameters that did not exist in the previous version are set to their default values. or specify a new one. do one of the following: • (Recommended) Click Yes and then specify the folder to save the backup file to.0 . Then move down to locate the row (on the left) for the system version you want to change your project to. review the results of the target system version change. The file extension (. see the Target System Version Change Matrix on page 259. Click No to continue without creating a backup file. When asked to backup your project before changing the target system version. To finish the process. use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor to verify your Tricon system version information. See Determining Your Tricon Controller’s System Version on page 252 for more information. however.bt2) does not have to be included in the name. Results of a Tricon Target System Version Change The following table describes the changes that are made to your project when changing from one target system version to another. All current configuration settings are maintained. Use the suggested name. To use the Target System Version Change Matrix: 1 2 Find the column for your current system version on the top. For more information. • TriStation reconfigures your project to the selected target system version.258 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Note If you aren’t sure which Main Processor model and Tricon system version to select. you must build the application and download it to the controller. The box where your selected column and row meet describes the changes that will be made to your project if you change to the new target system version. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. x 3008 MP v10. with one exception— when you are converting a project created in a version of TriStation prior to v4.x v9. 3721. 4352A. 3625 I/O modules • Add support for model 4351. 4352 TCMs DOWNGRADE • Remove TCMs (all models) • Remove model 3720.51.6 and Later ORIGINAL VERSION 3008 MP v10. 4354 TCMs • Remove model 3720. or v9. 4351B.5.1. 3625 I/O modules 259 . 4352B. 4353.52. 3625 I/O modules DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351A. 3625 I/O modules DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351A.2. 4352 TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351. 4353.x. 3625. 4354 TCMs • Remove model 3720. 4352A TCMs • Add support for model 4351. 3625. 4352B. 4354 TCMs • Remove model 3720. 4353. 4352A. 4352B. 4352 TCMs Configuring the Tricon Target System Version TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 3721.5.x DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351A. 4352 TCMs 3008 MP v10. 4352A TCMs • Remove model 3720.4. 3807 I/O modules DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351A. 3807 I/O modules • Add support for model 4351.9.0. 3807 I/O modules • Add support for model 4351.x 3008 MP v9. 4352 TCMs DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351B.x. 4353. NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED UPGRADE 3008 MP v9. 4354 TCMs • Remove model 3720.x 3008 MP v10. 3721. 4353. 3721. 4353. v9.6 and Later DOWNGRADE • Remove TCMs (all models) DOWNGRADE • Remove TCMs (all models) DOWNGRADE • Remove TCMs (all models) • Remove model 3720.6. 3807 I/O modules DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351A. v4. 3625.x 3008 MP v10. 3625. 3625. 4352 TCMs DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351B.0 on page 11.x v9. 3721. projects created with a previous version of TriStation will remain in the Download Changes state regardless of a target system version change. During project conversion. 4352B. 3721. 4354 TCMs • Remove model 3720. 3721.9. For more information. 4352B. 3721.x 3008 MP v10. 3807 I/O modules DOWNGRADE • Remove TCMs (all models) • Remove model 3720. 3721. 3721. 3625.0 3008 MP v10.Table 32 Target System Version Change Matrix 3006 MP v9.x 3008 MP v10. 3721. 4352A. 4352 TCMs DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351B. 4354 TCMs • Remove model 3720. 3807 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351. 4351B.5. 3721. 3625 I/O modules • Add support for model 4351.51.x NEW VERSION 3006 MP v9. see Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.x UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A and 4352A TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A and 4352A TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A and 4352A TCMs • Remove model 4351 and 4352 TCMs DOWNGRADE • Remove model 3720.3. 3625 I/O modules DOWNGRADE • Remove TCMs (all models) • Remove model 3720.x Note: A target system version change (upgrade or downgrade) requires that the project state be changed to Download All. 4352B. 4351B.1.52.0. 3807 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A.x UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. 4351B. 4353. 3721. 4351B.x Tricon Controller Configuration 3008 MP v10. 4354. 4352A TCMs • Add support for model 3720. 4352 TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 3720. 4351B. 4353. 4352B. 4353.1. 4351B. 3721.x UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. TCMs • Add support for model 3720.2. 3721. 4352A TCMs • Add support for model 3720. 4353 and 4354 TCMs • Add support for model 3720. 4352B.x 3008 MP v9.0 260 Chapter 3 ORIGINAL VERSION NEW VERSION 3008 MP v10. 4353 and 4354 TCMs • Remove model 4351A and 4352A TCMsb DOWNGRADE • Remove support for model 3807 I/O module DOWNGRADE • Remove support for model 3807 I/O module 3008 MP v10. 3807 I/O modules • Remove model 4351. 4352A. 4352B. 4352A.5. 3625. 3625. 3721. 3625 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351B. 3807 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351B. 4354. 3807 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351B. 4352 TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. 3625 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A.5. 3625. 4353.6 and Later TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guidev4. 3721. 4352B.x. 3721. 4352B. 4353. 4354.2. or v9. 3721. 4351B. 4354. 3721. 4352B. 4352A. 4352B. 3721. 4354 TCMs • Remove support for model 3807 I/O module 3008 MP v10.9.52. TCMs • Add support for model 3720. 4354 TCMs • Remove support for model 3807 I/O module DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351B. 4353 and 4354 TCMs • Add support for model 3720. TCMs • Add support for model 3720. 4352B. 4354. 4352B. 4352A TCMs • Add support for model 3720.3. v9.4.x.x 3008 MP v10. 4352A TCMs DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351B. 3721.Table 32 Target System Version Change Matrix (continued) 3006 MP v9. 3625 I/O modules • Remove model 4351 and 4352 TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. 4353 and 4354 TCMs • Add support for model 3807 I/O module • Remove model 4351A and 4352A TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 3807 I/O module DOWNGRADE • No hardware change . 4351B.0. 4354.x 3008 MP v10.x 3008 MP v10.4. 4352B. 4353.51. 4352A. 3625. 4353.x 3008 MP v10. 3625 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. 4352A. TCMs • Add support for model 3720.x 3008 MP v10. 3625 I/O modules • Remove model 4351. 3721. 4354 TCMs • Remove model 4351A and 4352A TCMsa DOWNGRADE • Remove model 4351B. 3625 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. 3625 I/O modules • Upgrade configuration options for model 4351A. 4352A.3. 4352B. 4353. 3625 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351B. 4353. 4352B.x UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. TCMs • Add support for model 3720. TCMs • Add support for model 3720. 3721. 4352B. and reconfigure it for use with the Tricon v10. 4351B.3 system. 4352B. When upgrading a Tricon v10. 3625. v4. 4352A. See If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project on page 255 for more information.2. or v9.3 project to Tricon v10.1.x 3008 MP v10.51.x 3008 MP v10.x 3008 MP v10.2. 4353 and 4354 TCMs • Add support for model 3720.0 261 . 4353 and 4354 TCMs • Add support for model 3807 I/O module • Remove model 4351A and 4352A TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 3807 I/O module UPGRADE • No hardware change a. 4352A. 4353. 4352B. 3721.2 system.5. if a model 4351A or 4352A TCM was installed and configured in the v10. 4353.0.x. b. 4352B.x. 3807 I/O modules • Remove model 4351. v9. Configuring the Tricon Target System Version TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 4352 TCMs UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351B. 3807 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351B.9.Table 32 Target System Version Change Matrix (continued) 3006 MP v9.x 3008 MP v10. 4354.3. 4354. 3721.x UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. TCMs • Add support for model 3720. 3625. 3807 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A.4. 4351B. 4352B. 4352B. 4352A. 3807 I/O modules UPGRADE • Add support for model 4351A. Once the project conversion is complete. TCMs • Add support for model 3720. if a model 4351A or 4352A TCM was installed and configured in the v10.5.2 project to Tricon v10.x 3008 MP v10. 4353. 3625.2 project.3 project. it will be removed during project conversion. you can add the 4351A/4352A TCM to the project again. 3721.x 3008 MP v10. and reconfigure it for use with the Tricon v10.3.x 3008 MP v9. you can add the 4351A/4352A TCM to the project again. See If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project on page 255 for more information. 4354. Once the project conversion is complete.6 and Later ORIGINAL VERSION NEW VERSION 3008 MP v10. 3721.52. 3625.5. When downgrading a Tricon v10. it will be removed during project conversion. 4351B. TCMs • Add support for model 3720. • • Note See Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 for the target system version upgrade/downgrade rules that apply to configurations with mixed chassis types.0 . Additional chassis in a configuration are expansion chassis (HD_EXP.3 or later only). Adding or Deleting a Tricon Chassis This procedure explains how to add or delete a Tricon chassis from the controller configuration. usually called HD_MAIN (High-Density chassis) or LD_MAIN (Low-Density chassis). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. The following rules apply to configuring different chassis types in a single system: • An Enhanced Low-Density expansion chassis (E_LD_EXP) may be configured in a system with either a High-Density or Low-Density main chassis (Tricon v10.9. or E_LD_EXP) or remote chassis (HD_RXM or LD_RXM).262 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Configuring Tricon Hardware This section explains how to configure the hardware for a Tricon controller. Each controller configuration includes a main chassis. Topics include: • • • • • • • Adding or Deleting a Tricon Chassis on page 262 Determining Tricon Chassis Power Usage on page 264 Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules on page 265 Configuring a Tricon AI Single-Ended or Differential Module on page 266 Configuring a Tricon DO Module on page 267 Configuring a Tricon PI Module on page 269 Adding a Tricon Thermocouple Module on page 270 For information on configuring communication modules. see Configuring Tricon Communication Modules on page 271. Only an Enhanced Low-Density expansion chassis may be configured in a system with a High-Density main chassis. Any other Low-Density expansion chassis cannot be configured in a system with a High-Density main chassis. A High-Density expansion (HD_EXP) or remote (HD_RXM) chassis cannot be configured in a system with a Low-Density main chassis. LD_EXP. A Low-Density remote chassis (LD_RXM) cannot be configured in a system with a High-Density main chassis. 0 . The Item Properties dialog box for the chassis appears.Configuring Tricon Hardware 263 Procedure 1 Expand the Controller tree. v4.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and then double-click Hardware Allocation. Commands Add Delete Actions Click to add a chassis. Only the last chassis in a configuration can be deleted. if you have four chassis in your configuration. it cannot be deleted. Select the last chassis in the list and then click Delete. Select the type of chassis from the list that appears. If you have only one chassis in a configuration. For example. you must first delete chassis 3 and 4 before you can delete chassis 2. 2 Take either of these actions. double-click Configuration. and you want to delete chassis 2. 264 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Determining Tricon Chassis Power Usage This procedure explains how to display the amount of power used by a Tricon chassis. For more information. the physical installation must be changed to match the logical configuration in TriStation.9.0 . v4. If acceptable. double-click Configuration. see the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. and then click Hardware Allocation. • • • 2 3 Total Power Supply: Shows the maximum logic power that the chassis can support. If the Available power is negative. delete one or more modules from the chassis and add them to another chassis in the configuration. Recheck the power usage for the chassis to ensure the logic power is acceptable. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 Expand the Controller tree. Total Power Used: Shows how much logic power is being used by the current configuration of modules in a chassis. The Chassis Power Usage screen shows information about the logic power used by each chassis. Available: Shows the amount of available (unused) logic power. Configuring Tricon Hardware 265 Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules This procedure explains how to add and delete modules to/from a Tricon configuration. click the module to be removed from the configuration. and expand Hardware Allocation. 3 Do one of the following: • To add a module. If a module is deleted. and then click Remove. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Double-click the chassis that you want to add or remove a module from.0 . double-click Configuration.9. and then click OK. select the type of module to insert. you must use the Download All command to download the application to the controller. click an empty slot. This cannot be undone. and then click Insert. v4. On the Insert Module screen. • To remove a module. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. A change from high to low resolution (or vice-versa) results in a value change by a factor of four. and expand Hardware Allocation. double-click the slot where the module is installed. v4.266 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Configuring a Tricon AI Single-Ended or Differential Module This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon Analog Input Single-Ended (model 3720) or Differential (model 3721) module. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. Expand the chassis where the module is installed. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the resolution type and field power monitoring status can be specified. the input type can also be specified. click Configuration.9. the implementation of the logic change will occur before the implementation of the range change on the modules. For the Differential module.2 and later systems. and then click Setup. This may result in a mismatch between the range the application expects and the actual range from the module. During a download change operation.0 . All points should be bypassed during a resolution change to prevent any unintended application problems. You must modify your application to take this change into account. For both modules. WARNING Changing the resolution type on model 3720 and 3721 AI modules will cause all input points on the module to change. The model 3720 and 3721 AI modules are compatible only with Tricon v10. 3 Specify these properties in the AI Setup dialog box. 9. For a Differential AI module. Field Power Monitoring Select whether the module should monitor field power at the termination panel. v4. The model 3625 DO module is compatible only with Tricon v10. If you select On. which is 16383 counts at the maximum range of 5 volts. For more information about external term panels. Differential AI Input Type Select the input type for the point. and then click Setup. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. If you are not using a term panel that passes field power to the module. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. The default is Unipolar Input. which is 4095 counts at the maximum range of 5 volts. click Configuration. The default is Off. Available with Single-Ended and Differential AI modules. • Standard Resolution: Data resolution is 12 bits.0 . Only available with the Differential AI module. and expand Hardware Allocation. • Bipolar Input: -5 to 5 volts (with 6% under-range and overrange). which allows you to specify how each point is configured. the module will report when field power at the term panel goes in or out of range. • Unipolar Input: 0 to 5 volts (with 6% over-range). Standard Resolution cannot be selected if Bipolar Input is selected. 4 Click OK to save your changes. you must select Off. When field power monitoring is On. see the Field Terminations Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. The default is Standard Resolution.2 and later systems. Expand the chassis where the module is installed.Configuring Tricon Hardware 267 Property Resolution Type Action Select the resolution to be used for the point. and the term panel does not support field power monitoring. • High Resolution: Data resolution is 14 bits. Configuring a Tricon DO Module This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon Digital Output (model 3625) module. you will see Field Power faults on the module. Applicable only if you are using a term panel that passes field power to the module. Available only if High Resolution is selected. double-click the slot where the module is installed. Only available if the points are supervised. • Not Used: Provides the same fault detection as for NonSupervised points. The default is 10. Typical threshold values are 10 to 48 ohms.9.200 ohms. • Non-Supervised: Provides detection of all internal faults and limited external faults associated with the field device or wiring.0 . The available range is 0 to 65. Shorted Point Alarm Threshold Enter the number of ohms below which values are alarmed as a shorted load.535. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is Non-Supervised. and then specify these properties in the DO Setup dialog box. Typical threshold values are 480 to 3. Open Point Alarm Threshold Enter the number of ohms above which values are alarmed as an open load. The available range is 0 to 65. except reporting of benign field fault conditions is suppressed. v4. 4 5 Continue to select tagnames and specify settings as needed.268 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration 3 Select the tagname to be configured. Property DO Point Options Action Select the option to be used for the DO point.535. Click OK to save your changes. The default is 2. Points configured as Not Used will be energized if the application commands them on.400. • Supervised: Provides detection of all internal faults and detection of all external faults associated with field device or wiring. Only available if the points are supervised. Expand the chassis where the module is installed. Click OK to save your changes. used with RPM.016667. • Pulses per hour. Each point can be independently configured. click Configuration. used with Speed rate type.0 . and then specify these properties in the Pulse Input Setup dialog box. Enter the revolutions per minute for the pulse input device. 3 Select the tagname to be configured. and then click Setup. For: • Pulses per second. set to 60. used with RPM rate type. and expand Hardware Allocation. which are used for speed and RPM inputs. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Enter the scaling value to convert pulse input signals into engineering units. Enter the number of pulses per revolution of the measuring shaft. set to 1.0 (default). Property Rate Type Maximum RPM Maximum Speed Pulses Per Revolution Scale Factor Action Select the type of rate applied to pulse input signals: Speed or RPM. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.9. • Pulses per minute.0 4 5 Continue to select tagnames and specify settings as needed. Enter the speed for the pulse input device.Configuring Tricon Hardware 269 Configuring a Tricon PI Module This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input module. double-click the slot where the module is installed. set to 0. J. For model 3708E only. For more information. or T. click Configuration. For model 3708.0 . Degree conversion UpS (upscale) DnS (downscale) dgC is converted to Celsius. E. see the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. There are no other properties to specify. Expand the chassis where the module is installed. For 3706.9. as indicated by these properties. v4. Because these modules come in a variety of configurations. 16 points. and click OK. double-click the thermocouple module slot. and then click Insert. K. and expand Hardware Allocation. which must match the module that is installed in the system. T Description 3706/A/AN or 3708/E/EN Specifies the thermocouple type installed. Specifies value returned if voltage is out-of-range. 3 From the module list. For 3708. K. J. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.270 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Adding a Tricon Thermocouple Module This procedure explains how to specify the type of Tricon thermocouple module. or T. K.767. • Upscale returns +32. dgF is converted to Fahrenheit. or burnout occurs. Property Model Type E. 32 points. Points For model 3706. select the type of thermocouple module installed in the Tricon. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • Downscale returns –32.767. 4 Click the type of module installed in the controller. J. select carefully. Double-click the ACM slot. Note In addition to configuring ports on the communication module(s). in order to connect to the Tricon and download your application. see Chapter 5. Instead. which supports these connections: • • • • On NET 1. Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. a network connection to a Foxboro Intelligent Automation (I/A) Series DCS On NET 1. Topics include: • • • • • • Configuring Tricon ACM Ports on page 271 Configuring Tricon HIM Ports on page 273 Configuring Tricon EICM Ports on page 274 Configuring Tricon NCM Ports on page 275 Configuring Tricon SMM Ports on page 277 Configuring TCM Ports on page 278 Configuring Tricon ACM Ports This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon ACM. time synchronization with a Foxboro Intelligent Automation (I/A) Series DCS On NET 2. v4.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 271 Configuring Tricon Communication Modules This section explains how to configure Tricon communication modules for communication with external devices. and expand Hardware Allocation. we do not recommend using NET 2 on the ACM for network connections. Note If you have both an ACM and a TCM installed in your Tricon. double-click Configuration. use NET 1 or NET 2 on the TCM for network connections and/or time synchronization. and NET 1 on the ACM for connection to the Foxboro I/A Series DCS. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.9. you also need to configure the Tricon’s network and/or serial connection to the TriStation PC. and then click Setup.0 . For more information. a network connection to a TriStation PC or other network devices On NET 2. time synchronization with the Tricon master node You can install primary and redundant ACM modules in either chassis 1 or chassis 2. To enable the right slot. Select On NET 1 enable time synchronization with external source to allow time synchronization with the I/A DCS. specify the block number. Privilege Specify Read/Write to allow external devices to read and write points. Property Redundant Mode Used/Not Used Action Select the check box to specify that a redundant module is installed. specify these properties on the ACM Setup screen. select the Redundant Mode check box (above). Select the check box to specify that a redundant ACM is installed. specify these properties on the ACM Setup screen. Specify Read/Write to allow external devices to read and write points.9.0 . The default is Read. Property SOE Block Collection Mode Privilege Redundant Mode Time Synchronization Action If using SOE.272 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration 3 For a NET 1 connection. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select Used to specify the slots that have an installed ACM module. 4 For a NET 2 connection. The default is Read. v4. Configuring Tricon HIM Ports This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon HIM. IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address Time Synchronization If the controller is on a subnet. and then click Setup. If not. Specify these properties on the HIM Setup screen. enter the subnet address.0 . leave blank. Procedure 1 Expand the Controller tree. 2 3 Click OK to save your changes.9. double-click Configuration. enter the IP address that identifies the controller on the network. Double-click the HIM slot. and expand Hardware Allocation. Property Base Address Number of Extended Block Action Enter a number between 5 and 31 to specify the block address for the HIM based on the Data Hiway memory map. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is 4. The default is 5. This must be the same IP address as entered on the TriStation Communication screen (see Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection on page 384). enter an IP address to be used as the default for a gateway. Select NET 2 to enable time synchronization with the Tricon Master controller. which supports a connection between a Tricon controller and a Honeywell control system.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 273 Property IP Address Action If using a default IP address. Enter a number which identifies a pair of HIM blocks consisting of a base block and a secondary block (which is offset from the 6-bit block address by 32). 5 Click OK to save your changes. If needed. v4. Modbus Slave Address Enter the number of the slave address. which can be 1–247. select the specific Modbus protocol. select ports 1–4 or 6–9. and then click Setup. select ports 5 or 10. For more information about module compatibility. 3 Specify these properties in the EICM Setup dialog box. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. and expand Hardware Allocation. Protocol TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For TriStation 1131.274 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Configuring Tricon EICM Ports This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon EICM. Only available with Modbus slave and Modbus slave/master protocols. Double-click the EICM slot. v4.0 . slave. Property Port Selection Action For TriStation 1131 or Modbus communication. An EICM cannot be installed in the same system as a TCM. see the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. and master/slave) To a Centronics printer You can install an EICM module in either chassis 1 or the first expansion chassis. double-click Configuration. select TriStation. For a printer connection. which supports these serial connections: • • • To a TriStation PC using TriStation 1131 protocol To an external device using Modbus protocol (master. For Modbus.9. Must use the same setting as other Modbus slaves. The default is 9600. must be the same as other Modbus slaves. a network connection to other Triconex controllers using the Peer-to-Peer protocol and Triconex Time Synchronization On NET 2. Data Bits Set as needed. maximum between 1 and 32767. which must be the same as other slaves on the network. If set to Hardware. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. double-click Configuration.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 275 Property Baud Rate Action Select the rate. The total rate for all four ports must be less than or equal to 57. and then click Setup. For more information about module compatibility. and expand Hardware Allocation. see Setting Signal Delays for Tricon EICM on page 608. v4. columns can be 0–255. only available with port 5 and 10. a network connection to a TriStation PC or other external devices Serial connection between a Tricon NCM/G module and a Global Positioning System (GPS) interface You can install a primary and redundant module in one logical slot.9. Stop Bits Select either 1 Bit or 2 Bits to specify whether to send 1 or 2 bits to indicate that the transmission of a byte of data is complete. Double-click the NCM slot. Rows can be 0–255.0 . Parity Handshake Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Rows and Columns SOE Block Collection Mode 4 Click OK to save your changes. Type the number of characters for the printer.600. Configuring Tricon NCM Ports This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon NCM. • Modbus slave can use 7 or 8 bits. Reserved for future use. which supports these connections: • • • On NET 1. The SOE block name. see the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. An NCM cannot be installed in the same system as a TCM. • Modbus master and master/slave must use 8 bits. Set minimum between 0 and 32767. Property Installed/Not Installed Privilege IP Address Global Positioning System Installed Time Synchronization Action Select to indicate which slots have modules installed. v4. Available for the right slot only when the module is installed in a redundant (non-COM) slot. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Enter the IP address for the NCM. Select the check box to synchronize time with the Tricon master node.0 .276 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration 3 Specify these properties in the NCM Setup dialog box. Select the check box to synchronize time with a GPS. Select Read or Read/Write.9. 4 Click OK to save your changes. The default is cleared. The default is cleared. and then click Setup. The default is cleared. which supports a connection between a Tricon controller and a Honeywell Universal Control Network (UCN). The default is cleared. Enter 15 or 16. Enable UCN Test Mode Time Synchronization 4 Click OK to save your changes. 3 Specify these properties in the SMM Setup dialog box. Select the check box to prevent Honeywell workstations from writing to memory and output points. and expand Hardware Allocation.9. which are Modified External blocks reserved for the SMM. double-click Configuration.0 . Double-click the SMM slot. Select the check box to enable time synchronization with the UCN. v4. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property UCN Node Number SOE Block Prohibit Writes Action Enter the UCN node number. Should only be selected if requested by Honeywell factory test personnel. The default is cleared.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 277 Configuring Tricon SMM Ports This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon Safety Manager Module (SMM). NET 2 NET 1. and 4354 TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10. 4352B. 4353. TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration. NET 2 NET 1 Protocol or Standard Serial Ports (All Models) Port 4 —a — — — — Any port Any port — Port 1 — — — — TriStation TSAA (UDP/IP) TSAA with IP Multicast (UDP/IP) Peer-to-Peer (UDP/IP) Peer-to-Peer (DLC) Embedded OPC Server (Data Access and Alarms & Events) Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) Modbus Master (RTU) Modbus Master or Slave (TCP) GPS Time Synchronization Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC Triconex Time Synchronization via UDP/IP SNTP Triconex Time Synchronization Network Printing using Jet Direct a. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or 4353/4354 TCMs installed. The following table lists the protocols supported by TCM models 4351A/B and 4353 (Copper). TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10.278 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Configuring TCM Ports Note The information and procedures in this section do not apply to model 4351 and 4352 TCMs.0.x systems. v4. NET 2 NET 1. They cannot be installed in Tricon v9.x or earlier systems. NET 2 NET 1 NET 1 NET 1 NET 1 NET 2 — — NET 1 — NET 1 NET 1 NET 1. — means the protocol is not available on this port. where A and B modules with the same model number can be installed in the same slot. 4352A/B. please see the Product Release Notice for your Tricon system version.0 . different TCM models cannot be mixed in the same logical slot.x systems. A single Tricon v10. NET 2 — NET 1 NET 1. If you have one of these TCMs installed in your system. NET 2 Network Ports (Models 4353 and 4354) NET 1. Model 4351A and 4352A TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10. Exceptions to this rule are the 4351A/B and 4352A/B modules. Additionally. even if they are installed in different chassis. Network Ports (Models 4351A/B and 4352A/B) NET 1.3 and later systems.x and later systems. NET 2 NET 1.1. Model 4351 and 4352 TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10. NET 2 NET 1. NET 2 NET 1.9. See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems for detailed TCM installation guidelines. NET 2 NET 1 — — — NET 1. and 4352A/B and 4354 (Fiber) on network and serial ports. Model 4351B. 1. which must reside in two logical slots located in chassis 1 or chassis 2 only. You cannot install model 4351/4352 TCMs in a system that also has model 4351A/B. please see Appendix C. For more detailed compatibility information.x system1 supports a maximum of four TCMs. you can go back and configure the more complex network connection without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the controller altogether. you can change the existing TCM model to a different model TCM without losing your port settings. v4. you cannot change the TCM model installed in the Tricon without downloading a new configuration. Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing on page 397 for instructions on configuring the TCM for use with a printer. This file can then be used to quickly configure other TCMs by importing the saved configuration settings. Once you have successfully connected to the TCM and downloaded the initial configuration to the Tricon.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 279 Note Invensys recommends configuring a serial connection to the TCM first.0 .3 and Later Only) on page 292 For additional information on configuring the TCM. see these topics: • • • • • • Configuring TCM Serial Ports on page 280 Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 282 Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 287 Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports on page 289 Configuring TCM Routing on page 291 Configuring TCM Protocols (Tricon v10. see Exporting the TCM Configuration to a File on page 296. See Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules on page 265. Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386 for instructions on controlling access to the TCM on a per-client level. Exporting and Importing a TCM Configuration Once you have configured a TCM. However. Changing TCM Models Once TCM ports have been configured. For detailed instructions. once the configuration has been downloaded to the controller.9. you can export its configuration to an XML file. but prior to downloading the configuration to the controller. see these topics: • • • Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization on page 298 for instructions on configuring the TCM to synchronize time. because it is less complex and easier to successfully connect to the TCM through the serial port. To configure specific types of ports. Only the following model changes will retain your port settings: • • 4351A to 4352A 4352A to 4351A • • 4351B to 4352B 4352B to 4351B • • 4353 to 4354 4354 to 4353 Any other TCM model changes will result in all port settings being reset to their default values. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. The default is cleared (the port is read-only). and expand Hardware Allocation. 4 Specify these properties. Property Port Selection Port Write Enabled Action Click the port to be configured.0 . Available only if Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) is selected as the communication protocol.9. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. Click the Serial Ports tab. Select this check box if you want to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. double-click Configuration. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.280 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Configuring TCM Serial Ports This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Tricon TCM. Ports can be configured only for a slot with an installed module. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Transceiver Mode Handshake Termination Options FP Ordering Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Master Logical Port 5 Click OK to save your changes. Available only with Modbus Slave ASCII. See Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time on page 303.0 . enter the number of the Modbus slave device (1-247). The default is Low 16 Bits First. Only available with RS-485 Transceiver Mode. The default is 8. v4. On port 4 when TriStation is selected as the protocol. Select RS-485 or RS-232.767. The default is Odd. Select the order to be used with floating point numbers. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is 9600. Only available for Modbus Master. Modbus Slave RTU. The default is None. The default is RS232. The default is 1. Enter the minimum and maximum values to be used for the Modbus data range. Select None or Hardware. Enter the port number (1-32) that the TCM will use in Modbus Master functions to access the port.9. This port is automatically configured for GPS when you enable time synchronization. Modbus Slave ASCII. Select 1 or 2 bits. The default minimum is 0. RS-485 is not available. The default maximum is 32. • Only port 1 can use GPS. The default is 1 bit. Select the type of termination used with cables. Select 8 or 7 bits. Select the type of parity for the port.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 281 Property Protocol Action Select the communication protocol for the port: • All ports can use Modbus Master. • Only port 4 can use TriStation. Enter the communication rate for the port. the default is None. Modbus Slave Address If you selected Modbus Slave RTU or ASCII. Determines whether the most significant bits in a 32-bit address are the first 16 (high) or the last 16 (low). Use the procedure that applies to your Tricon system version: • • Procedure for Tricon v10. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.3 and Later (Models 4351A/B. Network port configuration options differ depending on the target system version configured for the project. Procedure for Tricon v10. v4. The TCM/A Setup dialog box appears.0 . see Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252.2 (Models 4351A/4352A) 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.1 or v10. and expand Hardware Allocation.2 (Models 4351A/4352A) on page 282 Procedure for Tricon v10. and 4353/4354) on page 284 For more information about the target system version. double-click Configuration. 4352A/B.1 or v10. 3 Specify these properties on the Network tab.282 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Configuring TCM Network Ports This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Tricon TCM.9. you can select either the Left or Right slot.1. and one in the Right physical slot.168. Enter the UDP port to use for the TriStation connection.1. • If the TCM you are configuring is installed in the COM slot.9. Select the communication mode.0. Clicking Not Installed resets all options to their default state and makes them unavailable for configuration.255) are reserved for broadcast messaging and cannot be used as a valid IP address. A TCM can be configured in the Right slot only if a TCM in the Left slot has already been configured.0.x where x is the node number.255. the default is Auto-Negotiate.168.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 283 Property Slot Selection Action Select the physical slot where the TCM module you want to configure is installed. the default is 100 Mbps Half Duplex. you must select the Left slot.0. The addresses for NET 1 and NET 2 do not need to be unique. The default gateway address must be part of the subnet. v4.x • NET 2: 192. The default is 255.a See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems for more information about slot locations. The 4352A module cannot connect at 10 Mbps. IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address If needed.255. TriStation Port Number TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. If needed. • If the TCM is installed in any other available logical slot. The default is Not Installed. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information. • For the model 4351A. Installed Transceiver Mode Click Installed to enable configuration of the module. such as 192. IP Address Enter the IP Address for the port.0. • For the model 4352A with fiber connectors.168. enter the IP address for the subnet.0 . The default is 0. Not Installed. The default values are: • NET 1: 192. The default is 1502.0. Typically. enter the IP address for the default gateway. this is the IP address of the network router. Each logical slot can hold two TCMs—one in the Left physical slot. The highest and lowest IP addresses in a subnet (addresses where the last number is 0 or 255. it remains open until you close it. If you have configured TCMs in both the left and right slots. even if the IP address is changed via a download changes operation. 4352A/B.3 and Later (Models 4351A/B. Port Write Enabled a. and expand Hardware Allocation. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. 3 Specify these properties on the Network tab. Changes to TCM IP addresses are not effective until the existing connection is closed and a new connection is opened.9.284 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Property TSAA Port Number Action Enter the UDP port to use for TSAA connections. Select this check box if you want to allow TSAA writes to this port. The TCM/OPC or TCM/B Setup dialog box appears. including DDE Server.0 . and OPC Server. Once a connection is opened. The default is cleared (the port is read-only). you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the TCM installed in the right slot. SOE Recorder. and you then uninstall the TCM in the left slot. 4 Note Click OK to save your changes. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information. Procedure for Tricon v10. You must re-install a TCM in the left slot before you can modify the configuration of the TCM in the right slot. and 4353/4354) 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. The default is 1500. double-click Configuration. v4. Applies to all TSAA connections on this port. IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address If needed. enter the IP address for the subnet. The default values are: • NET 1: 192. v4.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 285 Property Slot Selection Action Select the physical slot where the TCM module you want to configure is installed.255) are reserved for broadcast messaging and cannot be used as a valid IP address. The default is 255. Clicking Not Installed resets all options to their default state and makes them unavailable for configuration.1. the default is 100 Mbps Half Duplex. The addresses for NET 1 and NET 2 do not need to be unique.168. Not Installed. • For a model 4352A/B or 4354 with fiber connectors.0. Transceiver Mode IP Address Enter the IP Address for the port.255. enter the IP address for the default gateway.a See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems for more information about slot locations. The default is Not Installed. this is the IP address of the network router.0. • If the TCM you are configuring is installed in the COM slot.168. such as 192. Installed Click Installed to enable configuration of the module.255.x • NET 2: 192.0 . If needed.168. you can select either the Left or Right slot. Select the communication mode. If you have a model 4353 TCM.1. These modules cannot negotiate the connection speed or connect at 10 Mbps.0. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Connections to the TCM’s embedded OPC server can be made only at 100 Mbps. • For a model 4351A/B or 4353. and one in the Right physical slot. the default is AutoNegotiate.0. The default gateway address must be part of the subnet.x where x is the node number. The default is 0. A TCM can be configured in the Right slot only if a TCM in the Left slot has already been configured. you must select the Left slot. Typically.0. The highest and lowest IP addresses in a subnet (addresses where the last number is 0 or 255. • If the TCM is installed in any other available logical slot. Each logical slot can hold two TCMs—one in the Left physical slot.9. you cannot select 10 Mbps as the communication mode on NET 2. You must re-install a TCM in the left slot before you can modify the configuration of the TCM in the right slot. 5 Note Click OK to save your changes. Invensys recommends that only advanced users change these settings. the default settings should be sufficient. click Show Advanced Options and then specify the properties shown in the table below for NET 1 and NET 2. The default value is 49152. This allows the TCM to operate behind a firewall that has implemented port restrictions. If you need to use this feature. Highest TCP Port Number Enter the highest TCP port number to use for an outgoing connection from the TCM. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For most networks.0 . Property Lowest TCP Port Number Action Enter the lowest TCP port number to use for an outgoing connection from the TCM. The default value is 65535. v4.286 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration a. Setting these properties restricts the ports that the TCM can use for TCP connections to the specified range.9. Can be from 1024 to 65535. and you then uninstall the TCM in the left slot. please contact Invensys Technical Support for assistance with configuring these settings. Applicable to Modbus/TCP and OPC ports. 4 To configure the TCM for operation behind a firewall. you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the TCM installed in the right slot. If this occurs. Modbus TCP and OPC will be unable to connect. If you have configured TCMs in both the left and right slots. even if the IP address is changed via a download change operation. Changes to TCM IP addresses are not effective until the existing connection is closed and a new connection is opened. reset the values to the default settings to fix the problem and re-enable Modbus TCP and OPC. it remains open until you close it. Applicable to Modbus/TCP and OPC ports. Once a connection is opened. Note If these settings are misconfigured. Can be from 1024 to 65535. and specify these properties. Select a node (controller). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. select the module (slot) you want to configure Peer-to-Peer ports for. 4 5 Under Slot Selection.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 287 Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports This procedure explains how to configure the IP addresses for controllers communicating on a Peer-to-Peer network through a Tricon TCM.0 . v4. Note Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. double-click Configuration. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. the Peer-to-Peer protocol is not available on NET 2 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.9. Click the Peer-to-Peer tab. Peer-to-Peer communication can be configured on NET 1 only for these TCMs. and expand Hardware Allocation. Enable Communication with Tricon V8 and V9 Peer-to-Peer Systems on NET 1 Select the check box to enable communication with Tricon version 8 and 9 systems on the NET 1 port. unconfigured state. click Reset All to reset all node settings for the selected slot to their default. UDP port numbers do not need to be unique. The default is 1503. v4. Enter the IP address for the controller. You should not need to change this setting unless the TCM is located behind a firewall. This must be the same number that the controller uses as its UDP Base Port Number. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property UDP Base Port Number Action For each network port. specify these properties (applicable to all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network). Note If necessary. Network Click the network port that the TCM uses to communicate with the selected Peer-to-Peer node. 1504. The default is 1503. IP Address 6 7 Click Update to save the new settings for the selected node. If you forget to click Update before selecting another node. The default is cleared. Available only for a module installed in the left slot.1504 on both NET 1 and NET 2 (meaning Peer-to-Peer is enabled on both ports). as long as the IP addresses for each port is unique.288 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Property Destination UDP Port Action Enter the UDP port number for each controller to be communicated with on the Peer-to-Peer network. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for reserved values.0 . Available only for NET 1 on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. The default is NET 1. enter the UDP base port number for the controller. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each node to be included in the network. Enter 0 to disable Peer-to-Peer over UDP/IP on the network. your settings will be lost.9. 9 Click OK to save your changes. NET 2 is not available for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. 8 Once all nodes have been configured. The TCM Setup dialog box appears.9. four ports are available on NET 1 only. which enables Modbus communication through network ports. Click the Modbus TCP tab. double-click Configuration. Modbus TCP is not available on NET 2 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. For model 4351A/B and 4352A/B TCMs. Select a port and specify these properties. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. 4 5 Under Slot Selection. and expand Hardware Allocation.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 289 Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports This procedure explains how to configure Modbus TCP ports on a Tricon TCM. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Note Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication. v4. select the module (slot) you want to configure Modbus TCP ports for. For model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. 16 ports are available for Modbus TCP communication.0 . enter the IP address of the slave node. the default is NET 2. The default is 502. 6 Click OK to save your changes. For models 4353 and 4354. Available only with Modbus TCP Slave Net.9.290 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Property Protocol Port Write Enabled Action Select the communication protocol for the port. Master Logical Port TCP Port Number Network IP Address If the port uses Modbus Master protocol. enter the specific master IP address. Click the network that the selected port is connected to. Enter the number of the Modbus Master node (1-32). enter either of these: • To accept communication from any Modbus Master. v4. For models 4351A/B and 4352A/B. Available only if Modbus TCP Slave is selected as the communication protocol. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is Low 16 Bits First. leave the IP address as 0. • To accept communication only from a defined Modbus Master. the default is NET 1 (NET 2 is not available for these TCMs). FP Ordering Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Select the ordering to use for floating point numbers.0. Available only with Modbus TCP Master protocol. The default is cleared (the port is read-only).0. Enter the minimum and maximum for the Modbus data range. Select this check box if you want to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. Enter the number for the TCP port.0 . Options include Modbus TCP Master and Modbus TCP Slave Net. Must be unique for each TCM installed in a system.0. If the port uses Modbus Slave protocol. Select a destination route and then specify these properties. each slot (module) has two networks (NET 1 and NET 2). 4 5 6 Select the module (slot) you want to configure routing for. Click the Routing tab. See Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 282. v4. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. If the gateway address is on NET 1. Up to 10 different routes can be configured for each network. If the gateway address is on NET 2. then the subnet mask must be the same as the NET 1 subnet mask defined on the Network tab. and expand Hardware Allocation. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. Property Destination IP Address Destination IP Subnet Mask Action Enter the IP address which is used if the controller is not on the same subnet as other devices. then the subnet mask must be the same as the NET 2 subnet mask defined on the Network tab.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 291 Configuring TCM Routing This procedure explains how to configure routing on a Tricon TCM.0 . Select the network (NET 1 or NET 2) you want to configure routing for.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Enter the IP address of the subnet mask. double-click Configuration. 9. The TCM/OPC or TCM/B Setup dialog box appears.2. Note If necessary. the TSAA and TriStation protocols are configured on the Network tab (see Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 282).292 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Property Destination Gateway IP Address Action Enter the IP address of the gateway to which the controller is connected. For Tricon v10. TriStation.3 or later. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. Click the Protocols tab. and expand Hardware Allocation. Additionally. the TSAA protocol is not available on NET 2 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. The OPC protocol is available only with model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. 8 Click OK to save your changes. Configuring TCM Protocols (Tricon v10. unconfigured state. because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. double-click Configuration.1 and v10. click Reset All to change all destination settings for the selected slot to their default.0 .3 and later systems. and is supported on NET 2 only.3 and Later Only) This procedure explains how to configure the TSAA. 7 Click Update Destination to apply the settings. and OPC protocols used for TCM communication in Tricon v10. The gateway address must always be on NET 1 or NET 2. Note The Protocols tab in the TCM Setup dialog box appears only when the target system version is configured for Tricon v10. Cannot be the same as the TriStation or TSAA port numbers. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information. Cannot be the same as the Management or TSAA port numbers. The default for both ports is 1510.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default for both ports is 1502. For more information. Protocol TriStation Property TriStation Port Number Action Enter the UDP port to use for TriStation connections on NET 1 and NET 2. Specify these properties for the protocol(s) you will be using with the TCM. see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User’s Guide.0 .Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 293 4 5 Select the module (slot) you want to configure protocols for. v4. This must be the same value as the Management UDP Port Number property in the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor’s Network Configuration dialog box. Management Management Port Number Enter the UDP port to use for the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor’s connection to TCM communication status information on NET 1 and NET 2. 0. OPC A&E SOE SOE Block Number Enter the SOE block number used when events are retrieved by an OPC client.0 (IP multicasting is disabled). The default value is 0 (not configured). Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be sent to the multicast IP address at the specified update rate (for example. on NET 1 and NET 2. Multicast Update Rate Enter the update rate.000ms). Available with TCM models 4353 and 4354 only. Available only for NET 1 on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.000. bin data will be multicast every 1.294 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Protocol TSAA Property TSAA Port Number Action Enter the UDP port to use for TSAA connections. The default value is 500. Available with TCM models 4353 and 4354 only. Cannot be the same as the TriStation or Management port numbers. The default value is 1000.000. See your Network Administrator or IT department for more information. The default for both ports is 1500. Can be from 250 to 2. Must be unique for each TCM installed in a system. Can be from 1 to 1. SOE Severity TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Multicast IP Address Enter the IP address that TSAA multicasts should be sent to. Can be from 0 to 14. by default. Available only for NET 1 on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. Note: To use TSAA multicasting.0. in milliseconds. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information.0 . The default is 0. v4. Enter the severity (priority) level for SOE events (state changes obtained from the SOE block). Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be sent to the specified address. A value of 0 indicates that TSAA communication is disabled on that port. including DDE Server and SOE Recorder. your network hardware (such as routers) must also support multicasting.9. so that all members of the group will receive the data. Available only for NET 1 on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. for TSAA IP multicasting. TSAA clients using a TCM interface have write access to the NET 1 and NET 2 ports by default. Major Severity Fatal Severity Disable All Reset All 6 Click OK to save your changes. The default value is 300.2 and earlier systems.3 and later systems. The default value is 100. See Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386.000 (highest). you must enable and configure the TCM access control list. Enter a number to represent the severity level for major system events. CAUTION TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Click to prevent the TCM from sending system event notifications to OPC clients. In Tricon v10. v4. Can be from 1 (lowest) to 1. Enter a number to represent the severity level for informational system events. Click to reset all OPC severity levels to their default values. Can be from 1 (lowest) to 1000 (highest). Enter 0 if you do not want the TCM to send notifications of fatal system events to OPC clients. Enter a number to represent the severity level for fatal system events. Minor Severity Enter a number to represent the severity level for minor system events.9. Enter 0 if you do not want the TCM to send notifications of major system events to OPC clients. Sets the severity levels for all system event types to 0. The default value is 700.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 295 Protocol OPC A&E System Events Property Info Severity Action Severity levels identify the urgency of an event.000 (highest). Depending on your configuration. The default value is 500. this may create a security issue. To disable write access by TSAA clients. Can be from 1 (lowest) to 1000 (highest). Can be from 1 (lowest) to 1. Please note that this default behavior is opposite of that on TCMs in Tricon v10. Enter 0 if you do not want the TCM to send notifications of minor system events to OPC clients.0 . Enter 0 if you do not want the TCM to send notifications of informational system events to OPC clients. saving time and effort.9. but not saved.296 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Exporting the TCM Configuration to a File Once TCM configuration is complete. The TCM Setup dialog box appears.2 or earlier system. Not only does this provide a backup of your configuration settings. 4 Note Navigate to the folder you want to save the exported configuration file in. 3 Click Export. If the XML file is changed after export. it also allows you to import the settings to other TCMs. and ensuring that all TCMs in a system have the same configuration. Note An exported TCM configuration file cannot be modified outside of TriStation. you may want to export it to an XML file.0 . you are asked if you want to include the unsaved changes in the exported file. and click Save. v4. If the TCM configuration has been changed. enter a file name. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. you will be unable to import it into TriStation. and expand Hardware Allocation.3 or later system cannot be imported to the same model TCM installed in a Tricon v10. A TCM configuration file exported from a model 4351A/4352A TCM installed in a Tricon v10. Invensys technical support may also ask for an exported configuration file to assist in troubleshooting TCM problems. double-click Configuration. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. These values will need to be manually configured.0 . if OPC configuration information is included in the exported file. but OPC configuration items are not included in the exported file. and click Open. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. including the unsaved changes. If a configuration item exists in the TCM. but not in the file being imported. with the imported settings. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. that item will be ignored. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. If the TCM configuration has been changed. if the TCM supports OPC.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Click OK to save your changes.Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 297 Importing the TCM Configuration From a File If you have already configured a TCM. all OPC settings will be ignored. but not yet saved. and exported the configuration to a file. For example. you should review the TCM configuration to ensure that all settings have been correctly configured for your implementation. double-click Configuration. Click each tab of the TCM Setup dialog box to review and verify that all settings have been correctly configured. v4. Click Import. you are asked if you want to overwrite the existing configuration. and expand Hardware Allocation. once the import is complete. but the TCM the file is being imported to does not support OPC. the default value will be used. For example. all OPC settings will be set to the default values. 4 5 6 Navigate to the folder where the exported configuration file is located. but is not applicable to the TCM it is being imported to. In all cases. TCM configuration settings are imported from the selected file. If a configuration item exists in the exported file. you can import the saved configuration to another TCM. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • By writing aliased data to the TIMESET or TIMEADJ function blocks in a TriStation 1131 application. • To the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network. For assistance with the specialized programming that is required. • To an OPC client. Time synchronization enables a network of Triconex controllers to synchronize time with each other or with external devices. contact Invensys Technical Support. • To the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network. see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. NCMG SMM TCM • To the GPS (Global Positioning System). For more information.0 . • To SNTP.9. • To the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network (Triconex Time Synchronization). v4. Topics include: • • • • • • About Tricon Time Synchronization on page 298 Using a Tricon ACM to Synchronize Time on page 299 Using a Tricon NCM to Synchronize Time on page 300 Using a Tricon NCM/G to Synchronize Time on page 301 Using a Tricon SMM to Synchronize Time on page 302 Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time on page 303 About Tricon Time Synchronization This table summarizes the ways Tricon controller time can be synchronized to an external device or to the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network. Table 33 Module ACM ACM or NCM Tricon Time Synchronization Time Synchronization Options • To a Foxboro DCS. • To the GPS (Global Positioning System). • To the Honeywell Universal Control Network (UCM). such as a DCS or the Global Positioning System.298 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization This section explains how to use the Time Synchronization communication protocol with Tricon controllers. • To the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network. 4 Click OK to save your changes. 3 Specify these properties on the ACM Setup screen. double-click Configuration.Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization 299 Using a Tricon ACM to Synchronize Time This procedure explains how to use a Tricon ACM to enable time synchronization based on: • • The Foxboro I/A Series nodebus system time The Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network Procedure 1 2 Expand the Configuration tree.0 . Double-click the ACM slot. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property Privilege Time Synchronization Action For synchronization on NET 2. and then click Setup. specify Read/Write. • Select NET 2 to enable time synchronization with the Tricon Master node (controller). and expand Hardware Allocation. • Select On NET 1 enable time synchronization with external source to allow time synchronization with a Foxboro I/A DCS. v4. The default is Read.9. 3 4 Select the On NET 1 enable time synchronization with Tricon Master Node check box. double-click Configuration.0 . and then click Setup.300 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Using a Tricon NCM to Synchronize Time This procedure explains how to use a Tricon NCM to enable time synchronization with the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network. Click OK to save your changes. Double-click the NCM slot. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Configuration tree. v4.9. and expand Hardware Allocation. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Time Synchronization For a network of Triconex controllers. Property Global Positioning System Installed Action Select this check box to enable time synchronization through the GPS.Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization 301 Using a Tricon NCM/G to Synchronize Time This procedure explains how to use a Tricon NCM/G to enable time synchronization through the Global Positioning System (GPS) by using the Trimble Acutime Gold Smart GPS Antenna.0 . it can be used as the master node for time synchronization of the controllers on the network. v4. For information on installing the kit. 4 Click OK to save your changes. select the On NET 1 enable time synchronization with the Tricon Master Node check box. CAUTION Procedure 1 2 To ensure the accuracy of GPS time adjustments. the Tricon clock must be set to within 10 minutes of the correct local time. Double-click the NCM/G slot. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. double-click Configuration. Expand the Configuration tree. If selected. If the Tricon NCMG is in a Peer-to-Peer network. and then click Setup. other controllers can also be synchronized to the Tricon master controller. 3 Specify these properties on the NCM Setup screen. and expand Hardware Allocation.9. and then click Setup. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . and expand Hardware Allocation. For more information. double-click Configuration. 3 4 Select the Enable time synchronization with external source check box.9. Double-click the SMM slot. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Configuration tree.302 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Using a Tricon SMM to Synchronize Time This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon SMM module to synchronize time based on the Honeywell Universal Control Network (UCM). v4. Click OK to save your changes. see the SMM User’s Guide. you configure time synchronization only for the left slot (there is no redundancy when installed in the COM slot). NET 2 is not available for Triconex Time Synchronization with model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. v4. If the TCM is installed in the COM slot. the master node TCM synchronizes time with the GPS. all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with GPS time.9. 2. the Tricon clock must be set to within 10 minutes of the correct local time. If the TCM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network. GPS time synchronization uses Serial Port 1 on the TCM. If the TCM is in a Peer-to-Peer network. Time synchronization can be enabled only for a single logical slot. Time synchronization can be enabled using the following protocols: • • • GPS SNTP Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC (NET 1 only) or UDP/IP (NET 1 or NET 22) on a Peer-to-Peer network In a redundant network of Triconex controllers that each have two TCMs installed. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and reject all other time change requests. it can also be used as the master node for time synchronization of other controllers on the network. In this configuration.Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization 303 Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time The information in this section explains how to enable time synchronization on a TCM. If you have one of these older model TCMs installed in your system. you can implement redundant time synchronization by configuring time synchronization for both TCM modules (both left and right slots). Slave nodes synchronize their time only to the master node on the Peerto-Peer network. Note The information and procedures in this section do not apply to model 4351 and 4352 TCMs. For information on installing the kit. Topics include: • • • Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 303 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 305 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 307 Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM This procedure explains how to configure a TCM to enable time synchronization through the Global Positioning System (GPS) by using the Trimble Acutime Gold Smart GPS Antenna. and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master TCM. it cannot be configured for GPS time synchronization.0 . CAUTION To ensure the accuracy of GPS time adjustments. TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration. In this way. see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. please see Appendix C. See Configuring TCM Serial Ports on page 280 for more information. 4 5 Under Slot Selection. You must configure the module in the left slot first.9. If you previously configured Port 1 to use a Modbus protocol. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. click Left Slot. selecting GPS will reset Port 1 to use the GPS protocol. v4. Enabling the TCM as a Master Node for Triconex Time Synchronization (Optional) If you also want the TCM to be able to act as a master node for time synchronization of other controllers on a Peer-to-Peer network (using Triconex Time Synchronization) do the following: 1 2 In the Configuration tree. click Operating Parameters (see Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249). Note The module in the right slot can be configured only if it has been installed (see Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 282) and if the module in the left slot has already been configured for GPS time synchronization. Under Time Synchronization Configuration. under Slot Selection. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. select GPS. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.304 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree.0 . click Right Slot. double-click Configuration. 7 Click OK to save your changes. Click the Time Sync tab. and expand Hardware Allocation. and then select GPS Redundant. 6 (Optional) If you have a redundant TCM installed in the right slot. Select the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization check box. network load issues or PC performance can result in delays in processing time update requests from the Tricon. Because the SNTP server resides on a PC. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. In this way. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree.0 . 4 5 Under Slot Selection. If the TCM is in a Peer-to-Peer network. it can also be used as the master node for time synchronization of other controllers on the network. all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with SNTP time. and expand Hardware Allocation. In this configuration. and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master TCM.Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization 305 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM This procedure explains how to configure TCM time synchronization to an SNTP server. the master node TCM synchronizes time with the SNTP server. double-click Configuration.9. If the TCM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network. Select these properties. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. You must configure the module in the left slot first. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. v4. Click the Time Sync tab. click Left Slot. Slave nodes synchronize their time only to the master node on the Peerto-Peer network. it cannot be configured for SNTP time synchronization. and reject all other time change requests. Note SNTP time synchronization is less accurate than GPS time synchronization. click Right Slot. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 7 Click OK to save your changes. Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize time with. click Operating Parameters (see Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249). under Slot Selection. and then select these properties.0 . Click the network the SNTP server is located on. Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize time with. Click the network the SNTP server is located on. 6 (Optional) If you have a redundant TCM installed in the right slot. Enabling the TCM as a Master Node for Triconex Time Synchronization (Optional) If you also want the TCM to be able to act as a master node for time synchronization of other controllers on a Peer-to-Peer network (using Triconex Time Synchronization) do the following: 1 2 In the Configuration tree. The default is None.9. v4. Property Time Synchronization Configuration SNTP Master Network Action Select SNTP Redundant.306 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration Property Time Synchronization Configuration SNTP Master Network SNTP Master IP Address Action Select SNTP. Select the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization check box. This can be different than the master network selected for the left slot. SNTP Master IP Address Note The module in the right slot can be configured only if it has been installed (see Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 282) and if the module in the left slot has already been configured for SNTP time synchronization. The master node can also synchronize its time with a GPS or an SNTP server. Configuring a Slave Node This procedure describes how to configure the TCM as a slave node on the Peer-to-Peer network. The controller with the lowest node number serves as the master node. double-click Configuration. use the procedures in the these sections: • • Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 303 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 305 Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Expand the Controller tree. Select the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization check box. Under Time Synchronization Configuration. select None. v4. and expand Hardware Allocation. Click the Time Sync tab. Configuring a Master Node This procedure describes how to configure the TCM as a master node on the Peer-to-Peer network when GPS or SNTP time synchronization is not being used. In this way. click Operating Parameters (see Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249). In this configuration.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization 307 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM In a Peer-to-Peer network. and expand Hardware Allocation. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. In the Configuration tree. the master node synchronizes time with the GPS or SNTP server. If you want the master node to synchronize to a GPS or SNTP server. all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with GPS or SNTP time. This allows the controller to participate as a master node in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.0 . Triconex Time Synchronization can be used to synchronize time across controllers on a network. Click OK to save your changes. double-click Configuration. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master node. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. The default is None. click Operating Parameters (see Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249).This property applies to the modules installed in both the left and right slots simultaneously. Specify these properties.0 . Time Synchronization Configuration is automatically set to Peer-to-Peer and cannot be changed.308 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration 3 Click the Time Sync tab. v4. 4 5 Under Slot Selection. Select the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization check box. You must configure the module in the left slot first. In the Configuration tree. Click the network you want to enable Triconex Time Synchronization for. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is NET 2.9. Click OK to save your changes. click Left Slot. Property Time Synchronization Configuration Peer-to-Peer Master Network Action Select Peer-to-Peer. This allows the controller to participate as a slave node in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network. Note 6 7 8 If you have a redundant TCM installed in the right slot. but the AI/DI module is not. Module Configuration Settings—Prints a report listing the current configuration settings for each applicable module in the project’s hardware configuration.Printing the Tricon Module Configuration 309 Printing the Tricon Module Configuration Once Tricon controller configuration is complete. you may want to print the module configuration information. The Print All Options dialog box appears. Select the printer you want to use. and make it easier to select only those documents you want to print. On the File menu. etc). CMs.9. The Print dialog box appears. Not only does this provide a backup of your configuration settings. 3 Select the check boxes for the following documents: • • Hardware Module Configuration—Prints a report listing the controller hardware (MPs. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Note 4 5 Click OK. as it does not require configuration in TriStation. To quickly clear the check boxes for all the documents in the list. clear the Select All check box. TCM and EPI module configuration details are included. I/O modules) currently configured in the project. v4. and the desired settings (number of copies. Only modules that require configuration in TriStation are included in this report. it also can assist Invensys technical support when troubleshooting configuration problems.0 . and then click OK. For example. select Print All. Procedure 1 2 Open the Project Workspace (see The Project Workspace on page 20). page orientation. v4.9.0 .310 Chapter 3 Tricon Controller Configuration TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 9.0 . v4.4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Overview 312 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters 315 Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points 317 Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version 318 Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 327 Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 342 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization 362 Using Trident or Tri-GP System and Module Attributes 369 Printing the Trident or Tri-GP Module Configuration 370 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 312 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Overview This figure shows the main steps for configuring the Trident or Tri-GP controller.Set up Time Synchronization (optional) Set Up TriStation C ommunication Implement on the C ontroller Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Steps This list includes the steps that can or should be done during Trident or Tri-GP controller configuration. Description See Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters on page 315 Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points on page 317 Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware on page 327 Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module on page 342 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization on page 362      Set the operating parameters. Allocate memory and hardware.0 . v4. Set Up the Project Develop the Application Test with the Emulator Fix Errors Yes Errors? No .Allocate memory and configure hardware . Controller configuration must be completed before an application is downloaded to the controller. Set up time synchronization.Set operating parameters C onfigure the C ontroller .C onfigure communication to external devices . The controller must be configured before an application can be downloaded and implemented on a controller. and their typical order in the project cycle. Configure hardware. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. Configure communication to external devices. Topics include: • • • The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Trees on page 313 The Trident and Tri-GP Configuration Trees on page 313 The Trident and Tri-GP Controller and Emulator Panels on page 314 The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Trees The Trident and Tri-GP Controller trees include the elements (operating parameters. which is where you specify the configuration for the project. The Trident Controller tree is shown at right. hardware allocation.9.Overview 313 The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Workspace This section explains the Controller Workspace. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . memory allocation. communication. communication settings. The Trident and Tri-GP Configuration Trees The Trident and Tri-GP Configuration trees include operating parameters. memory allocation. and hardware allocation) that can be configured. and Status Attributes. v4. The tree also includes the Controller and Emulator Panels used to emulate and run an application. 0 . v4. Controller and Emulator tree TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.314 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration The Trident and Tri-GP Controller and Emulator Panels The Trident and Tri-GP Controller and Emulator Panels display programs running in emulation or in the controller.9. Procedure 1 2 On the Configuration tree. Note The target system version displayed on the Operating Parameters screen is the target system version currently configured in the project. open the Hardware Allocation node. The default is cleared.Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters 315 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters This procedure explains how to specify Trident or Tri-GP operating parameters. However. Property Password Required for Connection Password Action Select the check box to restrict access by requiring a password when connecting to the controller. which are settings that affect the general operation of the controller. The Item Properties dialog box appears. 3 Specify these properties on the Operating Parameters tab. To view the actual system version of your Trident or Tri-GP system. including settings to restrict access to the controller from a TriStation PC and from remote devices. Enter the password required to access the controller. The MP Setup dialog box appears. Click Setup. see Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version on page 318. and then double-click the MP.0 . This value is not obtained from a connected controller. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. You can view Trident or Tri-GP operating parameters by clicking Operating Parameters on the Trident or Tri-GP Configuration tree. v4. The default is PASSWORD. you cannot make changes to the operating parameters from that screen. You must access the Operating Parameters tab on the MP Setup dialog box (as described below) to set or change operating parameters.9. x or Tri-GP CM on page 367). The default is cleared. In all cases.x or Tri-GP only) Use Local Time Prevent Restart Following Fatal Error (Trident 2. Clear the check box to allow remote devices to write to output points. all future restart attempts will be disabled. Select the check box to allow points to be disabled from TriStation 1131. when a Trident or Tri-GP MP detects a fatal error condition. The default is cleared. This allows the system to overcome temporary problems without user intervention. to prevent the MP from continually restarting. if an MP attempts to automatically restart more than three times in 30 minutes. Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization (Trident 2.0 . The default is selected. By default. The default is selected. you can print a report listing the current Operating Parameters settings. This will cause the controller to go to either DUAL or SINGLE mode. Using the Print All command. it will automatically restart. Select the check box to prevent the MPs from restarting automatically after a fatal error occurs.x and Tri-GP systems only. The default is cleared. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. This property can be changed only when your project is in the Download All state. reeducate from the other active MPs. Applicable to Trident 2. The default is cleared. Note: The default restart behavior described above applies to Trident 1.x systems. Clear the check box if you do not want to use local time. but cannot be changed. Applicable to Trident 2. and when possible. 4 Note Click OK to save. If you change this property (by selecting or clearing the check box). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. TriStation will automatically rebuild the application before it is downloaded. if the MP detects a fatal error. If all three MPs shut down. When this property is selected.316 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Property Restart on Power Up Disable Remote Changes to Outputs Allow Disabling of Points Action Select the check box to have the application restarted after a power failure.9.x and Tri-GP systems only. requiring user intervention to restart the MP. user intervention will be required to restart the system. you must perform a Download All to apply your changes to the controller. it will shut down without a restart attempt.x or Tri-GP only) Select the check box to allow the controller to participate in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network as a master node or a slave node (see Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the Trident 2. 0 . The amount of memory for memory points is set when a TriStation 1131 project is created. the amount of memory for input and output points is determined by the number and type of I/O modules configured in the TriStation 1131 project. You can change these allocations at any time before building and downloading the application. and memory points (tagnames) in the application. changes to memory allocation require a Download All (see Using the Download All Command on page 480). double-click Configuration. 3 4 Note Move the slider up or down to change the memory allocated for the selected point. you can print a report listing the current memory allocation settings.9. Initially.Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points 317 Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points This procedure explains how to change the amount of memory used for input. Using the Print All command. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. See What Are Undeclared Tagnames? on page 184 for more information about memory allocation for points. Repeat for all points to be changed. CAUTION After an application has been downloaded to the controller or Emulator. and then expand Memory Allocation. output. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Double-click the type of point you want to change. v4. See Printing Project Documents on page 91. v2.6 or later.x. Change the target system version in the project. you cannot change the target system version for a Tri-GP controller. v1. If you change the system version of your Trident controller (for example.0 supports only one version of the Tri-GP controller—version 2. you are allowed to back up your project.2. This change requires a Download All.) The target system version currently configured in the project is displayed on the Operating Parameters screen and at the top of the Select Main Processor dialog box. you must logically configure the change in the TriStation 1131 project. The target system version determines which Trident or Tri-GP controller features and modules can be configured in a project. Validate the target system version change to review the changes that will be made to the project before committing to the change. Before committing to the target system version change.0). v4. Thus. v1.0. You originally set the target system version when you created a new project. Configuring the target system version is a three-step process: • • • Determine the system version of the Trident or Tri-GP controller the project will be downloaded to. or when you converted an existing project to TriStation 1131 v4. etc.1. Procedure 1 Do one of the following: • If any of the following scenarios are true. Topics include: • • • • Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version on page 318 Validating a Trident Target System Version Change on page 320 Changing the Trident Target System Version on page 321 Results of a Trident Target System Version Change on page 324 Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version Before changing the target system version in your TriStation 1131 project. go to step 2: TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. you upgrade your Trident system from v1. You need to know the following: • • The model number of the Main Processor modules installed in the Trident or Tri-GP (3101) The Trident or Tri-GP system version (for example.0 .5.318 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version This procedure explains how to change the target system version in your project.9. Note TriStation 1131 v4.4 to v2.9. you should determine the system version of the Trident or Tri-GP controller you will be downloading the project to. The Trident target system version is not available in Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor v2. Note System version information is not available for Trident 1. v4.x controllers. you do not have the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor v2. You do not need to continue with this procedure.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version 319 — You know you have a Trident 1. you do not have the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor v2.0 and earlier. • 2 3 4 5 If the above scenarios do not apply to your situation. see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User's Guide). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. go to step 3. — For a Trident controller.5. Trident System Version 6 View the system version information. Connect to the node (controller) whose system version you want to find.9. The Tri-GP target system version is not available in Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor v2. — For a Tri-GP controller.0 .2 or later. — You are unable to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP controller. This property will display 0 when you are connected to a Trident 1.x system. located at the top of the System Overview window. click System Overview. In the System Overview tree. The System Overview window appears.0 or later. which should specify your Trident or Tri-GP controller’s system version.x controller. Open the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (for more detailed instructions.4.1 and earlier. Refer to your sales order paperwork. see the Trident Target System Version Change Matrix on page 325. based on your controller configuration. you should validate the change to determine what effect it will have on your project.9.0 does not support Trident controller versions v1.1 and earlier. Double-click the IOP whose target system version you want to change. For a list of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Trident controller.320 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Validating a Trident Target System Version Change Before committing to a target system version change. see the applicable Trident Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site). The system version of the Tridenta controller that this project will be downloaded to.9. and then click Replace MP. 3 Specify these properties in the Replace Main Processor dialog box. Property Model Target System Version Description The Main Processor model installed in the controller that this project will be downloaded to. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. and expand Hardware Allocation. For detailed information about the changes that occur when switching from one target system version to another. double-click Configuration. TriStation 1131 v4. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select. Validation allows you to plan ahead for the changes that will occur when you switch from one target system version to another.0 . a. When changing the target system version. See Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization on page 362 for more information.6) will NOT change your time synchronization settings.3). review the results of the validation to determine if you want to commit to the target system version change. from 1. you also need to change the target system version in your TriStation 1131 project.5 to v2. you can upgrade or downgrade the version number of the Trident system (for example. • On the Trident 2. time synchronization is enabled if either the On NET 1 Enable Time Synchronization or the On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization properties are selected on the Network tab of the CM Setup dialog box. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. See Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version on page 318 for more information.x controller. 4 5 Select the Validate Only check box. If time synchronization has been enabled on the Trident CM or MP (as described below). TriStation 1131 analyzes your project settings and current controller configuration to determine the modifications that will be made to the project if you change to the selected target system version.x to 2.0. or vice-versa. • You will need to re-enable time synchronization after the target system version change is complete. it will be disabled during a target system version change from 1. Changing the target system version requires a Download All. You cannot be connected to the controller while you are changing the target system version. time synchronization is enabled if the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization check box is selected on the Operating Parameters tab of the MP Setup dialog box. use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor or your sales paperwork to verify your controller’s system version information. upgrade from v1. If you have upgraded your Trident system to a newer version.x controller.9. or when you converted the project from a previous version of TriStation 1131.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version 321 Note If you aren’t sure which Trident system version to select. You selected the target system version for your project when you created it.5 to v1. Changing the Trident Target System Version The target system version determines which Trident controller features and modules can be configured in a project. You cannot change the project’s target system version while the project is in the Download Changes state. On the Trident 1. v4. or downgrade from v1.2 to 1. 6 In the Messages pane.x. Click OK.0 . Upgrading or downgrading within a major Trident controller version (for example. 322 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration CAUTION If you are upgrading from Trident 1.9. the configuration settings for the CM will be reset to their default values during the target system version change. • • 3 4 On the Commands menu. Note If the Replace MP button is unavailable. Go back to step 2 to change the project state before continuing. so that you can use them to reconfigure the Trident 2.0 . v4. Procedure 1 2 Verify that you are not connected to the controller. See Validating a Trident Target System Version Change on page 320. If needed.x to Trident 2. and then click Replace MP. and expand Hardware Allocation.x CM onfiguration details before changing the target system version.x. click Change State to Download All. We recommend writing down your Trident 1. change the project state to Download All. click Change State. In the Change Project State to Download All dialog box.x CM after the target system version change is complete. the project is in the Download Changes state. Double-click the IOP whose system version you want to change. Before committing to a target system version change. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Expand the Controller tree. double-click Configuration. you should validate the change to determine what effect it will have on your project. bt2) does not have to be included in the name. use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor to verify your Trident system version information. For a list of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Trident controller. When asked to backup your project before changing the target system version.9. Property Model Target System Version Description The Main Processor model installed in the Trident controller that this project will be downloaded to. based on your Trident configuration. a. The system version of the Tridenta controller that this project will be downloaded to. see the applicable Trident Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).0 does not support Trident controller versions 1.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version 323 5 Specify these properties in the Replace Main Processor dialog box. Note If you aren’t sure which Trident system version to select. v4. TriStation 1131 v4.1 and earlier.9. Click No to continue without creating a backup file. or specify a new one. • TriStation 1131 reconfigures your project to the selected target system version. All current configuration settings are maintained. See Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controller’s System Version on page 318 for more information. however. 6 7 8 Click OK. do one of the following: • (Recommended) Click Yes and then specify the folder to save the backup file to. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. any parameters that did not exist in the previous version are set to their default values. click Yes to continue. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct version to select.0 . The file extension (. Use the suggested name. When asked to confirm your selection. see the Trident Target System Version Change Matrix on page 325. Then move down to locate the row (on the left) for the system version you want to change your project to. review the results of the target system version change. The box where your selected column and row meet describes the changes that will be made to your project if you change to the new target system version. For more information.324 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration 9 10 In the Messages pane. you must build the application and download it to the controller. Results of a Trident Target System Version Change The following table describes the changes that are made to your project when changing from one target system version to another. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . v4. To finish the process. To use the Trident Target System Version Change Matrix: 1 2 Find the column for your current system version on the top.9. x v2.1.9. projects created with a previous version of TriStation will remain in the Download Changes state regardless of a target system version change. • Remove support for enhanced model 3201 CM. • Remove model 3382 EPI module. • Add support for model 3381 PI module. • Add support for model 3481 AO module.x v1. v1. v1.0 or v1. v1. • Add support for original and enhanced model 3201 CM.x Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version v1.0.3. • Add support for model 3482 AI module.x or v1. • Add support for model 3481 AO module. • Remove model 3311 HRDI module.2.x. • Add support for model 3381 PI module. DOWNGRADE • Remove support for enhanced model 3201 CM. UPGRADE • Add support for enhanced model 3201 CM. • Remove model 3411 SDO module. • Add support for model 3481 AO module. • Add support for model 3381 PI module. • Remove model 3411 SDO module.x UPGRADE • Add support for model 3361 AI /DI module. 325 . with one exception—when you are converting a project created in a version of TriStation prior to v4.4.2.0. NOT ALLOWED UPGRADE • Add support for model 3381 PI module. DOWNGRADE • Remove model 3382 EPI module.x v2.x NEW VERSION v1. • Add support for model 3201 CM. • Add support for model 3482 AI module.x. or v1. see Converting Existing Projects to Version 4. or v1.4.0 v2.5. • Remove support for enhanced model 3201 CM. • Add support for model 3482 AI module. UPGRADE • Add support for model 3361 AI /DI module. v4. • Remove model 3311 HRDI module.Table 34 Trident Target System Version Change Matrix ORIGINAL VERSION v1. • Remove support for enhanced model 3201 CM.x or v1.6. • Add support for enhanced model 3201 CM. • Add support for model 3361 AI /DI module. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.3. DOWNGRADE • Remove model 3382 EPI module.x UPGRADE • Add support for model 3381 PI module.0 on page 11.5. NOT ALLOWED DOWNGRADE • Remove model 3361 AI /DI module.1 Note: A target system version change (upgrade or downgrade) requires that the project state be changed to Download All. • Add support for model 3361 AI /DI module.6.0 or v1. • Remove model 3311 HRDI module.9. NOT ALLOWED DOWNGRADE • Remove model 3361 AI /DI module. NOT ALLOWED DOWNGRADE • Remove model 3361 AI /DI module.1 v1.6. UPGRADE • Add support for model 3381 PI module. For more information. • Remove model 3411 SDO module. During project conversion. • Add support for model 3201 CM. x v1.2.6.1.x v2. • Add support for model 3411 SDO module. • Add support for model 3382 EPI module.x .1 v1.9. UPGRADE • Replace model 3381 PI module with model 3382 EPI module. • Add support for model 3482 AI module. • Add support for model 3311 HRDI module. • Add support for model 3411 SDO module.x.5. • Add support for model 3361 AI /DI module. • Add support for model 3382 EPI module.1. or v1.3. • Add support for model 3311 HRDI module. • Add support for model 3382 EPI module. • Add support for model 3382 EPI module. v1. • Add support for model 3411 SDO module. • Add support for original and enhanced model 3201 CM. • Add support for enhanced model 3201 CM.0 or v1. • Add support for model 3411 SDO module. • Add support for model 3481 AO module. • Add support for enhanced model 3201 CM. • Add support for model 3361 AI /DI module.x or v1. • Add support for model 3311 HRDI module.x v2. • Add support for model 3311 HRDI module.4. Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration v2.x 326 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. UPGRADE • Replace model 3381 PI module with model 3382 EPI module.0.Table 34 Trident Target System Version Change Matrix (continued) ORIGINAL VERSION v1.0 Chapter 4 NEW VERSION UPGRADE • Replace model 3381 PI module with model 3382 EPI module. UPGRADE • Replace model 3381 PI module with model 3382 EPI module. v4. On the Configuration tree. and serial ports. Procedure 1 2 On the Controller tree. and Tri-GP MPs. Topics include: • • • • • • Note Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Main Processors (MPs) on page 327 Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module on page 334 Removing a Trident or Tri-GP Module on page 335 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP SDO Module on page 335 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module on page 336 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP PI or EPI Module on page 339 For information on configuring the CM. open the Hardware Allocation node. Topics include: • • • • • Specifying Trident or Tri-GP MP Module Properties on page 327 Displaying Trident or Tri-GP MP Attribute Properties on page 329 Configuring Trident 1. network ports. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x MP Network Ports on page 330 Configuring Trident 2.x. v4. The Item Properties dialog box appears.x.9. and then double-click an MP.x or Tri-GP MP Network Ports on page 331 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP MP Serial Ports on page 332 Specifying Trident or Tri-GP MP Module Properties This procedure explains how to view and specify properties on the Trident or Tri-GP MP Module tab. see Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module on page 342. This procedure applies to Trident 1.Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 327 Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware This section explains how to configure the hardware allocation for a Trident or Tri-GP controller. double-click Configuration. Trident 2.0 . Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Main Processors (MPs) This section explains how to configure the Trident or Tri-GP MP properties. if it has been specified. 4 Note Click Confirm to save your changes. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.328 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration 3 Specify these properties on the Module tab.9. You cannot specify point properties for a Trident or Tri-GP MP. v4. if desired.0 . Select to have remote access only to aliased tagnames. Displays the scan time. Select to have remote access to all tagnames. Displays the node name and number. Enter a description. Property Model Description Node Name Scan Time Remote Access to Aliased Tagnames Remote Access to All Tagnames Action Select the model used in the physical system. These properties are displayed on the Attributes tab. The description of the attribute. The memory location for the attribute. v4. Property Tagname Data Type Location Description Description The name of the status or control attribute. double-click Configuration.Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 329 Displaying Trident or Tri-GP MP Attribute Properties This procedure explains how to display MP attribute properties (status and control attributes). 3 Click the Attributes tab. The Item Properties dialog box appears. open the Hardware Allocation node. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. On the Configuration tree. and then double-click an MP. The data type.0 .9. Procedure 1 2 On the Controller tree. Double-click the MP slot. connected to redundant ports of the same Modbus Master. Set to RJ-45. they can operate as redundant serial ports. v4.9.330 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring Trident 1. click Setup.x MP Network Ports This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Trident 1. 3 Specify these properties on the Network Ports tab. which supports network connections to a TriStation PC. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. double-click Configuration. Select half or full duplex depending on the installation. Each port must be configured separately and can operate independently with different Modbus Masters. and then click the Network Ports tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. cannot be changed. Or. cannot be changed.0 . Property Mode Transceiver Port Transceiver Mode Action Set to TriStation. and expand Hardware Allocation.x MP. 4 Click OK to save your changes. click Setup. connected to redundant ports of the same Modbus Master.0 . Select half or full duplex depending on the installation. Or. you must connect either via serial port. Each port must be configured separately and can operate independently with different Modbus Masters. IP addresses configured for the Middle and Right MP network ports are not valid for the initial connection to the Trident 2.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Set to RJ-45.Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 331 Configuring Trident 2. which supports network connections to a TriStation PC. cannot be changed.x or Tri-GP controller. v4. they can operate as redundant serial ports. double-click Configuration. Property Mode Transceiver Port Transceiver Mode Action Set to TriStation.x or Tri-GP controller to download your application. Double-click the MP slot. Note The first time you connect to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP MP. or via a network connection to the Left MP. 3 Specify these properties on the Network Ports tab.x or Tri-GP MP Network Ports This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Trident 2. See Connecting to the Trident 2. cannot be changed. and then click the Network Ports tab. and expand Hardware Allocation. using the default IP address. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information. 255.n.9.168. Trident 2.x. Double-click the MP slot. 4 Click OK to save your changes.x. 3 Specify these properties on the Serial Ports tab.0 . Property Port Selection Protocol Action Select the port to be configured. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. The default IP address is 192. double-click Configuration. and then click the Serial Ports tab. click Setup. where n is the node number of the controller. or Tri-GP MP. Configuring Trident or Tri-GP MP Serial Ports This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Trident 1. v4. Only Modbus Slave RTU is available. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default IP address is for connection to the Left MP only. and expand Hardware Allocation.332 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Property IP Address Action Specify the IP address of the controller. which supports serial connections using Modbus Slave RTU protocol. Set to none. 4 Click OK to save your changes.Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 333 Property Modbus Slave Address Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Transceiver Mode Handshake Wire Type Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Signal Delays Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Ports Command Action Enter the slave address of the serial port on the MP Baseplate. Select 1 Bit or 2 Bits. Select a parity option.9.767 is maximum). cannot be changed. Set to 0. Select RS-232 or RS-485. cannot be changed. cannot be changed. Set to 4 wire. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.0 . cannot be changed. Click to have the settings for the selected port copied to the other two serial ports on the MP. Select the rate used in the installation. Set at 8 bits. depending on the physical connection. Enter a minimum value (0 is default) and maximum value (32. configure the module using the instructions specific to that module: • • • • Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP SDO Module on page 335 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module on page 336 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP PI or EPI Module on page 339 Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module on page 342 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. On the Tools menu. click Insert Module. open the Hardware Allocation node. you must use the Download All command to download the change. you can quickly change it to a model 3311 HRDI module (and vice-versa) by double-clicking on the module in the configuration pane. PI. EPI.9. HRDI. and then clicking Confirm. selecting the model 3311 HRDI module from the Model list in the Item Properties dialog box. and then click the MP slot. If a CM is added to a configuration after the application has been downloaded to the controller. and click OK. or CM module. On the Configuration tree. 3 4 Configuration pane Module being added 6 If you added an SDO. This configuration shortcut can also be used when switching between the model 3481 and 3482 AO modules.334 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module This procedure explains how to insert a Trident or Tri-GP module in a configuration.0 . The Insert Module dialog box appears. Procedure 1 2 On the Controller tree. The mouse pointer changes to look like this: 5 Click on the configuration pane to add the module to the configuration. Note If you already have a model 3301 DI module installed. double-click Configuration. Select the type of module you want to add to the configuration. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.1 and later systems. On the configuration pane. Procedure 1 2 3 On the Controller tree. click Hardware Allocation. See the Planning and Installation Guide for Trident v2 Systems for more information. double-click Configuration.9. and then click Setup. Procedure 1 2 3 On the Controller tree. and then press the Delete key. and then expand the MP node the SDO module is installed in. expand the Hardware Allocation node. v4. See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tri-GP v2 Systems for more information. you must use the Download All command to download the change. click the icon that represents the module. On the Configuration tree.0 . 16 points are available. each point can be independently configured. double-click Configuration.Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 335 Removing a Trident or Tri-GP Module This procedure explains how to remove a module from a Trident or Tri-GP controller configuration. which provides loop supervision to field devices in fire and gas applications. The model 3411 SDO module is compatible only with Trident v2. The model 3411S2 SDO module is compatible only with Tri-GP v2.1 and later systems. Double-click the SDO module. On the Configuration tree. Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP SDO Module This procedure explains how to configure a Trident (model 3411) or Tri-GP (model 3411S2) Supervised Digital Output (SDO) module. If a CM is removed from a configuration after the application has been downloaded to the controller. which allows you to enable highly-accurate sequence of events (SOE) recording for point transitions at a resolution of up to 1 msec. This will provide detection and alarming of supervisory (i. and then click Setup. Procedure 1 2 3 On the Controller tree. see SOE Development on page 222. and then expand the MP node the HRDI module is installed in. open-load) conditions. If you want the selected point to be supervised. Press Ctrl and click to select multiple non-contiguous tagnames. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. each point can be independently configured. 6 Click OK to save your changes.e. select the Inhibit Supervision check box This will suppress reporting of supervisory alarms (i. Double-click the HRDI module.1 and later systems. On the Configuration tree.9. clear the Inhibit Supervision check box.e. double-click Configuration. See the TriStation Libraries Reference for more information about the SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function block.0 . expand the Hardware Allocation node. • • Press Shift and click to select multiple contiguous tagnames. The model 3311 HRDI module is compatible only with Trident v2. and then select how you want the point to be configured: • If you want to inhibit supervision for the selected point. v4. open-loads). • The default for each point is Supervised (the check box is cleared). See the Planning and Installation Guide for Trident v2 Systems for more information. A point transition (or event) is the state change of a Boolean variable from True to False or from False to True.1 and later systems. The model 3311S2 HRDI module is compatible only with Tri-GP v2. Continue to select tagnames and specify settings as needed.336 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration 4 Select the tagname (point) to be configured. Note For more information about using sequence of events in your application. The HRDI has 32 points available. Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module This procedure explains how to configure a Trident (model 3311) or Tri-GP (model 3311S2) High-Resolution Digital Input (HRDI) module. See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tri-GP v2 Systems for more information. WARNING 5 Using the SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function block to inhibit OVDs on a point overrides the supervisory configuration and results in loss of supervision of that point. Point transitions will be reported when the Boolean value changes from True to False (1 to 0).9. Point transitions will not be reported. Property SOE Trigger State Action Determines if SOE is enabled for the selected point. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • Disabled: SOE is not enabled for the point. and then specify these properties in the HRDI Setup dialog box. Select the option to be used for the selected point. Point transitions will be reported for both Rising and Falling changes (False to True. v4. • Rising: SOE is enabled for the point. The default is Disabled.Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 337 4 Select the tagname to be configured. the HRDI module will time stamp and record point transitions for the selected point. • Falling: SOE is enabled for the point. or True to False).0 . Point transitions will be reported when the Boolean value changes from False to True (0 to 1). When SOE is enabled. • Rising/Falling: SOE is enabled for the point. It does not mean that every transition on the same point will generate an event. For example. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. then enter x-1 msec. Press Ctrl and click to select multiple non-contiguous tagnames. and: • A trigger with a pulse width larger than 1 msec will always generate an event. but it also means there is a higher chance of losing subsequent transition events. A longer dead time interval is better able to prevent the higherlevel SOE application from being flooded with events. The available range is 0 to 250 msec.9. For example. to filter out a pulse width smaller than 30. Once a transition on the selected point has occurred. meaning there is no debounce period. 5 Continue to select tagnames and specify settings as needed. so that pulse widths that fall within the debounce period will not be reported as an event. Enter the amount of dead time in seconds. • If any trigger with a pulse width larger than x msec needs to be reported as an event. v4.0 . any subsequent transitions will be reported only after the dead time interval has elapsed. enter 74 as the trigger time (because 75-1=74). The default is 0. meaning any subsequent transition will generate an event as long as the previous transition on the same point has been collected and cleared. • If any trigger with a pulse width smaller than x msec needs to be filtered out (not reported as an event). Only available if SOE has been enabled for the point. as a transition on the same point that occurs too soon—before the previous event is cleared—may be missed. The available range is 0 to 250 sec. SOE Dead Time Defines the length of time after a transition before a subsequent transition will be reported. 6 Click OK to save your changes. to report a pulse width larger than 75.338 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Property SOE Trigger Time Action Defines the number of milliseconds (with an accuracy of 1 msec or less) a signal must be stable before its change in state (transition) causes the reporting of an event. The default is 0. Enter the trigger time in milliseconds. A longer trigger time results in a longer debounce period. • • Press Shift and click to select multiple contiguous tagnames. then enter x+1 msec. Only available if SOE has been enabled for the point. enter 31 as the trigger time (because 30+1=31). • A trigger with a pulse width smaller than 1 msec may or may not generate an event. Also known as the debounce period. with an accuracy of 10 msec or less. If you have more than five PI modules installed in your Trident v2.0 . six additional points are also included in the total. acceleration.1.0 or earlier project. This is because each of the six available points provides speed. On the Configuration tree. but are reserved for future use.9. TriStation 1131 will not allow you to upgrade the project’s target system version to Trident 2. and reprogram your application accordingly. and then expand the MP node the PI or EPI module is installed in. and jerk measurements as separate logical points (for a total of 18 logical points).1. Because the EPI module requires a greater memory allocation than the PI module.1 or later will automatically upgrade the PI module to an EPI module. please see the Product Release Notice for your Trident version. you will need to physically remove the excess modules from the Trident chassis. A maximum of 5 EPI modules can be configured in a Trident 2. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. All of these tasks should be completed prior to upgrading to Trident 2. You must remove the excess PI modules from your project prior to starting a target system version change. the automatic upgrade from a PI module to an EPI module may not be successful in cases where not enough memory is available to be allocated to the EPI module(s). double-click Configuration.0 and earlier systems) Model 3382 Trident Enhanced Pulse Input (EPI) module (compatible only with Trident v2.1 or later if more than five PI modules are installed in the project. rewire the PI points that were connected to those modules. Note The number of points for the EPI (model 3382 or 3382S2) module displays as 24 in the Insert Module dialog box (see Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module on page 334).x and later systems) These modules are used for speed and RPM inputs.1. If you have a PI module installed in a Trident 2. or Tri-GP.1 or later. Six points are available. For information about system configuration restrictions and validated I/O module configurations in earlier Trident versions.x and later systems) Model 3382S2 Tri-GP Enhanced Pulse Input (EPI) module (compatible only with Tri-GP v2.1 or later. expand the Hardware Allocation node. • • Procedure 1 2 On the Controller tree. The existing PI module point configuration is retained for the EPI module during a target system version upgrade to Trident 2.0 or earlier system. Acceleration and jerk measurements for each point are available on the EPI module only. please note the following: • • • Upgrading the target system version for your project to Trident 2. v4. each point can be independently configured. project.Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 339 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP PI or EPI Module This procedure explains how to configure the following Trident or Tri-GP modules: • • • Model 3381 Trident Pulse Input (PI) module (compatible only with Trident v2. See Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318 for more information about changing the target system version. • RPM: Used for pulses measured in the number of revolutions per minute of the shaft that connects a gear to the rotating equipment. Property Field Power Action Select Field Power Present if the installed system has field power connected to the Pulse Input Baseplate. 4 Select the tagname (point) to be configured. and then click Setup. • Speed: Used for pulses measured in seconds. Min Field TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Available only when Field Power Present is selected.0 . The default is 0 volts. Not available if an Acceleration or Jerk point is selected (EPI module only). Available only when Field Power Present is selected. and then specify these properties in the PI Setup dialog box. Max Field Enter the maximum range for field power in volts. or hours. The default is Field Power Absent. Enter the minimum range for field power in volts.9.340 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration 3 Double-click the PI or EPI module. Rate Type Select Speed or RPM to specify the type of rate applied to pulse input signals. minutes. v4. The default is 33 volts. For: • Pulses per second. set to 60.016667. Number of Gear Teeth Enter the number of gear teeth that are counted in each revolution. Not available if an Acceleration or Jerk point is selected (EPI module only).0 (default).0 . • Pulses per minute. set to 1. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 Not available if an Acceleration or Jerk point is selected (EPI module only). 5 Continue to select tagnames and specify settings as needed.Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 341 Property Triggering Mode Action Select Rising Edge or Falling Edge depending on the installation. Not available if an Acceleration or Jerk point is selected (EPI module only). Press Ctrl and click to select multiple non-contiguous tagnames. Scale Factor Specifies how to convert pulse input signals into engineering units. • • Press Shift and click to select multiple contiguous tagnames. The Rate Type property must be specified as RPM to enable this property. 6 Click OK to save your changes.9. set to 0. • Pulses per hour. v4. which supports these connections: • • • To a TriStation PC To a Peer-to-Peer network of Triconex controllers To an external device or network Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.x CM Network Ports on page 342 Configuring Trident v1.x system.x CM Serial Ports on page 344 Configuring Trident v1. Double-click the CM.x or Tri-GP Communication Module on page 346 See Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing on page 439 for instructions on configuring the Trident or Tri-GP CM for use with a printer. Note In addition to configuring ports on the communication module(s). Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131.x Communication Module on page 342 Configuring the Trident v2. see Chapter 6.9.0 .x CM Network Ports This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Trident v1. you also need to configure the Trident or Tri-GP controller’s network and/or serial connection to the TriStation PC. and then click the Network tab. double-click Configuration.x CM. in order connect to the controller and download your application. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.342 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module This section explains how to configure the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module (CM) for communication with external devices. click Setup.x Communication Module These procedures explain how to configure the network and serial ports on a CM installed in a Trident v1.x CM Routing on page 345 Configuring Trident v1. and expand Hardware Allocation. Configuring the Trident v1. For more information. v4. Topics include: • • Configuring the Trident v1. Topics include: • • • Configuring Trident v1. You cannot use the same mode on both ports.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 343 3 Specify these properties on the Network tab. Not available with Peer-to-Peer. Enter the default gateway. Enter the subnet mask. Not available with Peerto-Peer. Privilege Transceiver Port Transceiver Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address Time Synchronization Select Read to restrict access from external devices. Enter the IP address of the controller. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Not available with Peerto-Peer. The default is Read/Write. if needed. 4 Click OK to save your changes. if needed. Not available with Peer-to-Peer.0 . v4. Not available with Peer-toPeer. Property Slot Selection Mode Action Select the slot to be configured. Select the mode used. Select Open Network or Peer-to-Peer for either NET 1 or NET 2. Select to enable time synchronization on NET 1 or NET 2.9. Select the type of port used. and then click the Serial Ports tab. and master/slave protocols. Select RS-232 or RS-485. Enter the slave address of the serial port on the MP Baseplate. Select 2 or 4 wire. Select the parity option. Not used with Master protocol.x CM. 3 Specify these properties on the Serial Ports tab. double-click Configuration. only available with slave ASCII protocol. depending on the installation. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. See Modbus Slave Address on page 563.x CM Serial Ports This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Trident v1.0 . v4. Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Transceiver Mode Handshake Wire Type TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. which supports connections using Modbus slave. click Setup. Select 1 Bit or 2 Bits. Select the rate used in the installation. Select 7 or 8 bits. Select the protocol to use.9. master. Set to 8 bits for all other protocols. Double-click the CM slot. Select Hardware to use signal delays to determine if the connection is valid.344 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring Trident v1. and expand Hardware Allocation. Property Port Selection Protocol Modbus Station Action Select the port to be configured. depending on the physical connection. and expand Hardware Allocation.767 is maximum). This procedure is optional. Enter the address for the gateway.x CM Routing This procedure explains how to configure routing information for network communication on a Trident v1. depending on your network configuration.x CM. Enter the destination address. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. Only available with Modbus. Property Slot Selection Destination IP Address Destination IP Subnet Mask Destination Gateway IP Address Action Select the slot to configure. 4 5 Repeat for each route required on your network. Double-click the CM slot. Enter the number of milliseconds to adjust timing of the data transmission.9. Configuring Trident v1.0 . For more information. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 345 Property Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Signal Delays Action Enter a minimum value (0 is default) and maximum value (32. v4. and then click the Routing tab. double-click Configuration. 3 Specify these properties on the Routing tab. see your network administrator. 4 Click OK to save your changes. Enter the address for the subnet mask. Click OK to save your changes. click Setup. x or Tri-GP controller supports a maximum of two CMs on one CM baseplate. — means the protocol is not available on this port. NET 2 NET 1. Protocol or Standard TriStation TSAA (UDP/IP) TSAA with IP Multicast (UDP/IP) Peer-to-Peer (UDP/IP) Peer-to-Peer (DLC) Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) Modbus Master (RTU) Modbus Master or Slave (TCP) GPS Time Synchronization Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC Triconex Time Synchronization via UDP/IP SNTP Triconex Time Synchronization Network Printing using Jet Direct a. NET 2 — — NET 1. see Configuring the Trident v1.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Network Ports NET 1.x or Tri-GP Communication Module These procedures explain how to configure an enhanced CM installed in a Trident v2. The following table lists the protocols supported by both the enhanced Trident CM (model 3201) and Tri-GP CM (model 3201S2) on network and serial ports. NET 2 NET 1. v4. NET 2 NET 1. NET 2 NET 1.x or Tri-GP system.x system.0 . without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the controller altogether. A single Trident v2.x Communication Module on page 342. NET 2 — NET 1 NET 1. NET 2 Serial Ports Port 3 only —a — — — Any port Any port — Any port — — — — Note While the preferred means for connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident or Tri-GP controller is via a network connection.346 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring the Trident v2. see the Planning and Installation Guide for your controller. Invensys recommends configuring a serial connection to the CM first. you can go back and configure the more complex network connection. because it is less complex and easier to successfully connect to the CM through the serial port. For detailed CM installation guidelines. Once you have successfully connected to the CM and downloaded the initial configuration to the Trident. NET 2 NET 1. NET 2 NET 1. Note To configure a CM installed in a Trident v1. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 412 for more information. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. see these topics: • • • Using a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM. Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing on page 439 for instructions on configuring the CM for use with a printer. This file can then be used to quickly configure other Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM to Synchronize Time on page 364 for instructions on configuring the CM to synchronize time. Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports on page 350 Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration Once you have configured a Trident 2. Exporting and Importing a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM Modbus TCP Ports on page 355 Configuring Trident v2. For detailed instructions.0 .x or Tri-GP CM Serial Ports on page 348 Configuring Trident v2. you can export its configuration to an XML file.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434 for instructions on controlling access to the CM on a per-client level.9.x or Tri-GP CM Protocols on page 358 For additional information on configuring the CM.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 347 To configure specific types of CM ports. v4.x or Tri-GP CM Routing on page 356 Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration to a File on page 360. see Exporting the Trident v2. see these topics: • • • • • • Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CMs by importing the saved configuration settings.x or Tri-GP CM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 352 Configuring Trident v2. 9. Modbus Slave ASCII. and then click Setup. Port Write Enabled Available only if Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) is selected as the communication protocol. v4.x or Tri-GP CM Serial Ports This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Trident v2. enter the number of the Modbus slave device (1-247).348 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring Trident v2. The default is cleared (the port is read-only).0 . Modbus Slave Address TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select the communication protocol for the port: • All ports can use Modbus Master. The default is 1.x or Tri-GP CM. If you selected Modbus Slave RTU or ASCII. Property Port Selection Protocol Action Click the port to be configured. Double-click the CM. double-click Configuration. or Modbus Slave RTU. Click the Serial Ports tab. Ports can be configured only for a slot with an installed module. • Only port 3 can use TriStation. The CM Setup dialog box appears. and expand Hardware Allocation. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. Select this check box if you want to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. 4 Specify these properties. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select the type of parity for the port. Select the type of termination used with cables. Enter the port number that the CM will use in Modbus Master functions to access the port (1-15). The default is Low 16 Bits First. Available only with Modbus Slave ASCII. Select RS-485 or RS-232. On port 3 when TriStation is selected as the protocol. the default is None. Select 1 or 2 bits. The default minimum is 0. this property is automatically set to High 16 Bits First and cannot be changed.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 349 Property Baud Rate Action Enter the communication rate for the port. Note: If you select Modbus Master as the communication protocol. Select None or Hardware. The default is Odd. The default maximum is 32. Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Transceiver Mode Select 8 or 7 bits. the default is 115200 and cannot be changed.0 . The default is None. The default is 8. The default is 9600. RS-485 is not available.9. Determines whether the most significant bits in a 32-bit address are the first 16 (high) or the last 16 (low). Only available with RS-485 Transceiver Mode.767. The default is RS-232. The default is 1 bit. For a TriStation connection. Only available for Modbus Master. Select the order to be used with floating point numbers. Handshake Termination Options FP Ordering Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Master Logical Port Enter the minimum and maximum values to be used for the Modbus data range. 5 Click OK to save your changes. x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Trident v2. Double-click the CM.9. and then click Setup. 3 Specify these properties on the Network tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.x or Tri-GP CM. and expand Hardware Allocation. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree.350 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring Trident v2.0 . double-click Configuration. The CM Setup dialog box appears. x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information. Select the communication mode.255) are reserved for broadcast messaging and cannot be used as a valid IP address.0. the default is 10 Mbps Half Duplex. see the Planning and Installation Guide for your controller. 4 To configure the CM for operation behind a firewall.0. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. this is the IP address of the network router. IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address If needed. you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the CM installed in the right slot.255.168. Clicking Not Installed resets all options to their default state and makes them unavailable for configuration. The default is 0.0. If needed.9. Transceiver Mode IP Address Enter the IP Address for the port.0.1. The CM baseplate can hold two CMs—one in the Left physical slot. You must re-install a CM in the left slot before you can modify the configuration of the CM in the right slot. Installed Click Installed to enable configuration of the module. and you then uninstall the CM in the left slot. and one in the Right physical slot.0. click Show Advanced Options and then specify the properties in the following table for NET 1 and NET 2. Left or Right.255. The default values are 0. See Connecting to the Trident 2. the default is Auto-Negotiate. Not Installed. Note: If you have configured CMs in both the left and right slots. Note: Your own IP addresses cannot be used for connecting to the controller until your application—with the IP address configuration—has been downloaded to the controller at least once. The addresses for NET 1 and NET 2 do not need to be unique.0. v4.0. For more information about slot locations. For NET 1. using the Download All command. The default gateway address must be part of the subnet. such as 192.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 351 Property Slot Selection Action Select the physical slot where the CM module you want to configure is installed.0 . enter the IP address for the subnet. The default is Not Installed. The default is 255. For NET 2. The highest and lowest IP addresses in a subnet (addresses where the last number is 0 or 255. enter the IP address for the default gateway. Typically. A CM can be configured in the Right slot only if a CM in the Left slot has already been configured. Modbus TCP will be unable to connect. it remains open until you close it. Click the Peer-to-Peer tab. Can be from 1024 to 65535. please contact Invensys Technical Support for assistance with configuring these settings. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. double-click Configuration. Can be from 1024 to 65535. the default settings should be sufficient. The default value is 65535. Changes to CM IP addresses are not in effect until the existing connection is closed and a new connection is opened. Highest TCP Port Number Enter the highest TCP port number to use for an outgoing connection from the CM. Note If these settings are misconfigured. Double-click the CM. Invensys recommends that only advanced users change these settings.352 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Setting these properties restricts the ports that the CM can use for TCP connections to the specified range. The default value is 49152. Once a connection is opened. Applicable to Modbus/TCP ports. reset the values to the default settings to fix the problem and re-enable Modbus TCP.9. For most networks.0 . even if the IP address is changed via a download changes operation. Property Lowest TCP Port Number 5 Note Click OK to save your changes. This allows the CM to operate behind a firewall that has implemented port restrictions. The CM Setup dialog box appears. Action Enter the lowest TCP port number to use for an outgoing connection from the CM. v4. If this occurs. and expand Hardware Allocation.x or Tri-GP CM Peer-To-Peer Ports This procedure explains how to configure the IP addresses for controllers communicating on a Peer-to-Peer network through a CM. and then click Setup. Configuring Trident v2. Applicable to Modbus/TCP ports. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. If you need to use this feature. The default is 1503. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each node to be included in the network. your settings will be lost. select the module (slot) you want to configure Peer-to-Peer ports for. v4. 8 Once all nodes have been configured. and specify these properties. click Reset All to reset all node settings for the selected slot to their default.0 . This must be the same number that the controller uses as its UDP Base Port Number. Property Destination UDP Port Action Enter the UDP port number for each controller to be communicated with on the Peer-to-Peer network. Select a node (controller). Enter the IP address for the controller. specify these properties (applicable to all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network). Note If necessary. The default is NET 1. unconfigured state. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. If you forget to click Update before selecting another node.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 353 4 5 Under Slot Selection. 6 7 Click Update to save the new settings for the selected node. You should not need to change this setting unless the CM is located behind a firewall.9. Network IP Address Click the network port that the CM uses to communicate with the selected Peer-to-Peer node. and Trident v1 Peer-to-Peer Systems Select the port—NET 1 or NET 2—on which you want to enable Peer-to-Peer communication with Tricon version 8 and 9 systems.0 . UDP port numbers do not need to be unique.354 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Property UDP Base Port Number Action For each network port. The default is None. enter the UDP base port number for the controller. v4. Tricon V9. 9 Click OK to save your changes. Available only for a module installed in the left slot. Enable Communication with Tricon V8. as long as the IP address for each port is unique. The default is 1503 on both NET 1 and NET 2 (meaning Peerto-Peer is enabled on both ports). See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for reserved values. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Enter 0 to disable Peer-to-Peer over UDP/IP on the network.9. and/or Trident version 1 systems. Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 355 Configuring Trident v2. Available only if Modbus TCP Slave is selected as the communication protocol.9. Click the Modbus TCP tab. v4.0 . which enables Modbus communication through network ports. Select this check box if you want to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. Four ports are available for Modbus TCP communication. The default is cleared (the port is read-only). select the module (slot) you want to configure Modbus TCP ports for. Options include Modbus TCP Master and Modbus TCP Slave Net. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Double-click the CM. Select a port and specify these properties. Property Protocol Port Write Enabled Action Select the communication protocol for the port. double-click Configuration. 4 5 Under Slot Selection.x or Tri-GP CM Modbus TCP Ports This procedure explains how to configure Modbus TCP ports on a CM. and expand Hardware Allocation. and then click Setup. The CM Setup dialog box appears. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. The CM Setup dialog box appears. The default maximum is 32.356 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Property Master Logical Port Action Enter the number of the Modbus Master node (1-15). If the port uses Modbus Master protocol. double-click Configuration. Double-click the CM. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. The default is NET 2. v4. enter the specific master IP address. Determines whether the most significant bits in a 32-bit address are the first 16 (high) or the last 16 (low). 6 Click OK to save your changes. Configuring Trident v2.0. enter the IP address of the slave node. this property is automatically set to High 16 Bits First and cannot be changed.9. Enter the number for the TCP port. Available only with Modbus TCP Master protocol. each slot (module) has two networks (NET 1 and NET 2). The default is Low 16 Bits First. leave the IP address as 0.767. and expand Hardware Allocation. Note: If you select Modbus TCP Master as the communication protocol.0. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default minimum is 0.0. Must be unique for each CM installed in a system.x or Tri-GP CM Routing This procedure explains how to configure routing on a CM. TCP Port Number Network IP Address FP Ordering Select the order to be used with floating point numbers. If the port uses Modbus Slave protocol. Click the network that the selected port is connected to. • To accept communication only from a defined Modbus Master. The default is 502. enter either of these: • To accept communication from any Modbus Master.0 . and then click Setup. Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Enter the minimum and maximum values to be used for the Modbus data range. Available only with Modbus TCP Slave Net. Up to 10 different routes can be configured for each network. Click the Routing tab. If the gateway address is on NET 2. Enter the IP address of the subnet mask. Note If necessary. unconfigured state. The gateway address must always be on NET 1 or NET 2.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 357 4 5 6 Select the module (slot) you want to configure routing for. 8 Click OK to save your changes. Property Destination IP Address Destination IP Subnet Mask Action Enter the IP address which is used if the controller is not on the same subnet as other devices. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select the network (NET 1 or NET 2) you want to configure routing for. click Reset All to change all destination settings for the selected slot to their default.0 . Enter the IP address of the gateway to which the controller is connected. If the gateway address is on NET 1. v4.x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports on page 350.9. then the subnet mask must be the same as the NET 1 subnet mask defined on the Network tab. then the subnet mask must be the same as the NET 2 subnet mask defined on the Network tab. See Configuring Trident v2. Destination Gateway IP Address 7 Click Update Destination to apply the settings. Select a destination route and then specify these properties. 4 5 Select the module (slot) you want to configure protocols for. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Click the Protocols tab. Cannot be the same as the Management or TSAA port numbers.x or Tri-GP CM Protocols This procedure explains how to configure the TSAA and TriStation protocols used for CM communication. The CM Setup dialog box appears. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information. double-click Configuration. and expand Hardware Allocation. and then click Setup.0 . The default for both ports is 1502. v4.9. Protocol TriStation Property TriStation Port Number Action Enter the UDP port to use for TriStation connections on NET 1 and NET 2. Specify these properties for the protocol(s) you will be using with the CM. Double-click the CM. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree.358 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring Trident v2. 000ms). see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User’s Guide. for TSAA IP multicasting. Multicast Update Rate Enter the update rate.0. The default for both ports is 1510. TSAA clients have write access to the NET 1 and NET 2 ports on the Trident v2. Depending on your configuration.0 (IP multicasting is disabled).000. 6 Click OK to save your changes. The default value is 1. by default. A value of 0 indicates that TSAA communication is disabled on that port.x or Tri-GP CM. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2. Can be from 250 to 2. The default is 0.9. this may create a security issue. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information. bin data will be multicast every 1. By default.0 . so that all members of the group will receive the data.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 359 Protocol Management Property Management Port Number Action Enter the UDP port to use for the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor’s connection to CM communication status information on NET 1 and NET 2. Note: To use TSAA multicasting. you must enable and configure the CM access control list. TSAA Multicast IP Address Enter the IP address that TSAA multicasts should be sent to. v4. This must be the same value as the Management UDP Port Number property in the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor’s Network Configuration dialog box. Cannot be the same as the TriStation or Management port numbers. To disable write access by TSAA clients.000. For more information. TSAA TSAA Port Number Enter the UDP port to use for TSAA connections. on NET 1 and NET 2. in milliseconds.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434. Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be sent to the specified address. See your Network Administrator or IT department for more information. The default for both ports is 1500. CAUTION TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be sent to the multicast IP address at the specified update rate (for example. your network hardware (such as routers) must also support multicasting. Cannot be the same as the TriStation or TSAA port numbers.0. including DDE Server and SOE Recorder. x or Tri-GP system cannot be imported to a CM installed in a Trident v1. and expand Hardware Allocation. The CM Setup dialog box appears. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and then click Setup. If the CM configuration has been changed. but not saved. Not only does this provide a backup of your configuration settings. A CM configuration file exported from a CM installed in a Trident v2. enter a file name. you may want to export it to an XML file. and ensuring that all CMs in a system have the same configuration. and click Save. v4. Export Button 3 Click Export. 4 Note Navigate to the folder you want to save the exported configuration file in.360 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Exporting the Trident v2. Invensys technical support may also ask for an exported configuration file to assist in troubleshooting CM problems. you will be unable to import it into TriStation 1131.9.0 .x or Tri-GP CMs.x system. double-click Configuration. you are asked if you want to include the unsaved changes in the exported file. it also allows you to import the settings to other Trident 2. saving time and effort. Note An exported CM configuration file cannot be modified outside of TriStation 1131.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration to a File Once CM configuration is complete. Double-click the CM. If the XML file is changed after export. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. and exported the configuration to a file. including the unsaved changes. Click Import. you can import the saved configuration to another Trident 2. double-click Configuration. and click Open.Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 361 Importing the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM.0 . Click OK to save your changes. CM configuration settings are imported from the selected file. you are asked if you want to overwrite the existing configuration. you should review the CM configuration to ensure that all settings have been correctly configured for your implementation.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration From a File If you have already configured a Trident 2. Click each tab of the CM Setup dialog box to review and verify that all settings have been correctly configured. and then click Setup. The CM Setup dialog box appears. with the imported settings. v4. but not yet saved. Once the import is complete. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree.x or Tri-GP CM. If the CM configuration has been changed.9. 4 5 6 Navigate to the folder where the exported configuration file is located. Double-click the CM. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and expand Hardware Allocation. x CM capabilities. • To the Tricon. CM (Trident v2. such as a DCS.x CM to Synchronize Time on page 363 Using a Trident 2. For assistance with the specialized programming that is required.362 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization This section explains how to use the Time Synchronization communication protocol with Trident or Tri-GP controllers. see the Communication Guide for Trident Systems.9.0 . For more information.x and Tri-GP) All of the v1. Table 35 Module CM (Trident v1. or Tri-GP master node in a Peer-to-Peer network (Triconex Time Synchronization). Trident. Time synchronization enables a network of Triconex controllers to synchronize time with each other or with external devices. • By writing aliased data to the TIMESET or TIMEADJ function blocks in a TriStation 1131 application. MP • By writing aliased data to the TIMESET or TIMEADJ function blocks in a TriStation 1131 application.x) Trident and Tri-GP Time Synchronization Time Synchronization Feature • To an OPC client. • To the Trident master node in a Peer-to-Peer network. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. contact Technical Support. For assistance with the specialized programming that is required. contact Technical Support.x or Tri-GP CM to Synchronize Time on page 364 About Trident and Tri-GP Time Synchronization This table summarizes the ways Trident or Tri-GP controller time can be synchronized to an external device or to the master node in a Peer-to-Peer network. plus: • To SNTP. Topics include: • • • About Trident and Tri-GP Time Synchronization on page 362 Using a Trident 1. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization 363 Using a Trident 1. and expand Hardware Allocation. double-click Configuration.x CM to synchronize Trident controllers to the master node in a Peer-to-Peer network.x CM to Synchronize Time This procedure explains how to use a Trident 1. v4.0 . 3 Select one of the following: • • On NET 1 Enable Time Synchronization with Trident Master Node On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization with Trident Master Node 4 Click OK to save your changes. click Setup. and then click the Network tab. Double-click the CM slot.9. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. it can also be used as the master node for time synchronization of other controllers on the network. and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master CM. In this way. v4. If the CM is in a Peer-to-Peer network. please see Using a Trident 1. Note Because the SNTP server resides on a PC. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x or Tri-GP CM time synchronization to an SNTP server. and reject all other time change requests. If the CM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network. Note The information and procedures in this section apply only to Trident 2. The CM Setup dialog box appears. Topics include: • • Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM This procedure explains how to configure Trident 2. the master node CM synchronizes time with the SNTP server. and expand Hardware Allocation.9. and then click Setup.x or Tri-GP CM to Synchronize Time The information in this section explains how to enable time synchronization on a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM.x or Tri-GP CM on page 364 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the Trident 2. all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with SNTP time.x CM to Synchronize Time on page 363. If you are configuring a Trident 1.x CM. network load issues or PC performance can result in delays in processing time update requests from the controller. Time synchronization can be enabled only for a single logical slot. you can implement redundant time synchronization by configuring time synchronization for both CM modules (both left and right slots).x or Tri-GP CMs.x or Tri-GP CM on page 367 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the Trident 2. Click the Time Sync tab.0 . In this configuration. Double-click the CM. Slave nodes synchronize their time only to the master node on the Peerto-Peer network. double-click Configuration. it cannot be configured for SNTP time synchronization. Time synchronization can be enabled using the following protocols: • • SNTP Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC (NET 1 only) or UDP/IP (NET 1 or NET 2) on a Peer-to-Peer network In a redundant network of Trident or Tri-GP controllers that each have two CMs installed. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree.364 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Using a Trident 2. You must configure the module in the left slot first. click Right Slot. and then select these properties. click Left Slot.9. Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize time with. Property Time Synchronization Configuration SNTP Master Network Action Select SNTP Redundant. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select these properties. v4. Click the network the SNTP server is located on. SNTP Master IP Address Note The module in the right slot can be configured only if it has been installed (see Configuring Trident v2. Property Time Synchronization Configuration SNTP Master Network SNTP Master IP Address Action Select SNTP. The default is None. This can be different than the master network selected for the left slot. Click the network the SNTP server is located on.Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization 365 4 5 Under Slot Selection. 6 (Optional) If you have a redundant CM installed in the right slot. Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize time with.x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports on page 350) and if the module in the left slot has already been configured for SNTP time synchronization. under Slot Selection.0 . and then double-click the MP.9. Enabling the Trident 2. v4.x or Tri-GP CM as a Master Node for Triconex Time Synchronization (Optional) If you also want the CM to be able to act as a master node for time synchronization of other controllers on a Peer-to-Peer network (using Triconex Time Synchronization) do the following: 1 On the Configuration tree.366 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration 7 Click OK to save your changes. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The MP Setup dialog box appears.0 . 3 Select the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization check box. The Item Properties dialog box appears. 2 Click Setup. open the Hardware Allocation node. double-click Configuration.x or Tri-GP CM In a Peer-to-Peer network. Under Time Synchronization Configuration. In this configuration. and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master node. In this way. and then click Setup. Configuring a Master Node This procedure describes how to configure the CM as a master node on the Peer-to-Peer network when SNTP time synchronization is not being used. all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with SNTP time. open the Hardware Allocation node. The CM Setup dialog box appears. Select the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization check box. The MP Setup dialog box appears. and expand Hardware Allocation. v4.x or Tri-GP CM on page 364. Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Expand the Controller tree. The master node can also synchronize its time with an SNTP server. Double-click the CM. the master node synchronizes time with the SNTP server. Click OK to save your changes.0 . This allows the controller to participate as a master node in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network. select None. The controller with the lowest node number serves as the master node. Configuring a Slave Node This procedure describes how to configure the CM as a slave node on the Peer-to-Peer network. The Item Properties dialog box appears. Click the Time Sync tab. use the procedures in Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the Trident 2. Double-click the CM. 7 8 Click Setup. and expand Hardware Allocation. Triconex Time Synchronization can be used to synchronize time across controllers on a network. and then double-click the MP.9. and then click Setup. double-click Configuration. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. On the Configuration tree.Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization 367 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the Trident 2. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. If you want the master node to synchronize to a SNTP server. The default is None. Specify these properties. 3 Click the Time Sync tab. and then double-click the MP. Click the network you want to enable Triconex Time Synchronization for. Note 6 7 If you have a redundant CM installed in the right slot.368 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration The CM Setup dialog box appears.0 . 4 5 Under Slot Selection. Select the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization check box. Property Time Synchronization Configuration Peer-to-Peer Master Network Action Select Peer-to-Peer.This property applies to the modules installed in both the left and right slots simultaneously. The default is NET 1. click Left Slot. v4.9. You must configure the module in the left slot first. open the Hardware Allocation node. 8 9 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The MP Setup dialog box appears. Click OK to save your changes. On the Configuration tree. This allows the controller to participate as a slave node in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network. The Item Properties dialog box appears. Time Synchronization Configuration is automatically set to Peer-to-Peer and cannot be changed. Click Setup. which allows you to read or write to the attribute.9. 3 Click Get Default.Using Trident or Tri-GP System and Module Attributes 369 Using Trident or Tri-GP System and Module Attributes System and module attributes are variables that can be used to monitor status. or enter a number for the Modbus Alias and click Confirm Alias.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Specifying an Alias Number for a Trident or Tri-GP Attribute This procedure explains how to specify an alias number for a system or module attribute. v4. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree and double-click Configuration. You can add an alias number so the variable can be read or written to. The alias number is assigned to the attribute. Expand Status Attributes and double-click the attribute to be assigned an alias. and control Trident or Tri-GP controller operations. clear the Select All check box.370 Chapter 4 Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Printing the Trident or Tri-GP Module Configuration Once Trident or Tri-GP controller configuration is complete. select Print All. I/O modules) currently configured in the project. The Print All Options dialog box appears. Only modules that require configuration in TriStation 1131 are included in this report.9. as it does not require configuration in TriStation 1131.0 . Select the printer you want to use. To quickly clear the check boxes for all the documents in the list. but the AI module is not. Module Configuration Settings—Prints a report listing the current configuration settings for each applicable module in the project’s hardware configuration. etc). and the desired settings (number of copies. Note 4 5 Click OK. 3 Select the check boxes for the following documents: • • Hardware Module Configuration—Prints a report listing the controller hardware (MPs. For example. v4. On the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. Not only does this provide a backup of your configuration settings. and make it easier to select only those documents you want to print. page orientation. CMs. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. CM configuration details are included. it also can assist Invensys technical support when troubleshooting configuration problems. and then click OK. you may want to print the module configuration information. Procedure 1 2 Open the Project Workspace (see The Project Workspace on page 20). 9.5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Overview 372 Configuring the TriStation PC 373 Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection 376 Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection 379 Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type 385 Controlling Access to the TCM 386 Configuring Tricon Controller Printing 392 Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses 399 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.0 . Description See Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection on page 376 • Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection on page 379. or • Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection on page 376   Connect to a Tricon EICM Connect to a Tricon ACM. NCM.Set node and IP address of the controller Implement on the C ontroller TriStation 1131 Communication Steps This checklist includes the items that can be or should be performed to set up communication between a TriStation PC and a Tricon controller.9.372 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Overview This figure shows the main steps for setting up TriStation 1131 communication and the typical order in the project cycle.Establish the physical connection Set Up TriStation C ommunication .0 . Communication setup can be done anytime before implementation. v4.C onfigure the connection to the TriStation PC . Set Up the Project Develop the Application Test with the Emulator Fix Errors Errors? C onfigure the C ontroller . or TCM   Configure user access to the Tricon TCM Set up printing Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386 Configuring Tricon Controller Printing on page 392 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Configuring the TriStation PC 373 Configuring the TriStation PC This section explains the setup required for a network connection from the TriStation PC. you can connect it to the NET 1 or NET 2 port on the TCM (model 4351/4351A/4351B/4353) via a router or hub using a patch cable.9. Do not change the factory default settings on the NIC card. Do one of the following: • If the network interface card has an RJ-45 connector. If the network interface card does not have the appropriate connector for your TCM model. you can skip this section. connect it directly to the NET 2 port. If the network interface card has a MTRJ (fiber) connector. Do not change the factory default settings on the NIC card. • • Note 3 Run the diagnostics provided with the network interface card according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC This procedure explains how to install a network interface card (NIC) in a TriStation PC to be connected to a Tricon ACM.0 . NCM. Please note. or TCM. v4. Procedure – Tricon TCM 1 2 Install the network interface card by following the manufacturer’s instructions. See the Communication Guide for Tricon v9–v10 Systems for more information about the differences between the TCM model 4351/4351A/4351B/4353 (copper) and model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354 (fiber). that the preferred method of connecting the TriStation PC to the Tricon controller is via a network connection. however. Procedure – Tricon ACM or NCM 1 2 Install the network interface card by following the manufacturer’s instructions. you can connect it to the NET 1 or NET 2 port on the TCM (model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354) via a router or hub using a patch cable. connect the network interface card to a media converter that is connected to the NET 1 or NET 2 port. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Do one of the following: • If the network interface card has a BNC connector. Topics include: • • Note Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC on page 373 Installing the TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC on page 374 If you will only be connecting to the Tricon controller via a serial connection. it means the protocol is installed and you are finished with this procedure. and then click OK.9. Installing TCP/IP on Windows 2000 1 2 3 On the Start menu. • 4 5 6 Click Install.0 . Run the diagnostics provided with the network interface card according to the manufacturer’s instructions. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. click Install. if the protocol is checked on the list of installed components. click Control Panel. Right-click the network connection where you want to install the protocol. NCM. Click the TCP/IP protocol. In the Select Network Component Type dialog box. then click Properties. and then click OK. Installing TCP/IP on Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 2 3 On the Start menu. and then click Add. and then double-click Network Connections. go to the next step to continue the installation. If the protocol is not checked. On the Select Network Protocol screen. • 4 5 6 On the General tab. Installing the TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC These procedures explain how to install the TCP/IP protocol on a TriStation PC. click Protocol. The TCP/IP protocol is required for Tricon ACM. If the TCP/IP protocol is not checked. Verify the check box for the protocol is checked.374 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 • 3 If the network interface card does not have a BNC connector. connect the network interface card to a media converter that is connected to the NET 2 port. v4. Right-click the network connection where you want to install the protocol. if the TCP/IP protocol is checked on the list of installed components. then click Properties. Do one of the following: • On the Networking tab. it means the protocol is installed and you are finished with this procedure. click the protocol on the Network Protocol list. and then click OK. click Settings. Do one of the following: • On the General tab. click Protocol. go to the next step to continue the installation. then click Network and Dial-up Connections. and TCM connection. then click Add. Do not install Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6). under This connection uses the following items. If prompted. click Manage Network Connections. and then click OK. Right-click the network connection you want to change. In the Network and Sharing Center. and then click Network and Sharing Center. Note Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) must be installed to allow a TriStation 1131 application to connect to a Tricon controller.Configuring the TriStation PC 375 Installing TCP/IP on Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 2 3 4 5 On the Start menu. v4.0 .9. enter the administrator’s password or confirm the operation. click Control Panel. and then click Properties. On the Networking tab. click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. open Network and Internet. 2. Topics include: • • • When to Use the Tricon Serial Connection on page 376 Connecting a Tricon Serial Port to a TriStation PC on page 377 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection on page 378 When to Use the Tricon Serial Connection The preferred means for connecting the TriStation PC to the Tricon controller is via a network connection.0 . you should restore the network connection to the Tricon controller. Connecting to the Tricon Controller for the First Time The first time you connect to the Tricon controller. Once the network problems have been resolved. Once you enable TCM client access control by TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.376 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection This section explains how to make a direct (point-to-point) serial connection between a Tricon EICM or TCM and a TriStation PC. or 3 can be used by changing settings on the module switch block. Additionally. You cannot use both an EICM and TCM module in the same Tricon system. without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the controller altogether. you can go back and configure the more complex network connection. see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9–v10 Systems for more information. If port 4 on the EICM fails. Invensys recommends connecting the TriStation PC to the EICM or TCM via a serial connection only in the following scenarios. If port 4 on the TCM fails.9. you can connect to TriStation 1131 using the NET 1 or NET 2 port. you could accidentally lock yourself out of a network connection to the Tricon controller. because it is less complex to configure and thus easier to successfully connect to the communication module through the serial port. port 1. v4. the serial connection can be used as a backup means of communicating with the Tricon controller. the TCM can be used only with a Tricon v10. Invensys strongly recommends you use the default setting. Connecting to the Tricon Controller When the Network Is Down When network communication has been interrupted due to hardware or other problems with the network. Connecting to the Tricon Controller When the Access Control List Has Been Misconfigured (Tricon 10.x controller.x Only) If you misconfigure the Access Control List. By default. both the EICM and the TCM use port 4 for the TriStation connection. Invensys recommends making a serial connection to the EICM or TCM. Once you have successfully connected to the EICM or TCM and downloaded the initial configuration to the Tricon controller via the serial connection. 0 . Invensys provides a serial cable that has a 9-pin connector on each end. or COM4. preventing you from making further changes to the application running on the controller. If you need other parts. If this happens. Procedure 1 2 Connect one end of the serial cable to a serial port on the EICM or TCM. Connect the other end of the serial cable to a COM port on the TriStation PC. This is typically port 4. If this is not done. you can use a Triconex 25-pin to 9-pin adapter.Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection 377 selecting the Enable Access List check box.9. Connecting a Tricon Serial Port to a TriStation PC This procedure explains how to connect a Tricon EICM or TCM serial port to a TriStation PC. see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9–v10 Systems. Figure 25 Connecting a Tricon Serial Port to the TriStation PC TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. If the COM port on the PC has a 25-pin connector. COM2. you must configure at least one client with TriStation Read/Write access before you save the configuration. v4. The COM port is typically numbered COM1. including changes to the TCM access control list. COM3. See Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386 for more information. you can purchase them from another manufacturer. you can use the serial connection to connect to the Tricon controller and download changes to the access control list. you will be unable to connect to the Tricon controller again after your next download. For more information. Enter the UDP port to use for the TriStation 1131 connection. Specify these properties on the TriStation Communication screen.378 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection This procedure explains how to configure the serial connection from the TriStation PC to the Tricon EICM or TCM. Procedure 1 Expand the Controller tree. v4. or enter your own user-defined name. TriStation Port Number Serial Port Baud Rate Note The data displayed on this screen is used by TriStation 1131 only to connect to a Tricon communication port. Enter the name of the Tricon controller. You can use a default name.0 . The default is 1502. See Configuring Tricon Communication Modules on page 271. 3 To complete the connection.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Specify the data transmission speed. Select the COM port on the TriStation PC to which the serial cable is connected. and then click TriStation Communication. 2 Property Serial Connection Node Name Action Select this check box. doubleclick Configuration. Available only when a TCM is installed. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to the Tricon controller. The default names are TRINODE01 through TRINODE31. Should be the same number specified on the TCM Setup Network tab. you must configure a Tricon EICM or TCM module. The default is 9600. 9. or TCM communication module and a TriStation PC. or a connection through a router. Configure the connection in the TriStation 1131 project. see the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. The node setting (on the ACM or NCM module or the 3008 MP Front Panel) must match the node number specified in the TriStation 1131 project. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For instructions on changing the MP node setting.0 . You cannot use both an NCM and TCM module in the same Tricon system. v4. This can be a direct connection from the communication module to the PC. you must: • • • • Install a network interface card and the TCP/IP protocol on the PC. or media converter.Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection 379 Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection This section explains how to make a network connection between an ACM. Topics include: • • • • Note Directly Connecting an ACM or NCM Network Port to a TriStation PC on page 380 Connecting a TCM Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Router or Hub on page 381 Connecting a Tricon Network Port Using a Media Converter on page 382 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection on page 384 If you are connecting the TCM or EICM to the TriStation PC via serial port. see Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection on page 376. Connect the TriStation PC to a network port on the communication module. To set up the connection. see Configuring the TriStation PC on page 373. CAUTION For instructions on installing a network interface card and the TCP/IP protocol on the TriStation PC. NCM. Set the node number of the controller. A router or hub is not required if you do not need to connect any additional devices besides the communication module and the PC. hub. Ask your network administrator for information about other termination methods.0 . Attach one of the T-connectors to a BNC connector on NET 2 of the communication module. you can attach a T-connector with 50-ohm terminators on each end to produce a 25-ohm parallel resistance. Figure 26 Directly Connecting an ACM or NCM to a TriStation PC 4 Terminate the BNC connectors on all communication modules that are installed in the Tricon controller. An NCM is used as an example in the following figure. BNC T-connectors. To terminate an unused BNC connector. Invensys provides an accessory kit that includes a 10Base2 coaxial cable.380 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Directly Connecting an ACM or NCM Network Port to a TriStation PC This procedure explains how to directly connect an ACM or NCM to a TriStation PC if the network interface card in the PC has a BNC connector. attach a BNC T-connector and a terminator. Procedure 1 2 3 To each end of a 10Base2 cable. Attach the other T-connector to the BNC connector on the network interface card in the TriStation PC. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The connection requires a 10Base2 coaxial cable.9. v4. and 50-ohm terminators for unused connectors (see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems for more information). Attach the other end of the first cable to the connector on the Ethernet router or hub. there is a problem with the physical cable connection.Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection 381 Connecting a TCM Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Router or Hub This procedure explains how to connect a TCM to a TriStation PC if the network interface card in the PC has an RJ-45 connector or a MTRJ fiber connector. You must use an Ethernet router or hub between the Tricon and the TriStation PC. The fiber connection requires 62. See the Communication Guide for Tricon v9–v10 Systems for more information about the required cables and how some may be purchased from Invensys. If the LED indicator is not on.9. Attach the other end of the second cable to the connector on the router or hub.0 . Figure 27 Connecting a TCM (Copper or Fiber) to a TriStation PC Using a Router or Hub If the correct cable is connected to the TCM and the TCM is installed in a powered Tricon chassis. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Attach one end of the second cable to the connector on the network interface card in the TriStation PC. The RJ-45 connection requires twisted-pair straight-through cables. the green LED indicator turns on. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Attach one end of the first cable to the NET 2 port on the TCM.5/125 um multimode fiber cables. and another appropriate cable. such as a twisted-pair cable. Attach one of the T-connectors to a BNC connector on the NET 2 port on the communication module.0 . • • The connection to an ACM or NCM requires a 10Base2 cable.Fiber) requires a 62. or TCM to a TriStation PC if the network interface card in the PC requires a media converter because it does not have the appropriate connector. Figure 28 Connecting an ACM or NCM to the TriStation PC Using a Media Converter TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. attach a BNC T-connector and a terminator. Attach the other T-connector to a BNC connector on the media converter. Attach the other end of the twisted-pair cable to an RJ-45 connector on the media converter.382 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting a Tricon Network Port Using a Media Converter This procedure explains how to connect an ACM.9.5/125 um multimode fiber cable. v4. 4 5 Attach one end of the twisted-pair cable to an RJ-45 connector on the network interface card in the TriStation 1131 PC. a media converter. The connection to a TCM (model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354 . you can use a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX twisted-pair cable for faster communication. For the TriStation PC. and another appropriate cable. NCM. such as a twisted-pair cable. a media converter. Procedure for Connecting an ACM or NCM 1 2 3 To each end of a 10Base2 cable. Figure 29 Connecting a TCM (Model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354) to the TriStation PC Using a Media Converter If the correct cable is connected to the TCM and the TCM is installed in a powered Tricon chassis. Connect one end of the twisted-pair cable to the RJ-45 connector on the network interface card in the TriStation PC.Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection 383 Procedure for Connecting a TCM (Model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354 .9. Attach the other end of the twisted-pair cable to an RJ-45 connector on the media converter. If the LED indicator is not on. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the green LED indicator turns on. there is a problem with the physical cable connection. Attach the other end of the fiber cable to a MTRJ fiber connector on the media converter. v4.Fiber) 1 2 3 4 Attach one end of the fiber cable to the NET 1 or NET 2 port on the TCM.0 . v4. Note The data displayed on this screen is used by TriStation 1131 only to connect to a Tricon communication port. and double-click Configuration. NCM. See Configuring Tricon Communication Modules on page 271. you must determine which IP address to use for the communication module. 4 To complete the connection. Enter the UDP port to use for the TriStation 1131 connection. Should be the same number specified on the TCM Setup Network tab. expand the Controller tree. Specify these properties on the TriStation Communication screen. click TriStation Communication.384 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection This procedure explains how to configure the Tricon network connection to a TriStation PC. Node Name IP Address UDP Base Port Number Enter a name containing eight or fewer characters to identify the Tricon controller. Property Network Connection Node Number Action Select the Network Connection check box. Typically. On the Configuration tree. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to the Tricon controller. Before beginning this procedure. or TCM module. The default is 1502. • For ACM and NCM. Available only when a TCM is installed. Click the browse button to select a node from the list of default node names and numbers. you can get an IP address from your network administrator or Information Technology department. • For TCM. Enter the physical address of the controller on the network. enter the number represented by the Network Node Address setting on the MP front panel. enter the number represented on the rotary switches. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 .9. Procedure 1 2 3 In TriStation 1131. you must configure a Tricon ACM. See Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses on page 399. and then click TriStation Communication. v4.Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type 385 Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type This procedure explains how to specify the default connection setting in the Connect To dialog box. the default connection setting you selected will be used. select one of the following: • • The next time you establish communication between the TriStation PC and the Tricon controller.9. Note If only one connection type is selected under Selected Connections. 2 Verify that the Network Connection Setup (for a network connection) or TriStation PC (for a serial connection) properties are correctly configured. and cannot be changed. double-click Configuration. See the following for additional information: • • Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection on page 378 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection on page 384 Network Connection Serial Connection 3 Under Default Connection. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the default connection is automatically set based on it. The connection setting—Network or Serial Connection—is an initial setting and can be changed when you use the Connect command. which appears when you establish communication between a TriStation PC and the Tricon controller.0 . Procedure 1 Expand the Configuration tree. 9. Access to any other applications that use the TSAA protocol. Topics include: • • • • What Are TCM Resources? on page 386 How Is Access Controlled? on page 387 What Are Access Levels? on page 387 Configuring the Access Control List on page 390 What Are TCM Resources? A resource is any service or information provided by the TCM through the supported communications protocols. you must enable and configure the TCM access control list. TCM models 4351 and 4352 do not support access control. To disable write access by TSAA clients. to allow the retrieval of events. Access to Tricon controller diagnostic information via the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor. only read access is provided. and each user’s level of access. Write access to OPC A&E is not currently supported. this may create a security issue.386 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Controlling Access to the TCM The Tricon Communication Module (TCM) gives you the ability to control who can access TCM resources through the module’s network ports.3 and later systems. Depending on your configuration. The OPC protocol is supported only by TCM models 4353 and 4354. Note Access control is supported on models 4351A/B.2 and earlier systems. Please note that this default behavior is opposite of that on TCMs in Tricon v10. Access to Tricon tagnames and system variables via OPC Data Access (DA). Access to OPC Alarms and Events (A&E) data (models 4353 and 4354 only). Access to information provided in applications such as SOE Recorder or DDE Server that use the TSAA protocol. • • CAUTION TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. In Tricon v10.0 . Examples of these resources include: • • • • Access to the controller via TriStation 1131 (ability to perform a Download Changes or Download All). 4353. and 4354 only. TSAA clients using a TCM interface have write access to the NET 1 and NET 2 ports by default. v4. 4352A/B. 1. change settings.Controlling Access to the TCM 387 How Is Access Controlled? Access is controlled via client IP addresses. you can set the access level. every user using TriStation 1131 on a PC with a particular IP address would have the same access rights to the TCM. For TCM/OPC.65 to share the same access permissions.1.255 restricts an access list entry so that it applies only to the specific IP address identified in the entry. This access level should only be provided to trusted clients. you can group them in the access list by setting the IP address for a single entry as 192. allows an OPC DA client to write to tagnames. depending on your network structure.255.255. they will all have the same access rights. A network address mask of 255.1. Allows client to view information provided by the TCM.168.134 and 192. • Access levels are configured by adding entries to the access control list. For example. Read/Write: Full access. and there are no other clients on the same subnet. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. they must be physically separated in a sub-network. TCM access is controlled only at the IP address level. you will need to create two separate entries in the access control list. and the network ports the client can use to access the TCM. You can control access for a single IP address (one client).168.255.255.0 . If you want to provide different access levels for a selected client depending on which protocol they are using. and a network address mask must be used to group them in the access list. Does not allow the client to change any settings or perform certain commands. or for a group of IP addresses (a group of clients). Access levels apply to all users using the PC assigned the IP address entered in the access control list. the protocols the client can use to access the TCM. The same access level is applied to all selected protocols in a single access control list entry. For example. What Are Access Levels? There are three levels of access: • • Deny Access: Prevents all access to resources provided by the TCM. and allows an OPC A&E client to retrieve events. This means if multiple users are using the same PC.0.0 applies an access list entry to any client on the same subnet as the IP address identified in the entry.255. if you want two clients with IP addresses of 192. v4. Read Only: Allows client to connect to the Tricon controller and view information provided via the TCM. A maximum of 10 entries can be provided in the access control list.9. and perform all commands (including Download Changes or Download All for TriStation 1131). If you want to group clients into a single access list entry.x and the network address mask to 255. allows an OPC DA client to read tagnames. For each IP address or group of IP addresses. Connections to the Tricon controller are not allowed.168. Other network address masks may also be used. Individual user access should be controlled via workstation security. For TCM/OPC.255. A network address mask of 255. one for each protocol. This ensures you will be able to connect to the Tricon controller again after your next download. Note If you are using the TSAA and/or TriStation protocols. See Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection on page 376. with the access control scenarios that would result if enabled on a model 4353 or 4354 TCM. you can also use the Port Write Enabled property to manage read/write access to specific ports. and allows you to make further changes to the application running on the controller. you must configure at least one client with TriStation Read/Write access before you can save the configuration.388 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 CAUTION Once you enable TCM client access control by selecting the Enable Access List check box. Sample Access Control List and Resulting Access Control The following table is a sample access control list. you can also connect via a TriStation 1131 serial connection to reconfigure the access control list.9. If you are using the serial and/or Modbus TCP protocols. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . including changes to the TCM access control list. If necessary. v4. you must enable and use access list control to manage read/write access to specific ports. See Port Write Enabled on page 581. 168.1. As a result. A client with an IP address of 206.1.255.0.216. using any protocol on NET 1 or NET 2. On the model 4353 and 4354 TCM.255.255.168.255.09 attempting to access the TCM using TSAA on NET 1 or NET 2 would be denied access.1.216. entry 3 specifically denies access to a client with the IP address of 192.05 255. None 2 206.05 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using OPC or TriStation 1131 on NET 2 would be granted Read Only access.05 attempting to access the TCM using the TriStation protocol on NET 1 or NET 2. v4.168.05 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using the TriStation protocol on NET 2 would be granted Read Only access.1. c.0 7 192.1.1.216. a client attempting to access the TCM using OPC on NET 1 will always be denied. A client with an IP address of 192.168.05 255. or OPC on NET 2. As a result.255. If a client with the specific IP address of 192. Access is denied for all IP addresses not included in entries 1–7.05 255.1.168.0 NULL 0. An access control list entry configured with only TSAA and NET 2 is an invalid combination that will not have any effect on client access to the TCM via TSAA.a A client with an IP address of 192.255.0 OPC and TriStation TriStation Read Only 6 192.Table 36 Entry 1 Sample TCM (Model 4353/4354) Access Control List IP Address 206. In this case.0. a client attempting to access the TCM using TSAA on NET 2 will always be denied.168.12 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using the TriStation protocol on NET 2 would be granted Read/Write access.05. and continuing through the list until it encounters an entry that applies to the IP address requesting access.1.0 NET 2 Read Only TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. OPC is supported only on NET 2.0. A client with an IP address of 192.1.1.09 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using OPC on NET 2 would be granted Read/Write access.255.0 NULL All NULL All NULL Deny Access NULL a.12 Subnet Mask 255.0.0 Protocol TriStation Network NET 2 Access Level Read/Write Resulting Access Control Scenario A client with an IP address of 206.255.1.c A client with an IP address of 192.1.9.b A client with an IP address of 192. would be denied access. b.09 255.168.255 TriStation and OPC TSAA NET 1 NET 2 NET 1 NET 2 NET 2 Deny Access 4 192.255.0 TSAA NET 1 Read Only 3 192.255.255.168.255 Deny Access 5 192.12 255.168.09 255. the TCM will deny access.168. An access control list entry configured with only OPC and NET 1 is an invalid combination that will not have any effect on client access to the TCM via OPC.1.0 OPC NET 2 Read/Write Controlling Access to the TCM 8 9 0.255.168. 389 .12 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using the TSAA protocol on NET 1 would be granted Read Only access.1.255. TSAA is supported only on NET 1.255. This is because the TCM evaluates the access control list beginning from the top. so the TCM will deny access and not evaluate the list any further.1.1.216.05 attempts to access the TCM using the TriStation protocol on NET 2.168. Note After a Download Changes or Download All has been performed so that access control on the TCM is enabled. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. The first match that the TCM makes (between the client’s network parameters and those listed in an access control list entry) determines which entry is used to authorize or deny access.0 . When configuring the access control list. This does not apply to model 4351 or 4352 TCMs. Click the Access List tab. even if the client’s access has been changed to Read Only or Deny Access. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. If no match is found. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. take care to organize your entries so that the most specific are at the top. and the least specific are at the bottom. you must perform a Download Changes for the access control to take effect. all existing connections will remain connected. The TCM evaluates the access control list from top (Entry 1) to bottom (Entry 10).390 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Configuring the Access Control List This section describes how to enable access control on the TCM and configure the access control list for your selected clients. Once you have enabled access control and configured the access control list. the TCM automatically denies all access. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. v4. and expand Hardware Allocation. The new access levels will not take effect until the client disconnects and attempts to reconnect. double-click Configuration. The last entry in the list should be used to define the access level for unspecified clients. 9. Permission Click the level of access to the TCM you want to provide for the selected client. unconfigured state. click Reset Client Entry to reset the settings for the selected client to the default. 7 If a TCM is installed in the right slot. so that you can create a single entry in the access control list for all IP addresses on the subnet. repeat steps 4 through 6 for the module installed in the right slot. Click Reset All to reset all entries in the access list to the default. Click on the entry for the client you want to configure or change. you should not set this property to Read/Write.255.0 . you should create identical access control lists for the modules in both slots. Property Slot Selection Action Select the slot where the TCM module you want to configure an access control list for is installed. and applies only for model 4353 or 4354 TCMs. If cleared.255. Protocol Select the protocol(s) that the selected client can use to access the TCM. click Copy Current Setup to Other Slot. v4. Note If necessary. The default is 255. you should configure identical access control lists for the modules in both slots. Network 5 6 Click Update Client Entry to save the settings for the selected client. Select the network(s) on which the selected client can access the TCM. If the application includes safety-critical outputs. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The OPC protocol is supported on NET 2 only. 8 Click OK to save your changes. do one of the following: • • In most cases.0. Client IP Subnet Mask This property allows you to group IP addresses. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each client to be included in the access control list. To do so. access control will be disabled and all users can access TCM resources. Can be used in conjunction with the Client IP Subnet Mask property to create groups of IP addresses with the same access levels. Enable Access List Command Client Access List Client IP Address Click to enable access control for this TCM. The default is cleared. If needed. To configured different access control lists for the modules in the right and left slots.Controlling Access to the TCM 391 4 Specify these properties. In most cases. Specify the IP address of the client that you want to allow. or deny access to the TCM. unconfigured state. restrict. enter the IP address for the subnet. the print function blocks are subject to conditional execution. the print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application are executed and the scan time increases.9. To print from a Tricon controller with a TCM. the execution of all conditional statements (when the conditions are True) could result in scan-time overruns. you must connect a TCM Ethernet port to a print server that is connected to a printer.392 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Configuring Tricon Controller Printing A Tricon controller can print brief ASCII text messages if a communication port is connected to a printer and the TriStation 1131 application includes standard print function blocks. and use print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application. alarms are typically displayed on an operator workstation. A sample alarm message might include the name of an analog input point. see the SOE Recorder User’s Guide. v4. configure the port in the TriStation 1131 project. status. Topics include: • • • • • • • Effect of Printing on Scan Time on page 392 Connecting a Tricon EICM Port to a Printer on page 393 Configuring a Tricon EICM Port for Printing on page 394 Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices on page 395 Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices Using a Hub on page 396 Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing on page 397 About Function Blocks for Printing on page 398 See the Communication Guide for Tricon v9–v10 Systems for more information about the types of devices that can be used for printing from the Tricon controller. and maintenance. You can minimize this problem by limiting the amount of printer output. you must connect an EICM parallel port to a Centronics-compatible printer. configure these devices in the TriStation 1131 project. If the Tricon system includes numerous controllers or is connected to a DCS. its time stamp and value. which means they are not executed every scan. To print from a Tricon controller with an EICM. and a statement that the value is out of range. An alternative is to use a PC event logger such as the Triconex SOE Recorder. Print messages are typically used for alarms. and use print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For more information.0 . If the scan time is not long enough. Typically. When you set the scan time in TriStation 1131. Effect of Printing on Scan Time Each time a message is printed. make sure it includes the execution time for all conditional statements in the application. and run the diagnostic routine. depending on the quality of the cable Procedure 1 2 3 4 If the printer package has an installation program. copy the program to the TriStation PC.0 . Follow the instructions. v4. (Other EICM ports cannot be used for printing.) Go to the next section to configure the EICM port for printing.9. Figure 30 Connecting an EICM to a Centronics-Compatible Printer TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. if available. You do not need the printer driver that may have come with the package. Connect one end of the cable to the printer. You can use a standard PC printer cable with a maximum cable length of 5 to 6 meters (15 to 20 feet).Configuring Tricon Controller Printing 393 Connecting a Tricon EICM Port to a Printer This procedure explains how to set up a Centronics-compatible printer and connect it directly to a Tricon EICM parallel port. and connect the other end to port 5 or 10 on the EICM. 9. Select Printer from the Protocol list. Procedure 1 2 In TriStation 1131. expand the Controller tree. Enter the number of characters per line. Property Port Selection Protocol Rows Columns Action Select Port 5 or Port 10. On the Configuration tree under Hardware Allocation. Enter the number of lines (rows) to be displayed on a page. and then click Setup. double-click EICM.0 . Other ports cannot be used for printing. v4. 4 Click OK. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 3 Specify these properties on the EICM Setup screen. and double-click Configuration.394 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Configuring a Tricon EICM Port for Printing This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon EICM port that is connected to a Centronicscompatible printer. open your project. 0 . Follow the instructions. NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. Connect the printer to the print server. TCM models 4351/4351A/4351B and 4352/4352A/4352B only. v4.Configuring Tricon Controller Printing 395 Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices This procedure explains how to directly connect a TCM to an HP JetDirect-compatible print server and printer. Figure 31 Connecting a Tricon TCM to a Printer and Print Server 1. install them on the TriStation PC. You will need the IP address when configuring the TCM printer. and run the diagnostic routines if available. Record the IP address of the print server. and connect the print server to a TCM Ethernet port (NET 1 or NET 21). You can use standard communication cables for these connections. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. Procedure 1 2 3 If the print server and printer packages have installation programs. You do not need the printer drivers that came with the packages. Record the IP address of the print server. Connect the hub to a TCM Ethernet port (NET 1 or NET 22).0 . Follow the instructions that came with the packages.396 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices Using a Hub This procedure explains how to connect a TCM to an HP JetDirect-compatible print server and printer by using a hub. You can use standard communication cables for these connections. You do not need to install the printer drivers that may have come with the print server and printer packages. install them on the TriStation PC. Procedure 1 2 3 4 If the print server and printer packages have installation programs.9. v4. and connect the print server to a hub. Connect the printer to the print server. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. and run the diagnostic routines. Figure 32 Connecting the Tricon TCM to a Printer Server and Printer Using a Hub 2. You will need the IP address when configuring the TCM printer. if available. TCM models 4351/4351A/4351B and 4352/4352A/4352B only. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. Procedure 1 2 3 In TriStation 1131. TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration. Property Printer Number Action Enter the number for the printer. The default is 0. 4 Specify these properties for the module installed in the Left Slot.The information and procedures in this section do not apply to model 4351 and 4352 TCMs. The printer port can be configured on NET 1 only for these TCMs. expand the Controller tree. Enter the number of the TCP port for the print server.0 . Click the Printer tab. You do not need the printer driver that may have come with the printer package. and expand Hardware Allocation. The valid range is 80–132 characters. Both slots cannot have the same printer number. If you have one of these TCMs installed in your system. v4. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup.9. double-click Configuration. please see Appendix C. The default is 9100 for an HP printer. Line Width TCP Port Number TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Note Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication. can only be 5 or 10. The default is 80 characters. you cannot configure this port for printing with model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. meaning a printer is not configured.Configuring Tricon Controller Printing 397 Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon TCM port that is connected to a Centronicscompatible printer. open your project. Enter the number of characters to be printed on a line. 398 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Property Network Action Click the network that the print server is connected to. the print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application are executed and the scan time increases. Prints a string of text. Prints the current date and time. Clears the print buffer. the PRINTER parameter must be 5 for a left EICM or TCM port. the default is NET 1 (NET 2 is not available for printing on these TCMs).) The PRINTER parameter must be the same number as is defined in TriStation 1131. 5 6 If a module is also installed in the Right Slot. About Function Blocks for Printing A TriStation 1131 application must use print function blocks to send messages to a printer. (Other EICM or TCM ports cannot be used for printing.9.0 . Print Function Block PRINT_BOOL PRINT_CDT PRINT_CRLF PRINT_CTOD PRINT_DINT PRINT_REAL PRINT_STRING PRINTR_FLUSH Purpose Prints a three-character field containing either Off or On. Click OK. Prints a REAL value. For model 4351A/4352A and 4351B/4352B TCMs. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. See the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference for more detailed information about the print function blocks. v4. • Each time a message is printed. IP Address Enter the IP address of the print server. Each print function block has a PRINTER parameter which specifies the port number where the printer cable is connected. Prints the current time of day. the default is NET 2. Prints a DINT value. • For a Tricon EICM or TCM port. For model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. This table lists the print function blocks in the Tricon libraries. or 10 for a right EICM or TCM port. repeat step 4 for that module. Prints a new line (carriage return and line feed). To use the procedures. you should know how to: • • • Connect the Tricon controller to a network Connect the TriStation PC to the controller Configure the TriStation 1131 project with the node number of the controller and the IP address For more information.Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses 399 Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses When communication between a TriStation PC and a Tricon controller occurs over a network. All begin with asking the network administrator for the intended IP addresses. there are other ways to set an IP address on a network. see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. Topics include: • • • • Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication on page 400 Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using a RARP Server on page 401 Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using an EICM or TCM on page 402 Testing a Network Connection on page 403 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Other ways include temporary connection of the TriStation PC to a non-Ethernet module during downloading.0 . the IP address of the controller must be specified on the communication module. it may be possible to use the default IP address set when the TriStation 1131 project is downloaded (assuming the correct node number and default IP address are specified in the project). Triconex controllers are located on their own subnet which is connected to a larger network such as a DCS. If the controller is not part of a larger network. The easiest way is to use a Reverse ARP (RARP) server that has been programmed in advance with the intended addresses. v4.9. Note Typically. All the procedures for setting the IP address are based on the assumption that the Tricon controller includes at least one communication module with an Ethernet port connected to a network. Your network administrator can set up the subnet for compatibility with the Triconex default IP addresses and can program any routers that lie between the DCS and the Triconex subnet with addressing information about the Triconex controllers. If you cannot use a default address. insert a communication module. Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Connect the Tricon controller to the network using the NET 2 port on the ACM. double-click Configuration.168. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 In the Setup dialog box. On the TriStation PC. NCM. from the Start menu. On the Commands menu. In the TriStation 1131 project. If a communication module is not installed. click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. expand the Controller tree. or TCM. Expand Hardware Allocation. On the Controller tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or directly to a NET 2 port on the ACM. the Active indicator is green. and then click TriStation Communication. v4. Power up the controller. Connect the TriStation PC to the network. click the slot where the communication module is installed.1 (Tricon ACM. enter the same IP address for the other slot.0 . NCM. click Configuration. and then click Setup. Note 6 7 The left and right modules in ACM or NCM slots use the same 48-bit physical MAC address and cannot be connected to the same network. If the Tricon controller includes a redundant communication module. the default address applies to both modules.9. Type the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. or TCM. enter the same IP address specified on the TriStation Communication screen. click Download All to download the TriStation 1131 project to the Tricon controller. On the TriStation Communication screen. Wait about 40 seconds for the module to reset and become active.1. verify the IP Address is: • 192. and then click Setup. From the Commands menu.400 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication This procedure explains how to use the default IP address for network communication between a Tricon controller and a TriStation PC. NCM. When the module is active. click the Controller Panel. click Connect. or TCM) If the controller includes two communication modules. On the Controller tree. Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using a RARP Server This procedure explains how to set the IP address of a communication module using a RARP server on the local network. 7 Connect the TriStation PC to the network. and then retry the ping command. the reply is Request timed out. verify your configuration settings are correct.43.216. the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. for an IP address of 206.43 If the network connection is made.Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses 401 For example. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or directly to a network port on the communication module.32.43 If the network connection is made. enter this: ping 206.32. check your network cable and port connections to verify they are securely connected.216. verify your configuration settings are correct. the network administrator must program the RARP server with the intended IP address for the controller. Note 5 6 The left and right modules in ACM or NCM slots use the same 48-bit physical MAC address and cannot be connected to the same network.9. If the connection is not okay. click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. for an IP address of 206. the communication module sends a request to the RARP server for an IP address that has been mapped to its own 48-bit MAC address. On the TriStation PC. the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Give the network administrator the MAC address. use another method to set the IP address. check your network cable and port connections to verify they are securely connected. Note If you receive a Request timed out reply. For example. Enter the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. To use this procedure.32. If this is not possible. During initialization.216. and then retry the ping command. v4. the reply is Request timed out. Note If you receive a Request timed out reply. Power up the controller.216. enter this: ping 206. Connect the Tricon controller to the network through a network port on the communication module. from the Start menu. which is: 40-00-00-00-00-00 (Tricon) Ask the network administrator for the IP address that is to be used for the Tricon controller. If the connection is not okay.43.0 .32. 402 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 8 9 10 11 In the TriStation 1131 project, expand the Controller tree, click Configuration, and then click TriStation Communication. On the TriStation Communication screen, specify the Node Number of the controller and the intended IP address. On the Commands menu, click Connect. Wait until the connection is made. On the Commands menu, click Download All to download the TriStation 1131 project to the controller. Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using an EICM or TCM This procedure explains how to set the IP address of the Tricon controller by initially connecting the TriStation PC to an EICM or TCM serial port, and downloading the TriStation 1131 project. After the address is set, you can disconnect the TriStation PC from the EICM or TCM serial port, and reconnect it to a NET 2 port on the ACM, NCM, or TCM. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Ask the network administrator for the IP address to be used for the ACM, NCM, or TCM. Connect the TriStation PC to a serial port on the EICM or TCM. Connect the controller to the network using the NET 1 or NET 2 port on the TCM. On the ACM or NCM, use the NET 2 port. In the TriStation 1131 project, configure the following: • • • 5 6 7 8 9 The EICM or TCM serial port and NET 2 Ethernet ports The node number and node name of the controller The intended IP address Power up the controller. On the Controller tree, click Controller Panel. On the Command menu, click Connect To. On the Connect To screen, select the Serial Port option and the COM port to which the TriStation cable is connected. Connect to the Tricon controller and download the TriStation 1131 project. The ACM, NCM, or TCM initializes (resets) and accepts the IP address that you specify in the TriStation 1131 project. 10 11 On the TriStation PC, from the Start menu, click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. Enter the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP address of 206.32.216.43, enter this: ping 206.32.216.43 If the network connection is made, the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses 403 Note If you receive a Request timed out reply, check your network cable and port connections to verify they are securely connected, verify your configuration settings are correct, and then retry the ping command. 12 If the IP address is set, you can disconnect the TriStation PC from the EICM or TCM serial port, and connect it to a NET 2 port or to the network. Testing a Network Connection This procedure explains how to test a connection from a Tricon communication module to a network by using the ping command from an MS-DOS command prompt. The test is performed on the TriStation PC. Before doing the test, you must have set the IP address of the communication module on the network. Procedure 1 2 On the TriStation PC, from the Start menu, click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. Type the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP address of 206.32.216.43, enter this: ping 206.32.216.43 If the network connection is made, the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 404 Chapter 5 Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Overview 406 Configuring the TriStation PC 408 Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time 411 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection 412 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 416 Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type 433 Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM 434 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing 439 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses 446 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 406 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Overview This figure shows the main steps for setting up TriStation 1131 communication and the typical order in the project cycle. Communication setup can be done anytime before implementation. Set Up the Project Develop the Application Test with the Emulator Fix Errors Errors? C onfigure the C ontroller - Establish the physical connection Set Up TriStation C ommunication - Configure the connection to the TriStation PC - Set node and IP address of the controller Implement on the Controller TriStation 1131 Communication Steps This checklist includes the items that can be or should be performed to set up communication between a TriStation PC and a Trident or Tri-GP controller. Description See • Connecting the Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC on page 417 • Connecting the Trident 1.x CM to the TriStation PC on page 421   Connect to a Trident v1.x MP Connect to a Trident v1.x CM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Overview 407 Description See • Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 • Connecting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Controller to a TriStation PC on page 426  Connect to a Trident v2.x CM or MP  Connect to a Tri-GP CM or MP • Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 • Connecting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Controller to a TriStation PC on page 426   Configure user access to the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Set up printing • Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434 • Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing on page 439 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 408 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Configuring the TriStation PC This section explains the setup required for a network connection from the TriStation PC. Topics include: • • Note Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC on page 408 Installing DLC or TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC on page 408 If you will only be connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP controller via a serial connection, you can skip this section. Please note, however, that the preferred method of connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident or Tri-GP controller is via a network connection. Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC This procedure explains how to install a network interface card (NIC) in a TriStation PC to be connected to a Trident or Tri-GP MP or CM. Procedure 1 2 3 Install the network interface card by following the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not change the factory default settings on the NIC card. Connect the network interface card directly to a CM or MP network port on the Trident or Tri-GP controller, or to an Ethernet hub. Run the diagnostics provided with the network interface card according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Installing DLC or TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC These procedures explain how to install DLC or TCP/IP protocol on a TriStation PC. • • The DLC protocol is required only for connecting to a Trident 1.x MP. The TCP/IP protocol is required for Trident or Tri-GP CM connection. Installing TCP/IP on Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 1 2 3 On the Start menu, click Control Panel, and then double-click Network Connections. Right-click the network connection where you want to install the protocol, then click Properties. Do one of the following: • On the General tab, if the TCP/IP protocol is checked on the list of installed components, it means the protocol is installed and you are finished with this procedure. If the TCP/IP protocol is not checked, go to the next step to continue the installation. • 4 On the General tab, click Install. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Configuring the TriStation PC 409 5 6 In the Select Network Component Type dialog box, click Protocol, and then click Add. Click the TCP/IP protocol, and then click OK. Installing TCP/IP on Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 1 2 3 4 5 On the Start menu, click Control Panel, open Network and Internet, and then click Network and Sharing Center. In the Network and Sharing Center, click Manage Network Connections. Right-click the network connection you want to change, and then click Properties. If prompted, enter the administrator’s password or confirm the operation. On the Networking tab, under This connection uses the following items, click Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then click OK. Note Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) must be installed to allow a TriStation 1131 application to connect to a Trident or Tri-GP controller. Do not install Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6). Installing DLC on Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2008 or Windows 7 Installing the DLC protocol on a Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 R2 (32-bit only), or Windows 7 (32-bit only) workstation is a 3-step process. The DLC protocol cannot be installed on Windows 64-bit systems. As a result, you cannot connect to a Trident 1.x MP on a Windows 64-bit system. Note If you have already installed the DLC protocol on your workstation, you can configure it to start automatically each time you start your workstation by changing a registry value. Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\ControlSet001\Services\Dlc, and then change the Start value to 1. Step 1: Download the DLC Protocol Installation Program 1 2 3 4 5 Open your Internet browser, and enter the following URL in the address field: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/ In the Search for a Download section, perform a search for “DLC Protocol” and then go to the download page for the DLC protocol for Windows XP. Follow the instructions on the download page to start the download process. When prompted, save the dlc.exe file to your local drive. When the download is complete, double-click the self-extracting dlc.exe file to unzip the five DLC protocol files. Save the files to a location on your local drive that will be easy to remember (for example, C:\DLC). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 410 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Step 2: Modify the .INF File 1 2 Go to the location where you saved the DLC protocol files in step 4 of the previous section. Right-click on NetDLC.inf, and select Open with from the shortcut menu that appears. Then select Notepad from the Open with dialog box and click OK. The .inf file opens in Notepad. Scroll down until you see the following section: 3 4 5 Change the value for StartType from 3 to 1. This ensures that the DLC protocol will start automatically each time you start your workstation. Save the file and then exit Notepad. Step 3: Configure the DLC Protocol Network Connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Go to the location where you saved the DLC protocol files in Step 1. Double-click install.cmd to start the installation script. On the Start menu, click Control Panel, and then double-click Network Connections. Right-click the network connection where you want to install the protocol, then click Properties. On the General tab, click Install. In the Select Network Component Type dialog box, click Protocol, and then click Add. Click the DLC Protocol, and then click OK. Once installation is complete, you can close the Network Connections dialog box. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time 411 Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time The first time you connect to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, you are limited to the following two connection options: • • Serial connection to the CM or MP (recommended), or Network connection to the Left MP, using the default IP address only You cannot connect to the controller via a network connection to the CM or the Right or Middle network ports on the MP until you have completed all of the following tasks: • Configure the CM and/or MP (Right and Middle ports) network connection in TriStation 1131, including configuring your own IP addresses for the desired network port(s). Successfully connect to the controller via the first-time connection options described above. Download your application to the controller using the Download All command. • • Once your application—with the IP addresses for the other MP and/or CM network ports correctly configured—has been downloaded to the controller, you can disconnect from the Trident or Tri-GP controller and reconnect using your desired network connection. Note After you have successfully configured your network configuration for the CM and/or the Right and Middle MP, you can change the default IP address for the Left MP to your desired IP address for future network connections. Connecting Via the Serial Connection (Recommended) Invensys recommends using the serial connection for the initial connection to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller because it is less complex to configure and thus easier to successfully connect to the CM through the serial port. Once you have successfully connected to the CM and downloaded the initial configuration to the Trident or Tri-GP controller via the serial connection, you can go back and configure the more complex network connection, without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the controller altogether. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection on page 412 for more information. Connecting via the Left MP Network Port If you need to use a network connection for the initial connection to the controller, you must connect using the default IP address (192.168.255.n) with the Left MP. Your own IP addresses for other MP and CM modules cannot be used for connecting to the controller until your application—with the IP addresses for the other MP and/or CM network ports correctly configured—has been downloaded to the controller at least once, using the Download All command. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection on page 416 for more information. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 412 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection This section explains how to make a direct (point-to-point) serial connection between a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM and a TriStation PC. Note You cannot connect the TriStation PC to the Trident 1.x controller via a serial connection. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection on page 416 for instructions on connecting the TriStation PC to a Trident 1.x. Port 3 on the CM is the only serial port that supports TriStation communication. If port 3 on the CM fails, you can connect to TriStation 1131 using the NET 1 or NET 2 port; see the Communication Guide for Trident v2 Systems for more information. Topics include: • • • When to Use the Trident or Tri-GP Serial Connection on page 412 Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Serial Port to a TriStation PC on page 414 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection on page 415 When to Use the Trident or Tri-GP Serial Connection The preferred means for connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident or Tri-GP controller is via a network connection. Invensys recommends connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident or Tri-GP controller via a serial connection only in the following scenarios. Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time The first time you connect to the Trident or Tri-GP controller, Invensys recommends making a serial connection to the CM, because it is less complex to configure and thus easier to successfully connect to the CM through the serial port. Once you have successfully connected to the CM and downloaded the initial configuration to the Trident or Tri-GP controller via the serial connection, you can go back and configure the more complex network connection without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the controller altogether. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information. Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller When the Network Is Down When network communication has been interrupted due to hardware or other problems with the network, the serial connection can be used as a backup means of communicating with the Trident or Tri-GP controller. Once the network problems have been resolved, you should restore the network connection to the Trident or Tri-GP controller. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection 413 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller When the Access Control List has Been Misconfigured If you misconfigure the access control list, you could accidentally lock yourself out of a network connection to the Trident or Tri-GP controller. Once you enable CM client access control by selecting the Enable Access List check box, you must configure at least one client with TriStation Read/Write access before you save the configuration. If this is not done, you will be unable to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP controller again after your next download, preventing you from making further changes to the application running on the controller, including changes to the CM access control list. If this happens, you can use the serial connection to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP controller and download changes to the access control list. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434 for more information. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 414 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Serial Port to a TriStation PC This procedure explains how to connect serial port 3 on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM to a TriStation PC. Invensys provides a serial cable that has a 9-pin connector on each end. If the COM port on the PC has a 25-pin connector, you can use a Triconex 25-pin to 9-pin adapter. If you need other parts, you can purchase them from another manufacturer. For more information, see the Communication Guide for Trident v2 Systems. Procedure 1 2 Connect one end of the serial cable to serial port 3 on the CM. Connect the other end of the serial cable to a COM port on the TriStation PC. The COM port is typically numbered COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4. Figure 33 Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Serial Port to the TriStation PC TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection 415 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection This procedure explains how to configure a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM serial port that is connected to a TriStation PC. Procedure 1 Expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration, and then click TriStation Communication. Specify these properties on the TriStation Communication screen. Note The data displayed on this screen is used by TriStation 1131 only to connect to a Trident or Tri-GP communication port. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to the Trident or Tri-GP controller. 2 Property Serial Connection (Trident/Tri-GP v2.x only) Node Name Action Select this check box. Enter the name of the Trident or Tri-GP controller. You can use a default name, or enter your own user-defined name. The default names are TRINODE01 through TRINODE31. Select the COM port on the TriStation PC to which the serial cable is connected. You cannot change the default baud rate of 115200. Serial Port 3 4 On the Configuration tree, expand Hardware Allocation, double-click CM, and then click Setup. Specify these properties on the Serial Ports tab of the CM Setup dialog box. Property Port Action Select the port that the TriStation PC is attached to. You must select port 3, as this is the only serial port supported for TriStation 1131 connection. Select TriStation. Protocol 5 Click OK. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Configure the connection in the TriStation 1131 project. see Configuring the TriStation PC on page 408.x CM to the TriStation PC on page 421 Connecting the Trident v2.9. CAUTION For instructions on installing a network interface card and the TCP/IP protocol on the TriStation PC. For instructions on changing the MP node setting. Connect the PC to a network port on the CM or MP. v4. The node setting (on the MP Baseplate) must match the node number specified in the TriStation 1131 project.416 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection This section explains how to make a network connection between a Trident or Tri-GP communication module (CM) or main processor (MP). This can be a direct connection from the Trident or Tri-GP controller to the PC. or media converter.x or Tri-GP Controller to a TriStation PC on page 426 If you are connecting the Trident 2. see Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection on page 412. hub.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. see the Planning and Installation Guide for Trident v2 Systems. Topics include: • • • Note Connecting the Trident 1. Set the node number of the controller.x MP to a TriStation PC on page 417 Connecting the Trident 1. you must: • • • • Install a network interface card and the TCP/IP protocol on the PC.x or Tri-GP controller to the TriStation PC via serial port. or a connection through a router. and a TriStation PC. To set up the connection. A router or hub is not required if you do not need to connect any additional devices besides the Trident or Tri-GP controller and the PC. This is typically MP A.x MP and the TriStation PC requires the DLC protocol to be installed on the PC. see Configuring the TriStation PC on page 408.x Main Processor TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x controller to the TriStation PC via the CM. DSP1 PASS F T AUL ACTIVE P ASS F LT AU ACTIVE P ASS F AULT ACTIVE DSP2 – + DSP3 MODE DSP4 REM OTE RUN PR R OG AM HALT MODE REM OTE RUN PR R OG AM HA LT MODE REM OTE RUN PR R OG AM HA LT ST ATUS PS1 PS2 S YSTEM ALARM PR R OG AM ALARM OVER TEMPE R ATURE ST ATUS PS1 PS2 SYSTEM ALARM P OG AM ALARM R R OVER TEMPE R ATURE S ATUS T PS1 PS2 SY STEM ALARM PR R OG AM ALARM OVER TEMPE TURE R A LOCK LOCK LOCK C OMMUNIATIONS C IO BUS TX R X TX R X TX R X C OMMUNI CATIONS IO BUS TX R X TX R X T X R X C OMMUNIATIONS C IO BUS T X R X C OMM BUS C OMM BUS T X C OMM BUS R X TX R X SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL LINK TRIS T ATION TX R X LINK TRIS T ATION TX R X LINK TRIS T ATION T X R X 1 MP3101 MP3101 MP3101 TX Figure 34 Connecting the TriStation PC to a Trident 1. or a connection through a hub on a network.x MP to a TriStation PC This procedure explains how to directly connect a TriStation PC to a network port on a Trident 1. as shown in the figure. Attach the other end of the cross-over cable to the network interface card in the PC.Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 417 Connecting the Trident 1. Communication between the Trident 1. Procedure 1 2 Attach one end of the cross-over cable to one of the RJ-45 connectors on the MP Baseplate.9.0 . Topics include: • • • Note Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC on page 417 Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC Using a Hub on page 418 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection on page 419 If you are connecting the Trident 1.x CM to the TriStation PC on page 421.x MP can be used for a network connection to a TriStation PC using the DLC protocol. For more information. This can be a direct connection from the MP to the PC.x MP Baseplate using a 10BaseT cross-over cable. v4. see Connecting the Trident 1. Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC This section explains how a Trident 1. x MP to a TriStation PC Using a Hub This procedure explains how to connect a Trident 1.x Main Processor Using a Hub TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure 1 Attach at least one 10BaseT straight-through cable from an RJ-45 connector on an MP Baseplate to the hub.x MP to a TriStation PC using a 10BaseT straight-through cable and a hub. Note Using more than one cable provides redundancy for the TriStation connection.0 . If you use only one cable during live operation.9. V SP1 V SP2 P ASS F A U LT A CTIVE PASS FAU L T A CTIVE P ASS F A U LT A CTIVE – + ALARM1 MODE ALARM2 REM O TE RUN PROG RAM HA LT MODE REM O TE RUN PROG RAM HA L T MODE REM OTE RUN PROG RAM HA LT ST ATUS PS1 PS2 SY STEM ALARM PROG R AM ALARM OVER TEMPE RATURE STA TUS PS1 PS2 SY STEM ALARM PROG RAM ALARM OVER TEMPE RA TURE S TATUS PS1 PS2 SY STEM ALARM PROG RAM ALARM OVER TEMPE RA TURE L OCK LOCK L OCK C OMMUNI C A TIONS TX IO BUS RX COMMUNI CA TIONS TX IO BUS RX COMMUNI C A TIONS TX IO BUS RX TX COMM BUS RX COMM BUS TX RX COMM BUS TX RX T X SERIAL RX SERIAL TX SERIAL RX TX RX LINK TRIS TA TION TX RX TRIS TA TION LINK TX RX TRIS TA TION LINK TX RX 1 MP3101 MP3101 MP3101 TX C OAX MDI MDIX POWER 16 10BASE-T 9X 8X 1X Figure 35 Connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident 1. v4. you have to unplug it and move it to another RJ-45 connector if the original connection fails. 2 Attach the network interface card in the TriStation PC to the hub using another 10BaseT straight-through cable.418 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting a Trident 1. Middle. and doubleclick Configuration. Enter the index position of the network interface card in the TriStation PC. expand Hardware Allocation. Enter the number specified on the address plug on the MP Baseplate.x only) check box. Enter a name with eight or fewer characters to identify the Trident controller. Property Select Connection Node Number Node Name Main Processor Setup NIC Index Action Select the Main Processor Connection (Trident 1. click TriStation Communication. or Right to specify which MP port is connected to the TriStation PC.x MP connection to a TriStation PC.9. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree.0 . In the MP Setup dialog box. On the Configuration tree. v4. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to the Trident controller. In the Properties dialog box. click the Network Ports tab. and then double-click the Main Processors (MP/IOP1). click Setup. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 4 5 6 On the Configuration tree. Note The data displayed on this screen is used by TriStation 1131 only to connect to a Trident communication port.Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 419 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection This procedure explains how to configure a Trident 1. Specify these properties on the TriStation Communication screen. Select Left. v4.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Middle. Click OK to save your changes. or Right) specify the Transceiver Mode to match the installed hardware.0 .420 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 7 8 For the port that is physically connected to the TriStation PC (Left. x controller to the TriStation PC via the MP. you must use a 10BaseT cable. see the Communication Guide for Trident v1 Systems. For a NET 2 port.x CM to the TriStation PC This section explains how to configure a Trident 1. Procedure 1 2 Attach one end of a cross-over cable to a NET 1 or NET 2 connector on the CM baseplate. Attach the other end of the cross-over cable to the network interface card in the TriStation PC. Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x CM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. as shown in this example.9.x CM to a TriStation PC This procedure explains how to directly connect a Trident v1. you can use either a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX cable.0 .x CM to a TriStation PC using a cross-over cable.x MP to a TriStation PC on page 417. Figure 36 Connecting the TriStation PC Directly to a Trident 1.Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 421 Connecting the Trident 1.x CM connection to the TriStation PC.x CM to a TriStation PC on page 421 Connecting a Trident 1. For a NET 1 port. On the CM baseplate. Topics include: • • • Note Directly Connecting a Trident 1. you can attach the cable to an RJ-45 connector or to a MAU. see Connecting the Trident 1. For information about MAUs.x CM to a TriStation PC Using a Hub on page 422 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection on page 423 If you are connecting the Trident 1. v4. Procedure 1 2 3 Attach one end of a straight-through cable to a NET 1 or NET 2 connector on the CM baseplate. as shown in the example below. v4. For a NET 2 port. On the CM baseplate. see the Communication Guide for Trident v1 Systems. Attach the other end of the straight-through cable to a network hub. you can use either a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX cable.9.x CM to a TriStation PC using a straightthrough cable and a hub.x CM to a TriStation PC Using a Hub This procedure explains how to connect a Trident 1. P ASS F AULT ACTIVE PASS F AULT ACTIVE LOCK LOCK C OMMUNI ATIONS C SERIAL TX RX COMMUNI ATIONS C SERIAL TX R X SERIAL TX RX SERIAL TX R X SERIAL TX RX SERIAL TX R X LINK NET 1 TX RX LINK NET 1 TX R X LINK NET 2 TX R X LINK NET 2 TX R X CM 3201 CM 3201 C OAX MDI MDIX P OWER 8X 1X 16 10BASE-T 9X Figure 37 Connecting the TriStation PC to a Trident 1.x CM Using a Hub TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. you must use a 10BaseT cable. For information about MAUs.422 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting a Trident 1. Connect the TriStation PC to the hub using another straight-through cable.0 . For a NET 1 port. you can attach the cable to an RJ-45 connector or to a MAU. 4 On the Configuration tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Before you begin this procedure. Property Select Connection Node Number Node Name IP Address Action Select the Network Connection check box. See Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses on page 446. Enter a name that contains eight or fewer characters to identify the Trident controller.0 . Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. you also need IP addresses for those devices. you must determine the IP address to use for the CM. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to the Trident controller.x CM connection to a TriStation PC. v4. Specify these properties on the TriStation Communication screen.9. Enter the IP address. If the connection goes through a gateway or a router. you can get the necessary IP addresses from your network administrator or Information Technology department. double-click the CM (COM: CM).Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 423 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection This procedure explains how to configure a Trident 1. On the Configuration tree. Note The data displayed on this screen is used by TriStation 1131 only to connect to a Trident communication port. and double-click Configuration. Enter the number specified on the address plug on the MP baseplate. click TriStation Communication. Typically. select Open Network. Property Slot Selection Mode Action Select Left Slot or Right Slot. Privilege Select Read or Read/Write to specify access privileges for external devices on the network. A TriStation 1131 application must use the Privilege option in conjunction with the MP.424 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 5 In the Properties dialog box. Transceiver Port Select RJ-45 or MAU depending on the type of CM baseplate port to which you have physically attached the TriStation cable. v4.0 . you can select Open Network for either NET 1 or NET 2.REMOTE_WRT_ENBL control attribute (and possibly other write controls) to enable writes by external devices. 6 Specify these properties for the NET 1 or NET 2 port. For the TriStation connection. but not for both ports. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. click Setup. depending on which slot contains the module that is connected to the TriStation PC. depending on which is connected to the TriStation PC.9. For each CM on a baseplate. IP Address If using the default node number. select the appropriate speed from the list.Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 425 Property Transceiver Mode Action Select the Auto mode if the TriStation cable can auto-negotiate to either 10 or 100 megabits per second. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. enter the IP address of the gateway. If using a different node number. Select None. This property does not apply to TriStation communication. IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address Time Synchronization Get the subnet mask from your network administrator. v4. enter the IP address that identifies the controller on the network. do not change this property (leave blank). If the CM connection to the TriStation PC goes through a default gateway. If your cable operates at only one speed. This must be the same address you entered in step 2.0 . 7 Click OK to save your changes.9. v4. If you want to be able to retrieve communication status information from the CM.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC on page 427 Connecting a Trident 2. you must use the default IP address (192. If you will be using the default IP address for the Trident or Tri-GP controller (192.x or Tri-GP controller for the very first time via a network connection. and connect to the controller via the Left MP.0 . you will not be able to view communication status information in the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor.9.168. Topics include: • • • Directly Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Hub on page 428 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection on page 429 CAUTION TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information.x or Tri-GP Controller to a TriStation PC This section explains how to connect the Trident v2. The network ports on the Middle MP. See the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User’s Guide for more information.x or Tri-GP controller to the TriStation PC via a network port on the CM or MP. you must connect the controller to the TriStation PC via a network port on the CM. and CM do not have default IP addresses. Note If the TriStation PC is connected only to the MP.255. Right MP.426 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting the Trident v2. See Connecting to the Trident 2.255. you must configure the IP addresses for these ports based on your network configuration. you must connect the controller to the TriStation PC via a network port on the Left MP.<node>). If you will be connecting to the Trident v2.168.<node>). v4. as shown in this example. DSP1 DSP2 PASS F T AUL ACTIVE P ASS F AULT ACTIVE P ASS F AULT ACTIVE – + DSP3 MODE DSP4 REM OTE RUN PROG AM R HALT MODE REM OTE RUN PROG RAM HA LT MODE REM OTE RUN PROG RAM HA LT ST ATUS PS1 PS2 S YSTEM ALARM PR RAM ALARM OG OVER TEMPE R ATURE STATUS PS1 PS2 SYSTEM ALARM P OG R RAM ALARM OVER TEMPEATURE R S ATUS T PS1 PS2 SY STEM ALARM PROG RAM ALARM OVER TEMPE TURE R A LOCK LOCK LOCK C OMMUNI CATIONS IO BUS TX RX TX RX TX RX COMMUNI CATIONS IO BUS TX R X TX R X T X R X C OMMUNI CATIONS IO BUS T X R X T X R X TX R X C OMM BUS COMM BUS COMM BUS SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL LINK TRIS T ATION TX RX LINK TRIS T ATION TX R X LINK X TRISATION T T R X 1 MP3101 MP3101 MP3101 Figure 38 Connecting the TriStation PC Directly to a Trident 2.Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 427 Directly Connecting a Trident 2. Attach the other end of the cross-over cable to the network interface card in the TriStation PC. you can use either a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX cable.x or Tri-GP MP (left) or CM (right) Using a Hub TX TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. for a NET 1 port. • • On the CM. for a TriStation port.9. On the MP baseplate.x or Tri-GP CM or MP network port to a TriStation PC using a cross-over cable.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC This procedure explains how to directly connect a Trident 2. Procedure 1 2 Attach one end of a cross-over cable to a NET 1 or NET 2 connector on the CM baseplate. or to a TriStation port on the MP baseplate.0 . For a NET 2 port. you must use a 10BaseT cable. you must use a 10BaseT cable. you must use a 10BaseT cable.9. Connect the TriStation PC to the hub using another straight-through cable. for a NET 1 port. On the MP baseplate.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Hub This procedure explains how to connect a Trident 2. as shown in the example below. P ASS F T AUL V SP1 PASS F T AUL ACTIVE ACTIVE V SP2 PASS F AU LT A CTIVE P ASS FAU L T A CTIVE PASS F AU LT A CTIVE – + ALARM1 MODE ALARM2 REM O TE RUN PROG RAM HA LT MODE REM O TE RUN PROG RAM HA L T MODE REM OTE RUN PROG RAM HA LT ST A TUS PS1 PS2 S Y STEM ALARM PROG R AM ALARM OVER TEMPE RA TURE STA TUS PS1 PS2 SY STEM ALARM PROG RAM ALARM OVER TEMPE RA TURE STA TUS PS1 PS2 SY STEM ALARM PROG RAM ALARM OVER TEMPE RA TURE LOCK L OCK LOCK L OCK LOCK C OMMUNI ATIONS C SERIAL TX RX COMMUNI CATIONS SERIAL TX R X C OMMUNI C ATIONS TX IO BUS RX COMMUNI CA TIONS TX IO BUS RX COMMUNI C ATIONS TX IO BUS RX SERIAL TX RX SERIAL TX R X SERIAL TX COMM BUS RX COMM BUS TX RX COMM BUS TX RX TX RX SERIAL TX R X LINK T X SERIAL RX SERIAL RX TX SERIAL RX TX LINK NET 1 TX R X NET 1 TX RX LINK TRIS TA TION TX RX TRIS TA TION LINK TX RX TRIS TA TION LINK TX RX LINK NET 2 TX R X LINK NET 2 TX R X 1 MP3101 MP3101 MP3101 CM 3201 CM 3201 Figure 39 Connecting the TriStation PC to a Trident 2. you can use either a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX cable.0 TX C AX O C OAX MDI MDIX POWER 16 10BASE-T 9X 8X 1X 8X MDI MDIX 1X P OWER 16 10BASE-T 9X .x or Tri-GP MP (left) or CM (right) Using a Hub TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or to a TriStation port on the MP baseplate.x or Tri-GP CM or MP network port to a TriStation PC using a straight-through cable and a hub. For a NET 2 port. for a TriStation port. v4. • • On the CM. Procedure 1 2 3 Attach one end of a straight-through cable to a NET 1 or NET 2 connector on the CM baseplate. you must use a 10BaseT cable.428 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Connecting a Trident 2. Attach the other end of the straight-through cable to a network hub. Before you begin this procedure.9. and double-click Configuration. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . On the Configuration tree. 3 Specify these properties on the TriStation Communication screen. you must determine the IP address to use for the CM or MP. See Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses on page 446. Enter the number specified on the address plug on the MP baseplate. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. v4. you can get the necessary IP addresses from your network administrator or Information Technology department. you also need IP addresses for those devices.x or Tri-GP network connection to a TriStation PC.Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 429 Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection This procedure explains how to configure a Trident 2. Property Select Connection Node Number Node Name Action Select the Network Connection check box. Typically. click TriStation Communication. If the connection goes through a gateway or a router. Enter a name that contains eight or fewer characters to identify the Trident or Tri-GP controller. Note: Your own IP addresses for other MP and CM modules cannot be used for connecting to the controller until the control program—with the IP address configuration—has been downloaded to the controller at least once. The default is 1502. 4 Do one of the following: • • If the TriStation PC is connected to the CM.430 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Property IP Address Action Enter the IP address for the CM or MP network port you will be connecting to. Note The data displayed on this screen is used by TriStation 1131 only to connect to a Trident or Tri-GP communication port.NET 1 • Right CM .9.255. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to the Trident or Tri-GP controller.n.NET 2 The default IP address is 192. and then click Setup. go to step 8. The default IP address is for connection to the Left MP only. To use the default IP address. v4. double-click CM. Each node has seven connection options: • Left MP • Middle MP • Right MP • Left CM . This must be the same value as the TriStation UDP Port Number property in the CM Setup dialog box. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. select the IP address for the node you are configuring. 5 On the Configuration tree.NET 2 • Right CM .x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information. If the TriStation PC is connected to the MP. where n is the node number of the controller.168.x or Tri-GP controller with a CM installed.NET 1 • Left CM . click the browse button. See Connecting to the Trident 2. TriStation UDP Port Number Specify the UDP port to use for the connection to a Trident 2. Required only for a connection to a Trident v2.0 . expand Hardware Allocation. go to step 5. using the Download All Command. and in the dialog box that appears.x or Tri-GP node with a CM installed. expand Hardware Allocation. In the MP Setup dialog box. leave blank.0 . specify these properties for the NET 1 or NET 2 port.9. leave blank. Otherwise. On the Configuration tree.Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 431 6 On the Network tab of the CM Setup dialog box. and then double-click the Main Processors (MP/IOP1). click Setup. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property Slot Selection Action Select Left Slot or Right Slot. enter the IP address of the gateway. Default Gateway IP Address If the CM connection to the TriStation PC goes through a default gateway. If not. enter the IP address that identifies the controller on the network. v4. If using a default IP address. Installed IP Address 7 8 9 10 Go to step 13. depending on which slot contains the module that is connected to the TriStation PC. This must be the same IP address entered on the TriStation Communication screen. In the Properties dialog box. depending on which is connected to the TriStation PC. get the subnet mask from your network administrator. Select this property for all installed modules. IP Subnet Mask If using a default IP Subnet Mask. click the Network Ports tab. or Right) specify the Transceiver Mode to match the installed hardware. Click OK to save your changes. v4. This must be the same IP address entered on the TriStation Communication screen in step 3.9. Middle.0 . Specify the IP address for the port. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.432 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 11 12 13 For the port that is physically connected to the TriStation PC (Left. 9. See the following for additional information: • Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection on page 412 Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection on page 416 2 • 3 Under Default Connection. select one of the following: • • • Network Connection Main Processor (for Trident 1. Procedure 1 Expand the Configuration tree. Verify that the Network Connection Setup (for a network connection). The connection setting—Network. or Main Processor Connection—is an initial setting and can be changed when you use the Connect command. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. which appears when you establish communication between a TriStation PC and a controller.x or Tri-GP only) The next time you establish communication between the TriStation PC and the Trident or Tri-GP. Serial. Main Processor Connection Setup (for a MP connection). the default connection setting you selected will be used. Note If only one connection type is selected under Select Connections. the default connection is automatically set based on it.0 .Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type 433 Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type This procedure explains how to specify the default connection setting in the Connect To dialog box. double-click Configuration.x only) Serial Connection (for Trident 2. or TriStation PC (for a serial connection) properties are correctly configured. and cannot be changed. and then click TriStation Communication. depending on your network structure.168. Access to information provided in applications such as SOE Recorder or DDE Server that use the TSAA protocol.255.1.0 applies an access list entry to any client on the same subnet as the IP address identified in the entry.0. To disable write access by TSAA clients. Depending on your configuration.434 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Controlling Access to the Trident 2. For example.0 . A network address mask of 255. You can control access for a single IP address (one client). if you want two clients with IP addresses of 192. Access to any other applications that use the TSAA protocol.168.x or Tri-GP Communication Module (CM) gives you the ability to control who can access CM resources through the module’s network ports. and each user’s level of access.x or Tri-GP CM The Trident 2. they must be physically separated in a sub-network. this may create a security issue.255.255 restricts an access list entry so that it applies only to the specific IP address identified in the entry.x and the network address mask to 255.1.9. Access to Trident or Tri-GP diagnostic information via the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor. v4. CAUTION How Is Access Controlled? Access is controlled via client IP addresses.255.134 and 192. you can group them in the access list by setting the IP address for a single entry as 192.1. If you want to group clients into a single access list entry.255. By default. A network address mask of 255. and there are no other clients on the same subnet. Examples of these resources include: • • • • Access to the controller via TriStation 1131 (ability to perform a Download Changes or Download All).255. Topics include: • • • • What Are CM Resources? on page 434 How Is Access Controlled? on page 434 What Are Access Levels? on page 435 Configuring the Access Control List on page 437 What Are CM Resources? A resource is any service or information provided by the CM through the supported communications protocols.65 to share the same access permissions.255. TSAA clients have write access to the NET 1 and NET 2 ports on Trident 2.168. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or for a group of IP addresses (a group of clients). you must enable and configure the CM access control list.x or Tri-GP CMs. and a network address mask must be used to group them in the access list. Other network address masks may also be used. Allows client to view information provided by the CM. they will all have the same access rights. Read/Write: Full access. Individual user access should be controlled via workstation security. • Access levels are configured by adding entries to the access control list. For example. and allows you to make further changes to the application running on the controller. and view information provided via the CM. Access levels apply to all users using the PC assigned the IP address entered in the access control list. every user using TriStation 1131 on a PC with a particular IP address would have the same access rights to the CM. Read Only: Allows client to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP.x or Tri-GP CM 435 For each IP address or group of IP addresses. The same access level is applied to all selected protocols in a single access control list entry. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. CAUTION Once you enable CM client access control by selecting the Enable Access List check box. v4. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection on page 412. This means if multiple users are using the same PC.0 . If you are using the serial and/or Modbus TCP protocols. you can also use the Port Write Enabled property to manage read/write access to specific ports.Controlling Access to the Trident 2. Does not allow the client to change any settings or perform certain commands. See Port Write Enabled on page 581. change settings. you must configure at least one client with TriStation Read/Write access before you can save the configuration.9. Note If you are using the TSAA and/or TriStation protocols. What Are Access Levels? There are three levels of access: • • Deny Access: Prevents all access to resources provided by the CM. A maximum of 10 entries can be provided in the access list. you can also connect via a TriStation serial connection to reconfigure the access control list. Connections to the Trident are not allowed. you will need to create two separate entries in the access control list. one for each protocol. CM access is controlled only at the IP address level. If you want to provide different access levels for a selected client depending on which protocol they are using. This ensures you will be able to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP again after your next download. including changes to the CM access control list. you must enable and use access list control to manage read/write access to specific ports. and perform all commands (including Download Changes or Download All for TriStation 1131). you can set the access level. and the network ports the client can use to access the CM. If necessary. the protocols the client can use to access the CM. 1.12 Subnet Mask 255.05 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the CM using the TSAA protocol on NET 2 would be granted Read Only access.12 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the CM using the TSAA protocol on NET 1 would be granted Read Only access.255.0 TriStation Read Only 6 192. b.1.168.0. b A client with an IP address of 192.1.1.168.255.0. entry 4 specifically denies access to a client with the IP address of 192.0 NULL 0.255.05.1.168.0 TriStation TSAA NET 2 Read/Write 8 9 0.09 255.05 255.168. Access is denied for all IP addresses not included in entries 1–7.0 Protocol TriStation Network NET 2 Access Level Read/Write Resulting Access Control Scenario A client with an IP address of 206.255.x or Tri-GP CM. Table 37 Entry 1 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. A client with an IP address of 206.168.1.168.255.255. v4.255.255.0. A client with an IP address of 192.255.1.0 TSAA NET 2 Read Only 7 192.216.05 255. so the CM will deny access and not evaluate the list any further.1. the CM will deny access.168. If a client with the specific IP address of 192.1.216.9. This is because the CM evaluates the access control list beginning from the top.168.a A client with an IP address of 192.12 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the CM using the TriStation protocol on NET 2 would be granted Read/Write access. .1.1.0 TSAA NET 1 Read Only 3 192. so the CM will deny access and not evaluate the list any further.0 NULL All NULL All NULL Deny Access NULL a. A client with an IP address of 192.255. using any protocol on NET 1 or NET 2.168.168.168.09 255.216. A client with an IP address of 192.1.05 attempts to access the CM using the TriStation protocol on NET 2.168.168. None Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 2 206.255.05.255.05 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the CM using TriStation on NET 2 would be granted Read Only access.216.255.1.1.05 attempting to access the CM using the TriStation protocol on NET 1 or NET 2 would be denied access. If a client with the specific IP address of 192.09 attempting to access the CM using TSAA on NET 1 or NET 2 would be denied access. and continuing through the list until it encounters an entry that applies to the IP address requesting access. the CM will deny access. with the access control scenarios that would result if enabled on a Trident v2.1.1.0 436 Chapter 6 Sample Trident v2.255 TSAA Deny Access 5 192.168.255.Sample Access Control List and Resulting Access Control The following table is a sample access control list. entry 3 specifically denies access to a client with the IP address of 192. In this case.09 (or any client on the same subnet) attempting to access the CM using TriStation or TSAA on NET 2 would be granted Read/Write access.05 255.1. In this case.255 TriStation NET 1 NET 2 NET 1 NET 2 NET 2 Deny Access 4 192.05 attempts to access the CM using the TSAA protocol on NET 2.1.0.x or Tri-GP CM Access Control List IP Address 206.12 255. x systems. The CM Setup dialog box appears. Once you have enabled access control and configured the access control list. all existing connections will remain connected. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. The CM evaluates the access control list from top (Entry 1) to bottom (Entry 10). Note After a Download Changes or Download All has been performed so that access control on the CM is enabled. If no match is found.Controlling Access to the Trident 2. even if the client’s access has been changed to Read Only or Deny Access. Click the Access List tab. When configuring the access control list. you must perform a Download Changes for the access control to take effect. the CM automatically denies all access. The new access levels will not take effect until the client disconnects and attempts to reconnect. This does not apply to Trident 1.x or Tri-GP CM 437 Configuring the Access Control List This section describes how to enable access control on the CM and configure the access control list for your selected clients. Double-click the CM. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and the least specific are at the bottom.0 . and then click Setup in the Item Properties dialog box.9. The last entry in the list should be used to define the access level for unspecified clients. double-click Configuration. take care to organize your entries so that the most specific are at the top. and expand Hardware Allocation. The first match that the CM makes (between the client’s network parameters and those listed in an access control list entry) determines which entry is used to authorize or deny access. v4. Click on the entry for the client you want to configure or change.0 . unconfigured state. enter the IP address for the subnet. 5 6 Click Update Client Entry to save the settings for the selected client. click Copy Current Setup to Other Slot. you should create identical access control lists for the modules in both slots. so that you can create a single entry in the access control list for all IP addresses on the subnet. you should not set this property to Read/Write. do one of the following: • • In most cases. 8 Click OK to save your changes. Permission Click the level of access to the CM you want to provide for the selected client. Note If necessary. Can be used in conjunction with the Client IP Subnet Mask property to create groups of IP addresses with the same access levels. restrict.255. Protocol Network Select the protocol(s) that the selected client can use to access the CM. Specify the IP address of the client that you want to allow.255.438 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 4 Specify these properties.9. In most cases. The default is cleared. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each client to be included in the access control list. Client IP Subnet Mask This property allows you to group IP addresses. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. To configured different access control lists for the modules in the right and left slots. If the application includes safety-critical outputs. or deny access to the CM. 7 If a CM is installed in the right slot. If cleared. v4. click Reset Client Entry to reset the settings for the selected client to the default. unconfigured state. Enable Access List Command Client Access List Client IP Address Click to enable access control for this CM. you should configure identical access control lists for the modules in both slots.0. Property Slot Selection Action Select the slot where the CM module you want to configure an access control list for is installed. access control will be disabled and all users can access CM resources. The default is 255. Select the network(s) on which the selected client can access the CM. If needed. Click Reset All to reset all entries in the access control list to the default. To do so. repeat steps 4 through 6 for the module installed in the right slot. You can minimize this problem by limiting the amount of printer output. which means they are not executed every scan. Devices for Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing At a minimum. If the Trident or Tri-GP system includes numerous controllers or is connected to a DCS. A sample alarm message might include the name of an analog input point. For more information. status. When you set the scan time in TriStation 1131. If the scan time is not long enough.Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing 439 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing A Trident or Tri-GP controller can print brief ASCII text messages if a communication port is connected to a printer and the TriStation 1131 application includes standard print function blocks. the print function blocks are subject to conditional execution. Topics include: • • • • • • Effect of Printing on Scan Time on page 439 Devices for Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing on page 439 Directly Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices on page 440 Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices Using a Hub on page 441 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Printing Devices on page 442 About Function Blocks for Printing on page 445 Effect of Printing on Scan Time Each time a message is printed. and maintenance.0 . and a statement that the value is out of range. Print messages are typically used for alarms. the printing devices you can use with a Trident or Tri-GP controller are an HP JetDirect®-compatible print server and a line printer for ASCII text. make sure it includes the execution time for all conditional statements in the application. the print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application are executed and the scan time increases. see the SOE Recorder User’s Guide. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. You can also use a router or a hub. the execution of all conditional statements (when the conditions are True) could result in scan-time overruns. v4. its time stamp and value. Typically. configure these devices in the TriStation 1131 project. An alternative is to use a PC event logger such as the Triconex SOE Recorder.9. Print Server and Cables A print server that is connected to a Trident or Tri-GP CM must use the HP JetDirect print protocol and operate at speeds of 10 or 100 megabits per second. alarms are typically displayed on an operator workstation. To print from a Trident or Tri-GP controller. you must connect a CM network port to a print server that is connected to a printer. and use print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application. Standard communication cables are suitable for this connection. 9. • • HP JetDirect Ex Plus HP JetDirect 500X Series. You can use standard communication cables for these connections. Connect the printer to the print server. You do not need the printer drivers that came with the packages. You must purchase print servers elsewhere because Invensys does not supply them. model J3265A Printers You must select a printer that is compatible with your print server. so a Centronics-compatible printer is adequate. and run the diagnostic routines if available. install them on the TriStation PC.440 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 You can purchase communication cables from other manufacturers. see the Communication Guide for Trident Systems. Invensys has tested these Hewlett-Packard print servers and can recommend them. v4. Trident or Tri-GP Controller Centronics-Compatible Printer Standard Printer Cable HP JetDirect-Compatible Print Server Ethernet Cross-Over Cable Figure 40 Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to a Printer and Print Server TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. which does not include formatting or graphics. Directly Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices This procedure explains how to directly connect a Trident or Tri-GP CM to an HP JetDirectcompatible print server and printer. Follow the instructions. Laser printers are also suitable. For more information. Procedure 1 2 3 If the print server and printer packages have installation programs. Black-box cables and HewlettPackard® print servers are examples of dependable network printing devices.0 . The Trident or Tri-GP controller prints ASCII text only. and connect the print server to a CM Ethernet port (NET 1 or NET 2). Follow the instructions that came with the packages.9.Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing 441 Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices Using a Hub This procedure explains how to connect a Trident or Tri-GP CM to an HP JetDirect-compatible print server and printer by using a hub. if available. Procedure 1 2 3 If the print server and printer packages have installation programs. Connect the printer to the print server. and connect the print server to a hub. You do not need to install the printer drivers that may have come with the print server and printer packages. Connect the hub to a CM Ethernet port (NET 1 or NET 2). and run the diagnostic routines. Trident or Tri-GP Controller Centronics-Compatible Printer Standard Printer Cable Ethernet Cable HP JetDirect-Compatible Print Server Ethernet Cable Ethernet Hub COAX MDI MDIX POWER 16 10BASE-T 9X 8X 1X Other Network Connections Figure 41 Connecting the Trident or Tri-GP CM to a Print Server and Printer Using a Hub TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . You can use standard communication cables for these connections. copy the programs to the TriStation PC. v4. Property Slot Selection Mode Action Select Left Slot or Right Slot depending on where the CM is installed on the baseplate. see Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318. and then click Setup.x Controllers on page 442 Procedure for Trident 2. and double-click Configuration. expand Hardware Allocation. Network port configuration options differ depending on the target system version configured for the project.x or Tri-GP Controllers on page 443 For more information about the target system version.0 . whichever is connected to the printer. double-click CM (COM: CM). Use the procedure that applies to your Trident or Tri-GP system version: • • Procedure for Trident 1.9. For the NET 1 or NET 2 port. On the Configuration tree. select the Open Network mode. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Procedure for Trident 1.x Controllers 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. 3 Specify these properties on the CM Setup Network tab.442 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Printing Devices These procedures explain how to configure a Trident or Tri-GP CM port that is connected to a print server and printer. v4. and then click Setup in the Item Properties dialog box. 6 Click OK to save the configuration.x or Tri-GP Controllers 1 2 In TriStation. and expand Hardware Allocation. Property Not Configured or Configured Printer Number Line Width Action Select Configured for the slot in which the CM is installed. Double-click the CM. If the print server is not on the same subnet as the controller. Procedure for Trident 2. Enter a number from 1 to 10. The CM Setup dialog box appears. based on the manufacturer’s specifications. TCP Port Number IP Address Enter the TCP/IP Port number that was defined by the manufacturer of the print server. This must be the same number that is declared for the PRINTER parameter in print function blocks. double-click Configuration. open your project.Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing 443 4 Click the Printer tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Enter the 32-bit IP address of the print server on the network. expand the Controller tree.0 . The most typical line widths are 80 characters and 132 characters.9. you must specify the destination address on the Routing tab of the CM Setup dialog box. 5 Specify these properties on the CM Setup Printer tab. Enter the maximum printable line width for your printer. 444 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 3 Click the Printer tab. 4 Specify these properties for the module installed in the Left Slot. Property Printer Number Action Enter the number for the printer; can only be 5 or 10. Both slots cannot have the same printer number. The default is 0, meaning a printer is not configured. This must be the same number that is declared for the PRINTER parameter in print function blocks. Line Width TCP Port Number Network IP Address Enter the number of characters to be printed on a line. The valid range is 80–132 characters. The default is 80 characters. Enter the number of the TCP port for the print server. The default is 9100 for an HP printer. Click the network that the print server is connected to. The default is NET 2. Enter the IP address of the print server. 5 6 If a module is also installed in the Right Slot, repeat step 4 for that module. Click OK to save the configuration. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing 445 About Function Blocks for Printing A TriStation 1131 application must use print function blocks to send messages to a printer. Each print function block has a PRINTER parameter which specifies the port number where the printer cable is connected. • • • For the Trident 1.x controller, the valid range is 1 through 10. For the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP controller, the PRINTER parameter must be 5 or 10. The Left and Right CM ports cannot have the same PRINTER parameter. The PRINTER parameter must be the same number as is defined in TriStation 1131. Each time a message is printed, the print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application are executed and the scan time increases. This table lists the print function blocks in the Trident/Tri-GP library. Print Function Block PRINT_BOOL PRINT_CDT PRINT_CRLF PRINT_CTOD PRINT_DINT PRINT_REAL PRINT_STRING PRINTR_FLUSH Purpose Prints a three-character field containing either Off or On. Prints the current date and time. Prints a new line (carriage return and line feed). Prints the current time of day. Prints a DINT value. Prints a REAL value. Prints a string of text. Clears the print buffer. See the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference for more detailed information about the print function blocks. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 446 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses When communication between a TriStation PC and a Trident or Tri-GP controller occurs over a network, the IP address of the controller must be specified on the communication module. If the controller is not part of a larger network, it may be possible to use the default IP address set when the TriStation 1131 project is downloaded (assuming the correct node number and default IP address are specified in the project). Note The Trident 2.x or Tri-GP default IP address applies to the Left MP only. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information. If you cannot use a default address, there are other ways to set an IP address on a network. All begin with asking the network administrator for the intended IP addresses. The easiest way is to use a Reverse ARP (RARP) server that has been programmed in advance with the intended addresses. Other ways include temporary connection of the TriStation PC to a non-Ethernet module during downloading. All the procedures for setting the IP address are based on the assumption that the controller includes at least one communication module with an Ethernet port connected to a network. To use the procedures, you should know how to: • • • Connect the Trident or Tri-GP controller to a network Connect the TriStation PC to the controller Configure the TriStation 1131 project with the node number of the controller and the IP address For more information, see the Communication Guide for Trident Systems. Note Typically, Triconex controllers are located on their own subnet which is connected to a larger network such as a DCS. Your network administrator can set up the subnet for compatibility with the Triconex default IP addresses and can program any routers that lie between the DCS and the Triconex subnet with addressing information about the Triconex controllers. Topics include: • • • • • • • Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication on page 447 Setting an IP Address Using a RARP Server on page 448 Setting a Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Address Using an MP Connection on page 449 Setting a Trident 1.x Controller IP Address Using a CM Connection on page 450 Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM Default Gateway on page 451 Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Network Routing on page 452 Testing a Network Connection on page 452 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses 447 Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication This procedure explains how to use the default IP address for network communication between a controller and a TriStation PC. Note If you have a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, the default IP address applies only to the Left MP network port. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information. Procedure 1 Do one of the following, depending on your Trident or Tri-GP system version: • • 2 3 Connect the Trident 1.x controller to the network using the NET 1 or NET 2 port on the CM. Connect the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller to the network using the Left MP network port. Power up the controller. Do one of the following, depending on your Trident or Tri-GP system version: • • • Connect the TriStation PC to the network (Trident 1.x, Trident 2.x, or Tri-GP) Connect the TriStation PC directly to an Ethernet port on the CM using a cross-over cable (Trident 1.x) Connect the TriStation PC to the Left MP network port using a cross-over cable (Trident 2.x or Tri-GP) 4 5 In the TriStation 1131 project, expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration, and then click TriStation Communication. On the TriStation Communication screen, verify the IP Address is: • • • 192.168.1.1 (Trident 1.x CM NET 1) 192.168.2.2 (Trident 1.x CM NET 2) 192.168.255.n, where n is the node number of the controller (Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Left MP) If the Trident 1.x controller includes two communication modules, the default address applies to both modules. Note 6 7 The Left CM and Right CM use the same 48-bit physical MAC address and cannot be connected to the same network. On the Controller tree, click Configuration. Expand Hardware Allocation, and then do one of the following: • (Trident 1.x) Click the slot where the communication module is installed, and then click Setup. If a communication module is not installed, insert a communication module, and then click Setup. (Trident 2.x or Tri-GP) Double-click the MP, click Setup, and then click the Network Ports tab. • TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 448 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 8 In the Setup dialog box, enter the same IP address specified on the TriStation Communication screen. If the Trident 1.x controller includes a redundant communication module, enter the same IP address for the other slot. 9 10 11 12 13 On the Controller tree, click the Controller Panel. From the Commands menu, click Connect. Wait about 40 seconds for the module to reset and become active. When the module is active, the Active indicator is green. On the Commands menu, click Download All to download the TriStation 1131 project to the controller. On the TriStation PC, from the Start menu, click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. Type the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP address of 206.32.216.43, enter this: ping 206.32.216.43 If the network connection is made, the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out. Note If you receive a Request timed out reply, check your network cable and port connections to verify they are securely connected, verify your configuration settings are correct, and then retry the ping command. Setting an IP Address Using a RARP Server This procedure explains how to set the IP address of a communication module using a RARP server on the local network. To use this procedure, the network administrator must program the RARP server with the intended IP address for the controller. If this is not possible, use another method to set the IP address. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Give the network administrator the MAC address, which is: 40-00-00-00-x-03 (where x is the Trident or Tri-GP controller node number). Ask the network administrator for the IP address that is to be used for the controller. Connect the controller to the network through a network port on the communication module. Power up the controller. During initialization, the communication module sends a request to the RARP server for an IP address that has been mapped to its own 48-bit MAC address. Note 5 The Left CM and Right CM use the same 48-bit physical MAC address and cannot be connected to the same network. On the TriStation PC, from the Start menu, click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses 449 6 Enter the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP address of 206.32.216.43, enter this: ping 206.32.216.43 If the network connection is made, the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out. Note If you receive a Request timed out reply, check your network cable and port connections to verify they are securely connected, verify your configuration settings are correct, and then retry the ping command. 7 8 9 10 11 Connect the TriStation PC to the network, or directly to a network port on the CM. In the TriStation 1131 project, expand the Controller tree, click Configuration, and then click TriStation Communication. On the TriStation Communication screen, specify the Node Number of the controller and the intended IP address. On the Commands menu, click Connect. Wait until the connection is made. On the Commands menu, click Download All to download the TriStation 1131 project to the controller. Setting a Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Address Using an MP Connection This procedure explains how to set the IP address of the Trident or Tri-GP controller by initially connecting the TriStation PC to an MP port and downloading the TriStation 1131 project. After the address is set, you can disconnect the TriStation PC from the MP port, and reconnect it to a network port on the CM. Note If you have a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, the default IP address applies only to the Left MP network port. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Ask the network administrator for the IP address to be used for the controller. Connect the TriStation PC to a TriStation port on the MP Baseplate. Connect the controller to the network through a network port on the CM. In the TriStation 1131 project, configure the following: • • • 5 6 7 The MP and CM ports The node name and node number of the controller The intended IP address Power up the controller. On the Controller tree, click Controller Panel. On the Command menu, click Connect To. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 450 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 8 9 On the Connect To screen, click Main Processor Module Port and Left, Middle, or Right for the MP port to which the TriStation cable is connected. After connecting to the controller, download the TriStation 1131 project. The CM initializes (resets) and accepts the IP address you specified in the TriStation 1131 project. 10 11 On the TriStation PC, from the Start menu, click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. Enter the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP address of 206.32.216.43, enter this: ping 206.32.216.43 If the network connection is made, the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out. 12 If the IP address is set, you can disconnect the TriStation PC from the MP port, and connect it to a network port on the CM or to the network. Setting a Trident 1.x Controller IP Address Using a CM Connection This procedure explains how to set the IP address for a Trident 1.x CM by temporarily configuring a default IP address for the CM, and assigning a default IP address to the TriStation PC. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Ask the network administrator for the IP address to be used for the CM. Connect the Trident controller to the network using a network port (NET 1 or NET 2) on the CM. Connect the TriStation PC to a network port on the CM, using a direct or network connection. On the TriStation PC, use Windows procedures to set the IP address of the PC to either of the following: • • 5 6 7 8 9 192.168.1.x if the PC is physically connected to a NET 1 port, where x is any unused host number. 192.168.2.x if the PC is physically connected to a NET 2 port, where x is any unused host number. Wait for the TriStation PC to reset. Open the TriStation 1131 project. Expand the Configuration tree, click Configuration, and then click TriStation Communication. Specify the node name, node number, and the default IP address of the controller. Use the Network tab on the CM Setup screen to specify the intended IP address for the Ethernet port that is connected to the network. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses 451 10 11 12 13 14 Power up the Trident controller. On the Controller tree, click Controller Panel. On the Command menu, click Connect To. On the Connect To screen, click the Serial Port option and the COM port to which the TriStation cable is connected. Verify that Communication Module Port is selected and the default IP address is displayed. Connect to the controller and download the TriStation 1131 project. Wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, TriStation 1131 displays the message, Connection failed. The default IP address you specified in the node definition is invalid, and the intended IP address of the CM is set. 15 16 17 On the TriStation PC, use Windows procedures to set the IP address of the PC to its actual address on the network. On the TriStation PC, from the Start menu, click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. Enter the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP address of 206.32.216.43, enter this: ping 206.32.216.43 If the network connection is made, the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out. 18 19 20 In the TriStation 1131 project, change the default IP address to the newly set IP address of the TriStation Communication screen. Use the Controller Panel to reconnect the TriStation 1131 project to the controller. After the IP address is set on the network, you must reconfigure the IP address in the TriStation 1131 project, and assign a valid IP address to the TriStation PC. Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM Default Gateway This procedure explains how to set the address of a default gateway for a controller that must communicate with devices on another network. A default gateway is a router that forwards all messages not addressed to stations within the local subnet. Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Expand the Controller tree and double-click Configuration. On the Configuration tree, click Hardware Allocation to display the modules that are configured for this system. Double-click the CM icon to open the Properties dialog box, and click Setup to display the configuration options for the CM. On the Network tab, select Left Slot or Right Slot depending on which CM you are configuring. Do one of the following: TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 452 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 • • 6 7 If you have a Trident 1.x controller, for NET 1 or NET 2 (depending on which one is connected the network), select Open Network from the list under Mode. If you have a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, go to the next step. In Default Gateway IP Address, enter the IP address of the default gateway that is connected to the local subnet. Click OK to save your changes. Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Network Routing This procedure explains how to specify routes to destinations outside the local network for controllers that do not have access to a default gateway. Each route must include an IP address for the destination, a subnet mask, and a gateway address. Procedure 1 2 3 4 Expand the Controller tree and double-click Configuration. On the Configuration tree, click Hardware Allocation to display the modules that are configured for this system. Double-click the CM icon to open the Properties dialog box, and click Setup to display the configuration options for the CM. Do one of the following: • For a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, click the Routing tab. For each route you need to specify, enter an IP address in Destination IP Address, Destination IP Subnet Mask, and Destination Gateway IP Address, and then click Update Destination. For a Trident 1.x controller, click the Routing tab and enter an IP address under Destination Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address for each route that you need to specify. • 5 Click OK to save your changes. Testing a Network Connection This procedure explains how to test a connection from a CM to a network by using the ping command from an MS-DOS command prompt. The test is performed on the TriStation PC. Before doing the test, you must have set the IP address of the communication module on the network. Procedure 1 2 On the TriStation PC, from the Start menu, click the MS-DOS Command Prompt. Type the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP address of 206.32.216.43, enter this: ping 206.32.216.43 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses 453 If the network connection is made, the reply includes the IP address followed by byte and time information. If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 454 Chapter 6 Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 7 Implementation Overview 456 Controlling the Operational Mode 458 Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing 459 Controller Testing 460 Maintenance 469 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 456 Chapter 7 Implementation Overview This figure shows the main steps for implementing an application, which is the last step in a TriStation 1131 project. Set Up the Project Develop the Application Test with the Emulator Fix Errors Yes Errors? No C onfigure the C ontroller Set Up TriStation C ommunication - Test application on emulator Implement on the C ontroller - Test application on offline system - C ommission the application - Maintain the application TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Overview 457 Implementation Steps This list includes steps for testing and maintaining an application. Step See • Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing on page 459 • The Triconex Emulator User’s Guide. • Downloading to the Controller on page 460 • Monitoring Variables on the Controller on page 463 • Monitoring the Program Execution on page 464 • Adding Annotation for Variables on page 465 • Displaying Hardware Allocation Exceptions on page 468   Test on the Emulator Test on the controller  Maintain an application • Steps for Downloading Changes on page 470 • Planning and Controlling Changes on page 471 • Commands Required with Application Changes on page 472 • Disabling Points on page 474 • Using the Download Changes Command on page 478 • Using the Download All Command on page 480 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 and halts the application. the keyswitch must be set to PROGRAM. and external devices. • For Tricon controllers. Also allows writes to program variables by Modbus masters and external devices. • For Tricon controllers. the keyswitch must be set to PROGRAM. Attempts to write to program variables by TriStation 1131. • For Trident and Tri-GP controllers. and write access. Stop mode is recommended for installation and service of process-related equipment.0 . the keyswitch must be set to RUN and the Run command used. Although the functionality is the same for Tricon. Trident.) TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the method of executing the mode may be different. the Stop command must be used. verification.9. (This is the default setting. (This is the default setting. • For Tricon controllers. Retentive outputs return to the value they had before the Stop was issued. the Run command must be used and the Set Programming Mode option must be set to Disable Programming Control Operations.458 Chapter 7 Implementation Controlling the Operational Mode This section describes the operational modes available on a controller. but is not required for service of the controller. • For Trident and Tri-GP controllers. see the GATDIS and GATENB function blocks in the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference. or external devices are rejected. however. • For Trident and Tri-GP controllers. the keyswitch must be set to STOP. Remote Controller runs the downloaded application and allows writes to program variables by TriStation 1131. v4. the Set Programming Mode option must be set to Enable Programming and Control Operations. forces non-retentive digital and analog outputs to zero. Download All and Download Changes by TriStation 1131 are not allowed. Modbus masters. Table 38 Mode Run Tricon. • For Tricon controllers. This table describes the mode and method.) Halt Controller stops running the application and retains the values of tagnames. • For Trident and Tri-GP controllers. Modbus masters. Allows Download All and Download Changes commands from TriStation 1131. Stop Controller stops reading inputs. • For Tricon controllers. Trident. and Tri-GP Controller Operational Modes Description Controller runs the downloaded application with read-only capability. the Halt command is used. Program Controller allows application loading. the Set Programming Mode option must be set to Enable Programming and Control Operations. and Tri-GP controllers. • For Trident and Tri-GP controllers. For more information. an application may call gated access functions to enable external writes during a designated window of time. the Halt command or the SYS_APP_HALT function can be used. you can emulate the following Triconex controller modules. including system state transitions Disabling of points Download Changes and Download All commands For detailed information and instructions for testing your application using the Triconex Emulator. Using the Emulator. and TriStation 1131 application features: • • • • • • • • • • Tricon Communication Module (TCM) Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module (CM) TSAA protocol communication. Trident. communication modes.9. Using the Emulator. because the Emulator is a separate application from TriStation 1131. you can test your applications in an offline environment. see the Triconex Emulator User’s Guide. v4. or Tri-GP controller. you can update it at any time without having to re-install TriStation 1131. execute. without exposing your online processes to potential application errors. however. and response Modbus TCP Master and Slave communication Peer-to-Peer communication over UDP Process alarm function blocks System status function blocks for MP and I/O modules. The latest version of the Emulator is installed with TriStation 1131. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . and test TriStation 1131 applications without connecting to a Tricon. You access the Emulator via the Emulator Control Panel in TriStation 1131. or available from the Invensys Global Customer Support web site. data generation. and multicasting (DDE clients only) Sequence of Events (SOE) blocks. included on the TriStation 1131 CD. including support for DDE and SOE clients.Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing 459 Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing The Triconex Emulator is software that allows you to emulate. The logical hardware configuration in TriStation 1131 must be completed and must match the physical configuration. This procedure can be used for testing when the controller is connected to simulation field devices or the control process is offline. and double-click the Controller Panel. A best practice is to rebuild the application before downloading it. does not apply to v1. you must connect either via a serial connection or via the Left MP.x or Tri-GP controller to download your application.x systems). which is usually done when the controller is physically connected to field instruments either in a test facility that simulates the system (Factory Acceptance Test). you will be unable to connect to the controller. expand the Configuration tree.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more information. Procedure 1 Open the Controller workspace. For instructions on changing the target system version in your project. or Tri-GP controller you are trying to connect to.x only. Note If the target system version configured for the project does not match the system version of the Tricon. The target system version specified in the project must be the same as the system version of your controller.9. see Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318. Trident (v2.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. See Connecting to the Trident 2.460 Chapter 7 Implementation Controller Testing This section explains how to test on the controller. Topics include: • • • • • • Downloading to the Controller on page 460 Monitoring Variables on the Controller on page 463 Monitoring the Program Execution on page 464 Adding Annotation for Variables on page 465 Determining the Scan Surplus on page 466 Displaying Hardware Allocation Exceptions on page 468 Downloading to the Controller This procedure explains how to use the Download All command to load an application to the controller. v4. or at the site while the control process is offline (Site Acceptance Test). CAUTION The first time you connect to the Trident 2. using the default IP address. This procedure can also be used to run the application when the control process is online. DWLD. ensure the keyswitch is turned to PROGRAM. a backup file of the project is automatically created with the major version. in version 3.0 .) . change the connection setting and click OK. click Run Do one of the following: • For Tricon controllers. For example. the major or minor downloaded version of your project is incremented. and then click Disable Programming and Control Operations. 6 7 To start the application. Changes to the Project’s Downloaded Version After the download to the controller is complete. click Download All If the download is successful. (To view this setting. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. EXCOUNTR_333_1_4120e077. If needed. Do one of the following: • • For Tricon controllers. v4. its download state. ensure the mode is Enable Programming and Control Operations.Controller Testing 461 2 On the Commands menu. Note See the Triconex Emulator User’s Guide for detailed information about the impact of downloading to the Emulator on the project’s version. click Set Programming Mode. see Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type on page 385 or Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type on page 433. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. 5 On the Commands menu. • Changes to the Project Version and State After Downloading to the Controller Downloading to the controller changes the project’s downloaded version and. time stamp. set the mode to Run and disable Download commands by doing this: On the Commands menu. click Connect . minor version. turn the keyswitch to RUN (to start the program on the controller) or to REMOTE (to start the program and allow external devices to write to tagnames or aliases). This is the default setting. For more information. (For example. The Connect To screen shows the default communication setting. This is the factory setting. and then click Enable Programming and Control Operations. and the extension DWLD. click Set Programming Mode.) TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. this file can be restored by using the Restore Project To Last Download Command on page 594. . If needed. on the Commands menu. the major version is 3 and the minor version is 7.7. if a Download All was performed. 3 4 Enter the connection password if required. 9. but has been downloaded to the Emulator. A Download Changes operation increments the minor version. but not the downloaded version for the controller.7. Project version changes made due to download operations can be viewed in the Project History dialog box. Project Version Rules The project’s downloaded version is different for the Emulator and the controller. v4.pt2) downloaded to the controller. all rules that pertain to projects in the Download Changes state will apply (see Commands Required with Application Changes on page 472).0 . — The EmulatorCount value is incremented sequentially after either a Download All or a Download Changes to the Emulator. The version is provided in the format major.12. See View Project History Command on page 640. • The controller downloaded project version is the last version of the project file (. Thus. the major version is 3. the download state of the project is changed to the Download Changes state. in version 3. Note Performing a download to the Emulator changes the downloaded version for the Emulator.x. Note Using the Change State to Download All command will change the download state for both the controller AND the Emulator to Download All. However.minor version is the same as the last controller downloaded project version. the Download Changes command will not be enabled for the Emulator until you have performed a Download All of the project on the Emulator at least once. in version 3.462 Chapter 7 Implementation • • A Download All operation increments the major version. the major version is 3 and the minor version is 7). it has no impact on the project’s ability to be downloaded to the Emulator. When the controller is in the Download Changes state.0. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. but can still be downloaded to the Emulator using the Download Changes command.minor (for example. See Change State to Download All Command on page 492. but it does not change the project’s download state. • Changes to the Project Download State After a Download All to the controller is complete.7. it is possible that a project is in the Download All state for the controller. — The major.minor. will have a project version of 0. and resets the minor version to 0. the minor version is 7.EmulatorCount (for example. The version is provided in the format major. The Emulator downloaded project version is the last version of the project file (. A project that has not yet been downloaded to the controller. The project state displayed in the Status Bar applies only to the controller. Downloading a project to the Emulator changes the project’s downloaded version (by incrementing the EmulatorCount value). and the EmulatorCount is 12).pt2) downloaded to the Emulator. where x is the EmulatorCount value. click Run Note or Single Step . Modbus Master and Peer-to-Peer behavior can be unpredictable when Single Step is applied. 4 To enable or disable a variable. the application executes for one scan only. When you click Single Step. you may occasionally see a question mark (?) instead of the variable’s actual value. CAUTION Procedure 1 2 3 Monitoring and disabling variables should only be done if the controller is not connected to a live system or if maintenance is being performed. The question mark appears only when TriStation does not know the actual value of the variable. Drag the function blocks and variables you want to monitor to the sheet. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. as needed. While monitoring variables on the controller. when you’ve scrolled down the variables list. double-click the variable and click Enable or Disable. This can occur in situations when the list of variables is being updated (for example. As a result.0 . 5 Note Continue testing. or resized the sheet view) and TriStation 1131 doesn’t have enough communications bandwidth to display all the new values in one scan.Controller Testing 463 Monitoring Variables on the Controller This procedure explains how to monitor and enable or disable variables while the application is running on the controller. v4.9. On the Commands menu. This is normal and should resolve itself within the next few scans. To connect and download an application. see Downloading to the Controller on page 460 and Monitoring the Program Execution on page 464. Click Display Program Document .464 Chapter 7 Implementation Monitoring the Program Execution This procedure explains how to display the program execution. To view the program execution.9. On the controller tree. click Run Note When you click Single Step. As a result. Modbus Master and Peer-to-Peer behavior can be unpredictable when Single Step is applied. and click the program you want to test. Procedure 1 2 3 4 To connect and download an application. .0 . expand Programs. which shows the program executing on the controller. see Downloading to the Controller on page 460. or Single Step . click Disconnect False Value in Green Figure 42 Sample Program Running on the Controller TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. True Value in Red 5 To quit running the program. v4. the program executes for one scan only. You can also enter text with the macros.Controller Testing 465 Adding Annotation for Variables This procedure explains how to add an annotation to a variable. 7 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. drag variables to be tested onto the sheet. The annotation can include text and macros. and select the Annotate check box on the Variable tab. 5 6 Click the Macros button to change the macro identified with the annotation. Continue testing. click the macro name and press Ctrl+C.9. v4. click in the Annotation area. To paste the macro. and press Ctrl+V. as needed. If needed. 4 Click the Annotation tab. see Downloading to the Controller on page 460. which allows you to specify information displayed while the program is executing. To copy a macro. Double-click a variable. Procedure 1 2 3 To connect and download an application.0 . close the Edit Macros dialog box. The actual scan time will always be equal to or greater than the requested scan time. the scan time should be set to 220 milliseconds. which means the scan time should be 500 milliseconds. there is a negative scan surplus of 50 milliseconds. Positive Scan Surplus A positive scan surplus means the application executes in less time than the requested scan time. see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User’s Guide. the scan surplus is positive. • If the surplus is negative. When actual time is more than the requested time. if the requested scan time is 150 milliseconds. For more information. • • If the surplus is 20 milliseconds or 10 percent of the actual scan time. the scan surplus is negative. In this example. For example.466 Chapter 7 Implementation Determining the Scan Surplus This section explains how to determine the scan surplus. including the Requested Scan Time. a burner management system has a PST of 1 second. the scan time could be set to 130 milliseconds. Actual Scan Time. If the surplus is greater than 20 milliseconds or 10 percent of the actual scan time. decrease the number for the scan time. For more information. if the requested scan time is 150 milliseconds. increase the number for the requested scan time by the negative amount plus 20 milliseconds. the Actual Scan Time displayed in the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor will always appear as the same as the Requested Scan Time. which means the scan time setting can be decreased. and Scan Surplus for an application. v4. there is a positive scan surplus of 50 milliseconds. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. which means the scan time should be increased to ensure that communication errors do not occur. and the actual scan time is 100 milliseconds. see Setting the Scan Time for a Downloaded Application on page 467. you should use the value displayed for the Scan Surplus to determine if you can reduce your requested scan time. The scan time for an application should be half the PST. and the actual scan time is 200 milliseconds. do nothing. Process Safety Time Requirements You should determine the Process Safety Time (PST) required by the application. which indicates whether the actual scan time required to execute the application uses less time or more time than the requested scan time in the project. For example. • • When the actual time is equal to the requested time.0 . The PST is the period of time during which the process could shift from a safe operating condition to a dangerous condition.9. Note Negative Scan Surplus A negative scan surplus means the actual scan time is greater than the requested scan time. The Triconex Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (sold separately) displays information to determine scan surplus. In this example. In this case. For example. Even when the actual scan time is less than the requested scan time. For more information.0 . the range is 10 to 450 milliseconds. Procedure 1 2 On the Controller tree. v4.Controller Testing 467 Setting the Scan Time for a Downloaded Application This procedure explains how to set the scan time for a downloaded application running in the controller. the range is 20 to 450 milliseconds. You can view the I/O poll time on the System Overview screen in the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (sold separately). you must set the scan time on the Implementation screen. click Set Scan Time. 4 Click OK to save your changes. For more information. double-click the Controller Panel and download the application. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. To change the requested scan time in the project. see Determining the Scan Surplus on page 466. On the Commands menu. Note To guarantee that the controller provides a deterministic response time. 3 Specify this property on the Set Scan Time screen. the range is 20 to 500 milliseconds. see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User’s Guide. The number must be in the minimum to maximum range. • For Trident or Tri-GP. • For Tricon 3006/3007.9. Property Enter the scan time in milliseconds Action Enter the number of milliseconds for the scan time used while the application is running in the controller. • For Tricon 3008. This is the Trident or Tri-GP screen. If you need a faster scan time than the low end of the range. This setting does not affect the requested scan time for the project. you must redesign the application or the process.) This should be done if the scan time set in the project is less than the actual scan time required to run the application. (The Emulator does not provide real-time information on scan time. This is the Tricon 3008 screen. the scan time should always be set to a value greater than the I/O poll time (the maximum time needed by the controller to obtain data from the input modules). The minimum must be equal to or larger than the poll times. If the logical and physical configurations do not match. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . This error must be fixed by changing the hardware configuration in the project.9. • The controller contains a module that is not included in the hardware configuration. The application can be downloaded. which means the module specified in the hardware configuration for the project is different from the module in the physical system. the Hardware Allocation Exception dialog box appears. Procedure 1 Download an application to the controller. v4. Identifier Asterisk (*) Description A red asterisk identifies a module mismatch.468 Chapter 7 Implementation Displaying Hardware Allocation Exceptions This procedure explains how to display hardware allocation exceptions. which indicate that the hardware configuration in the project does not match the physical hardware configuration. Empty slot An empty slot error indicates either of these: • The hardware configuration specifies a module that is empty in the controller. Other differences may allow you to download the application. 2 Differences identified with an asterisk must be fixed in the project before the application can be download. v4.0 .Maintenance 469 Maintenance This section explains how to plan and manage changes to an application running on a controller attached to a live system. WARNING Topics include: • • • • • • • Changing a safety-critical application that is running on a controller should be avoided because an error in the application could cause a trip or unpredictable behavior.9. Steps for Downloading Changes on page 470 Planning and Controlling Changes on page 471 Commands Required with Application Changes on page 472 Disabling Points on page 474 Forcing Points on page 477 Using the Download Changes Command on page 478 Using the Download All Command on page 480 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Test on the Emulator. Ensure the scan time has a surplus Download the changed application. v4. • Using the Download All Command on page 480  Backup the project and copy it to another storage medium.     • Compare Project to the Last Downloaded Command on page 497 • Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing on page 459 • Determining the Scan Surplus on page 466 • Using the Download Changes Command on page 478.0 . • See the Hardware Module Configuration report.470 Chapter 7 Implementation Steps for Downloading Changes This list includes steps for making changes to an application running on a controller. Compare the current project with the last downloaded. • Backup Project Command on page 487 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • Commands Required with Application Changes on page 472. Step See • Verifying the TriStation 1131 Installation on page 9 • Planning and Controlling Changes on page 471. the scan time is doubled for one scan immediately following the command. Determine whether a Download All or Download Changes is required. See Generating Reports on page 80. For example. Review the hardware configuration. WARNING • For a safety-critical application running on a live system. correct the hardware configuration to match the physical configuration. If needed.     Verify the TriStation 1131 software is correctly installed. if the normal scan time is 100 ms. the scan following a Download Changes would be 200 ms.9. Plan for the change. • When a Download Changes command is issued. you must use extreme caution because a configuration error in the changed application could cause unpredictable behavior or a trip. and should comply with strict control procedures.Maintenance 471 Planning and Controlling Changes This section describes recommended procedures for planning and controlling changes to an existing application. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. including those related to design. then obtain approval for the specification from the board. Archive two copies of the .pt2 (project) file and all associated documentation. When approved by the board. Recommended Procedure 1 2 3 4 Generate a change request defining all changes to the application and the reasons for the changes. If the applications do not match. See Verify Last Download to the Controller Command on page 637. or maintenance documentation. operation. Print all user documents and thoroughly check all changed networks in each document to ensure the changes do not affect other parts of the application. contact Invensys support. Verify the application in the controller matches the last downloaded application. Make the appropriate changes to the application. All changes to an application should be controlled by a change control board or the equivalent. download the changes to the controller. Save the downloaded application and back up the appropriate files on a CD or other storage medium. Print the Hardware Module Configuration report to compare the current configuration with the last one downloaded to the controller.0 . including a test specification. Develop a specification for changes.9. then obtain approval for the changes from the board. Test the new application on the Emulator and write a test report. Review and audit all changes and the test results with the board. Download All: Required if a function or function block is modified or deleted. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Node Number Number of Send or Receive function blocks Operating Parameters Download All: Required if the address plug and node number configuration are changed. This table identifies whether a Download All or Download Changes command is required. or the type is changed. Restart on Power-Up (Trident or Tri-GP only). a program cannot be deleted unless the state is changed to Download All (see Change State to Download All Command on page 492). updated. and there is sufficient memory allocated for the points. Download Changes: Allowed. and Use Local Time. Download Changes: Allowed if a program is added to an application and there is sufficient memory. Download Changes: Allowed if these properties are changed: Disable Remote Changes to Outputs. but not advised.0 .472 Chapter 7 Implementation Commands Required with Application Changes After an application is downloaded to a controller or the Emulator. For example. Download Changes: Allowed. Download All: Required if the library (or selected library elements) being added. or deleted does not change function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller. but only if the library (or selected library elements. Download All: Required if the number of send or receive function blocks is increased or decreased. Download Changes: Allowed if a module is added and the chassis has empty slots. Table 39 Component Chassis Functions and function blocks IP Address Library elements Commands Required with Changes Command Required Download All: Required if a chassis is added. Download All: Required if modules are deleted or moved in the configuration. deleted. Download All: Required if the Allow Disabling of Points property is changed. v4. it is either disabled or a message advises you to change the state or cancel the change. if the IP address of a communication module is changed. updated. or deleted changes function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller. Download Changes: Allowed if a function or function block is added. for partial changes) being added. the state is set to accept changes to the project which are allowed with the Download Changes command. If a change requires the Download All command. Password Required for Connection.9. Scan Time. Memory allocation Modules Download All: Required if memory allocation is increased. Programs Download All: Required if a program is deleted from an application. these changes will re-initialize the point to its configured initial value. Download Changes: Allowed if you are changing the target system version while converting a project created in a version of TriStation 1131 prior to v4.9. but not advised. Points must be enabled. Allowed. Download Changes: Allowed if changes to the Data Type does not require additional memory allocation.6. Download All: Required if the target system version is changed (upgrade or downgrade).0 . Also allowed if the variable Name. unless you are converting a project created in a version of TriStation 1131 prior to v4. Target System Version Variables Download All: Required if changes to the Data Type or Alias Type require additional memory allocation. if changes are made to the Point Type. or Alias Number of a memory variable. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Points must be enabled. or Initial Value is added or changed. Tagnames can also be disconnected or connected to different points. or deleted. v4. or 0 if no initial value is defined. if there is enough memory allocated for the required point types. Alias Type. Description.Maintenance 473 Table 39 Component Tagnames Commands Required with Changes (continued) Command Required Download Changes: Allowed if tagnames are added.6. modified. If desired. See the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference for more information about these function blocks. For Tricon v10. the application cannot write to it. however. To view information about when a point was disabled—and who disabled it—from the Project menu. once the point is configured as an input.9. v4. the Allow Disabling of Points property must be selected on the Operating Parameters screen. you can force the point to a specific value (see Forcing Points on page 477). Additionally. Points that are disabled in the program running on the Emulator will NOT also be disabled in the application that is currently running on (or will be downloaded to) the controller. the alarm state for disabled points is also changed to TRUE in the TR_SHUTDOWN (Tricon) or SYS_SHUTDOWN (Trident or Tri-GP) function block. (The application cannot write to it by definition. field instruments cannot write to it. a maximum of 64 points can be disabled at any one time. For Tricon v9. a maximum of 256 points can be disabled. or in RUN mode with gate access). In order to disable points from TriStation 1131.x controllers. select View Project History. When you disable one or more points. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.) can still write directly into the disabled point if the point is: — A memory read/write aliased tagname and the controller is write-accessible (the keyswitch is in PROGRAM or REMOTE mode. If the point is a memory point. inputs from field instruments or the application running on the controller do not change the value of the point. disabled points are not recorded and are cleared after a power cycle.0 . the application cannot write to it.x controllers. See Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249 or Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters on page 315 for more information. Note Disabling points on the controller is completely separate from disabling points on the Emulator. External hosts (Modbus Masters. Once a point is disabled: • • • • • If the point is a physical input.474 Chapter 7 Implementation Disabling Points This section explains how to disable points (tagnames) on an application running on a controller. Disabling points is typically used when field instruments need to be replaced or repaired. There is no maximum to the number of points that can be disabled for Trident or Tri-GP controllers. — An output point and the “Disable Remote Changes to Outputs” property on the Operating Parameters screen is not selected. which should be used with care. etc. the number of disabled points output parameter (POINTS_DISABLED) in the TR_PROGRAM_STATUS (Tricon) or SYS_MP_EXT_STATUS (Trident or Tri-GP) function block is updated. The value in the point when it was disabled is held. When a point is disabled. The disabling (and subsequent re-enabling) of points is saved to the TriStation 1131 Project History.) If the point is a physical output. and then click OK. and enter the connection password if required. Topics include: • • • Disabling Points on the Controller on page 475 Viewing Disabled Points on page 476 Re-enabling Disabled Points on page 476 Disabling Points on the Controller This procedure describes how to disable points in a program running on the controller. You will be prompted to enter a comment only if the corresponding option was selected in the Project Options dialog box. and click Disable. • Enabling the Allow Disabling of Points property can increase the scan time.9. If prompted. such as initial testing or maintenance.0 . 3 4 Double-click a point to be disabled. The comment will be placed in the project history. click the Connect command. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. regardless of whether any points are actually disabled. Points are automatically re-enabled if you perform a Download All. v4. Disabled points are retained if you perform a Download Changes operation. See Specifying Forced Points Options on page 40. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all desired points have been disabled. and click Controller Panel. On the Commands menu. Note Entering a comment is optional. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Configuration tree. • Disabling points can increase the scan time.Maintenance 475 WARNING • A project should not contain disabled points unless there is a specific reason for disabling them. you will be unable to connect to the controller. See Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318. enter a comment (using 100 char caters or less) that describes why this point was disabled. Only one point can be disabled at a time. Note If the target system version configured for the project does not match the system version of the controller you are trying to connect to. . Re-enabling Disabled Points Note Points that have been disabled can be re-enabled individually or all at once. select the points you want to enable. All points that are currently disabled on the controller are re-enabled. select List Disabled Points. enter a comment (using 100 char caters or less) that describes why this point was re-enabled.9. and Modbus alias. If desired. select Enable All Disabled Points. To enable points individually: 1 2 3 Click Run to execute the application on the controller. Note Entering a comment is optional. The comment will be placed in the project history. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . Procedure 1 2 3 Click Run to execute the application on the controller. Double-click the point to be enabled. 4 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all desired points have been enabled. location. You will be prompted to enter a comment only if the corresponding option was selected in the Project Options dialog box. and then click OK. See Specifying Forced Points Options on page 40. When asked to confirm the operation. v4. From the Commands menu. and then click OK. including each point’s tagname. click Yes.476 Chapter 7 Implementation Viewing Disabled Points You can view a list of all disabled points on the controller. If prompted. and click Enable. The application must be running on the controller in order to view the list of disabled points. To enable all disabled points at once: 1 2 3 Click Run to execute the application on the controller. You can also enable points from the List of Disabled Points dialog box. See Viewing Disabled Points on page 476. From the Commands menu. Individual points in the list can be selected and enabled. Maintenance 477 Forcing Points This section explains how to force points (tagnames) on an application running on a controller, which should be used with care. Forcing a point is the act of putting a value into a point that has been disabled. When a point is disabled, inputs from field instruments or the application running on the controller do not change the value of the point. Once you have disabled a point, you can then force the point to a specific value by entering that value in the point’s Tagname Properties dialog box. Disabling and forcing points is typically used during maintenance operations, when field instruments need to be replaced or repaired. For example, a digital output point drives a solenoid/valve, which is normally energized during operation. When the solenoid requires maintenance, the digital output point is disabled and then forced to the OFF state. This allows maintenance personnel to safely disconnect the field device and perform the required maintenance function. Points can also be disabled and forced during factory or site acceptance testing (FAT/SAT), when input conditions are set by disabling and forcing the input points because the field devices have not yet been wired and connected to the controller. If a portion of your process is offline, some points may remain in the disabled/forced state for a long period of time. Note Forcing points on the controller is completely separate from forcing points on the Emulator. Points that are forced to a value in the program running on the Emulator will NOT also be forced to the same value in the application that is currently running on (or will be downloaded to) the controller. Forced points are saved to the TriStation 1131 Project History. To view information about when a point was forced, the value it was forced to, and the user who forced the value, from the Project menu, select View Project History. This procedure describes how to force points in a program running on the controller. Procedure 1 2 3 Disable the point as described in Disabling Points on page 474. Double-click the point to be forced, opening the Item Properties dialog box for the point. In the Set Value field, enter the value you want to force the point to use, and click Confirm. Only one point can be forced at a time. 4 If prompted, enter a comment (using 100 char caters or less) that describes why this point was forced, and then click OK. The comment will be placed in the project history. Note Entering a comment is optional. You will be prompted to enter a comment only if the corresponding option was selected in the Project Options dialog box. See Specifying Forced Points Options on page 40. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 478 Chapter 7 Implementation Using the Download Changes Command This procedure explains how to use the Download Changes command to download changes to an application that has been downloaded and is running on a controller. For information on changes that are allowed with this command, see Download Changes Command on page 518. These warnings should be reviewed before proceeding. WARNING • Changing a safety-critical application that is running on a controller should be avoided because an error in the application could cause a trip or unpredictable behavior. • If the application has a negative Scan Surplus, do not use the Download Changes command because it could cause a trip or unpredictable behavior. • When a Download Changes command is issued, the scan time is doubled for one scan immediately following the command. • If a memory variable’s Point Type, Alias Type, or Alias Number is changed, using the Download Changes command re-initializes the variable to its configured initial value, or 0 if no initial value is defined. • If the IP Address is changed, the Fault indicator on the communication module turns on during the reset, which temporarily compromises the TMR status of the controller. • If an I/O module is added, the TMR status of the controller is temporarily compromised for as much as 8 to 16 scans. For more information, see Adding an I/O Module below. • If the AI module type for models 3703 or 3704 is changed, the TMR status of the controller is temporarily compromised for as much as 8 to 16 scans. • If the DO module type for models 3611, 3613, 3614, 3615, or 3617 is changed, the TMR status of the controller is temporarily compromised for as much as 8 to 16 scans. • If in doubt about the effect of this command, contact Technical Support. Adding an I/O Module If the application uses the following function blocks, the changed application should include logic to accommodate the behavior. • • For Tricon controllers, the IOMAIN and IOBAD parameters of the TR_MP_STATUS function block turn off. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the parameters for the SYS_IO_STATUS, SYS_IOP_STATUS, and SYS_SYSTEM_STATUS function blocks turn off. For more information, see the Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP Safety Considerations Guide. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 Maintenance 479 Procedure 1 2 Expand the Configuration tree, and double-click the Controller Panel. On the Commands menu, click Connect required. Note , and enter the connection password if If the target system version configured for the project does not match the system version of the Tricon, Trident (v2.x only; does not apply to v1.x systems), or Tri-GP controller you are trying to connect to, you will be unable to connect to the controller. See Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318. . 3 On the Commands menu, click Download Changes If the download is successful, a backup file of the project is automatically created with the major version, minor version, time stamp, and the extension DWLD. For example, EXCOUNTR_333_1_4120e077.DWLD. If needed, this file can be restored by using the Restore Project To Last Download Command on page 594. The changes are made while the application is running. If the download failed, review the error messages on both the Controller and Application tabs to determine the source of the failure. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 480 Chapter 7 Implementation Using the Download All Command This procedure explains how to use the Download All command to download a changed application to a controller. For information on changes that require this command, see Download All Command on page 517. See Changes to the Project Version and State After Downloading to the Controller on page 461 for information on the impact of performing a Download All operation on a controller. WARNING Procedure 1 2 Using the Download All command requires the current application running on the controller to be halted. Expand the Configuration tree, and double-click the Controller Panel. On the Commands menu, click Connect Note . If the target system version configured for the project does not match the system version of the Tricon, Trident (v2.x only; does not apply to v1.x systems), or Tri-GP controller you are trying to connect to, you will be unable to connect to the controller. See Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318. 3 4 5 6 7 8 If needed, change the connection setting. Click OK. If required, enter the connection password. If needed, change the state to Download All. On the Commands menu, click Change State to Download All. Click Halt to stop the application. For Tricon controllers, turn the keyswitch to PROGRAM. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, ensure the mode is Enable Programming and Control Operations, by doing this: On the Commands menu, click Set Programming Mode, and then click Enable Programming and Control Operations. (This is the default setting.) 9 Click Download All . If the download is successful, a backup file of the project is automatically created with the major version, minor version, time stamp, and the extension DWLD. For example, EXCOUNTR_333_1_4120e077.DWLD. If needed, this file can be restored by using the Restore Project To Last Download Command on page 594. If the download failed, review the error messages on both the Controller and Application tabs to determine the source of the failure. 10 11 Click Run to start the application running on the controller. For Tricon controllers, turn the keyswitch to RUN. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 A Commands and Properties This appendix provides descriptions of TriStation 1131 commands and properties. Add File Command The Add File command adds a custom Help file to the TriStation 1131 Help menu. A maximum of 32 customized HTML Help files (.chm) may be added to the TriStation 1131 Help menu. Applies To Application Location Help menu > Options > Add or Remove Custom Help Files Add Program to Execution List Command The Add Program to Execution List command places the cursor inside the Program Execution List box, which allows you to enter or select a program to be added to the list. Applies To Application Location Application tree > Implementation > Edit menu Alias Number The Alias Number property identifies the range of five-digit alias numbers that can be assigned to the point. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the alias number can be set within a default range or within a larger allowable range. This table identifies Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP controller alias ranges. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 482 Appendix A Commands and Properties Table 40 Data Type BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL DINT DINT REAL REAL DINT DINT REAL Alias Number Information Variable Type Output Memory Input Memory Input Memory Input Memory Output Memory Memory Message Type Read/Write Read/Write Read Read Read Read Read Read Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write Tricon Range 00001 - 02000 02001 - 04000 10001 - 12000 12001 - 14000 30001 - 31000 31001 - 32000 32001 - 32120 33001 - 34000 40001 - 40250 40251 - 41000 41001 - 42000 Trident/ Tri-GP Default Range 00001 - 04999 05000 - 09999 10001 - 14999 15000 - 19999 30001 - 32499 32500 - 34999 35000 - 37499 37500 - 39999 40000 - 42499 42500 - 44999 45000 - 49999 Trident/ Tri-GP Allowable Range 00001 - 09999 00001 - 09999 10001 - 19999 10001 - 19999 30001 - 39999 30001 - 39999 30001 - 39999 30001 - 39999 40001 - 49999 40001 - 49999 40001 - 49999 Bin Size 2048 2016 4096 2016 1024a 1000 120 1000 512 750 1000 Bin 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 a. For Tricon controllers only: While this bin size is 1024 points, only 1000 points are available to be aliased. The remaining 24 points will be unaliased, because the alias range reserved for DINT input points is 30001 through 31000. For more information about how alias numbers are assigned, see Assigning an Alias Number, Alias Type, and Physical Address on page 174. Applies To Communication Location Application tree > Tagnames > Item Properties > Point Assignment tab Alias Type The Alias Type property identifies whether the memory point has an alias number and whether the point is read or read/write. Settings include: • • • Unaliased: Means the point cannot be read or written to. Read aliased: Means the point can be read by an external device. If specified, you can accept the default alias, or enter a number for the alias. Read/write aliased: Means the point can be read or written by an external device. If specified, you can accept the default alias, or enter a number for the alias. Applies To Communication TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 483 Location Application tree > Tagnames > Item Properties > Point Assignment tab Alignment The Alignment property specifies how the text for an annotation or comment is aligned in the comment box; either left, center, or right. The default is left. Applies To Comments Locations • • Item Properties > Comment tab Project menu > Project Options > Annotations tab Allow Disabling of Points The Allow Disabling of Points property specifies whether points can be disabled from the TriStation PC. A TriStation PC cannot write to disabled points, however, external devices such as Modbus masters can write to disabled points unless you disable external device writes. This property can be changed only when your project is in the Download All state. The default is cleared, which means points cannot be disabled from the TriStation PC. Once you have changed this property (by selecting or clearing the check box), you must perform a Download All to apply your changes to the controller. TriStation 1131 will automatically rebuild the application before it is downloaded. See Building or Rebuilding an Application on page 241 and Using the Download All Command on page 480. Applies To Memory and Output Points Locations • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > MP Setup > Operating Parameters tab Allow Partial Changes to Libraries The Allow Partial Changes to Libraries property specifies whether you can make changes to selected elements in an existing library without having to add, update, or delete the entire library. Partial library changes are defined as: • • • Adding individual elements to an existing library. Updating individual elements in an existing library. Deleting individual elements from an existing library. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9.0 484 Appendix A Commands and Properties All partial changes must be compatible with the other elements in the library. Applies To Libraries Locations • • Application tree > right-click Library Documents > Manage command Project menu > Library > Manage command Annotate The Annotate property specifies whether to add an annotation, which is similar to a comment, to a variable. If selected, an annotation box is attached to the bottom of an input, output, input/output, or local variable. You can change the size of the annotation box. An annotation can include any of the following: • • • • • The monitor value (value of the variable as the configuration executes) The default macro for the particular type of variable Other standard macros User-modified macros Text that you type in The default is cleared, which means an annotation is not included. If Annotate is cleared, no properties are available to view when the application is run on the controller or Emulator. Applies To Variables Location Item Properties > Constant tab Annotation on by Default The Annotation on by Default property specifies whether to automatically add annotation boxes to variables used with a program or function block. Annotations allow you to include information that is displayed at the bottom of an input, output, input/output, or local variable. If you enable annotation for the project, the annotation display is automatically added to all the variables in the project. The default is cleared, which means annotation is not automatically added. Applies To Variables TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 485 Location Project menu > Project Options > Annotations tab Append Sheet Command The Append Sheet command adds a new logic sheet after the sheet currently being viewed. You must enter a title for the new sheet before it will be added. Applies To Logic sheets Location Sheets menu Application Type The Application Type property determines whether an application element (program, function, function block, or tagname) is used with safety, control, or safety and control applications. The default is Control. Table 41 Setting Safety Application Types Description An application that is designed to take a process to a safe state when predetermined conditions are violated. Also referred to as an Emergency Shutdown System (ESD), Safety Instrumented System (SIS), and Safety Interlock System. Applies to programs and tagnames. An application that controls a process. Cannot be used in Safety programs. Applies to programs, functions, function blocks, and tagnames. An application that includes a mixture of safety and control components. Applies to functions and function blocks. Control Safety or Control Applies To Programs, Functions, Function Blocks, and Tagnames Locations • • Item Properties > Application tab Declarations > Application tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9.0 486 Appendix A Commands and Properties Apply Command The Apply command allows you to save and apply changes you have entered. For example, if you enter an initial value of 2 for a BOOL tagname and click Apply, a message indicates that the value and data type are not compatible. Applies To Validation of application elements Location Item Properties > Constants or Point Assignment tab Auto Indent Command The Auto Indent Command toggles to allow you to use automatic indentation or set your own indentation in Structured Text code. Applies To ST programs and functions Location Auto Indent button, or View menu Auto Name Command The Auto Name command names more than one variable or constant according to a pattern that you specify. You can specify a name, starting value, and incremental value. You can also specify the order in which to apply the names to the selected elements. Properties include: • • • Formatted Name on page 537 Start Value and Increment on page 618 Name Order on page 566 Applies To Variables Locations • • Auto Name button, or Tools menu Item Properties > Constants or Selected tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 487 Auto Scroll Delay The Auto Scroll Delay property specifies how many milliseconds to delay scrolling while scrolling through the Structured Text. Applies To ST Language Location View menu > Set Editor Options Backup Project Command The Backup Project command saves a copy of the open project elements and settings, and creates a backup file named <project_name>.bt2. Procedure 1 2 3 On the File menu, click Backup Project. Specify the folder to save the file to. Use the suggested name or specify a new one. The file extension (.bt2) does not have to be included in the name. Click Save. Applies To Project Location File menu Base Address For Tricon controllers, the Base Address property specifies the block address for the Tricon HIM based on the Data Hiway memory map. Must be an integer between 5 and 31; the default is 5. Applies To Tricon HIM Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > HIM Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9.0 488 Appendix A Commands and Properties Baud Rate The Baud Rate property specifies the data transmission speed. Settings include: • • • • For Tricon EICM: 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, or 1200. For Tricon TCM: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, or 1200. For Trident 1.x CM: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 2400, or 1200. For Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, or 1200. The default is 9600. Applies To Tricon EICM, Tricon TCM, Trident MP, Trident CM, Tri-GP CM Locations • • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP or CM Setup > Serial Ports tab Block Collection See SOE Block Collection Mode on page 612 and SOE Block Collection Type on page 613. Block Type See SOE Block Type on page 614. Border The Border property specifies whether to include a border around an annotation or comment box. The border property can be specified for the project, or for individual annotations and comments. Options include None, Single, and Double. The default is Single. Applies To Annotations, Comments TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 489 Locations • • Item Properties > Comment tab Project menu > Project Options > Annotations tab Build Application Command The Build Application command builds an application by compiling programs in the execution list that have been modified since the last time they were compiled. The command then links the object code, library routines, and configuration elements to create an executable application. Each successive time you use the Build Application command, it compiles and links only documents and items that have changed since the last build. After using the Build Application command several times, you should use the Rebuild Application command. A rebuild compiles and links all documents and items in the application, not just the ones that have changed since the last build. Applies To Application Location Build Application button, or Project menu Category The Category property specifies a name for a category that can be associated with documents (programs, functions, function blocks, and data types). By adding a category name, you can sort elements by type. Applies To Documents Location Right-click a document > Document Properties > Summary tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9.0 490 Appendix A Commands and Properties Cause Effect Matrix Support The Cause Effect Matrix Support properties specify whether and how a function or function block can be used in a CEM program. For user-defined functions, function blocks, and data types, you can specify the setting. (For TriStation 1131 Library elements, the setting cannot be changed.) Settings include: • • • • Supports use in cause rows with ... inputs Supports use in effect columns with ... outputs Supports use in intersections Supports application defined states The default is cleared for all options. Applies To Functions and function blocks used in CEM programs Location Application tree > right-click a function or function block > click Attributes tab Cause Header Functions On by Default The Cause Header Functions On by Default property specifies whether an input and function column are automatically included in the cause header when a CEM program is created. The default is cleared. Applies To CEM programs Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > CEM Editor tab CEM Monitor Colors The CEM Monitor Colors property specifies the colors to display for cause, effect, and intersection cells in a CEM program. These colors are used when the application is run on the controller or Emulator. The default for True is red. The default for False is white. Applies To CEM programs Location Project menu > Project Options > Monitor Colors tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide, v4.9.0 For information on specifying initial properties. Properties include: • • • • • Enable Cause Header Functions on page 524 Enable Effect Header Functions on page 526 Enable Intersection Functions on page 527 Enable Floating Text in Intersection Cells on page 526 Evaluation Options on page 531 Applies To CEM programs Location Open a CEM program > click the Document menu > click Options Change Colors Command The Change Colors command displays a color palette that allows colors to be used when an element is displayed on a logic sheet.491 CEM Editor Options The CEM Editor Options properties specify the initial settings used when a CEM program is created. see Specifying CEM Element Options on page 148.0 . Properties include: • • • • • Cause Header Functions On by Default on page 490 Effect Header Functions On by Default on page 522 Intersection Functions On by Default on page 548 Default Number of Cause Rows on page 507 Default Number of Effect Columns on page 508 Applies To CEM programs Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > CEM Editor tab CEM Element Options The CEM Element Options properties specify the settings for a specific CEM program. Settings on individual CEM programs can be changed by setting the CEM Element Options on page 491. Applies To Project elements TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9. the owner of a document is the user who created it. This command is only available after an application has been downloaded to the controller or the Emulator. If the project is opened in a newer version of TriStation 1131.492 Appendix A Commands and Properties Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > Drawing Colors tab Change Owner Command The Change Owner command allows you to change the owner of a document. This command also sets the downloaded version for the controller and the Emulator to the same version number. Once the state has been changed to Download All. this dialog box may be displayed to indicate that changes. Normally. Using this command changes the download state for both the controller AND the Emulator to Download All. such as adding new libraries. Downloaded application Location Project menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. WARNING Applies To The Download All command should not be used if the application on the controller is running on a live system. Before changing the state. you cannot perform a Download Changes command until a Download All has been completed. You cannot reverse this command.9. If needed. v4. will require a Download All. you may want to make a backup copy of the application so that you can use it if you decide that a Download All command is not needed. See Downloaded Version on page 519. whichever of the two was greater. the system should be taken offline while the download is done. Applies To Programs and functions Location Right-click an element > Item Properties > Change Owner Change State to Download All Command The Change State to Download All command changes the download state of the project so that the Download All command can be used when the application is downloaded.0 . action. or Trident 1. Applies To Project Location Project menu Client IP Address The Client IP Address property specifies the IP address of the client that you want to allow.493 Choose Another Tagname Command The Choose Another Tagname command allows you to select a tagname and specify a different tagname to replace it. Can be used in conjunction with the Client IP Subnet Mask property to create groups of IP addresses with the same access levels.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Access List tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Each item includes the date. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Access List tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Access List tab Trident 2. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs). all occurrences are changed to the specified name. user.0 . or Trident 2. element.9.x CMs. Applies To Tagnames in FBD editor Location FBD editor > right-click a tagname in the Tagname Declarations tree Clear History Command The Clear History command deletes the history of actions. restrict. If there is more than one occurrence of the selected tagname. which is a listing of all changes made to a project. and comment for the change. or deny access to the TCM.x or Tri-GP CM. Also see IP Address on page 550. Trident 2.x CM/Tri-GP CM Client Access Protocols Description Stands for Triconex System Access Application. Trident 2. A Triconex master/slave protocol in which the master (a TriStation 1131 PC) communicates with the slave (a Triconex controller) over an Ethernet network. OPC Server and DDE Server use TSAA protocol to exchange data with Triconex controllers. Table 42 Protocol TSAA TCM/Trident 2. or Tri-GP CM. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs). which is a protocol that enables client/server communication between Triconex controllers and PCs. and applies only to model 4353 or 4354 TCMs. The OPC protocol is supported on NET 2 only.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Access List tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or Tri-GP CM access control list specifies the protocol(s) that the selected client can use to access the TCM. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Access List tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Access List tab Trident 2.x CMs. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 TCMs. or Tri-GP CM access control list for all IP addresses on the subnet.0 . v4. Trident 2.9. See also IP Subnet Mask on page 550.x CM. TSAA protocol can be used to write programs for accessing controller tagnames. so that you can create a single entry in the TCM.494 Appendix A Commands and Properties Client IP Subnet Mask The Client IP Subnet Mask property allows you to group IP addresses.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Access List tab Client Protocols The Protocols property in the TCM. or Trident 1. OPC TriStation Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Access List tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Access List tab Trident 2. OLE for Process Control.x CM.x CM. 9. The state of the associated Boolean variable is On from one evaluation to the next if the left link changes from On to Off. The associated Boolean variable is reset to Off if the left link is in the On state and remains Off until set by the SET coil. Table 43 Coil Type Normal (Momentary) Negated (Momentary) Positive Transition Negative Transition Set (Latch) Reset (Unlatch) Coil Type Symbols and Descriptions Symbol ( ) Description The state of the left link is copied to the associated Boolean variable and to the right link. Applies To LD program or function Location • • Coil Tool button Tools menu > Select Tools Coil Type The Coil Type property represents the output state of a coil used in an LD program or function. which represents the state of an output variable.495 Close Project Command The Close Project command closes an open project and prompts you to save it if changes have been made. Applies To Project Location File menu Coil Tool Command The Coil Tool Command allows you to add a coil. The associated Boolean variable is set to On if the left link is in the On state and remains On until reset by the RESET coil. The inverse of the state of the left link is copied to the associated Boolean variable and to the right link. (/ ) (P) (N) (S) (R) TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. The state of the associated Boolean variable is On from one evaluation to the next if the left link changes from Off to On.0 . test sheets in the Controller and Emulator Panels Locations • • • Comment Tool button Application tree > User Documents tree > Tools menu > Select Tool command Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Tools menu > Select Tool command Communication Command The Communication command displays the Communication screen on the Controller tree. Applies To Logic sheets in user documents. If redundant communication modules are installed in a single logical slot. you must select the physical communication module (LEFT or RIGHT) with the configuration you want to use.496 Appendix A Commands and Properties Applies To LD program or function Location Item Properties > Selected tab Comment Tool The Comment Tool allows you to draw a text box for a non-executable comment. you have not configured any communication modules for Modbus communication in your project. v4.9. The Modbus configuration from the selected communication module will be used by the Emulator so that you can test your Modbus functionality using emulated nodes. Only one Modbus configuration can be used by the Emulator. and then type text inside the box. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . Applies To Communication Locations • • Communication button Controller tree > View menu > Go to > Communication Communication Modules (CMs) for Modbus The Communication Modules (CMs) for Modbus property defines the communication module you want the Emulator to get Modbus configuration information from. The default is LEFT. If no CM modules are listed. 0 .9. You can view the comparison online. you must select the physical communication module (LEFT or RIGHT) with the configuration you want to use.497 Applies To Emulator Location Project menu > Project Options > Emulator Options tab Communication Modules (CMs) for Peer-to-Peer The Communication Modules (CMs) for Peer-to-Peer property defines the communication module you want the Emulator to get Peer-to-Peer configuration information from. you have not configured any communication modules for Peer-toPeer communication in your project. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. A red asterisk marks differences. Only one Peer-to-Peer configuration can be used by the Emulator. Applies To Emulator Location Project menu > Project Options > Emulator Options tab Compare Project to the Last Downloaded Command The Compare Project to Last Download command allows you to compare the changes made in the new application to-be-downloaded with the application already downloaded to a controller. If no CM modules are listed. The Peer-to-Peer configuration from the selected communication module will be used by the Emulator so that you can test your Peer-to-Peer functionality using emulated nodes. Click each tab to compare differences. or print a report. If redundant communication modules are installed in a single logical slot. This report should be run for all safety applications. Differences between the project and the downloaded application are identified with a red asterisk (*). The default is LEFT. which means a warning is not displayed if the right rail is missing.0 . Applies To Programs. and function blocks Locations • • Compile button Document menu Compile All User Documents Command The Compile All User Documents command compiles all the user-created documents in a project. functions. v4.9.498 Appendix A Commands and Properties Applies To Application and configuration elements Location Project menu Compile Command The Compile command compiles the selected document and displays any errors. Applies To Ladder Diagram programs Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > LD Editor tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Applies To Application Location Project menu Compiler Warning When Right Power Rail is Missing The Compiler Warning When Right Power Rail is Missing property specifies whether to display a warning if the right rail is missing on a Ladder Diagram program. The default is cleared. TriStation UDP Port Number. Communication Module Tricon EICM or NCM Tricon TCM Trident 1. Serial or Network port settings.x MP or CM Trident 2. After adding a contact. Serial or Network port settings.9. Serial or Network port settings. TriStation UDP Port Number. controller Locations • • Connect button Controller or Emulator Panel > Command menu Contact Command The Contact command allows you to add a contact to a Ladder Diagram. When issued from the Controller Panel. Applies To Ladder Diagrams Locations • • Contact Tool button Tools menu > Select Tools TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. TriStation UDP Port Number. you can specify the Contact Type. depending on whether the command is issued from the Controller or Emulator Panel. Table 44 Connect Properties for Communication Modules Properties that can be set Serial or Network port settings. you can change some default connection settings.0 .x MP or CM Tri-GP MP or CM Applies To Communication modules. Serial or Network port settings.499 Connect Command The Connect command attempts to connect the TriStation PC to the controller or Emulator. and Baud Rate (for serial connection only). 0 . The state of the right link is On from one evaluation to the next when the associated variable changes from Off to On while the state of the left link is On. Contact Type Normally Open Normally Closed Positive Transition Negative Transition —| / |— —| P |— —| N |— Applies To Contacts in Ladder Diagram programs Location Item Properties > Variable tab > Contact Type area Continuous Refresh Command The Continuous Refresh command continuously displays the current values of variables on test sheets or on the program document display. Applies To Controller or Emulator Panel Locations • • Continuous Refresh button Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The state of the left link is copied to the right link if the state of the Boolean variable is Off. The default is On. v4. Table 45 Contact Type Symbols and Descriptions Symbol —| |— Description The state of the left link is copied to the right link if the state of the Boolean variable is On.500 Appendix A Commands and Properties Contact Type The Contact Type property specifies the type of a contact used in a Ladder Diagram.9. The state of the right link is On from one evaluation to the next when the associated variable changes from On to Off while the state of the left link is On. x CMs. and Tri-GP CM access control lists Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Access List tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Access List tab Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Access List tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9. Applies To Trident or Tri-GP MP serial ports Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Serial Ports tab Copy Current Setup to Other Slot Command The Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Slot command copies the TCM.x CM. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs).501 Copy Command The Copy command copies the selected items from the current tree or sheet and places them on the clipboard.0 . or Trident 1. Applies To Test sheets and elements in Controller or Emulator Panel User documents and elements on logic sheets Locations • • Copy button Edit menu Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Ports Command The Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Ports command copies the settings for the selected serial port to the other serial ports on the MP.x CM. Applies To Tricon TCM. or Tri-GP CM access control list configuration for the module in the selected slot to the corresponding module installed in the other slot. This ensures that both TCMs or CMs have identical access control lists (recommended). Trident 2. Trident 2. erasing the previous clipboard contents. Tricon TCM. version 1.0. Applies To Test sheets and elements in Controller and Emulator Panels User documents and elements on logic sheets Location Cut button. Applies To Tricon EICM. the major number is increased by 1 and the minor number is changed to 0. Trident CM.0.1 is changed to 2. 1. the minor number is increased by 1. This is how the version is determined: • • • The version of a newly created project is 0. or Edit menu Data Bits The Data Bits property specifies whether the data format includes 7 or 8 data bits. Tri-GP CM Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. If the state is changed to Download All. The default is 8 bits. Applies To Projects Location Project menu > Project Description Cut Command The Cut command deletes the selected items from the current tree or sheet and places them on the clipboard. For example. For example.0 .502 Appendix A Commands and Properties Current Version The Current Version property identifies the current version of the project under development.1.9. To set this property. If it is changed and saved after being downloaded to the controller. you must use Modbus slave or Modbus slave ASCII protocol. 9. LREAL. see Appendix B. DINT. TOD User-defined data types—such as arrays. TIME. DT. Table 46 Variables Tagnames Constants and local variables Variable Data Types Data Types BOOL. This table identifies the data types available for variables. configuration files. DWORD. Data Types. and enumerations that you have defined in structured text—can also be selected as data types in local variable declarations. REAL DATE. The default path name and file extension is: • • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.0\Data. Applies To Constants. STRING. Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation Applies To Project Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > Directories tab Data Type The Data Type property specifies the kind of data that can be stored in the variable.9.0\Data. you must successfully compile your user-defined data type before it will appear in the Data Type list. However. and custom report templates. 1131 4.9.0 . local variables. INT. and tagnames Location Item Properties > Constant or Declaration tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. For more information about TriStation 1131 data types. structures.503 • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Serial Ports tab Data Files The Data Files property specifies the path name for documents including user libraries. Table 47 Drawing Item Default Colors Default Color Medium gray Black Dark blue White White Medium gray Medium gray Drawing Item Element background Element text and border Selected element background Selected element text Sheet background Sheet background (read-only documents) Zone division lines Applies To Logic sheets in user documents Test sheets in Controller and Emulator Panels Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > Drawing Colors tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. local. Applies To Variables Location Double-click a variable or right-click the Tagname Declarations folder Default Colors Command The Default Colors command returns the colors of drawing items to the default colors. This table describes the drawing items for which colors can be changed. or tagname declaration. in/out.0 . Variables must be declared to be used in programs and functions. output. The color settings on your PC affect the default colors.504 Appendix A Commands and Properties Declarations Command The Declarations command displays a dialog box that allows you to declare an input. v4. 505 Default Connection The Default Connection property specifies the initial setting used when the Connect dialog box is displayed. this is the IP address of the network router. The default gateway address must be part of the subnet. Trident 2. This setting can be changed in the Connect dialog box before connecting to the controller.x controllers. and Tri-GP controllers. modules Location Configuration tree > TriStation Communication Default Gateway IP Address The Default Gateway IP Address property specifies the IP address of the gateway to which the controller is connected. This property is only available when both types of connections are selected in the Select Connections area. the default is Network Connection. controller. Applies To Application. the default is Main Processor.9.0 . Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Network and Routing tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Network and Routing tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network and Routing tabs Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network and Routing tabs TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.Typically. Default settings are: • • For Tricon. This address can be obtained from your network administrator or Information Technology department. For Trident 1.x. For example.13). Variable Tag Refs Local variables I/O variables Program Defaults %PGM_TAGNAME %PGM_LOCAL %PG_IO %FB_LOCAL %FB_IO Function Defaults Default Macros for Annotations The default macros used with annotations vary depending on the element and variable type. v4. or function block.04. function. Table 48 Default Macros for Annotation Default Value %TAG_MEMORYADDRESS% TAG_ALIAS %WHERE_USED <no default> <no default> Used With Program Externals Program Locals Function Inputs Function Outputs Sample Expanded Macro P1.9.04. location on controller (03.13 10018 PROCESS_COUNT 1(C7) 3(D5) 4(A2) <no default> <no default> Macro Name %PGM_TAGNAME %PGM_LOCAL %FB_INPUT %FB_OUTPUT TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.WATER_LOW 03. The default is Function Block Diagram.506 Appendix A Commands and Properties Default Language The Default Language property specifies the programming language to use initially when creating a user document. and alias number (10018). Options include: • • • • Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram Structured Text Cause Effect Matrix Applies To User documents Location Project menu > Project Options > Language tab Default Macros or Text The Default Macros or Text property specifies a default macro or text to include with a variable in a program.WATER_LOW). the %PGM_TAGNAME macro expands to include the tagname (P1.0 . an empty string is returned.9. The default is 22. an empty string is returned. • For Trident or Tri-GP controllers: ii.pp. This only applies to physical input and output points and is displayed in this format: • For Tricon controllers: CC.PP.SS. If the point has no alias. Table 49 %TAG Macros Used in the Default Macros Description The name of the point to which the program variable is connected. The location of the point to which the program variable is connected. and PP is the point. where CC is the chassis.507 Table 48 Default Macros for Annotation (continued) Default Value <no default> <no default> Used With Function Inputs/Output Function Locals Sample Expanded Macro <no default> <no default> Macro Name %FB_IO %FB_LOCAL Macros Used in the Default Macros Macros beginning with %TAG cannot be modified. where ii is the I/O processor number.ss. %TAG_ALIAS The Modbus alias of the point to which the program variable is connected. and pp is the point number. SS is the slot.0 . ss is the module baseplate address plug number. For memory points. Applies To CEM programs Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > CEM Editor tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Macro Name %PGM_TAGNAME %TAG_MEMORY ADDRESS Applies To Annotations and Comments Location Item Properties > Annotation or Comment tab > Macros button Default Number of Cause Rows The Default Number of Cause Rows property specifies the number of rows added when a matrix is created using the CEM editor. 508 Appendix A Commands and Properties Default Number of Effect Columns The Default Number of Effect Columns property specifies the number of columns added when a program (matrix) is created using the CEM editor.0 . v4. Applies To CEM programs Locations • • Delete Columns button Edit menu Delete Rows Command The Delete Rows command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the number of rows to delete and the beginning row position. Applies To CEM programs Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > CEM Editor tab Delete Command The Delete command deletes the selected item. Applies To CEM programs Locations • • Delete Rows button Edit menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is 25. Applies To Project elements Location Edit menu Delete Columns Command The Delete Columns command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the number of columns to delete in a CEM program and the beginning column position.9. which can include A to Z.509 Delete Sheet Command The Delete Sheet command removes the currently displayed logic sheet from a program. The underscore character ( _ ) can also be used. To include this text in an annotation or comment. use the %DESCRIPTION macro. function. or function block.0 . Applies To Tagnames Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations Description The Description property specifies descriptive text about the selected item. Applies To Logic sheets Location Sheets menu Delete Unreferenced Tagnames Command The Delete Unreferenced Tagnames command removes tagnames that are not used in programs or functions. The maximum number of characters is 131. but not as the first character in the description. Applies To Communication TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Project elements Locations • • Item Properties > Selected or Declarations tab Project menu > Security > New or Modify > Add User or Modify User Destination IP Address The Destination IP Address property specifies an IP address which is used if the controller is not on the same subnet as other devices. and 0 to 9.9. 9. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Network and Routing tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Network and Routing tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network and Routing tabs Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Routing tab Destination IP Subnet Mask The Destination IP Subnet Mask property specifies the binary pattern that is matched with the IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Routing tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Routing tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Routing tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Routing tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.510 Appendix A Commands and Properties Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Routing tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Routing tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Routing tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Routing tab Destination Gateway IP Address The Destination Gateway IP Address property specifies the IP address of the gateway device which is used if the controller is not on the same subnet as other devices.0 . 0 . Options include: • • Unipolar: 0 to 5 volts with 6% over-range.9. The default is Unipolar.511 Destination UDP Port The Destination UDP Port property specifies the port number for other controllers on a Peer-toPeer network.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab Differential AI Input Type The Differential AI Input Type property specifies the input type for an analog input point. For detailed range information. Applies To Analog input points Location Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Differential AI Setup Directories See: • • • Data Files on page 503 Project Files on page 586 Temporary Files on page 623 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Only available with AI model 3721. see Resolution Type on page 592. Bipolar: -5 to 5 volts with 6% under-range and over-range. Applies To Peer-to-Peer communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Peerto-Peer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab Trident 2. 0 . The default OVD state is enabled for all digital output points. OVD is disabled for individual points by using the SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function.. the Disable OVD on All Modules command disables Output Voter Diagnostics (OVD) on the points of all digital output modules in a controller (except Supervised DO modules. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. For more information. modules A safety application may not disable the output voter diagnostic. See Set Programming Mode Command on page 603. The application must be running on a controller to use this command. v4. the Disable OVD on Module..512 Appendix A Commands and Properties Disable OVD on All Modules Command For Tricon controllers. OVD is disabled for individual points by using the SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function. The application must be running on a controller to use this command. which cannot have OVD disabled). see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference. WARNING Applies To Application A safety application may not disable the output voter diagnostic. Location Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Disable Programming and Control Operations Trident or Tri-GP controllers only. Location Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Disable OVD on Module. OVD cannot be disabled for points on a Supervised Digital Output module. see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference. command disables Output Voter Diagnostics (OVD) for all points on specified digital output modules in the controller. For more information. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. WARNING Applies To Application. The default OVD state is enabled for all digital output points.9.. Command For Tricon controllers.. If selected. The default is cleared. which means output points cannot be changed by external devices. floating-point representation is used.513 Disable Remote Changes to Outputs The Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property specifies whether external devices can write to output points in the TriStation 1131 application. the Disable Scaling property specifies whether REAL numbers are scaled to integers when they are transmitted from the controller. Applies To Application Locations • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Operating Parameters tab Disable Scaling For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. Applies To Application TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. which means that the application is stopped if the keyswitch is turned to STOP.0 . When cleared. Only the first alias of the two is displayed in the Modbus Alias field of the Declaration tab. When selected. only one alias is used.9. The default is cleared. which means real numbers are not scaled. this option is not available because REAL values are always scaled. If selected. For Tricon controllers. setting the keyswitch to STOP does not halt the application. You should select this check box if the application includes safety-critical outputs. two consecutive 16-bit aliases are assigned to each REAL tagname so that IEEE 754 single-precision. The default is selected. external devices cannot write to output points regardless of the settings for other properties. the Disable Stop on Keyswitch property specifies whether to logically disable the STOP position of the keyswitch on the Tricon Main Chassis so that the application is not stopped if the key is turned to the STOP position. Applies To Modbus communication Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations> Item Properties > Scaling tab Disable Stop on Keyswitch For Tricon controllers. This option is available because Modbus has a 16-bit size limitation. you must perform a Download Changes for the new colors to take effect. After changing the monitor colors.514 Appendix A Commands and Properties Location Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters Disconnect Command The Disconnect command disconnects an application from the controller or Emulator. which you can change online using the Project Options command. You can perform monitoring using the default colors or custom colors. Applies To Reports Location Project tree > Report viewer toolbar TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Applies To Programs Locations • • Display Program Document button Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Display Report Command The Display Report command displays a selected report. v4. Applies To Communication Locations • • Disconnect button Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Display Program Document Command The Display Program Document command allows you to monitor the execution (power flow) of an FBD program or LD program while an application is emulated in TriStation 1131 or run online on a controller.0 .9. • Detection of all external faults associated with field device or wiring. alias #. which allows you to change multiple tagnames at a time. alias type. such as. Min Span. and initial value. point type. Max Span. Each point can be specified with one of these options. including those in the output circuitry. Group 1. S/C (safety or control). data type. and so on. • Detection of external faults associated with the field device or wiring— limited to loss of field power and shorted loads under most conditions.515 Display Tabular View Command The Display Tabular View command displays tagnames in a table format. you can also change the columns that are displayed and the order in which they are displayed. retain (Retentive). Non-supervised is the default. including those in the output circuitry. point address. description. Table 50 Option Not Used DO Point Options Description Fault detection is the same as for Non-Supervised points.9. loss of power. Non-Supervised Fault detection includes: • Detection of all internal faults. open loads. shorted loads. Points configured as Not Used will be energized if the application commands them on. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Group 2. Supervised Fault detection includes: • Detection of all internal faults. Properties include: tagname. To make sorting and changing easier.0 . Applies To Tagnames Location Application tree > right-click Tagname Declarations folder DO Point Options The DO Point Options property specifies the type of fault detection used for the point. except reporting of benign field fault conditions is suppressed. Available only with the Tricon model 3625 Digital Output Module. 516 Appendix A Commands and Properties Applies To Tricon DO Points Location Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > DO Setup Document Access The Document Access property specifies whether the document can be read. The default is cleared. Settings include: • • • Read: Any user can read the document. CAUTION If you select Double Space after input and output variables have been attached to the function or function block. (Default) Lock: Only users with the same or higher security level can read and write the document. Applies To Document Location Project menu > New Document Double Space The Double Space property specifies whether to display double spaces between the terminals (inputs and outputs) on a function or function block. functions. which means the terminals are single spaced. which means it can be viewed. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. function blocks. which provides additional space for annotations and comments. read and written to (changed). function. Read/Write: Any user can read or change the document. Applies To Programs. function block.0 .9. the variables will have to be reattached. or data type. v4. or is locked. and data types Location Right-click a document > Properties > Summary tab Document Type The Document Type property specifies whether a document is a program. This setting specifies spacing on an individual function or function block. Applies To Functions and function blocks Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > FBD Editor tab and LD Editor tab Download All Command The Download All command downloads an application to the controller or Emulator. include the maximum number of chassis in the application before downloading the application. which means the terminals are single spaced by default. Required if moving or deleting modules in the configuration. Required if changing the address plug and node number configuration. Required if changing memory allocation. To avoid a Download All after the initial download. updating.0 . Download All Required Description Required if adding. WARNING Table 51 Component Chassis A Download All command requires that the application on the controller is halted. Required if changing (adding. changing (the type). Functions and function blocks Library elements Memory allocation Modules Node Number Required if changing or deleting a function or function block. This setting affects all new functions and function blocks created in a project.517 Applies To Functions and function blocks Location Item Properties > Function tab > Terminals > Double Space Double Space Function (Block) Terminals by Default The Double Space Function Block Terminals property specifies whether to display double space between the terminals (inputs and outputs) on a function or function block. deleting) library elements that have already been downloaded to a controller. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9. or deleting a chassis. The default is cleared. which allows space for annotations and comments. see Using the Download Changes Command on page 478. while an application is running on the controller or Emulator. Required if changes to tagnames require additional memory allocation. • For additional warnings.6.518 Appendix A Commands and Properties Table 51 Component Download All Required (continued) Description Required if increasing or decreasing the number of send or receive function blocks. updating. but not advised. Required if the target system version is changed (upgrade or downgrade). Required if changes to variables require additional memory allocation.0 . Allowed if adding a module to an empty slot. Allowed if changing (adding. deleting) library elements that have not yet been downloaded to a controller. but not if changing or deleting an existing function or function block. Required if changes to a program exceed available memory. Number of Send or Receive function blocks Operating Parameters Programs Tagnames Target System Version Variables Applies To Application Locations • • Download All button Controller > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Download Changes Command The Download Changes command downloads changes made to an application. v4. Functions and function blocks IP Address Modules Library elements TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. if the IP address of a communication module is changed. Required if changing the Allow Disabling of Points property. unless you are converting a project created in a version of TriStation 1131 prior to v4. Not allowed if moving or deleting modules. Table 52 Element Download Changes Allowed Description Allowed if adding a function or function block. Allowed. WARNING • Changing a safety-critical application that is running on a controller should be avoided because an error in the application could cause a trip or unpredictable behavior. Required if deleting a program. Required if importing tagnames from an Excel or database file. which has sufficient memory allocated for the points. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.0 . Allowed if changing variable properties does not require additional memory allocation. changing. • • • If you are currently connected to the controller. Allowed if adding. if there is enough memory allocated for the required point types. even if the last download was to the controller. Tagnames can also be disconnected or connected to different points. Alias Type. the version shown here is for the last download (which may be either the Emulator or the controller). If you are not connected to the Emulator or the controller. If the Initial Value is changed.519 Table 52 Element Operating Parameters Download Changes Allowed (continued) Description Allowed if changing these properties: • Disable Remote Changes to Outputs • Password Required for Connection • Restart on Power-Up (Trident or Tri-GP only) • Scan Time • Use Local Time Programs Tagnames Allowed if adding or changing a program and there is sufficient memory. Points must be enabled. Not allowed if deleting a program. If you are currently connected to the Emulator. if changes are made to the Point Type. these changes will re-initialize the variable to its configured initial value. Allowed. the value is not used until the application is stopped and restarted.6. Applies To Application changes Locations • • Download Changes button Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Downloaded Version The Downloaded Version property identifies the version of the application (project) that is downloaded and running on the controller or Emulator. Target System Version Variables Allowed if you are changing the target system version (upgrade or downgrade) while converting a project created in a version of TriStation 1131 prior to v4. or deleting tagnames. or 0 if no initial value is defined. but not advised. Points must be enabled. the version shown here is for the controller. or Alias Number of a memory variable.9. the version shown is for the Emulator. even if the last download was to the Emulator. For example. which will be the next major revision of the two current downloaded versions. the downloaded version for BOTH the controller and Emulator is set to 5.9. if the Emulator’s downloaded version was 3.0 . and the controller’s downloaded version was 4.1.2. Applies To Projects Location Project menu Drawing Item The Drawing Item property specifies the colors to use to with elements on logic sheets. and click Drop. double-click the comment box.0 (the next larger major revision of the two). v4. To drop. click the Pickup/Drop tab. Applies To Logic sheets Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > Drawing Colors tab Drop Command The Drop command drops all the logic elements enclosed by the comment box so they are not part of the comment. When the Change State to Download All command is used. the downloaded version for the controller and the Emulator are set to the same version number.520 Appendix A Commands and Properties Use the View Project History Command on page 640 to see the complete list of downloaded version changes. Applies To Comments Location Item Properties > Pickup/Drop tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 521 Edit. and Sheets menu Edit Sheet Title Command The Edit Sheet Title command displays a dialog box that allows you to enter a title for the logic sheet. Applies To Logic sheets Location Sheets menu Edit Title Block Command The Edit Title Block command displays a dialog box that allows you to add information to the title block that is used when the CEM program is printed. Project.9.0 . The source code can be edited only for user-created functions and function blocks.. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > User Documents > open a CEM program > right-click in the FBD Network TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. and Edit Sheet Macros commands allow you to specify text for macros that can be used in annotations and comments. Applies To Documents Location Document. Applies To CEM programs Location Sheets menu Edit/View Source Command The Edit/View Source command displays the source code for the selected element. Edit Project Macros.Macros Commands The Edit Document Macros.. Applies To CEM programs Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > CEM Editor tab Emulator File Generation The Emulator File Generation property defines the files to be generated each time you download an application to the Emulator. During a Download All or Download Changes operation on the Emulator. The default is cleared. increase the Emulator timeout value and then try downloading again. The valid range is from 0 to 65. Applies To Emulator Location Project menu > Project Options > Emulator Options tab Emulator Timeout The Emulator Timeout property specifies the timeout value for the connection to the Emulator. If you want to be able to test your SOE configuration with the Emulator. the processing time required for applications with a very large number of variables (symbols) may exceed the default Emulator timeout value of 4 seconds. you must select this option.SOE) generated.535 seconds.0 . The selected file(s) are generated in the same directory where the TriStation 1131 project is located. v4. The default setting is for the files to not be generated.BT2) generated (not recommended). If you receive a “download aborted” message when downloading an application to the Emulator.522 Appendix A Commands and Properties Effect Header Functions On by Default The Effect Header Functions On by Default property specifies whether an output and function column are automatically included in the effect header when a CEM program is created. The default timeout value should be adequate for the majority of applications.9. In most cases. you should not have to change this value. Select the SOE check box if you want an SOE definition file (. • • Select the BT2 check box if you want a backup project file (. The default is 4 seconds. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • Parameter EN Applies To Functions Location Item Properties > Function tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. If there is more than one function with EN/ENO visible in a network. the parameters are required. the function detected an error. • • For the FBD language. the function was not called and the value of ENO is set to False. the function did not detected any errors. you must connect the ENO output directly to the EN input of the next function. Description An input parameter that enables invocation of the function and carries power from the left power rail. then EN/ENO must be visible on every function in the network. then for every function except the last function. • If True. • If False.9. and evaluation of the network stops—the return value is not written to any variable. • If True. For the LD language. • If False.0 . ENO An output parameter that indicates whether the function detected an error and connects either to the EN input of the next function or to the ground rail. the parameters are optional.523 Applies To Emulator Location Project menu > Project Options > Emulator Options tab EN/ENO The EN/ENO property specifies whether to include EN (an input parameter) and ENO (an output parameter) in the function. You must not connect an ENO output to more than one EN input. the function was called and ENO indicates whether the function detected an error. Usage • • If EN/ENO is visible on any function in a network. x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Access List tab Enable All Disabled Points Command The Enable All Disabled Points command enables all disabled points on an application running on the controller.x CM. tagnames Location Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Enable Cause Header Functions The Enable Cause Header Functions property specifies whether an input and function column are included in a cause header of a CEM program. Applies To Application. or Trident 1. so that access control list settings are used to determine which IP addresses can access the TCM or CM. Trident 2. v4.x CMs. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > Document menu > Options TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Access List tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Access List tab Trident 2.0 .9. or denied. which means cause header functions are not included. The default is cleared. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs). read/write. or Tri-GP CM.524 Appendix A Commands and Properties Enable Access List Command The Enable Access List command turns on user access control for the TCM. and whether that access is read-only. and Trident v1 Peer-to-Peer Systems The Enable Communication with Tricon V8. Tricon V9. and Trident v1 Peer-to-Peer Systems property specifies whether communication is enabled with these systems on the selected port (NET 1 or NET 2). Available on Trident v2. Applies To Peer-to-Peer communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Peerto-Peer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab Enable Communication with Tricon V8. Applies To Peer-to-Peer communication Locations • Trident v2.0 . Tricon V9. Applies To Programs Location Document Properties > Attributes tab Enable Communication with Tricon V8 and V9 Peer-to-Peer Systems on NET 1 The Enable Communication with Tricon V8 and V9 Peer-to-Peer Systems on NET 1 property specifies whether communication is enabled with these systems on the NET 1 port.9. Peer-to-Peer communication with these systems is disabled. By default.x or Tri-GP systems only.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. The default is cleared.525 Enable Color Monitoring The Enable Color Monitoring property specifies whether color is used when the application is run on the controller or Emulator. which means that color monitoring is not used. Applies To Functions Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > FBD Editor tab Enable Floating Text in Intersection Cells The Floating Text Functions property allows the name of the function or function block to be displayed in a neighboring cell of the CEM matrix if it is empty.0 . Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > Document menu > Options TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is cleared. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > Document menu > Options Enable EN/ENO Terminals on Functions by Default The Enable EN/ENO Terminals on Functions by Default property specifies whether to automatically include EN (BOOL input) and ENO (BOOL output) parameters that detect and isolate errors in FBD and LD logic.9. which means effect headers are not included. The default is cleared. This may be useful if the name of the function or function block is long.526 Appendix A Commands and Properties Enable Effect Header Functions The Enable Effect Header Functions property specifies whether an output and function column are included in an effect header of a CEM program. which means EN/ENO terminals are not automatically included. v4. The default is cleared. 0 .9. an error is displayed when the program is compiled. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > Document menu > Options Enable Macro Editing The Enable Macro Editing property specifies whether you can change the value for a usermodifiable macro. Applies To Tagnames Location Application tree > double-click a tagname > Point Assignment tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. The default is cleared. Applies To Annotations and Comments Location Item Properties > Style tab Enable Multiple Writes The Enable Multiple Writes property specifies whether a tagname can be written to multiple times from programs in the application. The default is cleared. which means intersection functions are not included. The default is cleared.527 Enable Intersection Functions The Intersection Functions property specifies whether a function column is included in the intersection of a CEM matrix. User-modifiable macros are identified with a pencil graphic on the Edit Macros screen. which means the macro value cannot be changed. which means the tagname can only be written to once in an application. If this property is not selected and the tagname is written to more than once. modules Location Tricon Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Enable Programming and Control Operations For Trident or Tri-GP controllers only. command enables Output Voter Diagnostics (OVD) for all points on specified digital output modules in the controller. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default OVD state is enabled for all digital output points.... See Set Programming Mode Command on page 603. Applies To Application.528 Appendix A Commands and Properties Enable OVD on All Modules Command For Tricon controllers. Command For Tricon controllers. WARNING Applies To Application. the Enable OVD on All Modules command enables Output Voter Diagnostics (OVD) on the points of all digital output modules in a controller. Location Tricon Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Enable OVD on Module.0 . the Enable OVD on Module.9. modules A safety application may not disable the output voter diagnostic. The default OVD state is enabled for all digital output points. Enable Time Synchronization with External Source See Time Synchronization on page 625.. the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization property enables the controller to participate in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network as a Triconex Time Synchronization master or slave node. Applies To Communication Location Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization For Trident 2. Applies To Peer-to-Peer communication. The default is cleared. The default value is cleared. which means the controller will not synchronize time across the Peer-to-Peer network. The default value is cleared. See also Time Synchronization on page 625.529 Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization For Tricon controllers.0 .x or Tri-GP controllers.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Operating Parameters tab Enable UCN Test Mode For Tricon controllers. Applies To Tricon SMM Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > SMM Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization property enables the controller to participate in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network as a Triconex Time Synchronization master or slave node. time synchronization Location Trident 2. See also Time Synchronization on page 625. which means the controller will not synchronize time across the Peer-to-Peer network.9. the Enable UCN Test Mode property specifies whether UCN test mode is enabled on the Tricon SMM module. functions. function blocks.9. data types. Options include: • • • • • Programs Functions Function Blocks Data Types Multiple Programs The default is all options are selected. Applies To ST programs and functions Location • • Larger Font button View menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. functions. and multiple program to be created in the project. v4. function blocks. Windows and TriStation 1131 user authentications are required to log in. When selected. which means all options are enabled. data types. Applies To User security Location Project menu > Security > Security dialog box > Security Setting tab Enlarge Font Size Command The Enlarge Font Size command increases the size of the font for the entire ST program or function. Applies To Programs. See also Standard Security on page 618.530 Appendix A Commands and Properties Enabled Features The Enabled Features property specifies whether to allow programs.0 . multiple programs Location Project menu > Project Options > Language tab Enhanced Security The Enhanced Security property sets the project-level security setting to Enhanced. Applies To Library and user-defined function blocks Location Document Properties > Usage tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > Document menu > Options Exactly Once The Exactly Once setting indicates that each function block instance should be executed exactly once per scan because the function block contains internal data that must be updated exactly once per scan.0 . you can specify this setting. such as a fire suppression system. an OR evaluation is typically used because the normal state of inputs is False. For Triconex Library function blocks. The evaluation can be based on AND or OR logical processing. If one of the inputs changes to True. The default is OR.531 Evaluation Options The Evaluation Options property specifies how a matrix is evaluated when it includes multiple intersections between a cause and effect. OR Evaluation If the matrix is based on an energize-to-trip system. an AND evaluation is typically used because the normal state of inputs is True. the related outputs also change to True. If one of the inputs changes to False. For user-defined function blocks. This is why it is typically used with systems that are designed to be fail-safe. the setting cannot be changed. the related outputs also change to False. AND Evaluation If the matrix is based on a de-energize-to-trip (fail-safe) system. Applies To TCM configuration TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or Trident 1. the Export command exports the TCM or CM configuration to an XML file. Applies To Project Location Edit menu Expand Macros The Expand Macros property specifies whether the values or the name of the macro displays. For example.x/Tri-GP CM Configuration) Command on page 544. day.532 Appendix A Commands and Properties Exit Command The Exit command closes the current project and quits the TriStation 1131 application. the value displays. If the file is to be imported back to TriStation 1131. the macro %DATE_CREATED displays the month. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 TCMs. The default is cleared. v4. Applies To Annotations and Comments Location Item Properties > Style tab Export Command The Export command specifies a database or text file to export points to.0 . of the macro is displayed.x/Tri-GP CM Setup dialog box. Applies To Tagnames Location Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder Export (TCM or Trident 2.9. not the value. If selected. and year when the project was created. the filename must be eight characters or less. which means the name. See also Import (TCM or Trident 2.x CMs.x/Tri-GP CM Configuration) Command In the TCM Setup or Trident 2. The default is Disk file. Applies To Reports Location Export Report button on Project tree > Reports toolbar Export Format The Export Format property specifies the format to use when exporting a report file.0 (XLS) (Extended) • Excel 7.0 (XLS) (Extended) • Excel 8.533 Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup Trident 2.0 (XLS) (Extended) • Paginated Text • Rich Text (Exact) Format • Tab-separated text • Tab-separated values • Text • Word® for Windows document • XML The default is PDF. Settings include Disk file and Microsoft Mail.9.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup Export Destination The Export Destination property specifies the destination to use when exporting a report file. Applies To Reports Location Export Report button on Project tree > Reports toolbar TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Formats include: • Acrobat Format (PDF) • Character-separated values • Comma-separated values (CSV) • Excel 5.0 (XLS) • Excel 8.0 (XLS) • Excel 7.0 .0 (XLS) • Excel 5. 534 Appendix A Commands and Properties Export Report Command The Export Report command exports the viewed report to a file format and destination you specify. Applies To Reports Location Export Report button on Project tree > Reports toolbar False Color See Monitor Display Options on page 564. v4.9.0 . False State Name See Monitor Display Options on page 564. FBD Editor Options The FBD Editor options include: • • • Double Space Function (Block) Terminals by Default Enable EN/ENO Terminals on Functions by Default Left-Handed Wire Tool Applies To Functions and function blocks Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > FBD Editor tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Fatal Severity See System Events Severity on page 621. 9. Applies To Trident or Tri-GP Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Setup Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > PI or EPI Setup Field Power Monitoring For Tricon controllers. The default is Off. which means that field power is absent. This setting is typically chosen if all the field sensors are passive. The default is cleared. Applicable only if you are using a term panel that passes field power to the module. This setting is typically chosen if some or all the sensors are active. If you select On. Select if field power is connected to the PI Baseplate. and the term panel does not support field power monitoring.535 Field Power For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. you must select Off. Available only with the model 3720 and 3721 Analog Input Modules.0 . Applies To AI Modules Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Single-Ended and Differential AI Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. If you are not using a term panel that passes field power to the module. When field power monitoring is on. the Field Power Monitoring property specifies whether the module should monitor the 24V field power (also known as loop power) at the external termination panel. you will see Field Power faults on the module. the module will report when field power at the term panel goes in or out of range. the Field Power property specifies whether field power is connected to the Pulse Input Baseplate for use by the field sensors. Setting Field Power Absent Field Power Present Description Select if field power is not connected to the PI Baseplate. this command will search for the specified text only in the selected items. Click the Options button to narrow the search.536 Appendix A Commands and Properties Find In Application Command The Find In Application command finds the specified text by searching through the entire application (project). function. Applies To Application elements Location Edit menu Find Text Command The Find Text command finds the specified text in the current program. Applies To Application elements Locations • • Find Text button View menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 .9. If you select items on a sheet first. Click the Options button to further narrow the search. v4. or function block. Applies To Application elements Location Edit menu Find Text Options The Find Text Options dialog box allows you to narrow the search for text on a specific element or in an application. use %0. — For theater numbering (A to Z. use %A.0 . The default value is Low 16 Bits First. select New Tagnames Font Size The Font Size property specifies the size of the font displayed for Structured Text code. Should be 25 characters or less. depending on the start and increment value. ALARM_%0 would result in names of ALARM_1 through ALARM_nnn. Low 16 Bits First: the 16 least significant bits of the floating point number (the last 16) are read first. and the number of variables.. • • High 16 Bits First: the 16 most significant bits of the floating point number (the first 16) are read first. For example. ALARM_%A would result in ALARM_A . (0-nnn). ALARM_Z. and AA to ZZ). Applies To Comments and variables in user documents Locations • • • Item Properties > Auto Name > Auto Name button Tools menu > Auto Name Selected Items Application tree > Tagname Declarations > right-click. to ensure you do not exceed the 31-character limit on tagname and variable names. Applies To ST Language Location View menu > Set Editor Options FP Ordering The FP Ordering property specifies which 16-bit section of a 32-bit floating point number is read first. Macro: The numbering scheme to use as an increment. The pattern includes: • • Text: The text used as the base for the name.537 Formatted Name The Formatted Name property specifies a pattern to use when naming variables or tagnames. — For normal numbering.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.. Applies To Modbus communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Trident v2.0 .x or Tri-GP controllers only. Full Name The Full Name property specifies the name of the user. this property is automatically set to High 16 Bits First and cannot be changed. If a function block has not been selected. a dialog box allows you to select the function block.538 Appendix A Commands and Properties Note On Trident 2.9. Applies To Programs Locations • • Function Block button Tools menu > Select Tool > Function Blocks TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. Applies To User Security Location Project menu > Security > Users tab > Modify button Function Block Command The Function Block command allows you to add multiple function blocks at the same time to a program. if you select Modbus Master as the communication protocol.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Function Variables See Default Macros or Text on page 506. All the tagnames in a group must be of the same data type. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > User Documents > Programs > open a CEM program > Edit menu Group 1 and Group 2 The Group 1 and Group 2 properties specify group names to use for tagnames. Group names allow you to categorize tagnames by a name you define.0 . The default for False is green. Applies To Tricon communication.9.539 General Monitor Colors The General Monitor Colors property specifies the colors to display for the value of BOOL variables and wires. Group 2 is subordinate to group 1. The default is cleared. The name can be a maximum of 63 characters. Applies To Tagnames Location Tagname Declarations > Declaration tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Tagnames Location Project menu > Project Options > Monitor Colors tab Global Positioning System Installed For Tricon controllers. which means GPS is not installed. Time Synchronization Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration Panel > NCM Setup Go To Cell Command The Go To Cell command allows you to go to a specific row and column in the matrix. the Global Positioning System Installed property specifies whether a GPS interface is installed. The default for True is red. 9. With hardware handshake. the Trident or Tri-GP CM asserts the Request to Send (RTS) signal when it has a message to transmit. • • • On the Tricon EICM. The CM begins transmission when it receives a Clear to Send (CTS) signal from the Modbus master.0 . Used with RS-232 Transceiver Mode With the Handshake property set to Hardware. the switch settings determine whether handshaking is allowed. the CM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or Tri-GP CM. which means hardware handshake is not used. For Tricon controllers. Trident 2.x CM. On the Trident 1. the Trident or Tri-GP CM asserts RTS at all times and ignores CTS and DCD. On the Tricon TCM.540 Appendix A Commands and Properties Halt Command The Halt command stops the execution of an application in the controller or Emulator.x CM. The default is None. tagnames retain the values they had in the scan during which the application was halted. the setting is configured on the Serial Ports tab. In Halt mode. the Halt command or the SYS_APP_HALT function can be used. the setting of the Transceiver Mode property determines whether hardware handshake is valid. This settings allows the Modbus master to use half-duplex modems. Settings include: Setting Hardware Description Select for: • Any 2-wire configuration (required) • A multi-point configuration that uses the RS-485 transceiver mode (required) • A point-to-point configuration that uses an external modem with RS-232 transceiver mode (optional) None Select for configurations that do not allow or require Hardware Handshake. With the Handshake property set to None (typically for point-to-point connections). The Trident or Tri-GP CM ignores all characters unless the Modbus master asserts the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal. Applies To Application Locations • • Halt button Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Handshake The Handshake property specifies whether to use signals to establish a valid connection. which ensures that a device transmits data only when the other device is ready to receive it. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. In other words. the Halt command is used. a separate wire sends a signal when the receiving device is ready to receive the signal. v4. Use this setting for a Modbus slave port in a two-pair. Use this setting for all single-pair networks and for slave ports in two-pair. This could result in an overrun state. and the characters would have to be re-transmitted. the Trident or Tri-GP CM enables its RS-485 transmit driver at all times. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Serial Ports tab Hardware Allocation Command The Hardware Allocation command displays the Hardware Allocation screen in the Controller tree.0 .541 transmits characters even if the receiving device is not ready. point-to-point network. Used with RS-485 Transceiver Mode With the Handshake property set to Hardware. With the Handshake property set to None. multi-point networks.9. Applies To Configuration Locations • • Hardware Allocation button View menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. the Trident or Tri-GP CM enables its RS-485 transmit driver only when it is sending data. 9. If this occurs.542 Appendix A Commands and Properties Hide Causes Unrelated to Effects Command The Hide Causes Unrelated to Effects command hides causes on a CEM program that are not related to an effect. Applies To CEM programs Location View menu Hide Effects Unrelated to Causes Command The Hide Effects Unrelated to Causes command hides effects on a CEM program that are not related to a cause. Trident 2. Allows the TCM or CM to operate behind a firewall that has implemented port restrictions. v4. reset the value to the default setting to fix the problem and re-enable Modbus TCP and/or OPC. please contact Invensys Technical Support for assistance with configuring this setting. Applies To CEM programs Location View menu Highest TCP Port Number The Highest TCP Port Number property specifies the highest port number the TCM. If you need to use this feature.x CM.x or Tri-GP systems. Applicable only for: • • Note Modbus/TCP and OPC ports on TCMs installed in Tricon v10. For most networks. the default setting should be sufficient. If this setting is misconfigured.3 and later systems. or Tri-GP CM can use for outgoing TCP connections. Modbus TCP and/or OPC will be unable to connect. Modbus/TCP ports on CMs installed in Trident 2.0 . Applies To Communication Locations • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Network tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 0 .9.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network tab Horizontal Network Divider Command The Horizontal Network Divider command allows you to place a horizontal divider on a logic sheet to divide networks.543 • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Network tab Trident 2. Applies To Tagnames Location Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To FBD logic sheets Locations • • Horizontal Network Divider button Tools menu > Select Tool IDLE State IDLE is an application state which indicates that the TriStation PC is connected to a controller or the Emulator. but the application has not been downloaded. and how to link them to tagname properties. Applies To Application Location Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Title bar Import Command The Import command provides a wizard that allows you to specify the fields to import. use the TR_SCAN_STATUS (Tricon) or SYS_SYSTEM_STATUS (Trident/Tri-GP) function blocks.x CM Setup dialog box. Trident 2. which means the value is not displayed in the annotation.x/Tri-GP CM Configuration) Command In the TCM Setup or Trident 2.x CM. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 TCMs. The value can be changed with a Download Changes command. however. Applies To Variables Location Item Properties > Annotation tab Info Severity See System Events Severity on page 621. Applies To TCM. the value is not used until a first scan which is not issued with the Download Changes command.9. The default is cleared.0 . the Import command imports all settings from a previously exported TCM or CM configuration XML file.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup Include Monitor Value in Annotation The Include Monitor Value in Annotation property specifies whether to display the value of the variable in the annotation.544 Appendix A Commands and Properties Import (TCM or Trident 2. or Tri-GP CM configuration Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup Trident 2. or Trident 1. v4. A first scan occurs under any of these conditions: • • • The Download All and the Run command are issued The Halt command and the Run command are issued The application is restarted after a power failure To identify whether a first scan has occurred. Initial Value The Initial Value property specifies the beginning value assigned to a variable on the first scan of the application.x CMs. 9. Applies To ST programs and functions Location Edit menu Insert Input Variable Command The Insert Input Variable command inserts an input variable to a logic sheet. Applies To CEM. Applies To Tagnames.0 .545 In programs. all variables are assigned an initial value. you cannot assign an initial value to the variable. In functions and function blocks. The value is either the value declared for the property or zero. only local variables are assigned an initial value. Variables Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Declaration tab Insert Columns Command The Insert Columns command displays a dialog box that allows you to insert columns in a CEM program. FBD. If you have selected a user-defined Data Type for a local variable. Applies To CEM programs Locations • • Insert Columns button Edit menu Insert From File Command The Insert From File command displays an Open dialog box that allows you to select a file to be inserted in the ST program or function. and LD functions Locations • • Input Variable Tool button Edit menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. 546 Appendix A Commands and Properties Insert In/Out Variable Command The Insert In/Out Variable command inserts an in/out variable to a logic sheet. Applies To FBD and ST functions and function blocks Locations • • In/Out Variable Tool button Edit menu Insert Local Variable Command The Insert Local Variable command inserts a local variable to a logic sheet. FBD.9. v4. Applies To CEM. VAR IN/OUT are added to the code. Applies To FBD and LD functions Locations • • Input Variable Tool button Edit menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . not inserted by a command. and LD programs Locations • • Local Variable Tool button Edit menu Insert Output Variable Command The Insert Output Variable command inserts an input variable to a logic sheet. In Structured Text language. You must enter a title for the new sheet before it will be added.0 . Applies To Hardware configuration Locations • • • Insert Module button (on Trident or Tri-GP Configuration toolbar) Tricon Configuration tree > Hardware Allocation > double-click slot Trident or Tri-GP Configuration tree > Hardware Allocation > MP/IOP1 > Tools menu Insert Rows Command The Insert Rows command displays a dialog box that allows you to insert rows in a CEM program. Applies To Logic sheets Location Sheets menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9.547 Insert Module Command The Insert Module command displays a dialog box that allows you to select a module to add to the configuration. Applies To CEM programs Locations • • Insert Rows button Edit menu Insert Sheet Command The Insert Sheet command adds a new logic sheet before the sheet currently being viewed. Applies To CEM programs Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > CEM Editor tab Invert Input The Invert Input property specifies whether to invert the value of a BOOL input that is connected to a function or function block. which means the input value is not inverted.548 Appendix A Commands and Properties Insert Tagname Declaration Command The Insert Tagname Declaration command inserts a tagname declaration to the program. the value for the input is changed to the opposite value when the function or function block is executed. If selected. For example. The default is cleared. that is. you can specify this setting. you can execute the function block instance more than once per scan. For Triconex Library function blocks. or you can skip scans. There are no restrictions on usage of a function block labeled internal state. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Applies To Library and user-defined function blocks Location Document Properties > Usage tab Intersection Functions On by Default The Intersection Functions On by Default property specifies whether a function column is automatically included in the intersection when a matrix is created. v4. Applies To FBD and LD programs Locations • • Tagname Declaration Tool button Edit menu Internal State The Internal State setting means each function block instance may have an internal state which is remembered from one execution to the next and from one scan to the next.9. the setting cannot be changed.0 . For user-defined function blocks. The default is cleared. if the value is True it is changed to False. 9. a small circle (referred to as a fiducial) is displayed on the output terminal of the function. When an input/output is inverted. if the value is True it is changed to False. If selected. Applies To BOOL output points Location Functions and function blocks TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. For example. The default is cleared. When an output is inverted. The default is cleared. a small circle (referred to as a fiducial) is displayed on the input terminal of the function. Applies To BOOL input points Location Function and function blocks Invert Input/Output The Invert Input/Output property specifies whether to invert the value of a BOOL input/output that is connected to a function block.549 When an input is inverted. Applies To BOOL input points Location Function blocks Invert Output The Invert Output property specifies whether to invert the value of a BOOL output that is connected to a function or function block. which means the input value is not inverted. the value for the output is changed to the opposite value when the function is executed. which means the output value is not inverted. For example. a small circle (referred to as a fiducial) is displayed on the input terminal of the function. if the value is True it is changed to False. If selected. the value for the input/output is changed to the opposite value when the function block is executed.0 . 1. and Printer tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network.10. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • • • Controller tree > Configuration > Communication Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM or NCM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Network. 192.x or Tri-GP: 192.0 . which is either permanently or dynamically assigned at startup.168.x: 0. An IP address is formatted as four numbers separated by periods.0 for all other MP and CM network ports The highest and lowest IP addresses in a subnet (addresses where the last number is 0 or 255.0.0.168.9. v4. Peer-to-Peer.240.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Network Ports tab IP Subnet Mask The IP Subnet Mask property specifies a binary pattern that is matched with the IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets.168. Peer-to-Peer.<node number> TCM: 192. and Printer tabs Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network or Printer tab Trident 2.255) are reserved for broadcast messaging and cannot be used as a valid IP address for a Triconex communication module.1.0.255.550 Appendix A Commands and Properties IP Address The IP Address property specifies a unique 32-bit address of a computer attached to a network. An example is 1. Modbus TCP.<node number> for NET 2 Trident 1.0 Trident 2. A network uses IP addresses to route messages to their destinations. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and Printer tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Network. see your network administrator.0. Every client and server in a network requires an IP address. Modbus TCP. such as 192. • • • For Tricon ACM and TCM. For Trident or Tri-GP CM. Peer-to-Peer.<node number> for NET 1.168. Modbus TCP. where each number can be zero to 255.<node number> for Left MP network port only.1. The defaults are as follows: • • • • Note ACM/NCM: 192.160. see your network administrator.168.0. 0. do not change the default setting which is eight zeroes. For Tricon NCM. which varies depending on the item currently selected. modules.9. Settings include: • • • • Function Block Diagram Ladder Diagram Structured Text Cause Effect Matrix Applies To Programs.0 . functions. or data type. function. tagnames. function blocks.551 Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM and NCM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Network and Routing tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Network and Routing tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network and Routing tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network and Routing tab Item Properties Command The Item Properties command displays an Item Properties dialog box. and data types Location Project menu > New Document TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. function block. Applies To Chassis. variables Locations • • Item Properties button View menu Language The Language property specifies the language to be used for the program. which means the right-handed link tool is used. The default is 80.0 . Applies To Ladder Diagrams Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > LD Editor tab Left-Handed Wire Tool The Left-Handed Wire Tool specifies whether to have the wire tool configured for left-handed use for FBD programs. v4. Applies To Project Locations • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Printer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Printer tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.552 Appendix A Commands and Properties LD Editor Options The LD Editor Options include: • • • Compiler Warning When Right Power Rail is Missing on page 498 Double Space Function (Block) Terminals by Default on page 517 Left-Handed Link Tool on page 552 Left-Handed Link Tool The Left-Handed Link Tool specifies whether to have the link tool configured for left-handed use for LD programs.9. which means the right-handed tool is used. The default is cleared. The default is cleared. Applies To Project Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > FBD Editor tab Line Width The Line Width property specifies the number of characters per line. but is not copied to attached horizontal links on its left. • Is On if the state of one or more attached horizontal links to its left is On. The state represents the Inclusive OR of the On states of the horizontal links on its left side.553 • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Printer tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Printer tab Link Command The Link command draws a horizontal or vertical link between power rails and logic elements. so that individual points can be selected and enabled. Intersects one or more horizontal link elements on each side. Applies To Tagnames Location Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.0 . • Is Off if the states of all attached horizontal links to its left are Off. The direction of the link determines how it is evaluated in the logic. the application must be running on the controller. To use this command. The state is copied to all attached horizontal links on its right.9. Link Direction Horizontal Description Transmits the state of the element on its immediate left to the element on its immediate right. Vertical Applies To LD programs Locations • • Link Tool button Tools menu > Select Tools List Disabled Points Command The List Disabled Points command displays a list of all disabled points on a controller. For example. v4. or Trident/Tri-GP I/O Processor (IOP). 01. For example. or baseplate (Trident/Tri-GP). Applies To Tagnames Locations • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > DO and PI Setup Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > PI or EPI Setup Log On As New User Command The Log On As New User command allows you to save and close the current project and log on as a different user. C01 identifies cause 1 and C02E02 identifies the intersection of cause 2 and effect 2. Applies To Project Location File menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Trident system. You are prompted on whether to save project elements. or Tri-GP system.PP Identifier CC SS PP Description Stands for Tricon chassis.0 .9.554 Appendix A Commands and Properties Loc The Loc property displays the coordinates for the location of an element in terms of cause row and effect column in a CEM program.02. Stands for slot (Tricon). Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > Variable Detail Table Location The Location property specifies the location of the tagname based on the position in the Tricon chassis. in chassis 1.23 is the address for point 23.SS. on the module in slot 2. Stands for point number. The address is a three-part number in this format: CC. and press Ctrl+V.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network tab Macros Command The Macros command displays macros that can be included in an annotation or comment. For most networks. Modbus TCP and/or OPC will be unable to connect. reset the value to the default setting to fix the problem and re-enable Modbus TCP and/or OPC. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Network tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Network tab Trident 2.x CM. the default setting should be sufficient. If this setting is misconfigured. please contact Invensys Technical Support for assistance with configuring this setting. close the Edit Macro dialog box. Applies To User access Location Project menu > Security > Users tab > New or Modify button Lowest TCP Port Number The Lowest TCP Port Number property specifies the lowest port number the TCM. To copy. Applicable only for: • • Note Modbus/TCP and OPC ports on TCMs installed in Tricon v10. Document. or Tri-GP CM can use for outgoing TCP connections. Allows the TCM or CM to operate behind a firewall that has implemented port restrictions. Modbus/TCP ports on CMs installed in Trident 2.9.3 and later systems. Applies To Comments and variables TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. If you need to use this feature. click in the Comment area. click the macro and press Ctrl+C.x or Tri-GP systems.0 .555 Logon Name The Logon Name property specifies the identifier used to log on to the TriStation 1131 project. To paste. You can specify whether to display macros available by Project. Trident 2. If this occurs. or Sheet. the window caption bar and the Window Menu list. and Right. Manage Sheets Command The Manage Sheets command displays a screen that allows you to manage logic sheets.9.x. The sheet title is displayed in the title block. Middle. The options are Left.556 Appendix A Commands and Properties Locations • • • Document. Project.x Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication Major Severity See System Events Severity on page 621. These commands are on the Sheets Manager screen: Command Append Insert Delete Title Go To Action Adds a new sheet after an existing sheet.0 . and Sheets menus Annotation tab (tagnames and variables) Comments tab (comments) Main Processor Connection Setup For Trident 1. Applies To TriStation communication Location Trident 1. The default is left. Applies To Logic sheets Location Sheets menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the Main Processor Connection Setup property specifies which MP is connected to the TriStation PC. and then click Go To. Adds a new sheet before an existing sheet Delete the selected sheet. Click a sheet to be displayed. Allows you to edit the title of the current sheet. v4. Click to close the View Manager screen. or Tri-GP CM communication status information.0 .9. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC or TCM/B Setup > Protocols tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A Setup > Network tab Trident 2. For more information. Command Load Save Remove Restore All Defaults Close Cancel Action Click a view and click Load to have it displayed.557 Manage Views Command The Manage Views command allows you to save. Click to restore the current view to show all causes and effects. load. The default number is 1510. Click to save the view currently displayed. see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor User’s Guide. Click to cancel the action.x CM. Trident 2. and remove views of a CEM program. Click a view and click Remove to delete the view from the list. Applies To CEM programs Location View menu Management Port Number The Management Port Number property identifies the UDP port number used for the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor’s connection to the TCM. Cannot be the same as the TriStation or TSAA port numbers. This must be the same value as the Management UDP Port Number property in the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor’s Network Configuration dialog box. These commands are on the View Manager screen.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Protocols tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Trident or Tri-GP Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > PI or EPI Setup Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Receives The Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Receives property specifies the maximum number of Receive function blocks for each TriStation 1131 application. This number set for Receive and Send does not have to be the same. if you plan to add Receive function blocks in the future. the valid range is 1-32. the Max Field property specifies the maximum range for power. Must be unique for each TCM.x or Tri-GP CM.0 . the valid range is 1-15. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. To conserve memory and minimize scan time. This property is only available for Modbus Master. For Trident 2.558 Appendix A Commands and Properties Master Logical Port The Master Logical Port property specifies the logical port number that the TriStation 1131 application uses with Modbus Master Functions to access the port. based on volts on the Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Modbus TCP and Serial Ports tab Max Field For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. Applies To Modbus Communication Location • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Modbus TCP and Serial Ports tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Modbus TCP and Serial Ports tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Modbus TCP and Serial Ports tabs Trident 2.x CM. Trident 2. However. The default is 0. The default is 33 volts. or Tri-GP CM installed in a system. specify the anticipated maximum to avoid having to perform a Download All later.9. set this number as low as possible. For TCM. Applies To Peer-to-Peer communication Location Application tree > Implementation > Peer-to-Peer Configuration Maximum RPM The Maximum RPM property specifies the revolutions per minute for the device attached to the Pulse Input Module. To conserve memory and minimize scan time.559 Applies To Peer-to-Peer communication Location Application tree > Implementation > Peer-to-Peer Configuration Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Sends The Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Sends property specifies the maximum number of Send function blocks for each TriStation 1131 application. The number set for Send and Receive does not have to be the same.0 . Applies To Tricon Pulse Input Module Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Tricon Pulse Input Module Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input Setup Maximum Speed The Maximum Speed property specifies the speed for the device attached to the Pulse Input Module. The default is 0. The number must be a positive floating point value.000. The default is 30. set this number as low as possible. The default is 30. The number must be a positive floating point value. specify the anticipated maximum to avoid having to perform a Download All later. However.9. if you plan to add Send function blocks in the future.000. 999.) Applies To Tagnames with REAL data types Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Scaling tab Memory Allocation Command The Memory Allocation command displays the Memory Allocation screen in the Controller tree.0 . the maximum value is 9. The maximum value and default value is 32.560 Appendix A Commands and Properties Maximum Value (Max Span) The Maximum Value (Max Span) value identifies the maximum value for the range to scale a REAL tagname to an integer. Applies To Troubleshooting problems Location Configuration tree > Controller Panel > Tools menu > Message Options TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. (For Honeywell. The default for all options is cleared. and is generally used to troubleshoot problems. must be greater than the minimum value.9.767. Applies To Configuration Locations • • Memory Allocation button View menu Message Options Command The Message Options command allows you to specify the type of messages to be sent between the TriStation PC and controller. v4. 9. You can toggle the Workspace View On or Off. Find Results.561 Message View Command The Message View button displays a message area at the bottom of the TriStation 1131 screen. Applies To View Locations • • Message View button View menu > Messages Min Field For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. based on volts for the Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module. The default is 0 volts.0 . Applies To Trident or Tri-GP Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > PI or EPI Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. the Min Field property specifies the minimum range for power. and Compare Results. Controller. Tabs in the area allow you to display information for Application. ) Applies To Tagnames with REAL data types Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Scaling tab Minor Severity See System Events Severity on page 621. • • • The minimum value is -32. v4.0 .9. Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range The Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range property specifies the minimum and maximum limits of values communicated via serial ports. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP and CM Setup > Serial Ports tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.562 Appendix A Commands and Properties Minimum Value (Min Span) The Minimum Value (Min Span) value identifies the minimum value for the range used to scale a REAL tagname to an integer.999.767. The maximum value is 32. This property is used with the Minimum Value (Min Span) and Maximum Value (Max Span) to communicate REAL values using Modbus or Honeywell protocol. the default is 32. the default is 0.768.767. (For Honeywell. the minimum is 0. the minimum value is 0. The minimum value and default value is –32. must be less than the maximum value.767. the maximum is 9. For Honeywell. This property is only available if using Modbus slave.9.x Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP and CM Setup > Network tab Trident 2.0 . The address can be from 1 to 247. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP and CM Setup > Serial Ports tab Mode The Mode property specifies the type of communication. Table 53 Modes Open Network Peer-to-Peer TriStation Communication Modes Supported Protocols TriStation.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Network tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. If using Modbus master protocol. the default is 1. and printer protocol Peer-to-Peer and Time Synchronization TriStation Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > NCM Setup Trident 1. which can support one or more communication protocols. TSAA. and master/slave protocols.563 Modbus Slave Address The Modbus Slave Address property specifies the number of the Modbus slave device which is connected to the Modbus master. DDE. OPC. the address of the slave is specified in the Modbus Read and Write function blocks. Trident. These options are used only when the tagname is displayed in SOE Recorder. see the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide.x.5. Trident. Applies To Project Locations • • • File menu > New Project or > Select Main Processor File menu > Open Project > Select Main Processor Tricon. Trident.51. v4. select 3101.52. For Tri-GP system versions 2.9. Properties include: TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x and earlier. For a list of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your controller. or Tri-GP Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site). For Tricon system versions 9.x. or 9. The display options can help an operator identify alarm conditions at a glance. For more information. 3007. 9.x. select 3101S2.x and later.0 .4.564 Appendix A Commands and Properties Model The Model property specifies the model of Main Processor installed in the Tricon. • • • • Note For Tricon system versions 9. or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Replace MPs Modify Banner Message Command The Modify Banner Message command allows you to customize the security banner that appears each time you start TriStation 1131. Applies To User security Location Edit menu Monitor Display Options The Monitor Display Options include properties that specify the names and colors for BOOL variables. select 3008. select 3006/N. TriStation 1131 v4. see the applicable Tricon.2 and later. or Tri-GP controller that the project will be downloaded to. or Trident system versions v1. See also Target System Version on page 622. For Trident system versions 1.6 and later.1 and earlier.6 does not support Tricon system versions v9. Applies To Annotations and Comments Location Item Properties > Style tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Variables Location Project menu > Project Options > Annotations tab Move Behind Logic Elements The Move Behind Logic Elements property moves a selected comment box behind a logic element.0 . Specifies the name to display for a variable in the false state. which means the element is not enclosed in a comment. The default is TRUE. The default is red. The default is FALSE. Applies To BOOL values Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Display tab Monitor Value on by Default The Monitor Value on by Default property specifies whether to display the value of the variable when the program or function block is executed. The default is cleared. Determines the color used to display the true state of a variable.565 Property True State Name False State Name True Color False Color Description Specifies the name to display for a variable in the true state. The default is Green. which means the monitor does not display the value of the variable. The default is cleared.9. Determines the color used to display the false state of a variable. which means the element is considered part of the comment and not executed with the logic. 0 . Settings include: • • • Rows—Names are applied vertically. Name The Name property specifies an identifier or description for an element. Version Numbers Applies To Variables. Coils Location Item Properties Name Order The Name Order property specifies how automatic naming is applied to the selected variables. and closed. or Tri-GP CM network port—NET 1 or NET 2— that the selected external device is connected to. including the underscore (_) character.9. from top to bottom. saved. Contacts. and 0 to 9). Columns—Names are applied horizontally. Names of documents include a version number at the end of the name. which is always 1 and a minor number. Selection order—Names are applied based on the order in which they were selected. Feature Restrictions Description The name must begin with an alpha character (A to Z) and can include up to 31 alphanumeric characters (A to Z.566 Appendix A Commands and Properties Multicast IP Address See TSAA Multicast IP Address on page 631. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. which changes when the document is changed.x CM. Trident 2. from left to right. Letters are not case-sensitive. Applies To Comments and variables in user documents Locations • • Item Properties > Auto Name > Auto Name button Tools menu > Auto Name Selected Items Network The Network property specifies the TCM. The number includes a major number. Applies To Application Location Project menu New Project Command The New Project command creates a new project.0 .x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup New Document Command The New Document command opens a dialog box that allows you to specify the type of document to create and the type of language to use.9.567 Applies To Communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup Trident 2. Applies To Project Location File menu New Tagname Command The New Tagname command opens a screen that allows you to specify a new tagname. Applies To Tagnames Locations • • Project menu Application tree > right-click Tagname Declarations TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Properties include: • • • Formatted Name on page 537 Start Value and Increment on page 618 Name Order on page 566 Applies To Tagnames Locations • • Project menu Application tree > right-click Tagname Declarations NIC Index The NIC Index property specifies the index position of the network interface card in the TriStation PC. On the Hardware tab. Applies To Communication Location Trident 1. For example. The default names are TRINODE01 through TRINODE31.9. its index position is 4.0 . click Device Manager.568 Appendix A Commands and Properties New Tagnames Command The New Tagnames command opens a screen that allows you to create multiple tagnames based on a naming scheme. Applies To Communication TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. To determine the NIC index: 1 2 3 Open the Control Panel and click the System icon. if your adapter card is fifth in the list. Starting with zero. count down the list of adapter cards to the one that is connected to the TriStation PC. which can be a default name or a user-defined name.x Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication Node Name The Node Name property specifies the name for a Triconex controller. and then expand the Network Adapters tree. Applies To Trident or Tri-GP Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > PI or EPI Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. The Point Options property must be specified as RPM to enable this property. or from 1 to 63 for Trident or Tri-GP controllers. For more information. which must be the same as on the switch setting (Tricon) or the address plug (Trident or Tri-GP). The numbers can be from 1 to 31 for Tricon controllers. The default is 4. see the HIM User’s Guide. Applies To Communication Location Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication Number of Extended Block For Tricon controllers.569 Location Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication Node Number The Node Number property specifies a number for a Triconex controller.9. the Number of Extended Block property specifies a pair of HIM blocks consisting of a base block and a secondary block (which is offset from the six-bit block address by 32). Applies To Tricon HIM Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HIM Setup Number of Gear Teeth For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. the Number of Gear Teeth property specifies the number of gear teeth that are counted in each revolution for the Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module.0 . The default is 60. 0 . The default is Single. Applies To Emulator Location Project menu > Project Options > Emulator Options tab OFFLINE State The OFFLINE state is an application state which indicates the application is not connected to the Emulator or to a controller. If this option is set to Single. Applies To Application Location Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Title bar On NET 1 Enable Time Synchronization See Time Synchronization on page 625 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. more than one instance of the Emulator can be running at the same time. Applies To Functions Location Item Properties > Function tab Number of Instances The Number of Instances property specifies how many instances of the Emulator you want available at any one time. Only extensible functions.570 Appendix A Commands and Properties Number of Inputs The Number of Inputs property specifies the number of inputs to include with the function. which are functions that can include additional inputs. For more information. only one instance of the Emulator can be running at any one time. v4. If this option is set to Multiple. see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference. have this property. the setting cannot be changed. The default is 2. Applies To Application Location Project menu Open Point Alarm Threshold The Open Point Alarm Threshold property specifies the number of ohms above which values are alarmed as an open load. Typical threshold values are 480 to 3. This option is only available if the points are supervised. Applies To Tricon DO points Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > DO Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Available only with the model 3625 Digital Output Module. Open Document Command The Open Document command opens an existing document. For user-defined function blocks. Only Once The Only Once setting means each instance of a function block should be executed only once per scan.0 .400 ohms. you can specify this setting.571 On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization See Time Synchronization on page 625. This means the function block has internal data that does not need to be updated on every scan. but does not need to be executed every scan. For Triconex Library function blocks. but should not be updated more than once per scan. The available range is 0 to 65.200 ohms.535 ohms. Applies To Library and user-defined function blocks Location Document Properties > Usage tab OPC System Events Severity See System Events Severity on page 621.9. Permits points to be disabled in the Controller Panel.9. Applies To Project Location Project menu > Security command > Privileges tab Operations The Operations property specifies TriStation 1131 and controller operations that can be assigned a security level. CAUTION Applies To Project Location File menu Operation Type The Operation Type property specifies whether the security selection is for controller operations or TriStation 1131 operations.572 Appendix A Commands and Properties Open Project Command The Open Project command allows you to specify an existing project to open. Default Level 1 1 1 1 1 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. but you must copy the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation 1131. Projects may be saved to a network drive for backup purposes.0 . TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive. Permits state to be changed from Download Changes to Download All. Depending on the selection. v4. Permits use of the Download All command in the Controller and Emulator Panels. These tables describe the operations and default settings for security levels. different operations are displayed. Permits use of the Download Changes command in the Controller and Emulator Panels. Table 54 Operation Change point values Download All Download Changes Enable and disable points Change state to Download All Controller Operations Description Permits use of the Set Value command for variables in the Controller and Emulator Panels. Default Level 1 Halt and run mismatched application Halt application Modify configuration Modify Controller Panel Open Configuration Open Controller Panel Pause and Single Step application Run Application Set Operating Parameters Open Emulator Panel 1 1 1 1 1–2 1 1 1 1–3 Table 55 Type Elements TriStation 1131 Operations Operation Change Access Attributes Change Owner Modify control elements Description Permits changes to Access Attributes property. or Lock status. Permits use of the Configuration editor and the Build Element. and function blocks which are defined for safety applications.573 Table 54 Operation Controller Operations (continued) Description Permits use of the Halt. Permits use of the Halt command in the Controller and Emulator Panels. Build Configuration. and deleting programs. Read/Write. Permits use of the Emulator Panel. functions. functions. and deleting programs. Permits the operating parameters to be set.0 . modifying. functions. and function blocks which are defined for control applications. Permits use of the Controller Panel. Permits creating. Permits use of the Pause and Single Step commands in the Controller or Emulator Panel. Permits viewing of programs. Permits use of the Run command in the Controller or Emulator Panel. which allows Read Only. modifying. and function blocks. Permits exporting project documents to a shared library. Permits creating. Permits the Configuration editor to be opened. and Run commands when the project executing in the controller does not match the application that is currently open in TriStation 1131. and Rebuild Configuration commands. Permits using the Change Owner command to change the owner of a document. Permits use of the Controller Panel. Default Level 1–3 1–3 1–5 Modify safety elements 1–5 View elements Libraries Export Import 1–9 1–2 1–2 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Download All. Permits importing shared libraries.9. and function blocks in the TriStation 1131 Libraries in these ways: Property By Library By Type By Category By Name Description Organizes by the library where the elements are located. Permits changes to properties in TriStation Options. and so on. Arithmetic. and deleting users if the user has equal or higher privileges than the selected user. Permits changes to the privileges associated with security levels if the user has equal or higher privileges than the selected user. Permits adding. modifying.574 Appendix A Commands and Properties Table 55 Type Printing TriStation 1131 Operations (continued) Operation Print reports Update report database Description Permits printing of reports. Permits changes to the names associated with security levels. functions. Counter. Permits use of Change State to Download All command. Permits use of the Clear History command. functions. and function blocks TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Organizes by Functions and Data Types. Permits use of the Update Data command. This is the default selection. Organizes by the typical usage.0 . Data Type. v4. Default Level 1–9 1–5 1–3 1–2 1–2 1–2 Project Change Project Options Change state to Download All Clear history logs Security Add/Modify Users Change level descriptions Change level privileges 1–2 1–2 Workbench Change TriStation Options 1–2 Applies To Security Location Project menu > Security > Privileges tab Organize Command The Organize command allows you to organize the data types. Applies To TriStation 1131 Library data types. Organizes alphabetically by name. For example.9. Permits changes to properties in Project Options. Deletes the parity bit.The default is PASSWORD. Sets the parity bit to 0 for each data item. Settings include: Property Odd Even Mark Space None Description Sets the parity bit to 0 or 1 to make the total number of 1 bits odd. The default is Odd. Odd and Even parity counts the number of 1 bits in a one-byte data item then sets the parity bit (9th bit) to 0 or 1 to result in an Odd or Even total number of 1 bits.9.575 Location Application tree > right-click the Library Documents folder Parity The Parity property indicates whether to use parity checking. Sets the parity bit to 0 or 1 to make the total number of 1 bits even. Mark and Space parity (also called high/low parity) set the parity bit to 1 or 0 regardless of the number of 1 bits in the data item. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Trident MP or CM Setup > Serial Ports tab Password The Password property specifies a code required to access the project or to perform certain operations in the project. Applies To Security TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.0 . Sets the parity bit to 1 for each data item. which is a way to detect data communication errors on the transmitted data. you must enter a password.9. a dialog box displays that requires the password to be entered before the connection can be attempted. v4.576 Appendix A Commands and Properties Locations • • Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters Project menu > Security command > Users tab > Add or Modify button Password Required for Connection The Password Required for Connection property specifies whether a password is required to connect to the controller. If an application is paused. This setting takes effect after the application is downloaded to the controller. If selected. Applies To Editing Locations • • Paste button Edit menu Pause Command The Pause command pauses the execution of an application in the controller or the Emulator. Applies To Application TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. If selected. Applies To Security Locations • • Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters Project menu > Security command > Users tab > Add or Modify button Paste Command The Paste command puts the current contents of the clipboard onto the current sheet. The default is cleared. the Run command must be used to resume execution. which means a password is not required.0 . Applies To Communication Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Time Sync tab Permission The Permission property specifies the level of access to the TCM. Allows client to view information provided by the TCM or CM. Connections to the controller are not allowed.0 . Does not allow the client to change any settings or perform certain commands. Setting Deny Access Read Description Prevents all access to resources provided by the TCM or CM.x CM. you should not set this property to Read/Write. or Tri-GP CM for the selected client IP address. or Trident 1. Read/Write Does not apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs). Allows client to connect to the controller and view information provided via the TCM or CM. This access level should only be provided to trusted clients. Applies To Communication Locations • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Access List tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Access List tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Full access. change settings.9. Trident 2.x CMs.577 Locations • • Pause button Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Peer-to-Peer Time Synchronization Enabled The Peer-to-Peer Time Synchronization Enabled property determines whether the Triconex Time Synchronization protocol is used to synchronize time with controllers on the network. and perform all commands (including Download Changes or Download All for TriStation 1131). If the application includes safety-critical outputs. Applies to TCM models 4351 and 4352 only. v4. click the Pickup/Drop tab. Resize the box if needed. on the module in slot 2. move the comment box so it entirely covers the elements to be captured. To pick up. double-click the comment box.578 Appendix A Commands and Properties • Trident 2. or Trident/Tri-GP I/O Processor (IOP). 01. For example. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Access List tab Physical Address The Physical Address property specifies the physical point location on an input or output module.0 . Applies To Input and output tagnames Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Point Assignment tab Pickup Command The Pickup command picks up all the elements enclosed by the comment box so they are considered part of the comment and ignored by the compiler.SS.PP Identifier CC SS PP Description Stands for Tricon chassis. The address is a three-part number in this format: CC. To drop. Properties include: • User alias: A number that can be assigned if the point is a Read or Read/Write Alias. and click Drop. Stands for point number.23 is the address for point 23. Stands for slot (Tricon). and whether the point has a physical or local address.02. in chassis 1. Applies To Comments Location Item Properties > Pickup/Drop tab Point Assignment The Point Assignment properties specify whether the point uses an alias.9. or baseplate (Trident/Tri-GP). or an unaliased memory point. Applies To Tagnames Location Item Properties > Point Assignment tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9. output. Applies To Tagnames Location Tagname References > Item Properties > Point Assignment tab Point Options The Point Options properties specify options on a Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module. Settings include Input. No alias: Means the point is input.579 • • Default alias: A number is automatically assigned if the point is a Read or Read/Write Alias. and Memory.0 . Output. Settings include: • • • • Maximum RPM on page 559 Maximum Speed on page 559 Number of Gear Teeth on page 569 Scale Factor on page 598 Applies To Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Setup Location Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input or EPI Setup Point Type The Point Type property specifies the type of tagname. 9. Modbus Slave. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Serial Ports tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Ports 1–3 and 6–8: Modbus Slave ASCII.x CM Tri-GP CM Left. Port 3: TriStation. Middle. Ports 1-3: Modbus Slave RTU.0 . Ports 1–3 and 6: Modbus Slave RTU. Ports 5 and 10: Printer. and GPS. Ports 4 and 9: Modbus Slave ASCII. Middle. Ports 5 and 10: Printer. Ports 1-3: Modbus Slave RTU. Modbus Master/Slave. Modbus Master. and Modbus Master Slave. Modbus Master. Modbus Master. Modbus Master. Modbus Master. Modbus Slave ASCII. and Right: Modbus Slave RTU. Modbus Slave ASCII.580 Appendix A Commands and Properties Port Selection The Port Selection property specifies the port to be configured. and TriStation. The default is port 1 or Left.x CM Trident 2. and Right: Modbus Slave RTU. v4. Debug. Tricon TCM Trident MP Tri-GP MP Trident 1. Left. Modbus Slave ASCII. Modbus Slave RTU. Modbus Master. Port 3: TriStation. Modbus Slave RTU. Table 56 Module Tricon EICM Protocols Available with Specific Ports Selections Ports 1–4 and 6–9: TriStation. The default is 0.1 and v10. Serial Modbus Slave. Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs (Tricon v10. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs (Tricon v10. so that ports configured for TSAA.1 and v10. Available for the following: • • • Note Modbus TCP and serial protocols on Tricon v10.2 systems only.x CMs.3 and later) Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A Setup > Network.581 Port Write Enabled The Port Write Enabled property provides a fast and easy way to manage port security if you don’t want to configure an access control list (see Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386).1 and later systems Modbus TCP and serial protocols on Trident 2.x or Tri-GP systems TSAA protocol on Tricon v10. Projects converted from earlier versions of TriStation 1131 will have the default value automatically set for this property. or Trident 1.0 . Select this property to allow writes to the selected port.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Precision The Precision property specifies the number of decimals to use with a REAL point that has been scaled.2 only) Trident 2. meaning the port is read-only. The default value is cleared. Applies To Tagnames with REAL data types Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Scaling tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs).9. and TCP Modbus Slave will be read-only until selected otherwise. requiring user intervention to restart the MP. if the MP detects a fatal error. Function Blocks. it will shut down without a restart attempt. Applies To Logic sheets Locations • • Previous Sheets button Sheets menu Print Command The Print command prints the logic sheet. v4. but cannot be changed. The default is cleared (the MPs will automatically restart after a fatal error). function block.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Operating Parameters tab Previous Sheet Command The Previous Sheet command displays the previous logic sheet. Note The default restart behavior described above applies to Trident 1. Applies To Logic Sheets. Applies To Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controllers Location Trident 2. Reports Locations • • Print button Edit menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. or report displayed in the current window.x systems.9.x or Tri-GP systems only. When this property is selected.582 Appendix A Commands and Properties Prevent Restart Following Fatal Error The Prevent Restart Following Fatal Error property specifies whether the Trident or Tri-GP MPs should restart automatically after a fatal error occurs.0 . This will cause the controller to go to either DUAL or SINGLE mode. Applicable to Trident 2. 583 Print All Command The Print All command allows you to print multiple documents at one time. or Tri-GP CM. Applies To Logic Sheets. Reports Location Edit menu Print Report Command The Print Report command allows you to print the selected report. Applies To Reports Locations • • Print Report button Edit menu Printer Number The Printer Number property specifies the number used in the Printer parameter declared for the print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 project. Tagnames Location Edit menu Print Preview Command The Print Preview command displays the sheets to be printed. Users. You have the ability to select which documents you want to print. Trident 2. Reports. Applies To Project TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Logic Sheets.x. • • For Trident 1. For the TCM. Library Documents. the value must be from 1 to 10. Function Blocks.x CM. the value must be either 5 or 10.9.0 . Programs. Functions. Module Configuration. Project History. if the application includes safety-critical outputs.x Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network tab Program Execution List The Program Execution List property identifies the programs included in the application. Programs can be added. This is the default for Tricon NCM and Trident 1. Read/Write Other properties may need to be set to enable write access. or moved up and down in order. This is the default for Tricon ACM. See Disable Remote Changes to Outputs on page 513.0 .9. Setting Read Description An external device cannot write to any point. deleted. regardless of the settings for other properties.x CM. You should set this property to Read. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > NCM Setup Trident 1. v4.584 Appendix A Commands and Properties Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Printer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Printer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM Setup > Printer tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Printer tab Privilege The Privilege property specifies whether Read or Read/Write access is allowed by external devices. Applies To Application Location Application tree > Implementation > Execution List TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the Program command is set with the Set Programming Mode command in the Controller Panel. the Prohibit Writes property specifies whether to deny Honeywell workstations from writing to the application running on the Tricon controller. which means Honeywell workstations can write to memory and output tagnames.9. current and downloaded version.0 . the Program command is set by turning the keyswitch to PROGRAM. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers.585 Program Command The Program command allows you to implement or change an application in these ways: • • • Perform a Download All or Download Changes Disable points Change the values of points For Tricon controllers. or the SYS_SET_APP_LOCK function in a program. Applies To Application. controller Locations • • • Tricon keyswitch on PROGRAM Trident or Tri-GP Configuration tree > Controller Panel > Set Programming Mode command Trident or Tri-GP Application tree > Programs > SYS_SET_APP_LOCK function Prohibit Writes For Tricon controllers. Applies To Project Location Project menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Tricon HIM Module Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HIM Setup Project Description Command The Project Description command displays information about the project including the file name and location. The default is cleared. and controller type. 9. Tri-GP CM Tricon EICM. Controller acts as a slave to a Modbus master. TCM Trident CM. Tri-GP CM Tricon EICM. Communication Module Tricon TCM Tricon EICM Tricon TCM. Tri-GP CM Tricon NCM. Controller communicates with other controllers on an open network. Tri-GP CM Tricon EICM. The default path name and file extension is: • • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.0 . Controller acts as a Modbus master or slave. v4. Controller acts as a Modbus master on an open network.0\Projects Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. Controller acts as a slave to a Modbus master with data sent in pairs of ASCII characters.586 Appendix A Commands and Properties Project Files The Project File property specifies the path name for documents including projects and related files. Trident CM.9.x CM. Trident 2. Controller communicates with a TriStation PC. Controller acts as a Modbus master. TCM Trident CM.x CM/Tri-GP CM connect on a serial port.x CM communicates on an open network. Tri-GP MP and CM Tricon TCM.x CM. Tri-GP CM Tricon TCM. The EICM/TCM/Trident 2. Table 57 Protocol GPS Modbus Slave Modbus Slave ASCII Modbus Slave RTU Modbus TCP Slave Net Modbus Master Modbus TCP Master Modbus Master/Slave Peer-to-Peer TriStation Communication Module Available Protocols Description Controller receives time synchronization via the Global Positioning System.9. Trident CM. The NCM/TCM/Trident 1. Tri-GP CM Tricon TCM. TCM Trident CM. Trident MP and CM. Controller acts as a slave to a Modbus master on an open network. Trident 2. This table describes the protocols available with specific communication modules.0\Projects Applies To Project Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > Directories tab Protocol The Protocol property specifies the communication protocol used with the port. Controller acts as a slave to a Modbus master with data sent in 8-bit binary characters. NCM. Tri-GP CM TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The OPC protocol is supported only by model 4353 or 4354 TCMs. Configured in the TCM’s or CM’s access control list. or Trident 1. the TSAA protocol is supported only on NET 1 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.x CMs. the Pulses Per Revolution property specifies the number of pulses per revolution of the measuring shaft for the Pulse Input or Module.9. The default is 1.0 . or Tri-GP CM: TriStation. Additionally.587 Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM and NCM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP and CM Setup Protocols The Protocols property specifies the protocol(s) that a selected client can use to access the TCM.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Access List tab Pulses Per Revolution For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. and/or TSAA. Applies To Tricon or Tri-GP Pulse Input Module Location Tricon or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 TCMs.x CM. OPC. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Access List tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Access List tab Trident 2. Trident 2. then linking all the object code. Applies To ST programs and functions Locations • • Read Only button View menu Rebuild Application Command The Rebuild Application command builds an application by compiling all documents required by the programs in the execution list. and configuration information to form an executable application. or hours. Applies To Application Location Project menu Redo Command The Redo command reverses the last Undo command.9. library routines.588 Appendix A Commands and Properties Rate Type The Rate Type property specifies how the Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module is to measure pulse inputs. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.(Default) RPM: Used for pulses measured in the number of revolutions per minute of the shaft that connects a gear to the rotating equipment. v4.0 . Settings include: • • Speed: Used for pulses measured in seconds. Applies To Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module Location Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input or EPI Setup Read Only Command The Read Only command toggles between read only and edit in Structured Text programs and functions. minutes. You must use this command before other editing is done or the changes cannot be redone. 589 Applies To Programs. and function blocks Location Edit menu Reduce Font Size Command The Reduce Font Size command reduces the size of the font for the entire ST program or function. which means not redundant. Applies To Tricon ACM Module Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM Setup Refresh Command The Refresh command replaces the data on a report that is currently displayed with data from the reports database. functions. Applies To ST programs and functions Locations • Reduce Font Size button.9. you must first update the report database. Applies To Reports Location Refresh button on Project tree > Default Reports or User Reports folder TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.0 . the Redundant Mode property specifies whether there is a redundant Tricon ACM module in the installation. and then click Refresh. or View menu Redundant Mode For Tricon controllers. The default is cleared. If project changes are made. v4. memory.0 . TSAA. Applies To Tagnames for outputs Location Trident or Tri-GP MP > Item Properties > Module tab Remote Access to All Tagnames The Remote Access to All Tagnames property specifies whether external devices using the TSAA client/server protocol have read/write access to all tagnames (points) whether or not they have aliases.9. and Peerto-Peer communication. Applies To Application Location Trident or Tri-GP MP > Item Properties > Module tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. (Read access is always allowed for input. these properties must be set: • • The Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property on the Trident or Tri-GP MP Operating Parameters screen must be cleared. these properties must be set: • • The Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property on the Trident or Tri-GP MP Operating Parameters screen must be cleared. The default is selected. This property can be used for OPC.590 Appendix A Commands and Properties Remote Access to Aliased Tagnames The Remote Access to Aliased Tagnames property specifies whether external devices using the TSAA client/server protocol can write to output tagnames (points) that have aliases. The Privilege property must be set to Read/Write on the Trident CM or Tri-GP CM. The default is selected. In addition to setting this property. The Privilege property must be set to Read/Write on the Trident CM or Tri-GP CM. and Peer-to-Peer communication. and output points. TSAA.) This property must be used for DDE communication and can be used for OPC. In addition to setting this property. 9. from all test sheets. A maximum of 32 customized HTML Help files (. which means external devices are not allowed to write to aliases.chm) may be added to the TriStation 1131 Help menu. • • For Tricon controllers. The default is not enabled. Remote mode is set programmatically by enabling write access with the SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL function block in a program. Applies To Application.0 . For Trident or Tri-GP controllers.591 Remote Mode The Remote mode enables external (remote) devices to have read/write access to aliases in an application running on a controller. any invalid elements (each marked with a red X) that may be left over from previous builds or editing. Applies To Test sheets in the Emulator and controller Location Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Tools menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Remote mode is set by turning the keyswitch to REMOTE. Applies To Application Location Help menu > Options > Add or Remove Custom Help Files Remove Invalid Items (Red X’d) The Remove Invalid Items (Red X’d) command removes. tagnames Locations • • Tricon keyswitch set to REMOTE Trident or Tri-GP Application tree > Library Documents > Functions Remove File Command The Remove File command removes a custom Help file from the TriStation 1131 Help menu. controller. 3 -5 <0 0 5 Resolution Type Ranges and Returns Standard Resolution (Unipolar Input) 32767 (out-of-range under) 32767 (out-of-range under) 32767 (out-of-range under) 32767 (out-of-range under) 0 (minimum range) 4095 (maximum range) High Resolution (Unipolar Input) -32767 (out-of-range under) -32767 (out-of-range under) -32767 (out-of-range under) -32767 (out-of-range under) 0 (minimum range) 16383 (maximum range) High Resolution (Bipolar Input) -32767 (out-of-range under) -17366 (under-range) -16383 (minimum range) — 0 (minimum range) 16383 (maximum range) TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. this command will search and replace the specified text only in the selected items. The value returned is based on the input voltage. and the module type. Types include: • • Standard Resolution: Data resolution is 12 bits.3 -5. High Resolution: Data resolution is 14 bits. v4. The default is Standard Resolution. functions.9. The Single-Ended AI uses unipolar input.0 . This table identifies the ranges and returns. the resolution type. or variable names If you select items on a sheet first.592 Appendix A Commands and Properties Replace Command The Replace command searches and replaces specified text in programs. Applies To Editing Locations • • Replace Text button File menu Resolution Type The Resolution Type property specifies the resolution for the Tricon Single-Ended and Differential AI Modules (models 3720 and 3721 only). Table 58 Input (volts) <-5. function blocks. you can go back to the defaults by clicking Restore.3 >5.0 . if the Apply command has not been used. Applies To Trident or Tri-GP MP Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Operating Parameters tab Restore Command The Restore command returns the previous settings for the item. For example.9. Applies To Project elements Location Item Properties TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. The default is cleared.593 Table 58 Input (volts) 5. the Restart on Power Up property specifies whether the controller automatically restarts on power up. if you changed the default values for a property such as the Initial Value.3 Resolution Type Ranges and Returns (continued) Standard Resolution (Unipolar Input) 4341 (over-range) 32767 (out-of-range over) High Resolution (Unipolar Input) 17366 (over-range) 32767 (out-of-range over) High Resolution (Bipolar Input) 17366 (over-range) 32767 (out-of-range over) Applies To AI Modules Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Single-Ended and Differential AI Setup Restart on Power Up For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. which means the controller is not automatically restarted on power up. You can then save the file to a name with a project file extension. PEER_333_1_4120e077. when the system is powered up the memory point uses the value it had prior to the power failure.9. Applies To Project Location File menu Retentive The Retentive property specifies whether the value of a memory point is retained if a power failure occurs. v4.DWLD.594 Appendix A Commands and Properties Restore Project Command The Restore Project command allows you to open a backup file named project_name. When a download is successful. For input and output points. If selected.BT2. The default is cleared. For example.0 . such as project_name. a backup file of the project is automatically created with the major version. and the extension DWLD. Only memory points can be specified as retentive. Applies To Project Location File menu Restore Project To Last Download Command The Restore Project To Last Download command restores the project that was last successfully downloaded to the controller. minor version. time stamp. the value retained after a power failure is either zero or the value set for the Initial Value property. which means the value is not retained. Applies To Memory points Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Declaration tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.PT2. 0 . The first element in every network must be linked to the left power rail. Applies To LD logic sheets Locations • • Right Power Rail button Tools menu > Select Tools Roll Backward or Forward Command The Roll Backward or Forward command displays all the project changes made since the last save. double-click the rail and use the + or – buttons. which is considered On at all times.595 Right Power Rail Command The Right Power Rail command allows you to place a right power rail on a logic sheet to delimit the LD network. Applies To Project Location Edit menu Routing Configuration The Routing Configuration property displays the Destination IP Address. the changes are incorporated and the listing is cleared. and Default Gateway IP Address for the node. To change the height of the rail. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Routing tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Routing tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Routing tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. The left power rail is automatically included when a new logic sheet is created. and allows you to roll backward or forward to a specific change. After the project is saved.9. IP Subnet Mask. and can be explicit or implicit. The right power rail has an undefined status. v4.0 . but you must copy the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation 1131.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Routing tab Run Command The Run command executes an application in the controller or Emulator. • Applies To Application. CAUTION Applies To Project TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. programs Locations • • Run button Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu RUNNING State The RUNNING state is an application state which indicates the application is downloaded and running in the controller or Emulator.9. Applies To Application Location Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu or Title bar Save As Command The Save As command saves a project under a different name or folder. the Run command is unavailable if the SYS_APP_HALT function is set to halt execution programmatically. Projects may be saved to a server or network drive for backup purposes. The Run command is unavailable if the keyswitch is set to STOP or REMOTE.596 Appendix A Commands and Properties • Trident 2. Programs to be executed must be included on the Program Execution List. TriStation 1131 projects must always be saved to a local drive. the Run command is only available when the keyswitch is set to the RUN or PROGRAM mode. • For Tricon controllers. element. Applies To Project Location File menu Save Project Command The Save Project command saves an open project. Projects may be saved to a server or network drive for backup purposes. CAUTION TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Project Location Save Element button. which includes the Execution List. SOE Configuration. or File menu Save History Command The Save History command exports the project history log to a text file.0 .597 Location File menu Save Element Command The Save Element command saves an open element. action.9. Applies To Project Location Project menu Save Implementation The Save Implementation command saves the changes made to the Implementation area. but you must copy the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation 1131. and comment for the change. TriStation 1131 projects must always be saved to a local drive. user. and Peer-to-Peer Configuration. Each item includes the date. To Convert Pulses per second Pulses per minute Pulses per hour Set Scale to 0.9.598 Appendix A Commands and Properties Applies To Project Locations • • Save Project button File menu Save View Command The Save View command saves a view of a matrix. This table shows the correct scale factor to use for converting pulse input signals into seconds.016667 1. the Scale Factor property can be used to adjust the RPM measurement when the measuring shaft rotates at a different rate from the output shaft. Speed =((Pulses /Minute)/Number of Gear Teeth) x Scale TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Speed =(Pulses /Minute) x Scale RPM Measurement This formula scales RPM measurements under special circumstances.000000 (default) 60. The default is 1. For example. and hours. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > View menu Scale Factor The Scale Factor property specifies how to convert pulse input signals into engineering units. minutes. which is a display of a selected portion of the matrix. v4. You can create a view by hiding or showing columns and rows on the matrix. either by using menu commands or by dragging columns and rows on the matrix. The number must be a positive real number.000000 Speed Measurement This formula converts speed measurement to different engineering units.0 . The default is pulses per minute. Saving the view allows you to load it anytime. The controller determines a valid range for the scan time based on these operations: • • • • Reads inputs Executes the application Processes messages Writes outputs If the application is running. After the application is built and downloaded. • • • For Tricon controllers (3006/3007 MP). the scan time is doubled for one scan immediately following the command. the maximum scan time is 450 milliseconds. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9. To determine what the actual. the scan time can be set to a number different from the requested number without downloading the application.599 Applies To Pulse Input Configuration Location Controller tree > Configuration Panel > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input Setup Scan Time The Scan Time property specifies the requested number of milliseconds for a scan (execution of the application) on the controller. see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (sold separately). For example. For Tricon controllers (3008 MP). if the normal scan time is 100 ms. the maximum scan time is 500 milliseconds. the controller determines an actual scan time range and uses the specified scan time if it falls within these limits. requested and surplus scan times are. For all controllers. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. The number is requested before an application is built. the default is 200 milliseconds. CAUTION When a Download Changes command is issued. the scan following a Download Changes would be 200 ms. the maximum scan time is 450 milliseconds.0 . Applies To Application Location Application tree > Implementation > Execution List Search Text Command The Search Text command allows you to search for text in a report. 9. 05. a user with security level 03 has access to operations for security levels 04.9 and 10. 08.0 .600 Appendix A Commands and Properties Applies To Reports Location Search Text button Security Command The Security command opens the Security dialog box. 06. For example. Applies To Security Location Project menu > Security command > Users tab Select Function Block Command The Select Function Block command displays a dialog box that allows you to select a function block to add to a program. which allows user access to be created and modified. 0. 07. Applies To User security Locations • • Security button Project menu Security Level The Security Level property specifies the level of security for the user. Settings include: • • Level 01 is the highest security level Level 10 is the lowest security level Each level allows access to its own operations and the operations associated with all lower levels. Applies To Programs Locations • Select Function Block Element button TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. You must select at least one element (input.9.601 • Tools menu > Select Tool > Function Block Select Network Contents Command The Select Network Contents command selects all the elements in a network for the current document. Applies To Communication TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To Logic sheets in user documents. Applies To Editing Location Edit menu Select Sheet Contents Command The Select Sheet Contents command selects all the elements on the current logic sheet.0 . Applies To Editing Location Edit menu Selection Tool The Selection Tool command changes the cursor to a selection tool. test sheets in Emulator and controller Locations • • Selection Tool button Tools menu > Select Tool Serial Port The Serial Port property specifies the port on the TriStation PC that is connected to the controller. output variable) before using this command. which allows you to select elements. Open the TriStation 1131 project that is running in the controller. without having to download again. Applies To Controller Location Configuration tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Set Editor Options Command The Set Editor Options command specifies how to set tabs. if you want to change only the time zone location. Properties include: • • • Tabs on page 621 Font Size on page 537 Auto Scroll Delay on page 487 Applies To ST Language TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Click Yes when asked whether to set the calendar clock to the current configuration. you can also use the Set Time Zone command (see page 604). This command changes both the clock time and the time zone on the controller so that it matches the clock time and time zone set on the TriStation PC. On the Configuration tree. On the Commands menu. Before using the Set Calendar Clock command. and auto-scroll delay. click Connect.602 Appendix A Commands and Properties Location Controller tree > Configuration tree > TriStation Communication Set Calendar Clock Command The Set Calendar Clock command sets the controller clock to the TriStation PC time. v4. If the accuracy of the controller clock degrades over time. you should ensure the PC is set to the correct local time. font size. Note On the Tricon controller. right-click the time icon in the message bar or open the Date/Time dialog box from the Control Panel. Ensure the PC is set to the correct local time. you can reset the clock while the application is running. Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the TriStation PC. When you download and run a TriStation 1131 application. the controller automatically sets its clock to the TriStation PC time.9. and then click Set Calendar Clock.0 . double-click the Controller Panel. the maximum is 450 milliseconds. The default setting is Enable Programming and Control. the Set Programming Mode command specifies whether changes to the application are allowed. The scan time must be within the minimum and maximum range.603 Location View menu Set Programming Mode Command For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. the maximum time is 450 milliseconds. changing scan time. Applies To Application TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. the maximum is 500 milliseconds. To use this command. Disable Programming and Control The Set Programming Mode command is unavailable if the SYS_SET_APP_LOCK function has been set to prohibit (lock out) changes programmatically.0 . For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. controller Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Set Scan Time Command The Set Scan Time command specifies. Setting Enable Programming and Control Description Allowed changes include: Download Changes and Download All commands. Changing the scan time on the Set Scan Time screen does not change the scan time for the project. To change the time for the project. how often the Emulator or controller performs a scan. you must set the time on the Execution List. For Tricon 3008 MPs. you can set the scan time between the minimum and maximum times.9. The maximum time is determined by the type of controller. Applies To Application. changing the values of variables. The minimum time is determined by the controller after the application is downloaded. in milliseconds. the application must be downloaded to the controller. Prohibits all changes to the application. and changing the operational mode. • • • For Tricon 3006/3007 MPs. The scan time must be larger than the AI and DI poll times. For Trident or Tri-GP systems. Applies To Variables on test sheets in the Controller and Emulator Panels Location Item Properties > Variable tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . if you perform a Download Changes operation. and then click Set Time Zone. However. the time zone is not set automatically. v4. Ensure the PC is set to the correct local time zone. On the Configuration tree. Applies To Controller Location Tricon Configuration tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Set Value The Set Value property specifies the value for the variable during testing on the controller or Emulator.9. Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the TriStation PC. click Confirm when specifying the value on the Variable tab. Use this command to manually set or change the time zone on the Tricon controller. you should ensure the PC is set to the correct local time zone. When you perform a Download All and run a TriStation 1131 application. Note This command applies to the Tricon controller only. right-click the time icon in the message bar or open the Date/Time dialog box from the Control Panel. To ensure the value is valid for the data type. On the Commands menu. double-click the Controller Panel. click Connect.604 Appendix A Commands and Properties Location Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Set Time Zone Command The Set Time Zone command sets the Tricon controller clock to the time zone you select. Click Yes when asked whether to set the time zone to the current configuration. Before using the Set Time Zone command. To change the time zone on the Trident or Tri-GP controller. Open the TriStation 1131 project that is running in the controller. the Tricon controller automatically sets its time zone location to the time zone defined in the TriStation PC. see Set Calendar Clock Command on page 602. and function blocks. The sheet title is displayed in the title block. Adds a new sheet before an existing sheet. Displays the next sheet. test sheets in Controller and Emulator Panels Locations • Sheet Manager button. and the Window Menu list. Includes the following sheet templates: • Sheet A — 8. Deletes the selected sheet. Adds a new sheet after an existing sheet.9. which provide the workspace for developing programs.. Allows you to change the text associated with macros which are identified by a pencil icon.5" x 11" • Sheet B — 11" x 17" (default) • Sheet C — 17" x 22" • Sheet D — 22" x 34" Applies To Logic sheets in user documents. functions. Allows you to append. The Sheets menu includes these commands: Command Sheet Title Edit Sheet Macros Next Sheet Previous Sheet Append Sheet Insert Sheet Delete Sheet Manage Sheets Select Sheet Template. Also allows you to change the sheet title and to display (go to) the selected sheet. insert. which means that programs can only read tagnames that have the same Application type. and delete sheets. or Sheets menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.605 Shared Read The Shared Read property specifies whether a program can read a tagname that is a different Application type. For example. Applies To Tagnames Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Declaration tab Sheets Menu The Sheets menu includes commands that allow you to change the properties of logic sheets. it cannot be read by a Safety program unless Shared Read is checked.. Displays the previous sheet. if the tagname is a Control type.0 . The default is cleared. the window caption bar. Description Edits the title of the current sheet. Applies To FBD and LD programs and functions Location View menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Typical threshold values are 10 to 48 ohms.606 Appendix A Commands and Properties Shorted Point Alarm Threshold The Shorted Point Alarm Threshold property specifies the number of ohms below which values are alarmed as a shorted load.9. Applies To CEM programs Location View menu Show Grid Command The Show Grid command toggles on and off to show or hide dotted grid lines. Applies To Tricon DO points Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > DO Setup Show Causes for Selected Effect Command The Show Causes for Selected Effects command displays the causes of all selected effects in a CEM program. Applies To CEM programs Location View menu Show Effects for Selected Causes Command The Show Effects for Selected Causes command displays the effects of all selected causes in a CEM program.535 ohms. This option is only available if the points are supervised. The available range is 0 to 65.0 . v4. Available only with the model 3625 Digital Output Module. The default is 10 ohms. Applies To FBD and LD programs and functions Location View menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.607 Show IEC Representation The Show IEC Representation command toggles between displaying the IEC (International Electro-Technical Commission) representation and the TriStation 1131 graphical view. Applies To FBD and LD programs and functions Location View menu Show Line Numbers Command The Show Line Numbers command toggles to display or show line numbers in a ST program or function. Applies To ST programs and functions Locations • • Line Numbers button View menu Show Zones Command The Zones command toggles on and off to show or hide network zone lines.9. Applies To FBD and LD programs and functions Location View menu Show Network Numbers Command The Network Number command toggles on and off to show or hide network numbers.0 . 000 milliseconds. the default is 0.608 Appendix A Commands and Properties Signal Delays The Signal Delays property adjusts the timing of data transmission to Modbus devices that use hardware handshake. Enter the delay in milliseconds. Enter the EICM port number. 0 to 10.000. Setting Signal Delays for Tricon EICM Signal delays are set by using the MBWRITE function blocks in a program. enter 40001. Procedure 1 2 3 Set the Handshake property to Hardware on the Tricon EICM Setup screen. The RTS (Request to Send) signal opens and closes the data transmission channel. The CTS (Clear to Send) signal indicates the transmitting station that it is ready to receive data. Applies To Modbus Communication Locations • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Serial Ports tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Specify these parameters in the function block. Enter the slave station address. For RTS. enter 40004.0 . Signal delays adjust the timing for CTS and RTS signals for Modbus devices that have slow throughput or other limitations. Parameter Alias Port Station D01 Action For CTS. The CTS Pre-delay setting specifies the number of milliseconds to keep the channel open after data is transmitted. Add an MBWRITE function block for each type of delay (CTS and RTS) you want to specify. The settings can be from 0 to 10.9. The RTS predelay setting specifies the number of milliseconds to wait before the data is transmitted. v4. which is a method of ensuring devices are ready to receive data. 609 Single Step Command The Single Step command executes a single scan of the application in the controller or Emulator.0 . Applies To Application Locations • • Single Step button Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu Size/Alignment Command The Size/Alignment command includes commands that specify whether to increase or decrease the size of the element and how to align the element. The subcommands include: • Same Width • Same Height • Same Size • Align Left • Align Right • Align Top • Align Bottom • Center Horizontally • Center Vertically • Space Across • Space Down Applies To Comments. variables Location Right-click an element Size/Hide Columns Command The Size/Hide Columns command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the font size and hide or unhide the columns. For example. constants.9. The commands apply actions to the other elements using the currently selected element as the reference. the Same Width command changes all other elements to the same width as the selected element. Applies To CEM programs Locations • • Size/Hide Columns button View menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Applies To CEM programs Locations • • Size/Hide Rows button View menu Slot Selection The Slot Selection property specifies the physical slot where the communication module you want to configure is installed. A TCM can be configured in the right slot only if a TCM in the left slot has already been configured. • Slot selection rules for the Trident v2. If you have configured TCMs in both the left and right slots. you can select either the Left or Right slot. you must select the Left slot.x CM or Tri-GP CM: • The logical COM slot can hold two CMs—one in the Left physical slot. v4.9.610 Appendix A Commands and Properties Size/Hide Comment Column Command The Size/Hide Comment Column command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the font size and hide or unhide the comment. you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the TCM installed in the right slot.0 . Slot selection rules for the TCM: • • • If the TCM you are configuring is installed in the COM slot. and then you uninstall the TCM in the left slot. If the TCM is installed in any other available logical slot. You must re-install a TCM in the left slot before you can modify the configuration of the TCM in the right slot. and one in the right physical slot. Applies To CEM programs Location View menu Size/Hide Rows Command The Size/Hide Rows command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the font size and hide or unhide the rows. and one in the Right physical slot. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Each logical slot can hold two TCMs—one in the left physical slot. Applies To Time synchronization Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM/OPC Setup > Time Sync tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Time Sync tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Time Sync tab Trident 2.611 • • A CM can be configured in the Right slot only if a CM in the Left slot has already been configured.0 . you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the CM installed in the right slot. You must re-install a CM in the left slot before you can modify the configuration of the CM in the right slot. and you then uninstall the CM in the left slot.9. Applies To Communication Locations • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network and Routing tabs SNTP Master IP Address The SNTP Master IP Address property specifies the IP Address for the master node using the Simple Network Time Protocol. If you have configured CMs in both the left and right slots. Applies To Time synchronization Locations • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Time Sync tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Time Sync tab SNTP Master Network The SNTP Master Network property specifies the network on which the master node is located. There are 16 SOE blocks. Applies To Sequence of Events (SOE) Location Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration tree > double-click a block TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. see the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide. Each Primary block can have only one Redundant block. see the Triconex SOE Recorder v4.9. see the SOE Recorder User’s Guide.2 User’s Guide. For more information. each containing a time stamp and one or more data entries. The default is Primary. v4. Primary blocks are collected by an instance of SOE Recorder running in Primary mode. For more information. The block header contains the block type. the buffer size.612 Appendix A Commands and Properties • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Time Sync tab Trident 2. Applies To Sequence of Events (SOE) Locations • • Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HMM Setup SOE Block Assignments The SOE Block Assignments property specifies the SOE blocks that the tagname is assigned to for purposes of collecting SOE data. Applies To Sequence of Events (SOE) Location Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration > double-click the row for the tagname SOE Block Collection Mode The SOE Block Collection Mode property specifies the collection mode for the block.0 .x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Time Sync tab SOE Block The SOE Block property identifies a data structure in the MP memory. For more information. and a list of the event variables assigned to the block. and are collected only by an instance of SOE Recorder running in Redundant mode. Redundant blocks are copies of an existing Primary block. The buffer stores the event entries. Manual blocks are collected by an external DCS or an instance of SOE Recorder running in Custom mode. For more information. see the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide. The default is Automatic. For OPC configuration. see the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide. Applies To Sequence of Events (SOE). Applies To Sequence of Events (SOE) Location Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration tree > double-click a block SOE Block Number The SOE Block Number property specifies the block number used when events are retrieved by SOE Recorder or an OPC client.2 User’s Guide. For more information on using SOE Recorder. see the Triconex SOE Recorder v4.9. Applies To Sequence of Events (SOE) Location Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration tree > double-click a block SOE Block Name The SOE Block Name property specifies the name of the SOE block.0 . OPC communication Locations • • Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Protocols tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. must be unique for each TCM installed in a system. Applies only to model 4353/4354 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs). Automatic blocks are automatically collected by an instance of SOE Recorder running in either Primary or Redundant mode. The default value is 0 (not configured). For more information.613 SOE Block Collection Type The SOE Block Collection Type property specifies the event collection behavior type for the block. When the buffer is full. new event entries are discarded. Blocks 15 and 16 are modified external blocks that are reserved for use with the Safety Manager Module (SMM). the oldest event entries are overwritten when the buffer is full. Modified External The Modified External Block Type setting is used for event retrieval with the Safety Manager Module (SMM). Historical The Historical Block Type setting is typically used to monitor current events in SOE Recorder application. When events are collected by the external device. or History types. is retrieving events from a controller on a continual basis. however. see the Triconex SOE Recorder User’s Guide. First Out. There are 16 SOE blocks available. Only blocks 15 and 16 can be specified as Modified External. Blocks 1 through 14 can use any combination of External. The SMM is the Triconex communication interface with the Honeywell Universal Control Network (UCN). First Out The First Out Block Type setting is typically used to retrieve the first and subsequent events that led to a trip.0 . such as a Foxboro or Honeywell DCS or PC running SOE Recorder.9. New events are discarded. If the TriStation 1131 application does not clear and restart recording. Modified External. When the buffer is full. External The External Block Type setting is typically used when an external device. For more information. Types include: External. event data is cleared from the block. discarded. and Unassigned. Applies To Sequence of events (SOE) Location Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration tree > Blocks TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The default is Unassigned.614 Appendix A Commands and Properties SOE Block Type The SOE Block Type property specifies how the events are saved. An external device can collect events at any time. First Out. or cleared from the buffer. the Main Processors change the block’s status from collecting to stopped. v4. which is one of the principal networks of the Honeywell TCD 3000 Distributed Control System. the collection does not clear the block. Sequence of Events (SOE) Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HRDI Setup TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.000 events (320.000 bytes). Applies To Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module. meaning any subsequent transition will generate an event as long as the previous transition on the same point has been collected and cleared. A longer dead time interval is better able to prevent the higher-level SOE application from being flooded with events. but it also means there is a higher chance of losing subsequent transition events. You must change the project state to Download All prior to changing the size of the SOE buffer. before a subsequent transition will be reported. Applies To Sequence of Events (SOE) Location Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration tree > Blocks SOE Dead Time Defines the length of time (in seconds) after a transition. with an accuracy of 10 msec or less. It does not mean that every transition on the same point will generate an event. You cannot change the SOE Buffer Size while the project is in the Download Changes state. The available range is 0 to 250 sec.9. as a transition on the same point that occurs too soon—before the previous event is cleared—may be missed.000 events (1 MB). the default is 0. any subsequent transitions will be reported only after the dead time interval has elapsed. The maximum number is 20. each containing a 8-byte time stamp and one or more 8-byte data entries. The maximum buffer size across all blocks is 60.615 SOE Buffer Size The SOE Buffer Size property specifies the size of the buffer in the SOE block. based on the number of events. Once a transition on the selected point has occurred. The default is 0.The buffer stores the event entries.0 . When SOE is enabled.0 . Point transitions will be reported when the Boolean value changes from True to False (1 to 0). Applies only to model 4353/4354 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs). The default is Disabled. Rising/Falling: SOE is enabled for the point. Rising: SOE is enabled for the point. the module will time stamp and record point transitions for the selected point.616 Appendix A Commands and Properties SOE Severity The SOE Severity property specifies the severity (priority) level for SOE system events retrieved by an OPC client. Point transitions will be reported for both Rising and Falling changes (False to True. or True to False). Applies To Sequence of Events (SOE). The default is 500.9. Falling: SOE is enabled for the point. Sequence of Events (SOE) Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HRDI Setup SOE Trigger Time Defines the number of milliseconds (with an accuracy of 1 msec or less) a signal must be stable before its change in state (transition) causes the reporting of an event. A longer trigger time results in a longer debounce period. so that pulse widths that fall within the debounce period will not be reported as an event. OPC communication Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Protocols tab SOE Trigger State Determines if SOE is enabled for a selected point on the HRDI module. The available range is 0 to 250 msec. then enter x-1 msec. Applies To Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module. • • • • Disabled: SOE is not enabled for the point. v4. Point transitions will not be reported. Also known as the debounce period. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Point transitions will be reported when the Boolean value changes from False to True (0 to 1). • If any trigger with a pulse width larger than x msec needs to be reported as an event. 9. The sort order controls how the information is displayed in the OPC client. Applies To Tagnames (OPC) Location Project menu > Project Options > Download Options tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. A trigger with a pulse width smaller than 1 msec may or may not generate an event. This table. with information about the tagnames and system variables configured in the project. meaning there is no debounce period: • • A trigger with a pulse width larger than 1 msec will always generate an event.617 • If any trigger with a pulse width smaller than x msec needs to be filtered out (not reported as an event). The sort order controls how the information is displayed in the OPC client. Applicable only if a model 4353 or 4354 Tricon Communication Module (TCM) is installed in the Tricon controller. is downloaded to the TCM/OPC’s embedded OPC server during a Download All or Download Changes operation. regardless of their group assignments. Applies To Tagnames (OPC) Location Project menu > Project Options > Download Options tab Sort by Tagname The Sort by Tagname property organizes the tagnames table alphabetically. The default is 0. nonhierarchical list. where tagnames are organized according to the groups they are assigned to. then enter x+1 msec. in a single. Sequence of Events (SOE) Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HRDI Setup Sort by Group The Sort by Group property organizes the tagnames table in an hierarchical list. This table. Applicable only if a model 4353 or 4354 Tricon Communication Module (TCM) is installed in the Tricon controller. Applies To Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module. is downloaded to the TCM/OPC’s embedded OPC server during a Download All or Download Changes operation.0 . with information about the tagnames and system variables configured in the project. 9. select New Tagnames TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The Increment property specifies the number to increase each time a variable or tagname is named. The default value is 1 for both properties. using the same function block instance more than once on a function block diagram results in a WF0031 warning—whereas there is no such warning for a space saver function block. For Triconex Library function blocks. See also Enhanced Security on page 530. Note If a function block is not a space saver. When selected.0 . output. a user name and password is required to open TriStation 1131. Applies To User security Location Project menu > Security > Security dialog box > Security Setting tab Start Value and Increment The Start Value property specifies the beginning letter or number to use when naming multiple variables or tagnames. and memory points Locations • • • Item Properties > Auto Name > Auto Name button Tools menu > Auto Name Selected Items Application tree > Tagname Declarations > right-click. For user-defined function blocks. v4. This is the default setting. you can specify this setting. No other user authentication is required. • • Applies To Library and user-defined function blocks Location Function Blocks > Document Properties > Usage tab Standard Security The Standard Security property sets the application-level security setting to Standard. the setting cannot be changed. Applies To Comments and variables in user documents Input.618 Appendix A Commands and Properties Space Saver The Space Saver property means a single instance can be executed more than once per scan to reduce memory usage and increase performance. 0 . Applies To Application. Before using the stopping the application. Stop mode is set by turning the keyswitch to the STOP position. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. • • For Tricon controllers. The default is 1 bit. Retentive outputs retain the values they had before the application was halted. controller Locations • • • Tricon keyswitch set to STOP Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Trident or Tri-GP Application tree > Library Documents > Functions TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. but is not required for service of the controller.9. Stop mode is set by using the SYS_APP_HALT function in a program.619 Stop Bits The Stop Bits property specifies whether to transmit 1 bit or 2 bits after each character to notify the receiving computer that the transmission of a byte of data is complete. Stop mode is useful for installation and service of external equipment. the Halt command should be used to halt the application. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP and CM Setup > Serial Ports tab Stop Mode Stop mode stops the TriStation 1131 application from reading field inputs and forces nonretentive digital and analog outputs to zero. Applies To Functions..620 Appendix A Commands and Properties Supports Application Defined States The Supports Application Defined States property specifies whether to allow user-defined functions to include a variable that stores application states. Inputs property specifies whether a specific userdefined function can be used in a cause row.. function blocks Location Document menu > Item Properties > Attributes tab Supports Use in Effect Columns With.. The default is cleared.. and effect internal variables.. which means not enabled. Invensys-supplied functions do not have to be enabled. The default is cleared. Inputs The Supports Use in Cause Rows with. v4. function blocks Location Document menu > Item Properties > Attributes tab Supports Use in Cause Rows with. If included.0 . The default is cleared.. Invensys-supplied functions do not have to be enabled. the variable stores application states and is evaluated in the same way as the cause. which means not enabled. Outputs The Supports Use in Effect Columns with. function blocks Location Document menu > Item Properties > Attributes tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. intersection.. Applies To Functions. which means not enabled. Applies To Functions. Application state inputs and outputs must be a DWORD data type 32-bit string.9.. Outputs property specifies whether a specific userdefined function can be used in an effect column. where 1 is the lowest and 1000 is the highest. The default is cleared. which means not enabled. Minor. Applies To OPC communication Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Protocols tab Tabs The Tabs property specifies the number of tab settings used in the Structured Text code. Major.0 . Invensys-supplied functions do not have to be enabled. The severity level identifies the urgency or priority of an event. Applies To ST Language Location View menu > Set Editor Options TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. function blocks Location Document menu > Item Properties > Attributes tab System Events Severity The System Events Severity properties identify the severity levels of the different types of Tricon system events (Info. The default is 8. Applies To Functions.621 Supports Use in Intersections The Supports Use in Intersections property specifies whether a specific user-defined function can be used in an intersection.9. Enter 0 to prevent the TCM’s OPC server from sending event notifications for the selected event type. Applies only to model 4353/4354 TCMs. and Fatal) available through the TCM’s embedded OPC server. Trident. Applies To Project Locations • • • • File menu > New Project or > Select Main Processor File menu > Open Project > Select Main Processor Tricon. You cannot change the project’s target system version while the project is in the Download Changes state. the default is 9100. and duplicate port numbers are allowed in a Modbus configuration. or Tri-GP Controller tree > Operating Parameters TCP Port Number The TCP Port property specifies a port number used by a network device in a Modbus configuration. It also determines which controller features and modules can be configured in a project. • • For a Modbus TCP port. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. output. Changing the target system version requires a Download All. the default is 502.x CM. When changing the target system version. Trident. v4. output.9. The name comes from the use of tags tied to field points. or when you convert a project from a previous version of TriStation 1131. Trident 2. it generally refers to points.622 Appendix A Commands and Properties Tagname The Tagname property specifies the name of an input. In TriStation 1131. or Tri-GP CM. or memory point. or by a printer. or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Replace MPs Tricon. There are no reserved TCP port numbers.0 . Tagnames cannot begin with an underscore. Applies To Input. you cannot be connected to the controller. For a printer connected to the Tricon TCM. The target system version is configured when you create a project. and memory points Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Declaration tab Target System Version The Target System Version property specifies the version of the controller that the project will be downloaded to. Tagnames can include up to 31 alphanumeric (A to Z and 0 to 9) characters and the underscore (_) character. x CM.0\Temp Applies To Project Location Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > Directories tab Terminal The Terminal property displays the names of the input and output terminals for the function or function block included with the selected cause.0\Temp Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. The default path name is: • • Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4. Temporary Files The Temporary Files property specifies the path name for documents which include temporary files created by TriStation 1131 or other utilities. 9101. Extensible functions do not have terminal names. This information should be available with the printer instructions. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. The default is blank. the TCP Port property specifies a port number specified by a printer manufacturer. An HP JetDirect print server with three ports uses port numbers 9100.0 . or effect.9. • • Applies To Communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Printer and Modbus TCP tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Printer and Modbus TCP tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Printer and Modbus TCP tabs Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Printer tab TCP Port Restrictions See Highest TCP Port Number on page 542 and Lowest TCP Port Number on page 555.623 • For the Trident 1. and 9102.9. intersection. An HP JetDirect print server with one port uses port number 9100.9. C=10. All: Both pull-up/pull-down and standard resistors are used. This is the default.624 Appendix A Commands and Properties Applies To CEM programs Location Variable Detail Table Terminals See Double Space on page 516 and EN/ENO on page 523. B=8. Resistor: Resistors are used at each end of the cables. v4. and D=10. This option is only available with RS-485 Transceiver Mode.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Serial Ports tab Text Size The Text Size property specifies the point size for the text. Termination Options The Termination Options property specifies whether resistors are used to terminate the Modbus cable connections. The defaults are: A=6. Options include: • • • • None: The cables are not terminated. Applies To Modbus communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Serial Ports tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports tab Trident 2. Pull-Up/Pull-Down Resistors: Pull-up/pull-down resistors are used. from 3 to 24 points. Applies To Comments TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 .9. 0 .625 Locations • • Properties > Comment tab Project menu > Project Options > Annotations tab Time After Trip The Time After Trip property specifies the number of minutes after the trip to continue collecting events for the trip snapshot. Applies To SOE Location Application > Implementation > double-click SOE Configuration branch Time Synchronization The Time Synchronization properties specify whether and how time is synchronized for the controller. the maximum is 10 minutes. Applies To SOE Location Application > Implementation > double-click SOE Configuration branch Time Before Trip The Time Before Trip property specifies the number of minutes before the trip to begin collecting events for the trip snapshot.9. the maximum is 10 minutes. On NET 1 enable time synchronization with Trident Master Node On NET 2 enable time synchronization with Trident Master Node TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. which means time synchronization is not used. The minimum is two minutes. Controller Tricon ACM Tricon ACM Tricon NCM Tricon SMM Tricon TCM Trident 1. The default is two minutes.x CM Property On NET 1 enable time synchronization with external source On NET 2 enable time synchronization with Tricon Master Node On NET 1 enable time synchronization with Tricon Master Node Enable time synchronization with external source See Time Synchronization Configuration on page 626. the following properties can be specified. The minimum is two minutes. Depending on the controller. The default is cleared. The default is two minutes. x CM or Tri-GP CM.x CM.x CM or Tri-GP CM.626 Appendix A Commands and Properties Controller Trident 2. or Tri-GP CM. Simple Network Time Protocol with two TCMs. Time synchronization based on the GPS interface and one TCM module. Option None GPS GPS Redundant SNTP Redundant SNTP Peer-to-Peer Description No time synchronization. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Time Sync tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Time Sync tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Time Sync tab Trident 2.x CM or Tri-GP CM Property See Time Synchronization Configuration on page 626. Simple Network Time Protocol with one TCM or CM. These options are available. v4. Not applicable on the Trident 2.0 . Trident 2. Triconex Time Synchronization based on the master node in the Peer-toPeer network. Not applicable on the Trident 2. NCM.x Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network tab Trident 2. SMM. TCM Setup Trident 1.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Time Sync tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Applies To Controller Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM. Time synchronization based on the GPS interface and two TCM modules.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Time Sync tab Time Synchronization Configuration The Time Synchronization Configuration property specifies the type of synchronization to be performed by the TCM.9. If you have a switch.x CM. you can select Full Duplex or Half Duplex. both network peers can transmit at the same time. Connections to the TCM’s embedded OPC server can be made only at 100 Mbps. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > right-click in the FBD Network Transceiver Mode The Transceiver Mode property specifies the type of physical connection. or Tri-GP CM on NET 2. Choosing the Appropriate Ethernet Port Setting • If Auto-Negotiate is selected.627 Toggle Terminal Inverter Command The Toggle Terminal Inverter command toggles the inversion state of an input or output terminal on the selected function or function block. Trident CM. This setting is typically used only for applications with high-bandwidth requirements. the module will connect at either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. you must select 100 Mbps as the communication mode. Trident CM. Ethernet Port Settings For TCM. If Half Duplex is selected. or 4354 TCM with fiber connectors. only one network peer can transmit at a time. 4352B. depending on the speed of the connection. only) 10 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex (Tricon TCM. and Tri-GP CM will always negotiate to Half Duplex. a small circle appears at the terminal connection. When the terminal is inverted. only) 100 Mbps Full Duplex (Tricon TCM. Trident CM. • • TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. The TCM.0 . you cannot select 10 Mbps as the communication mode on NET 2. If you have a network hub. only) If you have a model 4352. or Tri-GP CM on NET 2. or Tri-GP CM Ethernet ports. If you have a model 4353 TCM. Trident 2. Trident CM. settings include: • • • • • Note Auto-Negotiate (Tricon TCM.9. If Full Duplex is selected. or Tri-GP CM on NET 2. 4352A. you must select Half Duplex. These TCMs cannot negotiate the connection speed or connect at 10 Mbps. the communication module enables its RS-485 transmit driver only when it is sending data. Trident CM. In other words. or Tri-GP CM port 3.x CM port 3. RS-485 Transceiver Mode with Handshake With the Handshake property set to Hardware. Use this setting for all single-pair networks and for slave ports in two-pair. With the Handshake property set to Hardware. settings include: • • RS-232 for point-to-point communication over distances up to 50 feet RS-485 for multi-point communication over distances up to 4. The communication module begins transmission when it receives a Clear to Send (CTS) signal from the Modbus master. Hardware handshake can be used with Tricon TCM.628 Appendix A Commands and Properties Serial Port Settings For Serial Ports. the communication module asserts RTS at all times and ignores CTS and DCD.0 . and the characters would have to be re-transmitted. RS-485 cannot be used for a TriStation serial connection on TCM port 4.000 feet RS-232 Transceiver Mode with Handshake Hardware handshake is a method for controlling the flow of serial communication between two devices which uses a separate wire to send a signal when the receiving device is read to receive the signal. Trident 2. the communication module transmits characters even if the receiving device is not ready. and Tri-GP CM. v4. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Network and Serial Ports tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Network and Serial Ports tabs Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network and Serial Ports tabs Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Serial Ports tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. This could result in an overrun state. With the Handshake property set to None (typically for point-to-point connections).9. the communication module asserts the Request to Send (RTS) signal when it has a message to transmit. point-to-point network. Use this setting for a Modbus slave port in a two-pair. the communication module enables its RS-485 transmit driver at all times. This settings allows the Modbus master to use half-duplex modems. multi-point networks. The communication module ignores all characters unless the Modbus master asserts the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal. With the Handshake property set to None. Applies To Trident or Tri-GP Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > PI Setup or EPI Setup Trip State The Trip State property specifies the value on which to begin collecting events. select the option that corresponds to the sharper edge. Settings include RJ-45 and MAU. Applies To Communication Location Trident 1. the Transceiver Port property specifies the type of connection to be used for the port.x. Applies To SOE Location Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9. The default is RJ-45. Settings include Rising Edge and Falling Edge. For asymmetrical waveforms. The default is Rising Edge.629 • Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network and Serial Ports tab Transceiver Port For Trident 1.x Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network tab Triggering Mode For Trident or Tri-GP controllers. the Triggering Mode property specifies where the input signal is triggered.0 . Applies To SOE Location Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration TriStation Port Number The TriStation Port Number property identifies the UDP port number used for the TriStation connection to the TCM. Peer-to-Peer.9. Trident 2. Peer-to-Peer+1. Applies To Communication Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > TriStation Communication TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 1508. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for the list of reserved values.0 .630 Appendix A Commands and Properties Trip Tagname The Trip Tagname property specifies the tagname (variable) that identifies whether a trip has occurred. 1507. The default number is 1502. The default number is 1502. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC or TCM/B Setup > Protocols tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM or TCM/A Setup > Network tab Trident 2. v4.x CM. 1506. or1505. Cannot be the same as the Managemen. or Tri-GP CM. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for the list of reserved values. TSAA port numbers.x CM or Tri-GP CM. Cannot be the same as the Management or TSAA port numbers.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Protocols tab TriStation UDP Port Number The TriStation UDP Port Number property identifies the UDP port number used for the TriStation connection to the Trident v2. the UDP port configured in those applications must match the TSAA Port Number configured in TriStation 1131. The default is 0. Additionally. your network hardware (such as routers) must also support multicasting. so that all members of the group will receive the data. Note TSAA IP multicasting is available only with Tricon v10. or Tri-GP systems. Cannot be the same as the Management or TriStation port numbers.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Protocols tab TSAA Port Number The TSAA Port Number property identifies the UDP port number used with TSAA client/server network communication. the TSAA protocol is available only on NET 1 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.631 True Color See Monitor Display Options on page 564.x systems. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Protocols tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Protocols tab Trident 2. TSAA Multicast IP Address The TSAA Multicast IP Address property specifies the IP address that TSAA multicasts should be sent to. the TSAA protocol is available only on NET 1 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. For communication with DDE Server and SOE Recorder clients. Trident 2. The default number is 1500. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.0. See also Update Rate on page 634.3 and later systems.0. because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication. See your Network Administrator or IT department for more information. True State Name See Monitor Display Options on page 564.0 (IP multicasting is disabled). See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for the list of reserved values. Additionally.0 .9. Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be sent to the specified address. Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication. which can be any odd number from 1 to 63. UDP port numbers do not need to be unique. The default is 1503 on both NET 1 and NET 2 (meaning Peer-to-Peer is enabled on both ports). as long as the IP addresses for each port is unique. the UCN Node Number property specifies an number on the Tricon SMM. Entering 0 as the UDP port number disables Peer-to-Peer over UDP/IP on the network. Applies To Tricon SMM Location Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > SMM Setup UDP Base Port Number The UDP Base Port Number property specifies the UDP port number for the controller where the TriStation 1131 application is to be run. and 1600 as the TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. For example. v4. The default is 1.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Protocols tab Type Over Command The Type Over command toggles between typing over and inserting characters in a Structured Text program or function.632 Appendix A Commands and Properties Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC or TCM/B Setup > Protocols tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A Setup > Network tab Trident 2.0 . This number identifies the controller in a Peer-toPeer network. Applies To ST programs and functions Locations • • Type Over button View menu UCN Node Number For Tricon controllers. Even numbers are used for hot-spare module communication.9. you can assign 1600 as the TriStation UDP port number on NET 1. The following values are reserved: Reserved Value(s) 1500 1502 1503–1504 1505–1508 1510 1–1023 Protocol TSAA TriStation Peer-to-Peer Firmware download Management — Notes Can be changed via configuration Can be changed via configuration Can be changed via configuration Cannot be changed. for Invensys use only Can be changed via configuration Reserved by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) Also see Management Port Number on page 557.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab Undo Command The Undo command reverses the last action performed when editing a program. and TSAA Port Number on page 631. you cannot assign 1600 as the TriStation UDP port number on NET 1. However. because the ports are on the same network. Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication.9. and 1600 as the Peer-toPeer port number on NET 1.0 .633 Peer-to-Peer UDP port number on NET 2. function. the Peer-to-Peer and TSAA protocols are available only on NET 1 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. Applies To Editing Location Edit menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. because the ports are on separate networks. TriStation Port Number on page 630. or function block. Applies To Communication Locations • • • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Peerto-Peer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication Trident 2. 3 and later systems. for TSAA IP multicasting. Applies To Reports Location Project tree > right-click the Default Reports or User Reports folder Update Selected Function Cells Command The Update Selected Function Cells command updates selected out-of-date elements which are marked with a red X in the active window. Trident 2. Applies To CEM programs Location Tools menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . v4. Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be sent to the multicast IP address at the specified update rate (for example.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Protocols tab Update Reports Database Command The Update Reports Database command copies project information to a database used when reports are generated. Applies To Communication Locations • • • Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Protocols tab Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup > Protocols tab Trident 2. TSAA IP multicasting is available only with Tricon v10. in milliseconds.x systems.9.634 Appendix A Commands and Properties Update Rate The TSAA Multicast Update Rate property specifies the update rate. or Tri-GP systems. See also TSAA Multicast IP Address on page 631. by default. bin data will be multicast every 1000ms). the settings can be specified. which means local time is used. Settings include: • • • • Exactly Once on page 531 Only Once on page 571 Space Saver on page 618 Internal State on page 548 Applies To Library and user-defined function blocks Location Document Properties > Usage tab Use Local Time The Use Local Time property specifies whether to use local time or universal time. For library function blocks. the options determine the usage and cannot be changed. For userdefined function blocks.0 . The default is selected.635 Usage The Usage property specifies how function blocks can be used in a function or function block. Applies To Project Location Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Replace MPs TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. Results of the validation appear in the Messages pane. Applies To Application Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP > Setup > Operating Parameters tab Validate Only Command The Validate Only command analyzes your project settings and current controller configuration to determine the modifications that will be made to the project if you change to the selected target system version.9. Internal variables are hidden. Applies To Constants Location Properties > Constant tab Value Range to Scale an Integer The Value Range to Scale an Integer properties specify how a REAL number is scaled to an integer so it can be transmitted using Modbus protocol. Properties include: • • • • Minimum Value (Min Span) on page 562 Maximum Value (Max Span) on page 560 Precision on page 581 Disable Scaling on page 513 Applies To Points with REAL data types Location Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Scaling tab Var/Const The Var/Const property displays the names of the variables connected to the terminals of the function or function block in a CEM program. Only user-defined variables are displayed.0 .636 Appendix A Commands and Properties Value The Value property specifies the value for the constant. v4.9. To ensure the value agrees with the Data Type. which does not use REAL numbers. click Apply. The values set for the scale range are used with the Modbus minimum and maximum range to derive an integer value that represents the real value. Applies To CEM programs Location Application tree > open a CEM program > Variable Detail Table TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Applies To User access. If there is a difference. Applies To Variables Location Properties > Declarations tab Verify Last Download to the Controller Command The Verify Last Download to the Controller compares the application that was last downloaded to the controller with the application running on the controller.9. Also known as a global variable. A variable which is used as both an input and output variable.0 . Security Location Project menu > Security command > Users tab > Add or Modify button TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4. A variable which returns the result of a program. Must be connected to a point. or function block. function. Applies To Application Location Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu Verify Password The Verify Password property allows you to enter the password a second time to verify it is the same as entered for the Password property.637 Var Type The Var Type property specifies the type of variable. you should contact Invensys support. Types include: Type Input Output In/Out Local Tagname Description A variable which provides a value to a program. Cannot be connected to a point. or function block. Must be connected to a point. Must be connected to a point. function. A variable that references a point. A variable used for internal logic. Applies To FBD logic sheets Locations • • Vertical Network Divider button Tools menu > Select Tool View Download History Command The View Download History command displays version information for each download for the current project.0 . The history is cleared and restarted with each Download All command.9. v4. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.638 Appendix A Commands and Properties Verify Version Command The Verify Version command compares the version of the selected library in the project with the most current version available. If the version in the project is out of date. which is a list of the elements affected for the last Download All and subsequent Download Changes commands. you are prompted to update it. Only libraries located in the default library directory are verified. Applies To Libraries Location Application tree > right-click Library Documents > Manage command Vertical Network Divider Command The Vertical Network Divider command allows you to place a vertical divider on a logic sheet to divide networks. These properties are displayed on the Download History screen. The library the element is included in. The version of the element.. The name of the program. Functions. function.9. You can copy the source code by using the Write to File command on the Edit menu. A system-generated identification for the program or function. An arrow indicates that the element was included in a Download All operation. Element Name ID# Ver Size Library Applies To Project Location Project menu View Intermediate FBD Command The View Intermediate FBD command displays source code that is generated in the Function Block Diagram language when the CEM program is compiled. and Function Blocks Location Document menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.639 Property St Description An icon that indicates the status of the element. The size of the element in bytes. Applies To Programs. an ellipsis (.0 . Applies To CEM programs Location Document menu View Intermediate ST Command The View Intermediate ST command displays source code that is generated when the program is compiled. or function block.) means it was included in a Download Changes operation.. This history is automatically generated during project development. v4. or remove views of a CEM matrix. load. By selecting either the plus (+) or the minus (-) buttons. you can expand or shrink the width of the variable symbol so you can use a longer name or fit the symbol into a smaller space.640 Appendix A Commands and Properties View Manager Command The View Manager command allows you to save. Click the Save History button to export the project history to a text file. Applies To Variables Location Properties > Selected tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Applies To Project Locations • • Project History button Project menu Width The Width property specifies the width (horizontal space) of the variable or constant symbol.0 .9. Applies To CEM programs Location View menu View Project History Command The View Project History command displays an audit trail of user access and modification of the project. Typically used to tie the output of a function block to an input of the same function block—so that the value of the output is used to “feed” it “back” to the input.0 . through a wire. For example.641 Wire Tool Command The Wire tool command provides a pointer tool to a connect logic elements in FBD programs. Feedback: The first function block is always evaluated after the second function block. Also useful for delaying a write from the first function block until after the second function block has read a value. to an input of a second function block. Applies To Serial ports Location Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP or CM Setup > Serial Ports tab TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.) The default is 4-Wire. Applies To FBD programs Locations • • Wire Tool button Tools menu > Select Tool Wire Type The Wire Type property specifies the type of wire used for serial communication.) 4-Wire (full duplex) if using two pairs of wires—one pair for Modbus reads and the other pair for Modbus writes. Represented by a solid line. (Only available when the Transceiver Mode property is set to RS-485. To set. The signal flow is from an output of one function block. the first function block writes the value and the second function block reads the value.9. Settings include: • • 2-Wire (half duplex) if using one pair of wires for Modbus reads and writes. • The default is Normal. Settings include: • Normal: The first function block is always evaluated before the second function block. Represented by a dashed line. Note Attempting to create a feedback loop without using the feedback wire will cause an error. double-click the wire and select either Normal or Feedback. (Trident or Tri-GP MP serial ports must use this setting. ST functions. Applies To ST programs. You can also enter a number or click Zoom To Fit to size the elements to fit the current window.0 . 100%. Applies To Logic sheets for user documents. You can enlarge the view of elements on a logic sheet by: • • Using the Zoom button or Zoom command from the View menu Double-clicking an empty area to see a Zoom Selection view. 75%. Applies To TriStation 1131 workspace Locations • • Workspace View button View menu Write To File Command The Write To File command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify a file name and location to save ST code as a text file. test sheets for Controller and Emulator Panels Locations • • • Zoom button View menu Double-click an empty area in a logic sheet TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. and intermediate ST for all programs and functions Location Edit menu Zoom Command The Zoom command enlarges or decreases the view of an element. and 200%.9.642 Appendix A Commands and Properties Workspace View Command The Workspace View command toggles to display or hide the Application and Controller workspace tree. v4. Standard settings are: 50%. The region is magnified. Procedure 1 2 On the View menu. The cursor changes to a cross-bar. click Zoom to Region.643 Zoom To Fit Command The Zoom To Fit command toggles between a large and small view of the logic sheet. Applies To Logic sheets for user documents.0 . Select the region to view by dragging the cross-bar across the area. Applies To FBD and LD editors Location View menu TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide v4.9. test sheets for the Controller and Emulator Panels Locations • • • Zoom To Fit button View menu Double-click an empty area in a logic sheet Zoom To Region The Zoom To Region command allows you to zoom into a region of the sheet. 9.0 .644 Appendix A Commands and Properties TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. v4.9.0 .B Data Types Overview 646 Elementary Data Types 647 Generic Data Types 658 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. specify the type of data used for the following: • • • Constants Tagname declarations and references Local.0 . v4. input. which adhere to the IEC 61131-3 standard. output.9. and I/O variables TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.646 Appendix B Data Types Overview Data types. 9. 32 bits in length An integer. This table describes the elementary data types and how they can be used. function. minutes. 32 bits in length A specific date and time A double word. and REAL. 1 bit in length A specific date A double integer. DINT. or function block and the operations that can be applied to the data. Table 59 Data Type BOOL DATE DINT DT DWORD INT LREAL REAL STRING TIME TOD Elementary Data Types and Usage Description A Boolean. hours. seconds. 16 bits in length A long real number.0 . or milliseconds A specific time of day   Tagnames  Constants and Local Variables            Only three data types can be declared as controller points: BOOL. v4. 64 bits in length A real number.Elementary Data Types 647 Elementary Data Types An elementary data type specifies the size and characteristics of most data used in a program. 32 bits in length A sequence of up to 132 alphanumeric characters delimited by single quotes A period of time (duration) expressed in days. These variables point to hardware addresses in the controller and are accessible to all programs in a project. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 9. Can be used in CEM Cause. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Syntax Default value Lower limit Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description DATE Date 64 bits D#CCYY-MM-DD D#1970-01-01 D#1970-01-01 D#2029-12-31 Invalid date Invalid date Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. month. Can be used in CEM Cause.648 Appendix B Data Types BOOL Data Type A BOOL data type is one bit in length and has two possible values: false (0) or true (1). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. Effect.0 . Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Default value Lower limit Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description BOOL Boolean 1 bit False (0) False (0) True (1) N/A Intermediate Value MOD 2 Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. DATE Data Type A DATE data type refers to a specific date expressed as the year. and Intersection cells. and day. Effect. and Intersection cells. the return value is the smallest or greatest double integer. when converting LREAL to DINT). 32 bits in length. Values are stored internally in microseconds and displayed in the TriStation 1131 Controller Panel in milliseconds.0 . Can be used in CEM Cause. DT Data Type A DT data type represents a date and time of day. To specify the time of day. v4. Effect. you can use fractions (FFF) of a second. and Intersection cells.FFF or DATE_AND_TIME#CCYY-MM-DD-HH:MM:SS Default value Lower limit DT#1970-01-01-00:00:00 DT#1970-01-01-00:00:00 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Syntax Description DT Date and time of day 64 bits DT#CCYY-MM-DD-HH:MM:SS or DT#CCYY-MM-DD-HH:MM:SS.9.Elementary Data Types 649 DINT Data Type A DINT data type is a double integer. A DT data type cannot be used as a program input or output. Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Default value Lower limit Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description DINT Double integer 32 bits 0 –2**31 2**31–1 –2**31 or V modulo 2**32 2**31–1 or V modulo 2**32 Note If the intermediate conversion value is out of range (for example. 9. Can be used in CEM Cause. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. if you shift 16#FFFFFFFF to the left once. For example. Effect. Effect. A DWORD data type cannot be used as a program input or output. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Default value Lower limit Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description DWORD Double word 32 bits 0 0 16#FFFFFFFF N/A V and 16#FFFFFFFF Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. and Intersection cells. v4. If the intermediate value is out of range. Can be used in CEM Cause. 32 bits in length. and Intersection cells.650 Appendix B Data Types Attribute Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description DT#2029-12-31-23:59:59. the intermediate value is 16#1FFFFFFFE and the result is 16#FFFFFFFE.999 Invalid date Invalid date Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. The result is always in the range from 0 to 16#FFFFFFFF. DWORD Data Type A DWORD data type is a double word.0 . then the result is the least-significant 32 bits of the intermediate value. using the SUB function to subtract 1 from -32768 results in –32769 (clearly out of range) without clearing ENO or reporting a BADPARAM error. However. SUB.7976931348623158 e +308 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 16 bits in length. and MUL operations do not check the range of results and can have resultant values out of the specified range (–32768 and +32767). Arithmetic operators ADD. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Default value Lower limit Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description INT Integer 32 bits 0 –2**15 2**15–1 InvINT InvINT Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. and MUL are implemented with 32-bit arithmetic and the container for INT is 32 bits. For example. To verify that output values from these functions are within range. the LREAL data type follows the IEC-559 Standard floating-point format. Can be used in CEM Cause.9. An INT data type cannot be used as a program input or output. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Default value Most positive number Description LREAL Long-real number 64 bits 0. and Intersection cells. LREAL Data Type An LREAL data type is 64 bits in length and has 15 decimal digits of precision. which converts the integer output to double integer and does a range check for the integer output.0 .Elementary Data Types 651 INT Data Type An INT data type is an integer. An LREAL data type cannot be used as a program input or output. an out-of-range value does display “Inv INT” on the Controller Panel. SUB. The ADD. Effect. connect the output terminal to the INT_TO_DINT function.0 1. In TriStation 1131. v4. 0E–322 5. If |x| Is Greater Than: 5. the floating-point implementation includes a standard feature called gradual underflow that extends the range for an LREAL number and gradually changes the precision as values approach zero.9406564584124654E–324.2250738585072014E–308.0 . 5. For values from 2–1075 to 2–1022. . The precision changes gradually from 17 digits to 1 digit as the value changes from 2–1023 to 2–1074.0E–324 Then the Precision Is Greater Than: 17 digits 16 digits 15 digits . Without Gradual Underflow The smallest positive number that can be stored in an LREAL variable is: 2–1022 = 2. 3 digits 2 digits 1 digits TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The precision changes abruptly from 17 digits to 0 digits when the value changes from a number greater than 2–1023 to a number less than 2–1023. . This table shows how the precision changes as LREAL numbers approach zero. This table compares the values obtained when gradual underflow is not present.7976931348623158 e +308 –Infinity or HUGE +Infinity or HUGE Gradual Underflow for LREAL Data Types In PCs and controllers.9406564584124654 e –324 – 4. . .652 Appendix B Data Types Attribute Least positive number Least negative number Most negative number Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description 4. With Gradual Underflow The smallest positive number that can be stored in an LREAL variable is: 2–1074 = 4.0E–323 5.9406564584124654 e –324 –1.0E–309 5.0E–308 5. For values from 2–1075 to 2–1022. The maximum relative error changes gradually from 2–53 to 1 as the value changes from 2–1023 to 2–1074. the maximum absolute error is a constant 2–1075.0E–310 . to the values obtained when it is present. The maximum relative error changes abruptly from 2–53 to 1 when the value changes from a number greater than 2–1023 to a number less than 2–1023.9. the maximum absolute error equals the value. v4. Elementary Data Types 653 If |x| Is Greater Than: 0. v4.402823466 e +38 –Infinity or HUGE +Infinity or HUGE TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . In TriStation 1131. REAL Data Type A REAL data type is 32 bits in length and has 6 decimal digits of precision. and Intersection cells. the REAL data type follows the IEC-559 Standard Floating-Point format. Can be used in CEM Cause.401298464 e 45 –3. This table shows how gradual underflow affects absolute error and relative error as LREAL numbers approach zero. Effect. Range 0 < |x|  2–1075 2–1075 < |x|  2–1022 2–1022  |x| < 21024 – 2972 Maximum Absolute Error |x| 2–1075 2–53 * |x| Maximum Relative Error 1 2–1075 / |x| 2–53 Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications.401298464 e –45 –1. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Default value Most positive number Least positive number Least negative number Most negative number Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description REAL Real number 32 bits 0.0 Then the Precision Is Greater Than: 0 digits Absolute error is the absolute value of x – a. where x is the exact value and a is the actual value stored. where x is the exact value and a is the actual value stored.9.0 3.402823466 e +38 1. Relative error is the absolute value of (x – a)/x. 654 Appendix B Data Types Gradual Underflow for REAL Data Types In PCs and safety controllers. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 .5E–43 1. For values from 2–150 to 2–126.0 Then the Precision Is Greater Than: 7 digits 6 digits 5 digits 4 digits 3 digits 2 digits 1 digits 0 digits Absolute error is the absolute value of x – a. Without Gradual Underflow The smallest positive number that can be stored in a REAL variable is: 2–126 = 1. For values from 2–150 to 2–126. This table compares the values obtained when gradual underflow is not present. This table shows how the precision changes as numbers approach zero. the floating-point implementation includes a standard feature called gradual underflow.5E–45 0.9. This table shows how gradual underflow affects absolute error and relative error as REAL numbers approach zero. where x is the exact value and a is the actual value stored.5E–41 1. The precision changes abruptly from 7 digits to 0 digits when the value changes from a number greater than 2–127 to a number less than 2–127. The precision changes gradually from 7 digits to 1 digit as the value changes from 2–127 to 2–149.401298464E–45.175494351E-38. With Underflow The smallest positive number that can be stored in a REAL variable is: 2–149 = 1. If |x| Is Greater Than: 1.5E–44 1. The maximum relative error changes gradually from 2–24 to 1 as the value changes from 2–127 to 2–149. where x is the exact value and a is the actual value stored. The maximum relative error changes abruptly from 2–24 to 1 when the value changes from a number greater than 2–127 to a number less than 2–127.5E–39 1. to the values obtained when it is present. the maximum absolute error equals the value. v4. Relative error is the absolute value of (x – a)/x. This feature extends the range of a REAL number and gradually changes the precision as values approach zero. the maximum absolute error is a constant 2–150.5E–42 1.5E–40 1. The count of 132 characters does not include the null terminator or the single quotation mark.0 . which is delimited by single quotation marks ( ' ).9. A STRING data type cannot be used as a program input or output. up to 132 characters in length. and Intersection cells.Elementary Data Types 655 Range 0 < |x|  2–150 2–150 < |x|  2–126 2–126  |x| < 2128 – 2103 Maximum Absolute Error |x| 2–150 2–24 * |x| Maximum Relative Error 1 2–150 / |x| 2–24 Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. STRING Data Type A STRING data type is an alphanumeric sequence. Can be used in CEM Cause. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Default Value Lower limit Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value Description STRING Character string 136 bytes Empty string (two single quotation marks not separated by any characters) 0 characters 132 characters Truncated string N/A Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. Can be used in CEM Cause. Effect. Effect. and Intersection cells. 656 Appendix B Data Types TIME Data Type A TIME data type refers to a period of time (duration) in days. and Intersection cells. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. hours.5ms or T#44.1 milliseconds. The range is ± 9999 years and the precision is 0.5ms or TIME#11d22h33m44s55. Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Syntax Description TIME Duration 64 bits TIME#11d or TIME#22.4s or TIME#55. and milliseconds. v4.5ms or T#11d22h33m44s55.2h or TIME#33.4s Default value Lower limit Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value TIME#0S TIME#-3652134d TIME#3652134d Inv Time Inv Time Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. A TIME data type cannot be used as a program input or output. minutes. Effect.9.0 . Can be used in CEM Cause.3m or TIME#44. seconds. 0 . Attribute Keyword/type Description Size Syntax Description TOD Time of day 64 bits TOD#HH:MM:SS or TOD#HH:MM:SS.9. v4. and Intersection cells.001 seconds. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Elementary Data Types 657 TOD Data Type A TOD data type refers to a specific time of day expressed in hours. and fractions (FFF) of a second. The precision is 0. A TOD data type cannot be used as a program input or output. Effect.FFF or TIME_OF_DAY#HH:MM:SS Default value Lower limit Upper limit Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value TOD#00:00:00 TOD#00:00:00 TOD#23:59:59. Can be used in CEM Cause.999 V modulo 24 hours V modulo 24 hours Application Notes • • Can be used in Safety or Control applications. minutes. seconds. DT. or TOD. v4. or two integers. identified by the prefix ANY. GT. REAL. TIME. Note that each of these types is ordered so that values of the same type can be compared (see functions EQ. DATE. or two long real numbers. MIN. Table 60 Data Type ANY ANY_NUM ANY_REAL ANY_INT ANY_BIT ANY_DATE ANY_NOTE1 Generic Data Types Standard Data Type Represented Any of the standard data types: BOOL. or two real numbers. STRING. DATE. The TriStation generic data types are based on the IEC 61131-3 standard. STRING. or REAL Any real number: LREAL or REAL Any integer: DINT or INT Any bitwise data type: BOOL or DWORD Any date or time of day or both: DATE. TIME. are used exclusively in the functions and function blocks that are available in the TriStation Standard Library. TOD. LREAL. For example. or Derived Any number: DINT. DINT.9. If a function specifies one generic data type for more than one argument. The hierarchy for them is shown in this figure. INT. LT. then the argument type must be one of the data types represented by that generic data type. If a function specifies a generic data type for an argument. NE. or TOD Any elementary data type: BOOL.0 . the function ADD specifies type ANY_NUM for all arguments and the return value. and MAX). DWORD. INT. DT. LE. then all such arguments must have the same data type. You can add two double integers. INT. but you cannot add a real number to a long real number. DINT. Figure 43 Generic Data Types Hierarchy This table lists the meaning of each generic data type and the standard data types it represents. GE. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. LREAL.658 Appendix B Data Types Generic Data Types Generic data types. DT. REAL. LREAL. DWORD. C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Overview 660 Configuring TCM Ports 661 Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time 673 Configuring a Tricon TCM Printer Port for Printing 678 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.9.0 . Note Model 4351 and 4352 TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10. and should be followed in place of the TCM configuration procedures provided in Chapters 3 and 5 of this guide. some of the configuration options are different than those for later model TCMs (models 4351A. 4352A. or 4354 TCM.9. You should instead use the information found in the following sections: • • • Configuring TCM Ports on page 278 Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time on page 303 Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing on page 397 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0. do not use the procedures in this appendix.1 and later systems do not support the model 4351 and 4352 TCMs. The procedures in this appendix apply specifically to configuring the ports on the model 4351 or 4352 TCM. 4352B. 4351B. v4. 4352A.660 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Overview If you have an older model 4351 or 4352 TCM installed in your system.0 . 4351B. If you have a model 4351A. 4353.x systems. 4352B. 4353. Tricon v10. and 4354). TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . please see the Product Release Notice for your Tricon system version. Network Ports NET 2 NET 2 NET 1 NET 1 — — NET 2 — NET 1 NET 2 NET 2 Serial Ports Port 4 —a — — Any port Any port — Port 1 — — Note Invensys recommends configuring a serial connection to the TCM first. which must reside in two logical slots.9.x or earlier systems. Model 4351/4352 TCMs cannot be installed in a system that also has 4351A/4352A or 4351B/4352B TCMs installed. For more detailed compatibility information. even if they are installed in different chassis.Configuring TCM Ports 661 Configuring TCM Ports A single Tricon v10. without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the controller altogether. because it is less complex and easier to successfully connect to the TCM through the serial port. v4. See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems for detailed TCM installation guidelines.1.0. Protocol TriStation TSAA (UDP/IP) Peer-to-Peer (UDP/IP) Peer-to-Peer (DLC) Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) Modbus Master (RTU) Modbus Master or Slave (TCP) GPS Time Synchronization Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC or UDP/IP SNTP Triconex Time Synchronization Network Printing using Jet Direct a.x system supports a maximum of four TCMs. you can go back and configure the more complex network connection. • • • Model 4351 and 4352 TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10. TCM models 4351 (Copper)/4352 (Fiber) support the following protocols on network and serial ports. — means the protocol is not available on this port. Once you have successfully connected to the TCM and downloaded the initial configuration to the Tricon.0.x and later systems.x systems. or in Tricon v10. Model 4351/4352 TCMs cannot be installed in Tricon v9. see these topics: • • Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time on page 673 for instructions on configuring the TCM to synchronize time. However. Only the following model changes will retain your port settings: • • 4351 to 4352 4352 to 4351 Any other TCM model changes will result in all port settings being reset to their default values. v4. you cannot change the TCM model installed in the Tricon system without downloading a new configuration. once the configuration has been downloaded to the controller.0 . TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. see these topics: • • • • • Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 667 Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 665 Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 667 Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports on page 669 Configuring TCM Routing on page 671 For additional information on configuring the TCM. but prior to downloading the configuration to the controller. you can change the existing TCM model to a different model TCM without losing your port settings (see Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules on page 265). Changing TCM Models Once TCM ports have been configured. Configuring a Tricon TCM Printer Port for Printing on page 678 for instructions on configuring the TCM for use with a printer.662 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration To configure specific types of ports. and expand Hardware Allocation.0 . Property Port Selection Protocol Action Click the port to be configured. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. Modbus Slave RTU. Modbus Slave ASCII. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. Click the Serial tab. Select the communication protocol for the port: • All ports can use Modbus Master. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. • Only port 1 can use GPS.9. v4. This port is automatically configured for GPS when you enable time synchronization. 4 Specify these properties. See Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time on page 673. Ports can be configured only for a slot with an installed module.Configuring TCM Ports 663 Configuring TCM Serial Ports This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Tricon TCM. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. • Only port 4 can use TriStation. double-click Configuration. Enter the minimum and maximum values to be used for the Modbus data range. The default is 1 bit. The default maximum is 32. Select the type of parity for the port. Even if port 4 is set to Not Configured (the default value). Only available for Modbus Master. The default is 1. Select None or Hardware. Select the type of termination used with cables. Select the order to be used with floating point numbers. Enter the port number that the TCM will use in the Modbus Master functions to access the port. it can still be used to connect to the Tricon controller via TriStation. The default is RS232. Select 8 or 7 bits. Select 1 or 2 bits. If you selected Modbus Slave RTU or ASCII. The default is cleared (the port is read-only). Determines whether the most significant bits in a32-bit address are the first 16 (high) or the last 16 (low). enter the number of the Modbus slave device. Enter the communication rate for the port. Available only with Modbus Slave ASCII.767. The default is Low 16 Bits First. RS-485 is not available.664 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Property Port Write Enabled Action Available only if Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) is selected as the communication protocol. Select RS-485 or RS-232. the default is None.0 . The default is 9600. Select this check box if you want to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. The default is None.9. The default is Odd. v4. The default minimum is 0. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Only available with RS-485 Transceiver Mode. This is useful when you are unable to connect via a network connection. Modbus Slave Address Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Transceiver Mode Handshake Termination Options FP Ordering Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Master Logical Port 5 Note Click OK to save your changes. The default is 8. On port 4 when TriStation is selected as the protocol. Property Slot Selection Not Installed. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. Click Installed to enable configuration of the module.0 .9. Clicking Not Installed resets all options to their default state and makes them unavailable for configuration. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. Procedure 1 2 Expand the Controller tree. v4. Select the check box to enable the network port to be configured.Configuring TCM Ports 665 Configuring TCM Network Ports This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Tricon TCM. and expand Hardware Allocation. double-click Configuration. Enable Network TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Installed Action Select the slot where the TCM module you want to configure is installed. 3 Specify these properties on the Network tab. The default is Not Installed. 1. Typically. IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address If needed. The highest and lowest IP addresses in a subnet (addresses where the last number is 0 or 255. even if the IP address is changed via a Download Changes operation.1. The default for NET 1 is 192. For a model 4351. and OPC Server. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information. Applies to all TSAA connections on these ports. The default is 0. Changes to TCM IP addresses are not effective until the existing connection is closed and a new connection is opened. The default is 1502. For a model 4352 with fiber connectors. The default is 1500. The default is 255. The default is cleared (the ports are read-only). See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information.255. for NET 2 is 192. enter the IP address for the subnet.0 . v4. NET 1 and NET 2 cannot use the same IP address.666 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Property Transceiver Mode Action Select the communication mode. enter the IP address for the default gateway. such as 192. The default gateway address must be part of the subnet. the default is 100 Mbps Half Duplex.0.0.168. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. The UDP port to use for the TriStation connection. The UDP port to use for TSAA connections. TriStation Configuration: UDP Port Number TSAA Configuration: UDP Port Number Port Write Enabled 4 Note Click OK to save your changes. including DDE Server. SOE Recorder. Once a connection is opened.0. it remains open until you close it.0. IP Address Enter the IP Address for the port.1. Select this check box if you want to allow TSAA writes to the network ports. the default is Auto-Negotiate. This TCM cannot negotiate the connection speed or connect at 10 Mbps. this is the IP address of the network router.168.0.255.9. If needed.168.1.255) are reserved for broadcast messaging and cannot be used as a valid IP address. Click the Peer-to-Peer tab. 4 5 Under Slot Selection. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree.9.0 . Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. Property Destination UDP Port Action Enter the UDP port number for each controller to be communicated with on the Peer-to-Peer network. v4. IP Address 6 7 Click Update to apply the new settings for the selected node. Enter the IP address for the controller. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each node to be included in the network. The TCM Setup dialog box appears.Configuring TCM Ports 667 Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports This procedure explains how to configure the IP address for controllers communicating on a Peer-to-Peer network through a Tricon TCM. double-click Configuration. and specify these properties. This must be the same number that the controller uses as its UDP Base Port Number. and expand Hardware Allocation. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. select the module (slot) you want to configure Peer-to-Peer ports for. Select a node (controller). The default is cleared. click Reset All to reset all node settings for the selected slot to their default. v4. The default is 1503. unconfigured state. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. specify these properties (applicable to all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network). Enter 0 to disable Peer-to-Peer over UDP/IP on the network.0 . 9 Click OK to save your changes. UDP port numbers must be unique.9. Once all nodes have been configured. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for reserved values. Available only for a module installed in the left slot. Property UDP Base Port Number Action Enter the UDP base port number for the controller. Enable Communication with Tricon V8 and V9 Peer-to-Peer Systems on NET 1 Select the check box to enable communication with Tricon version 8 and 9 systems.668 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Note 8 If necessary. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. Click the Modbus TCP tab.Configuring TCM Ports 669 Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports This procedure explains how to configure Modbus TCP ports on a Tricon TCM. Select this check box if you want to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. which enables Modbus communication through network ports. Select a port and specify these properties. Enter the number of the Modbus Master node. Must be unique for each TCM installed in a system. and expand Hardware Allocation. double-click Configuration. Options include Modbus TCP Master and Modbus TCP Slave Net. Available only with Modbus TCP Master protocol. v4. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. 4 5 Under Slot Selection. The default is cleared (the port is read-only). Available only if Modbus TCP Slave is selected as the communication protocol.9.0 . The TCM Setup dialog box appears. Master Logical Port TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. select the module (slot) you want to configure Modbus TCP ports for. Property Protocol Port Write Enabled Action Select the communication protocol for the port. 0. FP Ordering Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range Select the ordering to use for floating point numbers.0.0. If the port uses Modbus Slave protocol. enter either of these: • To accept communication from any Modbus Master. • To accept communication only from a defined Modbus Master. leave the IP address as 0.0 . The default is 502. enter the IP address of the slave node.670 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Property TCP Port Number IP Address Action Enter the number for the TCP port. Enter the minimum and maximum for the modbus data range. If the port uses Modbus Master protocol. Available only with Modbus TCP Slave Net. v4. enter the specific master IP address. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. 6 Click OK to save your changes. then the subnet mask must be the same as the NET 1 subnet mask defined on the Network tab. If the gateway address is on NET 1. then the subnet mask must be the same as the NET 2 subnet mask defined on the Network tab. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. Click the Routing tab.9.Configuring TCM Ports 671 Configuring TCM Routing This procedure explains how to configure routing on a Tricon TCM. double-click Configuration. Up to 10 different routes can be configured for each module. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. and expand Hardware Allocation. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . See Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 665. If the gateway address is on NET 2. Property Destination IP Address Destination IP Subnet Mask Action Enter the IP address which is used if the controller is not on the same subnet as other devices. Enter the IP address of the subnet mask. 4 5 Select the module (slot) you want to configure routing for. Select a destination route and then specify these properties. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. v4. The gateway address must always be on NET 1 or NET 2. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. unconfigured state. If necessary.0 . Click OK to save your changes. click Reset All to reset all destination settings for the selected slot to their default.672 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Property Destination Gateway IP Address Action Enter the IP address of the gateway to which the controller is connected.9. v4. 6 7 Click Update Destination to apply the settings. it can also be used as the master node for time synchronization of other controllers on the network. and reject all other time change requests. see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems. Topics include: • • • Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 673 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 675 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 677 Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM This procedure explains how to configure a TCM to enable time synchronization through the Global Positioning System (GPS) by using the Trimble Acutime Gold Smart GPS Antenna. you can implement redundant time synchronization by configuring time synchronization for both TCM modules (both left and right slots).0 . Time synchronization can be enabled only for a single logical slot. In this configuration. If the TCM is in a Peer-to-Peer network. and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master TCM. If the TCM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Time synchronization can be enabled using the following protocols: • • • GPS SNTP Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC or UDP/IP on a Peer-to-Peer network In a redundant network of Tricon controllers that each have two TCMs installed. v4. Slave nodes synchronize their time only to the master node on the Peerto-Peer network. GPS time synchronization uses Serial Port 1 on the TCM. you configure time synchronization only for the left slot (there is no redundancy when installed in the COM slot).Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time 673 Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time This procedure explains how to enable time synchronization on a TCM. and expand Hardware Allocation. Procedure 1 Expand the Controller tree. it cannot be configured for GPS time synchronization. double-click Configuration. the Tricon clock must be set to within 10 minutes of the correct local time. If the TCM is installed in the COM slot. all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with GPS time. In this way. CAUTION To ensure the accuracy of GPS time adjustments. the master node TCM synchronizes time with the GPS. For information on installing the kit. selecting GPS will reset Port 1 to use the GPS protocol.674 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration 2 3 Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. click Operating Parameters (see Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249). Note The module in the right slot can be configured only if it has been installed (see Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 665) and if the module in the left slot has already been configured for GPS time synchronization. under Slot Selection. See Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 667 for more information.0 . click Left Slot. Click the Time Sync tab. v4. 4 5 Under Slot Selection.9. 6 (Optional) If you have a redundant TCM installed in the right slot. and then select GPS Redundant. 7 Click OK to save your changes. You must configure the module in the left slot first. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. Under Time Synchronization Configuration. Enabling the TCM as a Master Node for Triconex Time Synchronization (Optional) If you also want the TCM to be able to act as a master node for time synchronization of other controllers on a Peer-to-Peer network (using Triconex Time Synchronization) do the following: 1 2 In the Configuration tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Select the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization check box. If you previously configured Port 1 to use a Modbus protocol. click Right Slot. select GPS. In this way. You must configure the module in the left slot first. click Left Slot. If the TCM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network. Click the Time Sync tab. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with SNTP time. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. network load issues or PC performance can result in delays in processing time update requests from the Tricon controller. Slave nodes synchronize their time only to the master node on the Peerto-Peer network. it cannot be configured for SNTP time synchronization. the master node TCM synchronizes time with the SNTP server. double-click Configuration. and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master TCM. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup.0 . Select these properties. it can also be used as the master node for time synchronization of other controllers on the network.9. and expand Hardware Allocation.Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time 675 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM This procedure explains how to configure TCM time synchronization to an SNTP server. Because the SNTP server resides on a PC. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. and reject all other time change requests. Note SNTP time synchronization is less accurate than GPS time synchronization. 4 5 Under Slot Selection. v4. If the TCM is in a Peer-to-Peer network. In this configuration. Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize time with. and then select these properties. Note The module in the right slot can be configured only if it has been installed (see Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 665) and if the module in the left slot has already been configured for SNTP time synchronization. v4. The default is None. 6 (Optional) If you have a redundant TCM installed in the right slot. 7 Click OK to save your changes. Enabling the TCM as a Master Node for Triconex Time Synchronization (Optional) If you also want the TCM to be able to act as a master node for time synchronization of other controllers on a Peer-to-Peer network (using Triconex Time Synchronization) do the following: 1 2 In the Configuration tree. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Property Time Synchronization Configuration SNTP Master IP Address Action Select SNTP Redundant.0 . click Operating Parameters (see Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249). under Slot Selection. Select the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization check box.9. Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize time with. click Right Slot.676 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Property Time Synchronization Configuration SNTP Master IP Address Action Select SNTP. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. click Operating Parameters (see Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249). Triconex Time Synchronization can be used to synchronize time across controllers on a network. The TCM Setup dialog box appears.9. double-click Configuration. Configuring a Master or Slave Node This procedure describes how to configure the TCM as a master or slave node on the Peer-toPeer network when GPS or SNTP time synchronization is not being used. Click the Time Sync tab. In this configuration. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. the master node synchronizes time with the GPS or SNTP server. and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master node. Select the Peer-to-Peer Time Synchronization Enabled check box to enable Triconex Time Synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network. If you want the master node to synchronize to a GPS or SNTP server. Click OK to save your changes. v4.Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time 677 Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM In a Peer-to-Peer network. This allows the controller to participate as a master node in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network. In the Configuration tree. The master node can also synchronize its time with a GPS or an SNTP server. Under Time Synchronization Configuration. all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with GPS or SNTP time.0 . and expand Hardware Allocation. select None. Select the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization check box. In this way. use the procedures in the these sections: • • Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 673 Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 675 Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Expand the Controller tree. The controller with the lowest node number serves as the master node. 5 6 If a module is also installed in the Right Slot. You do not need the printer driver that may have come with the printer package. 4 Specify these properties for the module installed in the Left Slot. v4. Click the Printer tab. Property Printer Number Line Width TCP Port Number IP Address Action Enter the number for the printer. See Configuring Tricon Controller Printing on page 392 for more information about printing from the Tricon controller. The default is 9100 for an HP printer. The TCM Setup dialog box appears. Enter the number of characters to be printed on a line. meaning a printer is not configured. The default is 80 characters.0 . Enter the number of the TCP port for the print server.9. TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. repeat step 4 for that module. Procedure 1 2 3 Expand the Controller tree. Enter the IP address of the printer server.678 Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration Configuring a Tricon TCM Printer Port for Printing This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon TCM port that is connected to a Centronicscompatible printer. Click OK to save your changes. The default is 0. double-click Configuration. and expand Hardware Allocation. can only be 5 or 10. v4.D Reserved Names Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 680 Names Reserved by SQL 688 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9.0 . programs. At.* _* ABS ACOS ACTION ADD AIN AIN_BP AIN_BP12 AIN_HR AND ANY ANY_BIT ANY_DATE ANY_INT ANY_NOTE1 ANY_NUM ANY_REAL AOUT AOUT_BP12 ARRAY ARRAY32_BOOL ARRAY32_DINT ARRAY32_REAL ASIN ASSIGN AT ATAN BECOMES BLINK BLINK_I BLINK_R BOOL BOOL_TO_BYTE BOOL_TO_DWORD BOOL_TO_STRING BOOL_TO_WORD BY BYTE BYTE_TO_BOOL BYTE_TO_DWORD BYTE_TO_WORD C##B C##F# CASE CEIL CHK_ERR CLR_ERR CONCAT CONCAT_DT CONCAT_STRING CONFIGURATION TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. aT. custom function block names. Names are not case-sensitive. TriStation 1131 reserves all of the following names: • AT. For example.9. tagnames. v4.0 . These reserved names cannot be used to name variables. or program instances.680 Appendix D Reserved Names Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 This section lists all names reserved by TriStation 1131. at TriStation 1131 Reserved Names . v4.9.Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 681 TriStation 1131 Reserved Names (continued) CONSTANT COS CSCHED CSCHED_I CSCHED_R CTD CTU CTUD D_ADD D_CMP D_CMPE D_DIV D_DTOF D_DTOI D_DTOLL D_DTOQ D_DTOU D_DTOULL D_FEQ D_FGE D_FGT D_FLE D_FLT D_FNE D_ITOD D_LLTOD D_MUL D_NEG D_QTOD D_SUB D_ULLTOD D_UTOD DATE DATE_AND_TIME DDEC DEBUG_MODVARS DELETE DINC DINT DINT_TO_DWORD DINT_TO_INT DINT_TO_LREAL DINT_TO_REAL DINT_TO_SINT DINT_TO_STRING DINT_TO_UDINT DINT_TO_UINT DINT_TO_USINT DIV DO DPFABS DT DT_TO_DATE DT_TO_TOD DWORD DWORD_TO_BOOL DWORD_TO_BYTE DWORD_TO_DINT DWORD_TO_WORD E##B E##C##B E##C##F E##F# ELSE ELSIF EN TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . 0 .9. v4.682 Appendix D Reserved Names TriStation 1131 Reserved Names (continued) END_ACTION END_CASE END_CONFIGURATION END_FOR END_FUNCTION END_FUNCTION_BLOCK END_IF END_PROGRAM END_REPEAT END_RESOURCE END_STEP END_STRUCT END_TRANSITION END_TYPE END_VAR END_WHILE ENO EQ ERRNO EXIT EXP EXPFLTR EXPT EXTERN F_ADD F_CMP F_CMPE F_DIV F_EDGE F_FEQ F_FGE F_FGT F_FLE F_FLT F_FNE F_FTOD F_FTOI F_FTOLL F_FTOQ F_FTOU F_FTOULL F_ITOF F_LLTOF F_MUL F_NEG F_QTOF F_SUB F_TRIG F_ULLTOF F_UTOF FALSE FDEC FINC FIND FLOOR FOR FP_ROUND FPFABS FROM FUNCTION FUNCTION_BLOCK GASDETR GATDIS GATENB GE GETDELTA_DINT TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.0 .9.Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 683 TriStation 1131 Reserved Names (continued) GETDELTA_REAL GETDELTAT GETTIMER GREATEREQUAL GT IDENT IF INFINITY_LREAL INFINITY_REAL INITIAL_STEP INSERT INT INT_TO_DINT INT_TO_LREAL INT_TO_REAL INT_TO_SINT INT_TO_STRING INT_TO_UDINT INT_TO_UINT INT_TO_USINT INTERNAL INTGTOR INTGTOR_R ISFINITE_LREAL ISFINITE_REAL ISNAN_LREAL ISNAN_REAL L_EDGE LE LEADLAG LEADLAG_R LEFT LEN LESSEQUAL LIMIT LINEMNTR LINT LN LOG LOOPDETR LPT05BUF LPT10BUF LREAL LREAL_TO_DINT LREAL_TO_INT LREAL_TO_REAL LREAL_TO_SINT LREAL_TO_UDINT LREAL_TO_UINT LREAL_TO_USINT LSX_CLEAR_ALL_FAULTS LSX_DI_POINT LSX_II_POINT LSX_RI_POINT LT LWORD MAX MBCTRL MBREAD_BOOL MBREAD_DINT MBREAD_REAL MBREAD_REAL_TRD MBWRITE_BOOL MBWRITE_DINT MBWRITE_REAL MBWRITE_REAL_TRD TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 9. v4.0 .684 Appendix D Reserved Names TriStation 1131 Reserved Names (continued) MEDSEL MID MIN MINUS_INFINITY_LREAL MINUS_INFINITY_REAL MOD MOVE MUL MUX NAN_LREAL NAN_REAL NE NEG NIL NOT NOTEQUAL NUMBITS NUMBITS_DWORD OF ON OR OVDDISABLE OVDENABLE PACK16 PACK32 PAGE_EJECT PERDEV PID PID_R POLY4 POLY5 PRINT_BOOL PRINT_CDT PRINT_CRLF PRINT_CTOD PRINT_DINT PRINT_REAL PRINT_STRING PRIORITY PRNTR_FLUSH PROGRAM R_EDGE R_TRIG READ_ONLY READ_WRITE READ_WRT REAL REAL_TO_DINT REAL_TO_INT REAL_TO_LREAL REAL_TO_SINT REAL_TO_UDINT REAL_TO_UINT REAL_TO_USINT REPEAT REPLACE REPORT_BAD_PARAM REPORTBADPARAM RESOURCE RETAIN RETURN RIGHT ROL ROR RS RTC TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4.0 .Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 685 TriStation 1131 Reserved Names (continued) SCALE SEL SEMA SET_ERR SHL SHR SIN SINGLE SINT SINT_TO_DINT SINT_TO_INT SINT_TO_LREAL SINT_TO_REAL SINT_TO_UDINT SINT_TO_UINT SINT_TO_USINT SOECLR SOESTAT SOESTOP SOESTRT SQRT SR STEP STRING STRUCT SUB SYS_AI32_STATUS SYS_AO04_STATUS SYS_APP_HALT SYS_CLEAR_FLTS SYS_CM_STATUS SYS_CRITICAL_IO SYS_DI_POINT SYS_DI16_AI16_STATUS SYS_DI32_STATUS SYS_DO16_STATUS SYS_EPI06_STATUS SYS_HRDI32_STATUS SYS_II_POINT SYS_IO_STATUS SYS_IOP_STATUS SYS_MP_EXT_STATUS SYS_MP_RESET_PORTS SYS_MP_STATUS SYS_OVD_INHIBIT SYS_PI06_STATUS SYS_RI_POINT SYS_RO32_STATUS SYS_SDO16_STATUS SYS_SERIAL_PORT SYS_SET_APP_LOCK SYS_SET_PROG_ALARM SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL SYS_SHUTDOWN SYS_SYSTEM_STATUS SYS_VOTE_MODE TAN TASK TCJ_CONV TCK_CONV TDD_I TDD_R TDE_I TDE_R THEN TIME TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. 0 . v4.9.686 Appendix D Reserved Names TriStation 1131 Reserved Names (continued) TIME_OF_DAY TIME_TO_LREAL TIME_TO_SECS TIME_TO_SECS_REAL TIMEADJ TIMESET TMR TMR_I TMR_R TO TOD TOF TOGGLE TON TP TP_I TP_R TRUE TR_64_POINT_STATUS TR_CALENDAR TR_CHASSIS_STATUS TR_CRITICAL_IO TR_LOG_EVENT TR_LOG_EVENT_DINT TR_LOG_EVENT_DWORDS TR_MP_STATUS TR_PEER_STATUS TR_POINT_STATUS TR_PORT_STATUS TR_PROGRAM_STATUS TR_SCAN_STATUS TR_SHUTDOWN TR_SLOT_STATUS TR_URCV_BOOL TR_URCV_DINT TR_URCV_DINT_32 TR_URCV_REAL TR_URCV_REAL_32 TR_USEND_BOOL TR_USEND_DINT TR_USEND_DINT_32 TR_USEND_REAL TR_USEND_REAL_32 TR_VOTE_MODE TRANSITION TRUNC_*_TO_* TRUNC_LREAL_TO_DINT TRUNC_LREAL_TO_INT TRUNC_LREAL_TO_SINT TRUNC_LREAL_TO_UDINT TRUNC_LREAL_TO_UINT TRUNC_LREAL_TO_USINT TRUNC_REAL_TO_DINT TRUNC_REAL_TO_INT TRUNC_REAL_TO_SINT TRUNC_REAL_TO_UDINT TRUNC_REAL_TO_UINT TRUNC_REAL_TO_USINT TSCHED TSCHED_I TSCHED_R TYPE UDINT UDINT_TO_DINT UDINT_TO_INT UDINT_TO_LREAL TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 0 .9. v4.Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 687 TriStation 1131 Reserved Names (continued) UDINT_TO_REAL UDINT_TO_SINT UDINT_TO_UINT UDINT_TO_USINT UINT UINT_TO_DINT UINT_TO_INT UINT_TO_LREAL UINT_TO_REAL UINT_TO_SINT UINT_TO_UDINT UINT_TO_USINT ULINT UNPACK16 UNPACK32 UNTIL UPTO USINT USINT_TO_DINT USINT_TO_INT USINT_TO_LREAL USINT_TO_REAL USINT_TO_SINT USINT_TO_UDINT USINT_TO_UINT VAR VAR_ACCESS VAR_EXTERNAL VAR_GLOBAL VAR_IN_OUT VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_TEMP WHILE WITH WORD WORD_TO_BOOL WORD_TO_BYTE WORD_TO_DWORD X_OF_N XOR TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. all of the following words are reserved: • AS. v4.9. If the name is reserved. see Importing and Exporting Tagnames on page 189. use a different name for exporting tagnames. For example. as SQL Reserved Names ABSOLUTE ACTION ADA ADD ALL ALLOCATE ALTER AND ANY ARE AS ASC ASSERTION AT AUTHORIZATION AVG BEGIN BETWEEN BIT BIT_LENGTH BOTH BY CASCADE CASCADED CASE CAST TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.xls) files. As.688 Appendix D Reserved Names Names Reserved by SQL This section lists names that should not be used to name data files when exporting tagnames to Microsoft Excel (.0 . aS. Names are not case-sensitive. For information on how to export tagnames. check the list to see if the name used is reserved. Using a reserved name results in the following error message: If you receive this error message when exporting tagnames to Microsoft Excel files. 0 .9.Names Reserved by SQL 689 SQL Reserved Names (continued) CATALOG CHAR CHAR_LENGTH CHARACTER CHARACTER_LENGTH CHECK CLOSE COALESCE COLLATE COLLATION COLUMN COMMIT CONNECT CONNECTION CONSTRAINT CONSTRAINTS CONTINUE CONVERT CORRESPONDING COUNT CREATE CROSS CURRENT CURRENT_DATE CURRENT_TIME CURRENT_TIMESTAMP CURRENT_USER CURSOR DATE DAY DEALLOCATE DEC DECIMAL DECLARE DEFAULT DEFERRABLE DEFERRED DELETE DESC DESCRIBE DESCRIPTOR DIAGNOSTICS DISCONNECT DISTINCT DOMAIN DOUBLE DROP ELSE END END-EXEC ESCAPE EXCEPT EXCEPTION EXEC EXECUTE EXISTS EXTERNAL EXTRACT FALSE FETCH FIRST FLOAT FOR FOREIGN FORTRAN FOUND TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. 690 Appendix D Reserved Names SQL Reserved Names (continued) FROM FULL GET GLOBAL GO GOTO GRANT GROUP HAVING HOUR IDENTITY IMMEDIATE IN INCLUDE INDEX INDICATOR INITIALLY INNER INPUT INSENSITIVE INSERT INT INTEGER INTERSECT INTERVAL INTO IS ISOLATION JOIN KEY LANGUAGE LAST LEADING LEFT LEVEL LIKE LOCAL LOWER MATCH MAX MIN MINUTE MODULE MONTH NAMES NATIONAL NATURAL NCHAR NEXT NO NONE NOT NULL NULLIF NUMERIC OCTET_LENGTH OF ON ONLY OPEN OPTION OR ORDER OUTER OUTPUT OVERLAPS TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . v4.9. 9.0 .Names Reserved by SQL 691 SQL Reserved Names (continued) PAD PARTIAL PASCAL POSITION PRECISION PREPARE PRESERVE PRIMARY PRIOR PRIVILEGES PROCEDURE PUBLIC READ REAL REFERENCES RELATIVE RESTRICT REVOKE RIGHT ROLLBACK ROWS SCHEMA SCROLL SECOND SECTION SELECT SESSION SESSION_USER SET SIZE SMALLINT SOME SPACE SQL SQLCA SQLCODE SQLERROR SQLSTATE SQLWARNING SUBSTRING SUM SYSTEM_USER TABLE TEMPORARY THEN TIME TIMESTAMP TIMEZONE_HOUR TIMEZONE_MINUTE TO TRAILING TRANSACTION TRANSLATE TRANSLATION TRIM TRUE UNION UNIQUE UNKNOWN UPDATE UPPER USAGE USER USING VALUE VALUES TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. 9.0 .692 Appendix D Reserved Names SQL Reserved Names (continued) VARCHAR VARYING VIEW WHEN WHENEVER WHERE WITH WORK WRITE YEAR ZONE TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. v4. Windows 64 AI modules.Index A access changing element owner 115 operations 572 to TCM. 489 change requirements 472 changing document owner 115 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 474. Tricon 266 ALARMS 68 Alias Number property 481 Alias Type property 482 aliases assigning 174 special for Tricon 212 Alignment property 483 allocating memory points Tricon 251 Trident 317 Tri-GP 317 allocation. See Tricon ACM actual scan time 466 Add File command 481 Add Program to Execution List command 481 adding custom Help file 52 custom reports 82 libraries 74 users 59 adding logic sheets 121 admin user. v4. controlling 434 to Trident. 171 specifying properties 202 using macros 206 ANY data type 658 ANY_BIT data type 658 ANY_DATE data type 658 ANY_INT data type 658 ANY_NOTE1 data type 658 ANY_NUM data type 658 ANY_REAL data type 658 Append Sheet command 485 appending logic sheets 121. controlling 434 to Tri-GP. 485 application access 229. controlling 386 to Tricon.9. restricting 229 to Trident CM. user clearing 67 exporting 65 options 66 saving 65 viewing 64 ACM. restricting 234 user 54 access control list See CM access list See TCM access list access levels CM 435 TCM 387 access list See CM access list See TCM access list access logs. restricting 234 to Tri-GP CM. 483 Allow Partial Changes to Libraries property 483 AND or OR. description 531 Annotate property 484 Annotation on by Default property 484 annotations adding in FBD and LD 200 adding macros to 202 adding to variables 465 Alignment property 483 Annotate property 484 Annotation on by Default property 484 Border property 488 default macros 506 specifying default 37 specifying in FBD and LD 165.0 . 234 building 241. Peer-to-Peer memory 221 Allow Disabling of Points property 230. 487 TCM configuration 296 backup file (.9. terminating 380 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 55 Auto Indent command 486 Auto Name command 486 Auto Scroll Delay property 487 Automatic collection. 151 Apply command 486 array data type definition 133 attempts. 489 C CASE statement 139 Category property 489 Cause and Effect Matrix. 592 block selection. overview 142 B backing up CM configuration 360 project file 5. see CEM language Cause Effect Matrix Support property 490 Cause Header Functions On by Default property 490 cells. 461.bt2) generation.694 Index application (continued) comparing to last download 497 definition 102 development steps 99 Download All command 517 Download Changes command 518 execution order list 239 function block usage 127 parts 102 Peer-to-Peer 219 planning changes 471 rebuilding 241 run mode 596 safety and control 104 setting scan time 467 specifying Application Type 113 testing with Emulator 459 types of 485 Application Workspace 100 application-defined states 150. login 27 attributes documents 113 status 369 audit comments 32 authentication. SOE 225 auto-negotiate transceiver mode 627 BOOL definition 648 specifying colors for monitoring 39 Border property 488 BPAO module 175 buffer. Foxboro I/A DCS 223 BNC connectors. SOE 225 Build Application command 489 building an application 241. CEM 153 CEM editor FBD Network overview 145 language settings 50 managing views 162 matrix overview 145 overview 144 properties 147 specifying colors for monitoring 149 Variable Detail Table overview 146 CEM Editor Options properties 491 CEM Element Options properties 491 CEM language about 108 editor properties 147 editor settings 50 CEM Monitor Colors property 490 CEM programs default settings 147 deleting columns 156 deleting rows 157 element options 148 inserting columns 155 inserting rows 156 intermediate FBD or ST code 241 options 150 planning 142 resizing cells 154 saving views 162 selecting cells 153 size/hide columns 158 size/hide comments 160 size/hide rows 159 title block 161 CEMPLE. security 7–8 Base Address property 487 Baud Rate property 488 bipolar input 267. user 28. Emulator 43 Backup Project command 487 bad password error 29 banner text.0 . v4. intermediate FBD or ST 241 Coil Tool Command 495 Coil Type property 495 colors Change Colors command 491 Default Colors command 504 Drawing Item property 520 Enable Color Monitoring property 525 specifying for monitoring 39 columns comment 160 deleting 508 inserting 155 sizing and hiding 158 tagnames table 183. user 60 security setting 55 Tricon system version 255 Trident system version 321 user logon name 60 chassis. setting for controller 602 Close Project command 495 CM See Trident CM See Tri-GP CM CM access list access levels 435 configuring 437 controller access 61 Deny Access 435 description 236 grouping clients 434 IP addresses 434 maximum number of entries 435 order of evaluation 437 permissions 435 protocols 435 Read Only 435 Read/Write 435 resources. Tricon 266 changing Tricon modules 265 CM protocols 358 DO modules. Tricon adding or deleting 262 configuration rules 262 high-density 262 low-density 262 power usage 264 target system version 12 Choose Another Tagname command 493 Clear History command 493 clearing user access logs 67 Client IP Address property 391. 493 Client IP Subnet Mask property 391. 520 editing macros in 206 enclosing logic 565 forced points 40 picking up elements 205 style 204 using macros 206 Communication command 496 Communication Modules for Modbus property 44. Tricon 267 inserting Trident modules 334 inserting Tri-GP modules 334 Modbus. Emulator 44 Peer-to-Peer 221 Peer-to-Peer. 497 Compare Project to Last Downloaded command 497 compatibility.0 . v4. TCM embedded OPC server 224 Compile All User Documents command 498 Compile command 498 Compiler Warning When Right Rail is Missing property 498 compiling programs 240 configuration AI modules. using 434 troubleshooting 413 code. 184 Comment Tool 496 comments adding in FBD and LD 203 Alignment property 483 audit trail 32 Border property 488 Comment Tool 496 dropping elements 205. 438 Client Protocols property 391. 393 Change Colors command 491 Change Owner Command 492 Change State to Download All command 492 changing library elements 77 logic sheet size 120 logic sheet title 122 password.9. 438. defined 434 sample list 436 subnet mask. 496 Communication Modules for Peer-to-Peer property 44. 494 clock. Emulator 44 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.Index 695 Centronics printing setup 439 using a Tricon EICM port 392. 438. 60.8. 64 D Data Bits property 502 Data Files property 503 data transfer time. Tricon 385 connection type. 312 target system version. 465 workspace 247.0 . Tricon 255 changing target system version. Tricon 262 configuration 103 configuration checklist 246. 312 configuring Trident 1. defined 485 controller access 229. Trident 321 chassis types. SOE 338 debounce period. NERC 7. 313 Tricon chassis power usage 264 variables 463. Tricon 252 target system version. Tri-GP HRDI 338 Declaration Tree 101 Declarations command 504 default connection type. 313 converting projects to v4. Trident 433 connection type. See Help files. v4.x MP 331 configuring Tri-GP MP 331 Connect command 499 download state changes 462 downloading to 460 program execution 464 project version after download 33. 461 restricting access to Tricon 229 restricting access to Trident 234 restricting access to Tri-GP 234 testing application on 460 tree 247. Tri-GP 318 TCM protocols 292 tree 247. time synchronization 299 dead time. Tri-GP 433 gateway. reports 83 date and time data type 649 DATE data type 648 DCS. 220 Data Type property 503 data types array 133 BOOL 648 creating 109 DATE 648 definition 103 DINT 649 DT 649 DWORD 650 elementary 647 enumeration 132 generic 658 INT 651 LREAL 651 REAL 653 STRING 655 structured 134 TIME 656 TOD 657 user-defined 163 databases. Peer-to-Peer 219. Trident CM 451 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.696 Index configuration (continued) removing Trident modules 335 removing Tri-GP modules 335 steps for controller 246. Trident 318 target system version. 313 Tricon operating parameters 249 Trident operating parameters 315 Tri-GP operating parameters 315 Connect command 499 constants creating in FBD and LD 170 specifying in CEM 152 VAR CONSTANT 134 Contact command 499 Contact Type property 500 Continuous Refresh command 500 control application.x MP 330 configuring Trident 2. 234 adding and deleting a Tricon chassis 262 allocating Peer-to-Peer memory 221 changing target system version. Trident HRDI 338 debounce period.0 11 Copy command 501 Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Ports command 501 copying documents 110 SOE configuration 222 copying (continued) ST code 130 CTS Pre-Delay setting 608 Current Version property 502 custom Help files. custom custom reports 82 customer support xv Cut command 502 Cyber Security.9. 55 Default Colors command 504 Default Connection property 505 Default Gateway IP Address property 505 Default Language property 506 Default Macros or Text property 506 Default Number of Cause Rows property 507 Default Number of Effect Columns property 508 definition file.Index 697 default (continued) gateway.9. Windows 28. affect on 475 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 447 security banner text 8 security setting 11.0 . 474–475 Disconnect command 514 Display Program Document command 514 Display Report command 514 Display Tabular View command 515 DLC protocol. 16. 75.. 74. command 512 Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property 513 Disable Scaling property 513 Disable Stop on Keyswitch property 513 disabled points re-enabling 476 viewing 476 disabled points. TriStation 1131 46 Disable OVD on All Modules command 512 Disable OVD on Module. Tri-GP 411. configuring 267 DO Point Options property 268. Trident 2. specifying fault detection 515 DINT data type 649 directories. 511 digital output points. 492 to controller 460 download aborted message 43 Download All command 460. Trident 447 IP address. 462 downloaded version 461 downloading disabled points. SOE 43 Delete Columns command 508 Delete command 508 Delete Rows command 508 Delete Sheet command 509 Delete Unreferenced Tagnames command 509 deleting columns 156 libraries 76 logic sheets 121 rows 157 tagnames 182 unused tagnames 188 description project 31 using the %DESCRIPTION macro 509 Description property 509 Destination Gateway IP Address property 510 Destination IP Address 509 Destination IP Subnet property 510 Destination UDP Port property 511 development steps 99 Differential AI Input Type property 267.. Tri-GP CM 451 IP address. v4. 516 Document Type property 516 documents attributes 113 changing owner 115 copying 110 creating 109 printing 91 restricting access 114 summary information 112 version number 33 domain authentication. Tricon 400 IP address.x 411 IP address. 515 Document Access property 114. 462. maximum 474 disabling points 230. installing 408 DO modules. 517 procedure 480 Download Changes command 518 procedure 478 steps for 470 download state 462 Download Version property 519 downloaded project version 33. 55 Double Space Function Block Terminals by Default property 517 Double Space property 516 downgrading target system version Tricon 255 Trident 321 download 15 options 41 state 11. rules for 60 Enhanced Security property 530 Enlarge Font Size command 530 enumeration data type 132 EPI module.. 522 EmulatorCount value 462 EN/ENO property 523 Enable Access List command 391. 461 project version..Macros command 521 Edit/View Source command 521 editors CEM properties 50. library 77 Emulator accessing 459 download state 462 file generation 43 help file 51 installing 6 instances of 43 options 42 project version after download 33.0 .698 Index downloading (continued) project version changes after 462 timeout value 43 drawing colors Change Colors command 491 Drawing Item property 520 properties 47 Drawing Item property 520 Drop command 520 DT data type definition 649 DWORD data type 650 Enable All Disabled Points command 524 Enable Color Monitoring property 113.9. 524 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 522 Emulator Timeout property 43. 529 Enable Trident Node Time Synchronization property 316 Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization property 529 Enable UCN Test Mode property 529 Enabled Features property 530 enabling disabled points 476 enhanced low-density chassis 12. saving 8 Evaluation Options property 531 evaluation options. downloaded 462 testing application on 459 timeout value 43 using Modbus configuration 44 using Peer-to-Peer configuration 44 emulator. 262 Enhanced Security changing to 55 defined 54 login 28 login attempts 27 passwords for 60 user names. command 528 Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization property 250. configuring 339 EPI Point Options properties 579 error messages login 29 security banner text.. maximum number of POUs 102 Emulator File Generation property 43. 438. v4.. 147 FBD properties 48 LD properties 49 using FBD 117 using LD 118 using ST 130 Effect Cause Header Functions property 524 Effect Header Functions On by Default property 522 elementary data types 647 elements. Tricon V9. and Trident v1 Peer-to-Peer Systems property 525 Enable Effect Header Functions property 526 Enable EN/ENO Terminals on Functions by Default property 526 Enable Floating Text in Intersection Cells property 526 Enable Intersection functions property 527 Enable Macro Editing property 527 Enable Multiple Writes property 527 Enable OVD on All Modules command 528 Enable OVD on Module. CEMPLE matrix 148 evaluation order CEMPLE matrix 143 CM access list 437 functions 119 TCM access list 390 E E_LD_EXP chassis 262 Edit Sheet Title command 521 Edit Title Block command 521 Edit. 525 Enable Communication with Tricon V8 and V9 Peer-toPeer Systems property 525 Enable Communication with Tricon V8. Emulator 43 files data file location 503 project 586 Find In Application command 536 Find Text command 536 Find Text Options 536 firewall using with CM 351 using with TCM 285 first-time connection Tricon 376 Trident 411. TCM 283.Index 699 evaluation. monitoring 514 execution list 239 Exit command 532 Exit statement 138 Expand Macros property 532 Export CM Configuration command 532 Export command 532 Export Destination property 533 Export Format property 533 Export Report command 534 Export TCM Configuration command 532 exporting CM configuration 360 project elements 69 reports. Tricon 398 printing. 147 enabling for CEM 148 properties 125 specifying Application Type 113 F False Color property 534 False Severity property 534 False State Name property 534 FBD Editor options 534 FBD language about 105 adding annotations 200 adding comments 203 annotation 165. 285 required cables for TCM 381 Field Power Monitoring property 267. v4. options for 40 forcing points 477 ForLoop statement 138 Formatted Name property 537 Foxboro I/A Series DCS 223 FP Ordering property 537 Full Name property 538 full-duplex transceiver mode 627 Function Block command 538 function blocks definition 102 printing. how to 82 tagnames. order of 131 Event Viewer.9. 535 Field Power property 535 file generation. import tagname file 192 execution flow. 412 Tri-GP 411.0 . Tri-GP 445 properties 126 space saver setting 128 SYS_OVD_INHIBIT 335 VAR_IN_OUT parameters in 74 functions creating 109 definition 102 EN/ENO property 523 enabling for a matrix 50. Trident 445 printing. file format for 190 TCM configuration 296 user access logs 65 expressions. 171 creating constants 170 creating variables 163 declaring variables 164 editor 117 editor properties 48 EN/ENO property 523 intermediate code 241 selecting library elements 124 terminals 119 using macros 206 FBD Network. ST language 131 extensible functions. overview 145 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. specifying 125 fiber communication mode. 412 floating-point underflow for LREAL data types 652 for REAL data types 654 Font Size property 537 forced points. Windows 64 Exactly Once setting 531 example projects 5 Excel. SDO 335 Initial Value property 544 initialization table 242–243 input. application 456.0 . 193 TCM configuration 297 Include Monitor Value in Annotation property 544 incorrect parameter error 29 inhibiting supervision. Windows 30. v4. invert 548 Insert Columns command 545 Insert From File command 545 Insert In/Out Variable command 546 Insert Input Variable command 545 Insert Local Variable command 546 Insert Module command 547 Insert Output Variable command 546 Insert Rows command 547 Insert Sheet command 547 Insert Tagname Declaration command 548 inserting logic sheets 121 installing .NET framework 6 Emulator 6 installing TriStation 1131 6 H half-duplex transceiver mode 627 Halt command 540 Handshake property 540 Hardware Allocation command 541 hardware allocation exceptions 468 Hardware Module Configuration report 91 HD_EXP chassis 262 HD_MAIN chassis 262 HD_RXM chassis 262 Help files. 457 Import CM Configuration command 544 Import command 543 Import TCM Configuration command 544 importing CM configuration 361 libraries 68 points 196 tagnames. using for TCM connection 381 G GCS xv General Monitor Colors property 539 generic data types 658 Global Customer Support xv Global Positioning System Installed property 539 global variables. configuring 336 hub. See Tagnames Go To Cell command 539 GPS property 539 synchronization with NCMG 301 synchronization with TCM 303 gradual underflow effect on absolute and relative error 653. 654 for LREAL data types 652 for REAL data types 654 Group 1 and Group 2 property 539 Guest account. custom adding 52 description 51 format of 51 maximum number 51 removing 53 viewing 52 Hide Causes Unrelated to Effects command 542 Hide Effects Unrelated to Causes command 542 high-density chassis adding to Tricon system 262 target system version 12 Highest TCP Port Number property 542 history clearing 493 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. file format for 190. 64 I I/A Series DCS 299 IDLE state 543 IEC 61131-3 standard 658 IEC-559 Standard Floating-Point format 653 implementation information 104 Implementation Tree 101 implementation.9.700 Index functions (continued) using in FBD 124 history (continued) saving 597 viewing 640 Honeywell TDC 3000 DCS 223 Horizontal Network Divider command 543 HRDI module. Index 701 instance name. Tricon 400 setting. selecting 124 functions. Trident 446–451 setting. described 119 Instance Variable Connections report 91 instances. See CEM. Tricon 400 default. LD. 171 Coil Type property 495 Compiler Warning When Right Rail is Missing property 498 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. copying 111 elements. and ST languages LD Editor Options properties 552 LD language about 106 adding annotations 200 adding comments 203 annotation 165. Tri-GP 446–451 Trident 2. v4. 553 Loc property 554 local variables Data Type property 503 declaring 137 Location property 554 locking application elements 114 Log On As New User command 554 logging in 27–29 logging in to a project 27 logic colors for drawings 47 logic sheets 120–123 K keyswitch. disable stop 513 L language Default Language property 506 setting default 36 Language property 551 languages. Emulator 43 INT data type 651 integers.0 .9. FBD. Tri-GP 447 for CM network port 351 for TCM network port 283. 285 methods for setting 446 setting with a Tricon EICM or TCM 402 setting. 73 unregistered 79 updating 11. Trident 447 default.x 430 Tri-GP 430 IP Address property 550 IP Subnet Mask property 550 LD language (continued) Contact Type property 500 creating constants 170 creating variables 163 declaring variables 164 editor 118 editor properties 49 EN/ENO property 523 power rails 595 selecting library elements 124 terminals 119 using macros 206 LD_EXP chassis 262 LD_MAIN chassis 262 LD_RXM chassis 262 Left-Handed Link Tool 552 Left-Handed Wire Tool 552 levels. 578 IP address default. user access 63 libraries adding 74 default directory for 68 deleting 76 exporting elements 69 importing 68 partial changes to 77 TriStation 1131 68. application usage 127 Library Documents report 91 Line Width property 552 Link command 553 List Disabled Points command 476. scaling from REALs 213 intermediate FBD or ST code 241 Internal State setting 548 Intersection Functions On by Default 548 Invensys contact information xiv Invensys GCS xv Invert Input property 548 Invert Input/Output property 549 Invert Output property 549 IOP 12. 75 version numbers of 79 library documents. precision when approaching zero 652 matrix enabling functions 151 evaluation 143 evaluation options 148 FBD Network overview 145 overview 145 planning 142 resizing cells 154 Variable Detail Table overview 146 Max Field property 558 Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Receives property 558 Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Sends property 559 Maximum RPM property 559 Maximum Speed property 559 Maximum Value 560 MaxSpan 560 media converter 382 Memory Allocation command 560 memory allocation.9. upgrading 255. Emulator 44 Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range property 562 Modbus Slave Address property 563 Mode property 563 modes. operational 458 M macros %DESCRIPTION 509 %TAG 507 adding to annotations 206 default for annotations 506 Default Macros or Text property 506 editing 521 editing text 208 enabling editing 527 expanding 532 with annotations and comments 206 Macros command 555 Main Processor Connection Setup property 556 Main Processors. number of 27 Enhanced Security 28 error messages 29 first time 28 Standard Security 28 troubleshooting 29 Windows Guest user 30 Logon Name property 555 logon name. NGDO 535 loop supervision 335 low-density chassis adding to Tricon system 262 target system version 12 Lowest TCP Port Number property 555 LREAL data type 651 LREAL numbers. v4. 321 maintenance.minor version 33.702 Index login access logs. example 185 memory points allocating. Triconex time synchronization 307. precision when approaching zero 652 loop power. CM 359 Management protocol. 462 Manage Sheets command 556 Manage Views command 557 Management Port Number property 557 Management protocol. TCM 293 Manual collection. changing 60 long reals.0 . Tricon 251 allocating. Trident 317 allocating. SOE 225 Master Logical Port property 558 master node. Tri-GP 317 assigning alias 177 Message Options command 560 Message View command 561 Min Field property 561 Minimum Value 562 Minor Severity property 562 MinSpan 562 Modbus assigning aliases 210 CM ports. application 470 Major Severity property 556 major. 367 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. viewing 64 attempts. configuring 289 Tricon and REAL numbers 211 Tricon functionality 209 Trident functionality 209 Tri-GP functionality 209 using configuration. configuring 355 Data Bits property 502 disabling scaling of REALs 218 scaling numbers 215 signal delays 608 TCM ports. printing 309.NET framework. 238 protocol 494 SOE block for 223. 8. Trident 335 removing. Tri-GP 369 Module Configuration Settings report 92 modules configuration. installing in a TriStation PC 373. controller 464 programs 514 value included in annotation 544 variables. Trident 334 upgrading. TSAA 294. Trident 369 module attributes. Tricon 265 removing. scaling to integers 213 scaling for Modbus 215 O OFFLINE state 570 On NET 1 Enable Time Synchronization property 570 On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization property 571 Only Once setting 571 OPC browsing tagnames 41 external client write access 233. testing 403. Tri-GP 334 removing. Tri-GP 335 Tricon AI 266 Tricon BPAO 175 Tricon DO 267 Tricon PI 269 Tricon Thermocouple 270 Trident EPI 339 Trident HRDI 336 Trident PI 339 Trident SDO 335 Tri-GP EPI 339 Tri-GP HRDI 336 Tri-GP SDO 335 upgrading. Emulator 43 Name property 566 naming multiple variables 167 NCM. 408 NIC Index property 568 Node Name property 568 Node Number property 569 non-supervised DO points 268 not authorized error 30 Number of Extended Block property 569 Number of Gear Teeth property 569 Number of Inputs property 570 Number of Instances property 43. Tricon 265 inserting. additional routing 452 New Document Command 567 new features xiii New Project command 567 new project. 359 multiple instances. with tagnames 179 Monitor Display Options 564 Monitor Value on by Default property 565 monitoring CEM Monitor Colors property 490 colors 539 field power 267. 535 program execution.9. creating 20 New Tagname Command 567 New Tagnames Command 568 NIC card. 294 N Name Order property 566 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. controller 463 Move Behind Logic Elements property 204.0 . Tri-GP 334 monitor display.Index 703 Modify Banner Message command 7. Tricon 379 TCM 278 Network property 566 networks. Trident 334 inserting. Tri-GP 329 MPs Tricon 252 Trident 318 Tri-GP 318 Multicast IP Address property 566 multicasting. v4. 370 inserting. 565 MP attribute properties. 564 module attributes. 570 numbers REAL. 452 network ports connecting to PC. See Tricon NCM negative scan surplus 466 NERC password rules 60 security banner text 7 user access logs 64–67 . installing 6 Network Address Mask property 494 network connection. Trident 329 MP attribute properties. SDO 335 point transition 336 Point Type property 579 points allocating memory. Trident 317 allocating memory. Tricon 269 configuring.9. POINTS_DISABLED 474 Parity property 575 partial changes. ST language 131 operating parameters Tricon 249 Trident 315 Tri-GP 315 operating systems supported 4 operation symbols. changing 115 Paste command 576 Pause command 576 Peer-to-Peer allocating memory 221 applications 219 data transfer time 219. expressions 131 Organize command 574 output. Trident 339 PI Point Options properties 579 Pickup command 578 Point Assignment properties 578 point supervision. initialization table 242 owner. 475 forced. library 77 Password property 575 Password Required for Connection property 576 passwords default 28 login errors 29 rules for 60 user 60 Windows 28. Tricon 251 allocating memory. 474. ST language 131 options download 41 project 35 TriStation 1131 45 user access logs 66 order of evaluation.0 . 438. ST language 131 Operation Type property 572 operational modes 458 Operations property 572 operations. disabling changes 513 overflow error.704 Index OPC (continued) SOE severity 294 system events severity 295 TCM connection speed 285 TCM tagnames table 41 user access to 387 OPC System Events Severity property 571 Open Document command 571 Open Project command 572 Opened Point Alarm Threshold property 571 operand. v4. Tri-GP 317 Allow Disabling of Points property 483 assigning aliases 210 creating multiple tagnames 180 Data Type property 503 declaring tagnames 172 disabling 230. 220 time synchronization with TCM 307–308 time synchronization with Trident 2. 577 physical address. options for 40 forcing 477 import options 195 memory 177 overview 172 re-enabling 476 restricting access to Trident 237 restricting access to Tri-GP 237 scaling REAL values 178 undeclared 184 viewing disabled 476 write access to Tricon 232–233 write access to Trident 235–238 write access to Tri-GP 235–238 P parameters.x CM 367–368 time synchronization with Tri-GP CM 367–368 Tricon TCM port configuration 287 Trident CM port configuration 352 Tri-GP CM port configuration 352 using configuration. order of 131 operator. invert 549 output points. Emulator 44 Peer-to-Peer Time Synchronization Enabled property 494. CEMPLE matrix 143 order of evaluation. assigning 174 Physical Address property 578 PI module configuring. 577 Permission property 391. 55 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 487 cannot edit 54 cannot open 27 CEM monitor colors 149 changing the download state 492 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 582 Previous Sheet command 582 Primary mode. Tri-GP 370 project documents 91 reports 80 scan time increases 392. multiple 94 logic sheets 122 module configuration. field 535. reserved 633 Port Selection property 580 Port Write Enabled property description 231. described 458 program organizational units 102 Program Variable Listing report 92 programming. Tricon 309 module configuration. operations 131 Precision property 581 Prevent Restart Following Fatal Error property 316. 445 Print Number property 583 Print Preview command 583 Print Report command 583 print server with Trident CM 439 with Tri-GP CM 439 PRINTER parameter Tricon 398 Trident 445 Tri-GP 445 printing configuring for Trident CM 442 configuring for Tri-GP CM 442 configuring Tricon EICM port 394 configuring Tricon TCM port 397 connecting to Tricon TCM 395 connecting to Trident CM 440 connecting to Tri-GP CM 440 documents. 558. 583 Print command 582 print function blocks 398.x CM serial 344 Trident 2. individual 94 documents.Index 705 POINTS_DISABLED parameter 474 poll time 467 port numbers.x CM network 350 Trident 2. 439 with Tricon 392 with Trident 439 with Tri-GP 439 Privilege property 584 privileges.0 .x CM serial 348 Tri-GP CM 346–358 Tri-GP CM network 350 Tri-GP CM serial 348 positive scan surplus 466 POU Cross-Reference report 92 POU Variables report 92 POUs 102 power usage. 561 precedence.x CM 346–358 Trident 2. See Program command programs compiling 240 creating 109 definition 102 maximum number of 102. security 61 process safety time 466 Program command 585 program execution. SOE 226 Print All command 91. 239 order on execution list 239 specifying Application Type 113 viewing number of variables in 169 Prohibit Writes property 585 project annotation properties 37 backing up 5. 581 for CM Modbus ports 355 for CM serial ports 348 for TCM Modbus ports 290 for TCM network ports 284 for TCM serial ports 280 ports reserved numbers 633 Tricon ACM 271 Tricon EICM 274 Tricon HIM 273 Tricon NCM 275 Tricon SMM 277 Tricon TCM 278–291 Trident 1.9. about languages 105 Programming Mode. Trident 370 module configuration. controller 464 Program Execution List property 584 Program mode. 461. v4.x CM 342 Trident 1. Tricon 264 power. Trident 15 version number 33 viewing history 640 Project Description property 585 Project Files property 586 Project History by Element report 92 Project History by Time report 92 Project Implementation report 92 Project Memory Allocation report 93 Project Security Levels report 93 project state 462 Project Users report 93 project version changes 462 downloaded 33. printing 91 downgrading system version.8. 461. Trident 321 download options 41 Emulator version 33 enabling features 530 exiting 532 exporting elements 69 file access rules 27 forced points options 40 language properties 36 logging in 27 monitor colors 39 options 35 properties 35 Roll Backward or Forward command 595 sample 5 security setting. 591 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.0 . precision when approaching zero 654 REAL numbers disabling scaling 218. default 11 selecting target system 11 selecting target system. 513 scaling to integers 213 unscaled 217 REAL points. Trident 24 selecting target system. Tri-GP 26 upgrading system version. Trident 321 upgrading.706 Index project (continued) closing 495 compiling 498 conversion rules 12 converting from v2. explained 634 Redo command 588 Reduce Font Size command 589 reducing initialization table size 243 Redundant Mode property 589 Redundant mode. adding 31 documents. 462 Project workspace 20 properties annotations 202 function blocks 126 functions 125 project 35 TriStation 1131 45 Properties command 551 Protocol property 586 protocols Tricon TCM 292 Trident 2.0 11 converting Tricon from v4. Tricon 255 downgrading system version. 462 Emulator 33 project version (continued) rules 33. Tricon 255 upgrading system version. 358 Tri-GP CM 346.x 17 converting to v4.0 and earlier 13 converting Trident from v4.9.7.7.x or v3.x CM 346. Tricon 13 upgrading. specifying precision 581 Rebuild Application command 588 rebuilding an application 241 red X. v4. Tricon 22 selecting target system. 358 Protocols property 587 Pulses Per Revolution property 587 R rails 498 RARP Server 448 Rate Type property 588 Read Only command 588 read/write property 114 read-only property 114 REAL data type 653 real number.0 and earlier 15 creating 20 default directory for 46 description. SOE 226 re-enabling points 476 Refresh command 589 refreshing values of variables 500 Remote Access to Aliased Tagnames property 590 Remote Access to All Tagnames property 590 Remote mode 458. passwords 60 rules. 596 RUNNING state 596 S safety and control. about 104 safety application. printable 91 Shared Libraries 73 updating database 80 viewing and printing 80 requested scan time 466 reserved port numbers 633 Resolution Type property 267.x CM 356 Tri-GP CM 356 Routing Configuration property 595 rows deleting 157 hiding and sizing 610 inserting 156 sizing and hiding 159 RS-232 transceiver mode 628 RS-485 transceiver mode 628 RTS Pre-Delay setting 608 rules. Trident 370 module configuration. Tri-GP 370 Project Security Levels 61 Project Users 58 project.x CM 345 Trident 2.0 .Index 707 remote write enabled. defined 485 sample projects 5 Save As command 596 Save Element command 597 Save History command 597 Save Implementation command 597 Save Project command 597 Save View command 598 saving. CEMPLE matrix 142 Retentive property 594 retentive variables 242 Right Power Rail command 595 Roll Backward or Forward command 595 router. user access logs 65 Scale Factor property 598 scaling. setting 591 Remove File command 591 Remove Invalid Items command 591 removing custom Help files 53 Replace command 592 reports adding custom 82 databases 83 default directory for templates 46 exporting 82 Library Documents 73 module configuration. using for TCM connection 381 routing Tricon TCM 291 Trident 1. 462 rules. 603 setting for running application 467 Scan Time property 599 SDO module. 55 defined 54 Select Function Block command 600 Select Network Contents command 601 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. Tricon 309 module configuration. v4. 592 Restart on Power Up property 593 Restore command 593 Restore Project command 594 Restore Project To Last Download command 594 restricting access to Tricon 229 to Tricon points 232 to Trident 234 to Tri-GP 234 restrictions and limitations. project versioning 33. for Modbus 215 scan surplus 466 scan time affect of print function blocks 392. 439 defined 466.9. configuring 335 Search Text command 599 security Operations property 572 user access 54 security banner customizing 7 default text 8 error while saving 8 Security command 600 Security Level property 600 security setting changing 55 default 11. target system version 12 Run command 596 Run mode 458. 615 SOE Recorder. defining properties 223 buffer size 225 collection mode 226 collection type 225 configuration 222 copying configuration 222 definition file (.0 . 295 Shared Libraries report 93 Shared Read property 605 sheet templates.9. Triconex time synchronization 307.708 Index Select Sheet Contents command 601 Selection Tool command 601 Sequence of Events. 616 Sort by Group property 617 Sort by Tagname property 617 sort order. See SOE serial connection Tricon 376 Trident 412 Tri-GP 412 Serial Port property 601 serial ports connecting to PC. See logic sheets sheet title 122 sheets. 280 Set Calendar Clock command 602 Set Editor Options command 602 Set Programming Mode command 603 Set Scan Time command 603 Set Time Zone command 604 Set Value property 604 severity levels. 294 Manual collection type 225 Primary mode 226 Redundant mode 226 searching for tagnames 222 sorting by block 222 trip variable 228 using with Trident HRDI module 336 using with Tri-GP HRDI module 336 SOE Block Assignments property 612 SOE Block Collection Mode property 612 SOE Block Collection Type property 613 SOE Block Name property 613 SOE Block Number property 613 SOE Block property 612 SOE Block Type property 614 SOE Block Variables report 93 SOE Buffer Size property 615 SOE Dead Time property 338. 367 slot selection. Trident 414 connecting to PC. multiple clients 223 SOE Severity property 616 SOE Trigger State property 337. See logic sheets Sheets Menu 122. OPC 294. Tricon 377 connecting to PC. 364 SOE assigning tagnames 226 Automatic collection type 225 block type 225 blocks. 618 ST language about 107 copying and pasting code 130 Editor 130 expressions 131 font size 537 intermediate code 241 operands and operators 131 order of evaluation 131 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 605 Shorted Point Alarm Threshold property 606 Show Causes for Selected Effect command 606 Show Effects for Selected Causes command 606 Show Grid command 606 Show IEC Representation command 607 Show Line Numbers command 607 Show Network Numbers command 607 Show Zones command 607 signal delays property 608 Single Step command 609 Size/Alignment command 609 Size/Hide Columns command 609 Size/Hide Comment Column command 610 Size/Hide Rows command 610 slave node. 616 SOE Trigger Time property 338. v4. tagnames table 41 Space Saver property 128.SOE) 43 for OPC 223. TCM 283 Slot Selection property 610 SNTP Master IP Address property 611 SNTP Master Network property 611 SNTP time synchronization 305. Tri-GP 414 TCM 278. 324 rules for changing. OPC 295 system requirements 4 system version Tricon 252 Trident 318 Tri-GP 318 tagnames assigning aliases 174 assigning to SOE blocks 226 changing multiple 181 creating multiple tagnames 180 data types of. v4. tagnames 183. 24. point 335 Supports Application Defined States property 620 Supports Use in Cause Rows property 620 Supports Use in Effect Columns property 620 Supports Use in Intersections property 621 surplus. 318 download state 255. 321 configuring. Tri-GP 318–325 connection problems 460 conversion rules 12 defined 11 determining current 252. scan 466 synchronizing time. Tricon 255 selecting during project conversion 11 selecting during project creation 22. controller download 462 status attributes Trident 369 Tri-GP 369 STDLIB 68. Tricon 252–259 configuring. 434 summary information. 26 TCM configuration rules 255 validating changes 253. See initialization table Tabs property 621 Tagname property 622 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 187. Tricon 515 table 183.9. 163 memory allocation example 185 monitor color 179 monitoring colors 539 overview 172 physical addresses 174 renaming 182 reports 93 restricting access 513 scaling 178 specifying DO points. for SOE 226 declaring tagnames 172 definition 103 deleting 182 disabling 474 enabling for multiple writes 174 export command 532 exporting to file 189 file format 190 forcing 477 import command 543 import file format 193 importing from file 196 maximum number of 103. initialization. TCM OPC 41 target system version change matrix. 77 Stop Bits property 619 Stop mode 458. 619 STRING data type 655 structured data type 134 subnet masks 387. See Time Synchronization SYS_MP_EXT_STATUS 474 SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function block 335 SYS_SHUTDOWN 474 system attributes Trident 369 Tri-GP 369 System Events Severity properties 621 system events.Index 709 Standard Security changing to 55 defined 54 login 28 login attempts 27 Standard Security property 618 Start Value and Increment property 618 state 15 state changes. 321 on Tricon Operating Parameters screen 249 results of change 258. 184 table.0 . Trident 324 changing 255. 184 undeclared 184. Tricon 258 change matrix. Trident 318–325 configuring. document 112 supervised DO points 268 supervision. 188 viewing number of 169 tagnames table. 186 unused 186. 635 Target System Version property 622 T table. 320. printing 309 modules 265–270 operating parameters 249 PI modules 269 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 77 Tricon AI modules 266 BPAO modules 175 connecting serial port to PC 377 connecting to for first time 376 connecting via network port 379 converting project from v2.chm file 51 TCXLIB 68. with Tri-GP CM 367 Trident 1.x CM 364 SNTP. with Trident 2. logic sheet 122 TOD data type 657 Toggle Terminal Inverter command 627 TR_PROGRAM_STATUS 474 TR_SHUTDOWN 474 TR1LIB 68. 77 technical support xv Temporary Files property 623 Terminal property 623 terminals described 119 double spacing 516. 75. Peer-to-Peer 219 transmission speed. with TCM 303 SNTP. 408 TCXEMX.9. See Tricon TCM TCM access list access levels 387 configuring 390 controller access 61 Deny Access 387 description 231 grouping clients 387 IP addresses 387 maximum number of entries 387 order of evaluation 390 permissions 387 protocols 387 Read Only 387 Read/Write 387 resources. setting for controller 604 timeout value.7. 517 enable EN/ENO by default 526 FBD and LD 119 Termination Options property 624 testing network connection 403.x CM slave node 367 Trident project conversion 12 Tri-GP CM master node 367 Tri-GP CM slave node 367 with external source 299 with Tricon ACM 299 with Tricon NCM 300 with Tricon NCMG 301 with Tricon TCM 303 with Trident 2.x 17 converting project from v4.x CM 364 with Tri-GP CM 364 Time Synchronization Configuration property 626 Time Synchronization properties 625 time zone.0 and earlier 13 default connection 385 disabling OVD 512 DO modules 267 Modbus functionality 209 module configuration. with TCM 307 Triconex.710 Index TCM.x CM 363 Trident 2. editing 161 title. with TCM 305 SNTP. Baud Rate property 488 TRDLIB 68.x CM 367 Triconex. installing 374.0 . with Trident 2. defined 386 sample list 388 subnet mask.x CM master node 367 Trident 2. 452 on controller 460 on Emulator 459 Text Size property 624 time after trip 228 Time After Trip property 625 time before trip 228 Time Before Trip property 625 TIME data type 656 time synchronization GPS. Emulator 43 title block. 77 training xiv Transceiver Mode 627 Transceiver Port property 629 transfer time. v4.x or v3. with Tri-GP CM 364 TCM master node 307 TCM slave node 307 time synchronization (continued) Triconex. using 387 troubleshooting 376 TCP Port property 622 TCP Port Restrictions properties 623 TCP/IP protocol. 75. 284 OPC 224 OPC connection speed 285 peer-to-peer ports 287 printing from 392 protocols supported 278 protocols. configuring 292 routing ports 291 serial ports 280 setting an IP address 402 slot selection 283 SNTP time synchronization 305 target system version change rules for 255 time synchronization 303 Triconex time synchronization 307 TriStation Ethernet connection 379 TriStation network connection 379 TriStation protocol 293 TriStation serial communication 376 TSAA protocol 294 TSAA write access to 232 Triconex Time Synchronization 303. time synchronization 301 Tricon SMM ports 277 synchronizing time 302 Tricon TCM access list 386–391 backing up configuration 296 compatibility 224 configuring a printing port 397 configuring connection 384 Tricon TCM (continued) configuring serial TriStation connection 378 connecting devices using a hub 396 connecting devices using a router or hub 381 connecting printing devices 395 connection using media converter 382 connection using router or hub 381 controlling access to 386–391 default IP address 400 direct connection to TriStation 380 exporting configuration 255. Tri-GP CM 367–368 Trident 1.x network ports. 364 Triconex Time Synchronization.x MP connection to TriStation 417 2.Index 711 Tricon (continued) project.x connection to TriStation 1131 426 2.0 . v4. Trident 2. TCM 307–308 Triconex Time Synchronization. 393 setting an IP address 402 TriStation serial communication 376 Tricon HIM Base Address property 487 ports 273 Tricon NCM configuring connection 384 connection using media converter 382 default IP address 400 direct connection to TriStation 380 getting IP address using RARP server 401 installing NIC card for 373 ports 275 time synchronization 300 TriStation Ethernet connection 379 TriStation network connection 379 Tricon NCMG.x CM connection to TriStation 421 1.9. 252–259 target system version change matrix 258 thermocouple input module 270 time synchronization 298 write access 230 Tricon ACM configuring connection 384 configuring ports 271 connection using media converter 382 default IP address 400 direct connection to TriStation 380 getting IP address using RARP server 401 installing NIC card for 373 time synchronization 299 TriStation Ethernet connection 379 TriStation network connection 379 Tricon EICM configuring a printing port 394 configuring ports 274 configuring serial TriStation connection 378 connecting a printer 392. 285 Management protocol 293 maximum number of 278 Modbus TCP ports 289 network ports 282. configuring 331 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x CM 367– 368 Triconex Time Synchronization. 22. 296 fiber cables 381 fiber mode 283. creating new 21 restricting access to 229 serial communication 376 special alias numbers 211 special aliases 212 target system version 11. 285 firewall. using behind 285 GPS time synchronization 303 importing configuration 297 installation rules 278 installing NIC card for 373 IP addresses 283. x 348 setting an IP address 450 SNTP time synchronization 364 specifying default gateway 451 specifying network routing 452 time synchronization 364 time synchronization. SOE 337 trigger time. 2. 2.x 17 converting project from v4. v4. 2.x routing 345 1.x 429 connecting serial port to PC 414 connecting to for first time 411. creating new 23 restricting access to 234 SDO module 335 serial communication 412 system and module attributes 369 target system version 11.9. 2.x 367 TriStation protocol 358 TSAA protocol 359 TSAA write access to 236 upgrading from 1.1 and earlier support 15 write access 235 Trident CM 1. 24.x 363 time synchronization. 2.x 342 network ports. 412 connection to TriStation 1131 426 default connection 433 default IP address for 411 disabling OVD 512 EPI module 339 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.x 330 configuring. 2. 412 converting project from v2.0 and earlier 15 default connection 433 default IP address for 411 disabling OVD 512 EPI module 339 HRDI module 336 initial connection to 411 IP address.x 355 network ports. 2.x to 2. 2. 1. status 369 CM configuration 342 configuring hardware 327 configuring serial TriStation connection 415 configuring TriStation 1131 connection. using behind 351 getting IP address using RARP server 448 hub connection to TriStation 422 hub connection to TriStation 1131 428 Trident CM (continued) importing configuration 361 IP addresses 351 Management protocol 359 Modbus TCP ports. SOE 338 Triggering Mode property 629 Tri-GP access 234 attributes. 2.x 331 direct connection to TriStation 417 hub connection to TriStation 418 module properties 327 serial ports 332 setting an IP address 449 trigger state. 1.7.x 430 Modbus functionality 209 module configuration.x 358 routing ports. status 369 CM configuration 342 configuring hardware 327 configuring serial TriStation connection 415 configuring TriStation 1131 connection 429 connecting serial port to PC 414 connecting to for first time 411. 318–325 time synchronization 362 TriStation network connection 416 upgrading PI to EPI 339 version 1.x 346 protocols.0 .712 Index Trident (continued) access 234 attributes.x 12 using default IP address 447 Trident MP attribute properties 329 configuring 327 configuring TriStation connection 419 configuring.x or v3. 2. printing 370 modules 334–335 operating parameters 315 PI module 339 printing devices 439 project.x 350 peer-to-peer ports 352 project conversion upgrade 12 protocols supported.x 346 connecting devices using a hub 441 connecting printing devices 440 controlling access to 434–438 direct connection to TriStation 421 direct connection to TriStation 1131 427 exporting configuration 360 firewall. 2.x serial ports 344 access list 434–438 backing up configuration 360 configuring 342 configuring printing devices 442 configuring TriStation 1131 connection 423 configuring.x 356 serial ports. 1. assigning 228 TriStation 1131 connection to Tricon ACM. using behind 351 getting IP address using RARP server 448 hub connection to TriStation 1131 428 importing configuration 361 IP addresses 351 Management protocol 359 Modbus TCP ports 355 network ports 350 peer-to-peer ports 352 protocols 358 protocols supported 346 routing ports 356 serial ports 348 SNTP time synchronization 364 specifying default gateway 451 specifying network routing 452 time synchronization 364.x CM 421 connection to Trident 1. TCM 376 cannot edit project 54 cannot edit user documents 109 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide.9. NCM. 318–325 time synchronization 362 TriStation network connection 416 write access 235 Tri-GP CM access list 434–438 backing up configuration 360 configuring 342. configuring 331 operating parameters 315 printing devices 439 project. 331 module properties 327 Tri-GP MP (continued) serial ports 332 setting an IP address 449 trip state 228 Trip State property 629 trip tagname 228 Trip Tagname property 630 trip variable. 367 TriStation protocol 358 TSAA protocol 359 TSAA write access to 236 using default IP address 447 Tri-GP MP attribute properties 329 configuring 327. creating new 25 restricting access to 234 SDO module 335 serial communication 412 system and module attributes 369 target system version 26.x MP 417 connection to Trident 2.0 .8. v4. printing 370 modules 334–335 network ports.Index 713 Tri-GP (continued) HRDI module 336 inital connection to 411 IP address 430 Modbus functionality 209 module configuration.x 426 connection to Trident MP 417. 418 connection to Tri-GP 426 converting to v4.x 428 hub connection to Trident CM 422 hub connection to Tri-GP 428 installing 6 installing DLC protocol 408 installing TCP/IP protocol 374 LD Editor tab 49 libraries 68 options 45 properties 45 sample projects 5 system requirements 4 Trident 2.x connection 427 Trident CM connection 421 Trident MP configuration 419 Tri-GP connection 427 uninstalling 5. or TCM 380 connection to Tricon TCM 381 connection to Trident 1.0 11 creating a project 20 Directories tab 46 Drawing Color tab 47 examples 5 FBD Editor tab 48 hub connection to Trident 2. CM 413 access control list. 9 upgrading 5 verifying the installation 9 TriStation Port Number property 630 TriStation protocol CM 358 definition 494 TCM 293 TriStation UDP Port Number property 630 troubleshooting access control list. 346 configuring printing devices 442 connecting devices using a hub 441 connecting printing devices 440 controlling access to 434–438 direct connection to TriStation 1131 427 exporting configuration 360 firewall. 0 . 354. v4. defining 135 Var/Const property 636 Variable Detail Table. 31 CM access control list 413 login problems 29 TCM access control list 376 Tricon network connection 376 Trident network connection 412 Tri-GP network connection 412 viewing total variables used 169 True Color property 631 True State Name property 631 TSAA clients 232. 150–151 variables 169 users adding 59 authentication of 55 logon name. Trident 339 project.714 Index troubleshooting (continued) cannot open project 27. 359 Update Rate property 634 Update Reports Database command 634 Updated Selected Function Cells command 634 updating libraries 75 upgrading PI to EPI. 592 unknown user name error 29 unregistered libraries 79 unused tagnames definition 186 deleting 188 editing 187 viewing 186 update rate.9. declaring 136 VAR_IN_OUT function parameters 74. TSAA multicasting 294. 77 type name. 632 undeclared tagnames definition 184 viewing 186 underflow gradual for LREAL data types 652 gradual for REAL data types 654 Undo command 633 uninstalling TriStation 1131 5. 236 TSAA Multicast IP Address property 631 TSAA Port Number property 631 TSAA protocol 294. described 119 Type Over command 632 upgrading (continued) TriStation 1131 5 Usage property 635 Use Local Time property 635 user access adding or modifying 59 creating 54 editing documents 54 level names tab 63 managing 58 Privileges tab 61 See also CM access list See also TCM access list user access logs 64–67 user documents copying 110 creating 109 User Documents report 93 user name default 28 Windows 28. CEM editor 146 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. declaring 137 VAR CONSTANT. using 163 functions 103. changing 60 managing 58 modifying 59 password. 494 TX1LIB 68. 9 unipolar input 267. defining 134 Var Type property 637 VAR_EXTERNALS. changing 60 U UCN Node Number property 632 UDP Base Port Number property 288. 55 user-defined data types. Tricon 13 project. 359. Trident 15 target system version. Tricon 255 V Validate Only command 635 validating target system version change Tricon 253 Trident 320 Value property 636 Value Range to Scale an Integer properties 636 VAR. 75. 140 VAR_TEMP. 238 restricting access to Tricon points 232 restricting access to Trident points 237 restricting access to Tri-GP points 237 to Tricon points 232–233 to Trident points 235–238 to Tri-GP points 235–238 Tricon 230 Trident 235 Tri-GP 235 TSAA clients to CM 236 TSAA clients to TCM 232 Write To File command 642 Z Zoom command 642 Zoom To Fit command 643 Zoom To Region command 643 TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. 55 Windows Event Viewer 64 Wire Tool command 641 Wire Type property 641 workspace controller 247.minor 33. Invensys xiv Width property 640 Windows administrator privileges 64 domain authentication 28. rules for 60 user name 28. 313 project 20 Workspace View command 642 write access by tagname or alias 172 disabling remote changes 513 OPC client 233. v4. initialization table impact 242 formatted name 537 in initialization table 242 initial value 544 initialization table sample 243 limit exceeded 241 maximum number in function block 102 maximum number in program 103 maximum number of 163. 241 monitoring on controller 463 naming multiple 167 overflow.0 .9.Index 715 variables adding annotations 465 Auto Name command 486 changing multiple 168 creating in FBD and LD 163 declaring in FBD and LD 164 declaring in ST 137 definition 103 deleting. 55. 60 file access rules for projects 27 file properties dialog box 31 Guest account. 462 Vertical Network Divider command 638 View Download History command 638 View Intermediate FBD command 639 View Intermediate ST command 639 View Manager command 640 View Project History command 640 viewing custom Help files 52 initialization table 242 total variables and tagnames used 169 viewing (continued) undeclared tagnames 186 unused tagnames 186 viewing disabled points 476 views enlarged 642 managing 162 saving 162 W web site. initialization table 242 question mark while monitoring 463 reducing number of 241 retentive 242 specifying in CEM 152 types 103 user-defined data types in 163 viewing number of 169 Verify Last Download to the Controller command 637 Verify Password property 637 Verify Version command 638 verifying a TriStation 1131 installation 9 version number downloaded 461 projects 33 Tricon system version 252 Trident system version 318 Tri-GP system version 318 verifying library version 79 version. 64 passwords. project changes 462 major. using 30. 0 . v4.9.716 Index TriStation 1131 Developer’s Guide. . S.Invensys Operations Management 5601 Granite Parkway Suite 1000 Plano.com Global Customer Support Inside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 or contact your local Invensys representative.: 1-866-746-6477 Outside U. Website: http://support.ips.invensys. TX 75024 United States of America http://iom.com .invensys.